Home

Spec Sheet - The Reynolds Company

1. Class 10 Class 15 10000 5 10000 S x 3 8 gt 1000 v E 5 Qa 2 Cold 2 1004 E 100 Cold 2 Hot 2 Hot C G E x D S 10 e S S lt lt 1 1 1 O 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 of Full Load Current of Full Load Current Class 20 10000 o 2 o E E Qa 2 Col spg Cold 2 Hot oO gt lt e Q Q lt 1 1 r 1 1 7 1 r 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 of Full Load Current 1 6 Product Overview of P133 Motor OL Current 100 80 60 40 20 The Bulletin 283 overload trip class allows for class 10 protection Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload Figure 1 2 Overload Trip Curve Class 10 10000 o 2 gt 1000 E Cold G 100 4 o Hot i x lt 3 10 4 Q Q lt O 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Multiples of Full Load Current The Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller incorporates as standard electronic motor overload protection This overload protection is accomplished electronically with an Pt algorithm The ArmorStart s overload protection is programmable via the communication
2. 2 6 Installation and Wiring Dimensions for Bulletin 280 281 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not Continued intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 4 Dimensions for Type 4X with ArmorConnect Connectivity A Al LA aa ZIS Allen Gradiey Allen Bradiey CAUTION CAUTION Y G 7 G i ty Installation and Wiring 2 7 Figure 2 5 Bulletin 280D 281D ArmorStart with DeviceNet Communication Protocol Local Disconnect LS la N LED Status aat Allen Bradley 2 Outputs S Micro M12 4 Inputs Micro M12 CAUTION Motor 9 Connection
3. 5 12 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Net Out COS Mask Parameter Number 20 This parameter sets the bit that will trigger a COS message on the network output Access Rule GET SET Data Type WORD Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Bit Function 14 13 12 11 10 7 3 2 Net Output 0 ka Net Output 1 X Net Output 2 X Net Output 3 Net Output 4 Net Output 5 Net Output 6 X Net Output 7 Net Output 8 Net Output 9 E X bag Net Output 10 X Net Output 11 X bat Net Output 12 X Net Output 13 X _ a Net Output 14 Dnet Voltage Parameter Number 21 This parameter provides the voltage measurement for the DeviceNet network Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group DeviceNet Units V Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 6500 Default Value 0 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 13 Starter Protection Group
4. Q ad ArmorStart device with a 10 A short circuit protection rating 68 1 2 68 Z ArmorStart device with a 25 A short circuit protection rating EA Installation and Wiring 2 11 Dimensions for Bulletin 283 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not Continued intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 10 Dimensions for NEMA Type 4X with Conduit Entrance J o D O oO o o O O O o Q O TH lt 67 9 131 1 CONDUIT OPENING O 0 75 CONDUIT OPENING 2 12 Installation and Wiring Dimensions for Bulletin 283 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not Continued intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject
5. Drive Control Parameter Number 48 This parameter provides the status of drive parameters Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4095 Default Value 0 Bit Function 11 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 0 5 I X Accel 1 En SS SS S Accel 2 En s Ml 9 Decel 1 En X Decel 3 En l l l X Freq Sel 0 l l l X Freq Sel 1 e l Freq Sel 2 X sell e l Reserved S SK Drv In 1 oS JIT Drv In 2 S OK SS S Drv In3 X e l Drv In 4 Drvin PrFitState Parameter Number 49 This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 50 defines how the Drive Digital Access Rule GET SET Inputs 1 2 will respond when a protection trip occurs When set to 1 Drive Digital Data Type BOOL Inputs 1 2 continue to operate as command via the network When set to 0 Drive Group Drive DeviceNet Digital Inputs 1 4 Parameters 151 154 will open or close as determined by Units setting in Parameter 50 0 Go to PrFit Value Minimum Value 0 1 Ignore PrFit Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Drvin PrFitValue Parameter Number 50 This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs 1 2 assumes when a Access Rule GET SET trip occurs and Parameter 49 is set to 0
6. 373 14 69 ae 43 wo Z Hise L S o0 0 le O C L 195 68 Z G D p 0 0 i p 5 0 E lep oa oft t 1 CONDUIT OPENING amp BN OY BAY Gee 38 972 f 41 01 53 a 0 75 CONDUIT OPENING Installation and Wiring 2 19 Dimensions for Bulletin 284 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not Continued intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 19 Dimensions for 1 Hp and below 230V AC 2 Hp and below 460V AC and 2 Hp and below 575V AC NEMA Type 4X with ArmorConnect Connectivity P P Al A g bonn AB N i yf i Eeee k ArmorStart device with a 10 A short circuit protection rating ap 2 68 2 20 Installation and Wiring Dimensions for Bulletin 284 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches
7. Parameter Number 37 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 38 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 39 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 40 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 41 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutB DN FitValue This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when a DeviceNet network fault occurs and Parameter 41 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutB DN IdlState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 44 defines how Output B will respond when the DeviceNet network is idle When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by the setting in Parameter 44 The DN Fit parameters supersede the Dn Id parameters OutB DN IdlValue This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 43 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controll
8. Accel 2 Accel 1 Description 0 0 No Command 0 1 Accel 1 Enable 1 0 Accel 2 Enable 1 1 Hold Accel Rate Selected Decel 2 Decel 1 0 0 No Command 0 1 Decel 1 Enable 1 0 Decel 2 Enable 1 1 Hold Decel Rate Selected Freq Select 3 Freq Select 2 Freq Select 1 0 0 0 No Command 0 0 1 Freq Source P136 Start Source 0 1 0 Freq Source P169 Internal Freq 0 1 1 Freq Source Comms 1 0 0 P170 Preset Freq 0 1 0 1 P171 Preset Freq 1 1 1 0 P172 Preset Freq 2 1 1 1 P173 Preset Freq 3 Power Flex Native Produced Assembly Instance 171 is the Power Flex Native Format Produced Assembly Table D 33 Instance 171 PowerFlex Native Format Produced Assembly Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Faulted Alarm Deceling Acceling Rot Fwd a Running Ready Drvin4 Drvin3 Param Ctl fm 1 Stat Stat Drv In 2 Stat Drv ln Locked Net Ref fm Net At Ref 2 Drive Error Code low 3 Drive Error Code high Bulletin 284 CIP Information Connection Object CLASS CODE 0x0005 No class attributes are supported for the Connection Object D 13 Multiple instances of the Connection Object are supported Instances 1 2 and 4 from the Group 2 predefined master slave connection set Instances 5 and 6 are available explicit UCMM connections Instance 1 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Explicit Message Connection The following Ins
9. Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 19 Parameter Number 40 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 41 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units a Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 42 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 43 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 44 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 4 20 Misc Group Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Keypad Mode Parameter Number 45 Access Rule GET SET This parameter selects if the Data Type BOOL keypad operation is maintained or momentary Group Misc Units 0 Maintained Minimum Value 0 1 Momentary Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Keypad Disable Parameter Number 46 Access Rule GET SET This parameter disables all Data Type BOOL keypad function except for the OFF and RESET buttons Group Misc Units O Not Disabled Minimum Value 0 1 Disabled Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Set to Defaults Parameter Number 47 Access Rule GET SET This parameter if
10. Parameter Number 51 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 52 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 53 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 54 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 55 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value 0 1 0 6 22 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Display Group Output Freq Output frequency present at T1 T2 T3 Commanded Freq Value of the active frequency command Displays the commanded frequency even if the drive is not running Output Current Output Current present at T1 T2 T3 Output Voltage Output Current present at T1 T2 T3 DC Bus Voltage Present DC Bus voltage level Parameter Number 101 Related Parameters 102 110 134 135 138 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximu
11. KW Hp Cat No Current Rating A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50Hz 50Hz 60Hz 60Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz THE LR GIS TT E 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 0 5 281D F12Z NA R 281D F12D NA R 281D F12B NA R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 281D F12Z NB R 281D F12D NB R 281D F12B NB R 1 1 5 5 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 281D F12Z NC R 281D F12D NC R 281D F12B NC R 3 2 16 4 7 5 3 5 10 10 281D F23Z ND R 281D F23D ND R 281D F23B ND R kW Hp Cat No Current Rating A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50Hz 50Hz 60Hz 60Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz TIE TRW E S 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 0 5 281A F12Z NA R 281A F12D NA R 281A F12B NA R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 281A F12Z NB R 281A F12D NB R 281A F12B NB R 1 1 5 5 11 2 2 1 1 3 281A F12Z NC R 281A F12D NC R 281A F12B NC R 3 2 16 4 75 3 5 10 10 281A F23Z ND R 281A F23D ND R 281A F23B ND R Table H 4 Reversing Starters NEMA Type 4X Up to 575V AC KW Hp Cat No Current Rating A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50Hz 50Hz 60Hz 60Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz TIE LR S BINS 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 0 5 281D S12Z NA R 281D S12D NA R 281D S12B NA R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 281D S12Z NB R 281D S12D NB R 281D S12B NB R 1 1 5 5 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 281D S12Z NC R 281D S12D NC R 281D S12B NC R 3 2 16 4 75 3 5 10 10 281D S23Z ND R 281D S23D ND R 281D S23B ND R Renewal Parts H 3
12. Net Output 12 X a Net Output 13 X as Net Output 14 Dnet Voltage Parameter Number 21 This parameter provides the voltage measurement for the DeviceNet network Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group DeviceNet Units V Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 6500 Default Value 0 6 12 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Starter Protection Group Breaker Type Parameter Number 22 This parameter identifies the Bulletin 140M used in this product Access Rule GET 1 140M D8N C25 Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value PrFit Reset Mode Parameter Number 23 This parameter is the Protection Fault reset mode Access Rule GET SET 0 Manual Data Type BOOL 1 Automatic Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Pr Fault Enable Parameter Number 24 This parameter enables the Protection Fault by setting the bit to 1 Access Rule GET SET Data Type WORD Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 64927 Function 15 Short Circuit Overload Phase Short Ground Fault Stall Control Power 10 Fault Overtemperature Ov
13. Installation and Wiring 2 23 Figure 2 23 Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Local Disconnect AS w D LED Status ee eee Indication Alisn Bradiey 2 Outputs Lier Ko owe are E Micro M12 I ArmorPoint Interface In K m Source Control Brake io Connector Out Motor Dynamic 0 10V Analog Connector Brake Connector Input Connector Available only with the Bulletin 284 with sensorless vector con trol Figure 2 24 Bulletin 284 ArmorStart with ArmorConnect Control Power Ground Terminal Control Power Three Phase Power Ground Three Phase Power Terminal 2 24 Wiring Installation and Wiring Power Control Safety Monitor Inputs and Ground Wiring Table 2 1 provides the power control and ground wire capacity and the tightening torque requirements The power control ground and safety monitor terminals will accept a maximum of two wires per terminal Table 2 1 Power Control Safety Monitor Inputs Ground Wire Size and Torque Specifications Terminals Wire Size Torque Wire Strip Length Primary Terminal Primary Secondary 10 8 Ib in Ower Terminal 1 2 Nem i and 2 Nae 0 35 in 9 mm Ground 1 5 4 0 mm Secondary Terminal
14. 2 14 Installation and Wiring Dimensions for Bulletin 284 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 14 Dimensions for 1 Hp and below 230V AC 2 Hp and below 460V AC and 2 Hp and below 575V AC IP67 NEMA Type 4 with Conduit Entrance 420 38 16 551 236 191 290 11 42 aj 3 02 C 12 f MOTOR CONNECTION 266 9 10 51 373 114 691 O 67 9 2 g 131 o S l o 0 l 0 T S 1 CONDUIT OPENING 39 i l 21 1 85 0 75 CONDUIT OPENING Installation and Wiring 2 15 Dimensions for Bulletin 284 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not Continued intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 15 Dimensions for 1 Hp and below 230V AC 2 Hp and below 460V AC
15. Parameter Number 139 138 140 151 152 167 Related Parameters 170 173 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Setup Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 sec Maximum Value 600 0 sec Default Value 10 0 sec Parameter Number 140 Related Parameters 138 T 168 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Setup Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 1 sec Maximum Value 600 0 sec Default Value 10 0 sec Parameter Number 141 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Basic Program Group Units Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 143 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Basic Program Group Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value 0 1 0 5 38 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Advanced Program Group 151 Digital In 1 SEL Parameter Number 151 152 152 Digital In 2 SEL 112 114 138 140 167 Related Parameters 168 170 173 178 179 Stop drive before changing this parameter Access Rule GET SET elects the function for the digital inputs Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group See Table 5 B for details Units _ Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 26 Default Value 4 Table 5 B Digital Inputs Options Options Description 0 Not Used Terminal has no function but can be read over network communication via Parameter 114 Dig In Status
16. gt oO aul 6 o _4 T Installation and Wiring 2 17 Dimensions for Bulletin 284 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not Continued intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 17 Dimensions for 2 Hp 230V AC 3 Hp and above 460V AC and 3 Hp and above 575V AC IP67 NEMA Type 4 with ArmorConnect Connectivity AE Ss ArmorStart device with a 25 A short circuit protection rating 2 18 Installation and Wiring Dimensions for Bulletin 284 Continued 420 38 16 551 290 11 421 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 18 Dimensions for 1 Hp and below 230V AC 2 Hp and below 460V AC and 2 Hp and below 575V AC NEMA Type 4X with Conduit Entrance EM h l LB p U ao f NOTOR CONNECTION 266 9 110 511
17. kw Hp Current nora 230V AC ae 200ovac 230vac 4sovac 575vV AC carino A 50 Hz abe 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 1 1 3 0 0 55 0 75 0 5 05 1 15 280D FN 10 R 3 0 5 5 11 2 2 1 5 2 3 3 280D FN 10 R 5 3 7 6 1 5 5 5 3 3 5 5 280D FN 10 R 6 3 16 4 5 5 3 3 10 10 280D FN 25 R kW Hp Current gie 230V AC Koe 200ovac 230vac 4sovac 575vV AC carino A 50 Hz ie 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 280A FN 10 R 3 0 5 5 11 2 2 15 280A FN 10 R 5 3 7 6 15 55 3 280A FN 10 R 6 3 16 4 55 3 280A FN 25 R Table H 18 Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controller NEMA 4X Up to 575V AC with Conduit Entrance kw Hp Current Rating 230V AC oe 200ovac 230vac 46ovac 575vV AC Cat No A 50 Hz 50Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 1 1 3 0 0 55 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 280D SN 10 C 3 0 5 5 11 2 2 15 2 3 3 280D SN 10 C 5 3 7 6 1 5 5 5 3 3 5 5 280D SN 10 C 6 3 16 4 5 5 3 3 10 10 280D SN 25 C Table H 19 Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controller NEMA 4X Up to 575V AC with ArmorConnect Connectivity kw Hp Current Rating 230V AC ae 200vAC 230VAC 460V AC 575V AC Cat No A 50 Hz SOS 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 1 1 3 0 0 55 0 75 0 5 05 1 1 5 280D SN 10 R 3 0 5 5 11 2 2 1 5 2 3 3 280D SN 10 R 5 3 7 6 1 5 5 5 3 3 5 5 280D SN 10 R 6 3 16 4 5 5 3 3 10 10 280D SN 25 R Renewal Parts H 9 Bulletin 283 Continued Table H 20 Motor Cables Description Current Ra
18. DeviceNet Connection Mini M18 Ot G S Cc Ground Terminal are Figure 2 6 Bulletin 280A 281A ArmorStart for the ArmorPoint Backplane N LA Local Disconnect LLN LED Status f Indication 2 Outputs Micro M12 Allen Bradley ArmorPoint Motor Interface IN Connection CAUTION ArmorPoint Interface OUT Ground Terminal K 7 2 8 Installation and Wiring Figure 2 7 Bulletin 280D 281D ArmorStart with ArmorConnect Connectivity LA pq fo Z ae Allen Bradicy CAUTION I Control Power Three Phase Power Ground Terminal Control Power Three Phase Power Ground Terminal p i lt Allen Bradley CAUTION Installation and Wiring 2 9 Dimensions for Bulletin 283 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not
19. Net Output 0 X Net Output 1 X Net Output 2 Net Output 3 mR X Net Output 4 X Net Output 5 X Net Output 6 X Net Output 7 Net Output 8 Net Output 9 X Net Output 10 X Net Output 11 X _ Net Output 12 X Net Output 13 X Net Output 14 Dnet Voltage Parameter Number 21 Access Rule GET This parameter provides the Data Type UINT voltage measurement for the DeviceNet network Group DeviceNet Units Xx Xx Volts Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 6500 Default Value 0 Starter Protection Group Breaker Type Parameter Number 22 Access Rule GET SET This parameter identifies the Data Type BOOL Bulletin 140M used in this product Group Starter Protection 0 140M D8N C10 Units 1 140M D8N C25 Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value 0 1 0 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 11 PrFlt Reset Mode Parameter Number 23 Access Rule GET SET This parameter configures the Data Type BOOL Protection
20. Zone 3 EPR Parameter Number 88 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in Data Type UNIT msec for the zone 1 consuming connection If consumed data is Group ZIP Parameters not received in 4 times this Units msec value the zone connection will MinimumValue 0 time out and Zone 3 Health will report 1 Not Healthy Maximum value 69939 Default Value 75 Zone 4 EPR Parameter Number 89 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in Data Type UNIT msec for the zone 1 consuming connection If consumed data is Group ZIP Parameters not received in 4 times this Units msec value the zone connection will MinimumValue 0 time out and Zone 4 Health Maximum Value 65535 will report 1 Not Healthy Default Value 75 Zone 1 Control Parameter Number 90 Zone 1 Control Word Default Access Rule GET SET Bit 0 and Bit 1 set all other bits clear Data Type BYTE BitO Security Enable 1 Enable data security Group ZIP Parameters Bit1 COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Units Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll MinimumValue 0 Response msgs Bit3 Strobe Cnxn Maximum Value 255 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs Bit4 Multicast Poll Default Value 3 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages 3 24 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Zone 2 Control Parameter Number 91 Zone 2 Control Word Defau
21. Important Before programming logic it is important to decide on the conditions under which the logic will run As defined earlier the conditions can be defined by setting parameter 8 Network Override and parameter 9 Comm Override to the desired value 1 While in RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Double click on the ArmorStart 2 Click on the DeviceLogix tab If you are on line with a device a dialog box will appear asking you to upload or download Click on Upload 3 Click the Start Logic Editor button 4 If programming off line continue to step 5 otherwise click on the Edit button Click Yes when asked if you want to Enter Edit Mode Once in edit mode the entire list of Function Blocks will be displayed in the toolbar 5 Left Click on the RSL function block This is a reset dominate latch 6 Move the cursor into the grid and left click to drop the function onto the grid Using DeviceLogix 10 3 7 From the toolbar Click on the Discrete Input button and select Input 0 from the pull down menu This is the remote start button based on the example I O table 8 Place the input to the left of the RSL function To drop the input on the page left click on the desired position 9 Place the mouse cursor over the tip of Input 0 The tip will turn green Click on the tip when it turns green 10 Move the mouse cursor toward the input of the RSL function A line will follow t
22. PID Setup Trim Control In Trim Control the PID Output is added to the Speed Reference In Trim mode the output of the PID loop bypasses the accel decel ramp as shown Trim Control is used when Parameter 232 PID Ref Sel is set to option 5 6 7 or 8 Speen Ref I i PID Loop Accel Decel PID Ref gt PID Prop Gain l Ramp j PID PD t Error utput i l Output PIO Fdbk PID Integ Time O O gt Fred T l A l N PID Diff Rate PID Enabled Example e na winder application the PID Reference equals the Equilibrium set point e The Dancer Pot signal provides PID Feedback to the drive Fluctuations in tension result in a PID Error value e The Master Speed Reference sets the wind unwind speed e As tension increases or decreases during winding the Speed Reference is trimmed to compensate Tension is maintained near the Equilibrium set point wou lt 0 Volts PID Feedback Dancer Pot Signal PID Reference Equilibrium Set Point CI ogobo Koo o Speed Reference Ei lt 10 Volts PID Setup l 3 PID Reference and Feedback Parameter 232 PID Ref Sel is used to enable the PID mode Parameter 232 0 PID Disabled and to select the source of the PID Reference If A132 PID Ref Sel is not set to 0 PID Disabled PID can still be disabled by select progr
23. 24V DC 2 Source Output w 2 M12 connectors 1738 OB2EM12 24V DC 2 Source Output 2 A Prot w 2 M12 connectors 1738 OB2EPM12 24V DC 4 Sink Output w 4 M12 connectors Table G 6 Digital Input Products 1738 OV4EM12 Description Cat No 24V DC 8 Sink Input w 4 M12 connectors 2 1738 IB8M12 points per connector 24V DC 8 Sink Input w 8 M8 connectors 1738 IB8M8 24V DC 8 Sink Input w 1 M23 connector 1738 IB8M23 24V DC 4 Sink Input w 4 M12 connectors 1738 IB4M12 24V DC 4 Sink Input w 4 M8 connectors 1738 IB4M8 24V DC 2 Sink Input w 2 M12 connectors 1738 IB2M12 24V DC 4 Source Input w 4 M12 connectors 1738 IV4M12 Table G 7 Analog Products Description Cat No 24V DC Analog Current Input w 2 M12 connectors 1738 IE2CM12 24V DC 2 Analog Voltage Input w 2 M12 connectors 1738 IE2VM12 24V DC Analog Current Output w 2 M12 connectors 1738 OE2CM12 24V DC Analog Voltage Output w 2 M12 connectors 1738 OE2VM12 only with male M18 connector ArmorPoint DeviceNet Adapter Module Drop or Pass through with male and female M18 connectors 24V DC Coil N O DPST Relay w 2 AC M12 1738 connectors OW4M12AC4 120V AC 2 Input w 2 AC 4 pin M12 connectors ney am P IA2M12AC4 120V AC 2 Input w 2 AC 3 pin M12 connectors ites eee P I1A2M12AC3 120 230V AC 2 Output w 2 AC 3 pin M12 1738 connect
24. DeviceLogix Group Hdw Inputs Parameter Number 10 This parameter provides status of hardware inputs Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value Maximum Value 15 Default Value Bit Function 1 Input 0 X Input 1 a Input 2 X Input 3 Network Inputs Parameter Number 2 This parameter provides status of network inputs Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 4 3 2 0 X Net Input 0 B Net Input 1 X _ Net input 2 E a E X _ Net Input 3 _ X Net Input 4 _ Net Input 5 ka Net Input 6 z m Net Input 7 X Net Input 8 _ Net Input 9 _ X _ _ Net Input 10 X E _ Net Input 11 X _ Net Input 12 X _ Net Input 13 X TE Net Input 14 X a S kas Net Input 15 5 4 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Network Outputs Parameter Number 3 This parameter provides status of network
25. Terminal Designations Description Color Code A1 Control Power Input Blue A2 Control Power Common Black PE Ground Green Yellow 1 L1 Line Power Phase A Black 2 2 Line Power Phase B White 3 L3 Line Power Phase C Red ArmorConnect Cable Ratings The ArmorConnect power media cables are rated per UL Type TC 600V 90 C Dry 75 C Wet Exposed Run ER or MTW 600V 90 C or STOOW 105 C 600V CSA STOOW 600V FT2 Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect Three Phase Power Media When using ArmorConnect three phase power media only fuses can be used for the motor branch circuit protective device for the group motor installations The following fuse types are recommended Class CC T or J type fuses Maximum Ratings Voltage V A80Y 277 480 480 600Y 347 600 600 Sym Amps RMS 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA Time Delay Fuse 50 A 30A 30A 30A Non Delay Fuse 100 A 60 A 60 A 60 A Installation and Wiring 2 33 AC Supply Considerations for Ungrounded and High Resistive Distribution Systems Bulletin 284 units The Bulletin 284 contains protective MOVs that are referenced to ground These devices should be disconnected if the Bulletin 284 is installed on an ungrounded and high resistive distribution system Disconnecting MOVs To prevent drive damage the MOVs connected to ground must be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded and high resistive distribution system
26. 0 Sink 1 Source U Not available on the Bulleti OutA Pr FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 34 defines how Output A will respond when a protection trip occurs When set to 1 Output A continues to operate as command via the network When set to 0 Output A will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 34 OutA Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state the Out A assumes when a trip occurs and Parameter 33 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 17 Parameter Number 310 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group User 1 0 Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 000 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 320 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 n 283A Parameter Number 33 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 34 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 4 18 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters OutA DN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 36 defines how Output A will respond when a DeviceNet network fault occurs When set to 1 Output A will hold state prior to trip occurrence When set to 0 Output A w
27. In Sink Source Parameter Number 320 This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to be sink or source Access Rule GET SET 0 Sink Data Type BOOL Nesou Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Not available on Bulletin 284A units OutA Pr FitState Parameter Number 33 This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 34 defines how Output A will respond Access Rule GET SET when a trip When set to 1 Output A continue to operate as command via the Data Type BOOL network When set to 0 Output A will open or close as determined by setting in Group User I 0 Parameter 34 S Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutA Pr FitValue Parameter Number 34 This parameter determines the state the Out A assumes when a trip occurs and Access Rule GET SET Parameter 33 is set to 0 Data Type BOOL 0 Open Group User 1 0 1 Close Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutA DN FitState Parameter Number 35 This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 36 defines how Output A will respond Access Rule GET SET when a DeviceNet network fault occurs When set to 1 Output A will hold state prior Data Type BOOL to trip occurrence When set to 0 Output A will open or close as determined by Group User I 0 setting in Parameter 36 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutA DN FitValue Parameter Number 36 This parameter determines the state that Output A
28. A 2 Specifications Bulletin 280 281 Continued Electrical Ratings UL NEMA IEC Environmental Operating Temperature Range 20 40 C 4 104 F Storage and Transportation A a aaa pas 25 85 C 13 185 F Altitude 2000 m Humidity 5 95 non condensing Pollution Degree 3 Enclosure Ratings NEMA 4 12 13 or NEMA 4X IP67 or IP69K Approximate Shipping Weight 6 8 kg 15 Ibs Mechanical Resistance to Shock Operational 15G Non Operational 30G Resistance to Vibration Operational 1 G 0 15 mm 0 006 in displacement Non Operational 2 5 G 0 38 mm 0 015 in displacement Power and Ground Terminals WireSize Primary Secondary Terminal Primary Secondary Terminal 1 5 mm 4 0 mm 16 AWG 10 AWG Tightening Torque Primary Terminal 1 2 N m Primary Terminal 10 8 in Ib Secondary Terminal 0 5 N m Secondary Terminal 4 5 in Ib Wire Strip Length 0 35 in 9 mm Control and Safety Monitor Inputs 1 0 mm 2 4 0 mm WireSize 18 AWG 10 AWG Tightening Torque 6 2 in lb 0 7 Nem Wire Strip Length 0 35 in 9 mm Other Rating EMC Emission levels Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions Class A Radiated Emissions Class A EMC immunity levels Electrostatic Discharge 4 kV contact and 8 kV Air Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field 10 V m Fast Transient 2kV Surge Transient TKV LL 2
29. Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 35 Opto Out Logic Parameter Number 164 Determines the logic Normally Open N O or Normally Closed N C of the opto Access Rule GET SET outputs Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Option Opto Out Logic Opto Out2 Logic Units 1 0 N O Normally Open N O Normally Open Minimum Value 0 1 N C Normally Closed N O Normally Open Maximum Value 3 2 N O Normally Open N C Normally Closed 3 N C Normally Closed N C Normally Closed Default Value 0 6 36 Analog Out Sel Sets the analog output signal 0 10V The output is used to provide a signal that is proportional to several drives Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Table 6 5 Analog Output Options Parameter Number 165 Related Parameters 135 166 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value l See Table for details Maximum Value Default Value Options Output Range A RE a dit Wa gua DIP Switch Position baie 0 OutFreq 0 10 0 10V OV 0Hz P035 Maximum Freq 0 10V 101 1 OutCurr 0 10 OV 0 Amps 200 Drive Rated Output Current 0 10V 103 2 OutVolt 0 10 OV 0 Volts 120 Drive Rated Output Volts 0 10V 104 3 OutPowr 0 10 OV 0 kW 200 Drive Ra
30. Relay Out Level Parameter Number 156 Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter 155 Relay Out Sel is 6 7 8 10 16 17 18 or 20 Related Parameters 155 158 161 Access Rule GET SET Parameters 155 Setting Parameter 156 Min Max Data Type UINT 6 0 400 Hz 7 0 180 Group Advanced Program Group 8 0 815V Units 0 1 0 C 0100 Minimum Value 0 0 16 0 1 9999 sec 17 1 9999 counts Maximum Value 9999 18 1 180 20 On Default Value 0 0 158 Opto Outi Sel Parameter Number 158 161 161 Opto Out2 Sel elated Parameters 133 156 192 240 247 Determines the operation of the programmable opto outputs 250 257 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value See Table 6 4 for details Maximum Value Default Value Table 6 4 Parameter 158 and 161 Options Options Description 0 Ready Fault Opto outputs are active when power is applied This indicates the drive is ready for operation Opto outputs are Default inactive when power is removed or a fault occurs At Frequency Drive reached commanded frequency 1 Parameter 161 Default MotorRunning Motor is receiving power from drive 2 Parameter 158Default 3 Reverse Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction 4 Motor Overld Motor overload condition exists 5 Ramp Reg Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel decal times to avoid overcurrent or overvoltage fault from
31. Electromechanical contactors and motor starters e Bulletin 283 EN 60947 4 2 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 4 2 AC semiconductor motor controllers and starters e Bulletin 284 EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Table of Contents i Chapter 1 Product Overview Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring Table of Contents INTO CUGHION sinisiin nnen noin ininda detssiesieniesdessiadesemeeescdies 1 1 Descriptio see keane nnee neeaaea E aa eai 1 1 Operation E E 1 2 lais Tn 1 2 Bulletin 280 281 Full Voltage Start sese eee ee 1 2 Bulletin 283 Soft BRT sss ee eree eee 1 2 Bulletin 283 Current Limit Bart sss sese 1 3 Bulletin 283 Selectable Kick Sart eee 1 3 Bulletin 283 Soft Stop sese ss sese ss sese sees sees ee eee enen 1 3 Bulletin 284 Sensorless Vector Performance eee 1 4 Bulletin 284 Sensorless Vector Cond sese 1 4 Description Of Features sss cccsesescssesscssssssceesseceseeseesesseseseesereesens 1 5 Overload Protection c cccccssesssscsccessessssessecesersesssssesecseees 1 5 LED Status Indication sese 1 7 Fault Diagnostics sese eee eee eee 1 7 IMPULS TT 1 8 QUITS 5520 soe cee se Sask oe Ps ci cha cas ieee TTT 1 8 Gland Plate Entrance 00 cc ccesscceeecsesssscsesecsessesesecsesesersenees 1 8 Motor Cable c
32. Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 198 Related Parameters 133 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 A Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2 Default Value 0 0 Disabled Parameter Number 199 Related Parameters 110 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 999 9 Default Value 30 0 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 49 Fault Clear Stop drive before changing this parameter Resets a fault and clears the fault queue Used primarily to clear a fault over network communications 0 Ready Idle Default 1 Reset Fault 2 Clear Buffer Parameters 107 109 Fault x Code Program Lock Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel 0 Unlocked 1 Locked Testpoint Sel Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel Comm Data Rate This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller CommNode Addr This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Comm Loss Action Selects the drive s response to a loss of the communication connection or excessive communication errors 0 Fault Default Drive will fault on an F81 Comm Loss and coast to stop 1 Coast Stop Stops drive via coast to stop 2 Stop Stops via Parameter 137 S
33. Logic Verify from the Tools pull down menu Click on the Edit button to toggle out of edit mode if online with a device Go to the pull down menu in the right corner of the toolbar and select Download Note Ensure that the PLC key switch is in the Program position If in any other position the download will not occur and an error will be generated Press OK when told the download was successful Now from the same pull down menu select Logic Enable On The ArmorStart is now programmed and the logic is Active ArmorStart with ArmorPoint Chapter 11 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity ArmorStart for the ArmorPoint Backplane The Bulletin 280A 281A 283A and 284A ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller allows connectivity to the ArmorPoint backplane The ArmorPoint I O system can communicate using DeviceNet ControlNet or EtherNet communication protocols In addition to the other network communication protocols the ArmorPoint Distributed I O products allow the I O capability to be expanded beyond the standard two outputs Two dual key output connectors are provided standard The outputs are sourced from control voltage power A1 A2 LED status indication is also provided as standard with the ArmorPoint When using ArmorPoint a maximum of two ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can be connected to the ArmorPoint Distributed I O products ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Conn
34. 16 10 AWG 4 5 b in 0 5 Nem Control and Safety 1 0 mm2 4 0 mm 6 2 Ib in f Monitor Inputs 18 10 AWG 0 7 Nem 0 33 in me Installation and Wiring 2 25 Terminal Designations As shown in the next figures the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller contains terminals for power control safety monitor inputs and ground wiring Access can be gained by removing the terminal access cover plate Secondaries es ust Primaries Ee lt DETAIL A Si CALE 2 000 2 26 Installation and Wiring Figure 2 27 Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Power and Control Terminals oe A NA A WA Wa CO A W A e K DETAIL A SCALE 1 000 Table 2 2 Power Control Safety Monitor and Ground Terminal Designations Terminal Designations No of Poles Description SM1 2 Safety Monitor Input SM2 2 Safety Monitor Input A1 2 Control Power Input A2 2 Control Power Common PE 2 Ground 1 L1 2 Line Power Phase A 3 L3 2 Line Power Phase B 5 L5 2 Line Power Phase C Only available with the Safety Monitor option Optional Locking Clip Installation and Wiring 2 27 The clam shell design clips over the ArmorStart motor connector and motor cable to limit customer access from disconnecting the motor cable on the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller The locking clip is an optional device that can be used if desired Figure 2 28 Bulletin 2
35. Breaker Type Parameter Number 22 This parameter identifies the Bulletin 140M used in this product Access Rule GET 1 140M D8N C25 Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value PrFit Reset Mode Parameter Number 23 This parameter is the Protection Fault reset mode Access Rule GET SET 0 Manual Data Type BOOL 1 Automatic Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Pr Fault Enable Parameter Number 24 This parameter enables the Protection Fault by setting the bit to 1 Access Rule GET SET Data Type WORD Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 64927 Function 15 E Short Circuit Overload Phase Short Ground Fault Stall Control Power 10 Fault Overtemperature Over Current Dnet Power Loss Internal Comm DC Bus Fault EEprom HW Fault Restart Retries Misc Fault 5 14 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Pr Fault Reset This parameter resets the Protection Fault on a transition 0 gt 1 StrtrDN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 27 defines how the starter will respond when a DeviceNet fault occurs When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to DnFit Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 27 StrtrDN FitValue This pa
36. Bulletin Number es 280 Starter Communications D DeviceNet A ArmorPoint Figure H 2 Bulletin 280 Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure 280 D F N 10 C Option Option SM Safety Monitor Line Connection C Conduit Entrance a T H ArmorConnect Power Media S NEMA Type 4X Short Circuit Protection Bul 140M 10 10 A Rated Device N Base Only 25 25 A Rated Device No Control Module Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection Table H 5 Bul 280 Full Voltage Starters amp Bul 281 Reversing Starters IP67 NEMA Type 4 Up to 575V AC with Conduit Entrance kw Hp Current Rating c at No A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 E 05 0 5 280D FN 10 C 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 280D FN 10 C 1 1 5 5 14 2 2 1 1 3 3 280D FN 10 C 3 2 16 4 75 3 5 10 10 280D FN 25 C kw Hp Current Rating Cat No A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 0 5 280A FN 10 C 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 280A FN 10 C 1 1 5 5 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 280A FN 10 C 3 2 16 4 75 3 5 10 10 280A FN 25 C Table H 6 Bul 280 Full Voltage Starters amp Bul 281 Reversing Starters IP67 NEMA Type 4 Up to 575V AC with ArmorConnect Connectivity kw Hp Current Rating c at No A 23
37. Consumed 1 0 Assy This parameter selects the format of the 1 0 data consumed Produced 1 0 Assy This parameter selects the format of the I O data produced Prod Assy Word 0 This parameter is used to build bytes 0 1 for produced assembly 120 Produced Assy Word 1 This parameter is used to build bytes 2 3 for produced assembly 120 Parameter Number 10 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 11 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 188 Default Value 164 Parameter Number 12 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 190 Default Value 165 Parameter Number 13 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 216 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 14 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 216 Default Value 4 5 10 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Prod Assy Word 2 This parameter is used to build bytes 4 5 for produced assembly 120 Prod Assy Word 3 This parameter is used to build bytes 6 7 for produced assembly 120 Consumer I O Size This parameter maps to the Scanner Tx Size Produced 1 0 Siz
38. Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value O Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 13 Last PR Fault Parameter Number 61 0 None 1 Hardware Short Circuit 2 Software Short Circuit Access Rule GET 3 Motor Overload 4 Reserved 5 Phase Loss Data Type UINT 6 12 Reserved 13 Control Power Loss 14 Control Power Fuse Group Starter Protection 15 1 0 Short 16 Output Fuse 17 Overtemp Units 2 18 Reserved 19 Phase Imbalance 20 Reserved ave 21 DNet Power Loss Minimumyalue 22 Internal Comm 23 26 Reserved l 27 MCB EEPROM Maximum Value 100 28 Base EEPROM 29 Reserved 30 Wrong Base 31 Wrong CTs Default Value 0 32 100 Reserved Warning Status Parameter Number 62 Access Rule GET This parameter warns the Data Type WORD user of a condition without faulting Group Starter Protection Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Brt Warnin 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 g reserve X reserved X Phase Loss X reserved X reserved X Control Power X 10 Warning X reserved X Phase Imbalance X DeviceNet X reserved X reserved X reserved X Hardware X reserved X reserved Not available on the Bulletin 280A 281A 3 14 User 1 0 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters
39. ZIP 3 Fit ZIP 4 Cnxn X ZIP 4 Fit Starter Command Parameter Number 7 This parameter provides the command the starter Access Rule GET SET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 Default Value 0 Bit Function 6 5 4 2 1 Run Fwd X Run Rev X Fault Reset Jog Fwd X Jog Rev X Reserved X User Out A User Out B 5 8 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Network Override Parameter Number 8 This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault Access Rule GET SET 0 Disable Data Type BOOL 1 Enable Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Comm Override Parameter Number 9 This parameter allows for local logic to override a loss of an 1 0 connection Access Rule GET SET 0 Disable Data Type BOOL 1 Enable Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value il 0 Default Value Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers DeviceNet Group Autobaud Enable When this parameter is enabled the device will attempt to determine the network baud rate and set its baud rate to the same provided network traffic exists At least one node with an established baud rate must exist on the network for autobaud to occur 0 Disable 1 Enable
40. e When active Parameter 167 Accel Time 2 and Parameter 168 Decel Time 2 are used for all ramp rates 1 Acc amp Dec2 except Jog e Can only be tied to one input e When input is present drive accelerates according to the value set in Parameter 179 Jog Accel Decel and ramps to the value set in Parameter 178 Jog Frequency 2 Jog e When the input is removed drive ramps to a stop according to the value set in Parameter 179 Jog Accel Decel e Avalid Start command will override this input 3 Aux Fault When enable an F2 Auxiliary Input fault will occur when the input is removed 4 Parameters 151 and 152 Default Preset Freq Refer to Parameters 170 173 and 174 177 5 25 Not Used Reserved 26 Anlg Invert Option not valid for Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 39 155 Relay Out Sel Sets the condition that changes the state of the output relay contacts See Table 5 C for details Table 5 C Relay Out Sel Options Parameter Number 155 Related Parameters 133 156 192 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 21 Default Value 6 Options Description 0 Ready Fault Relay changes state when power is applied This indicates the drive is
41. 10 17 5 710 5 063 0 425 10 1 I supply 1 74 3 55 315 0 1 6 57A F 4 24V DC Control Design Considerations System Design Considerations The use of 16 AWG requires more consideration when determining When Using 16 AWG Control Wiring the number and location of the power supplies since it is effectively limited to 125 feet Re working example 1 using 16 AWG shows that two power supplies will be required Figure F 4 Conveyor Conveyor Conveyor gt j E 9 Section 5 Conveyor T Conveyor ya y a S a 5 Section 3 a 5 Section 4 L d d N g 2 Section 1 Section 2 ral alt ral ral ral 24V DC 16 24V DC 16 AWG Power AWG 16 AwWG Power 16 AW Supply Supply Distance 1 Distance 2 Distance 3 Distance 4 Distance 5 Wire Length 25 ft Run 1 25 ft 7 6 m 7 6 m 25 Tt Run 2 25 ft 7 6 m 7 6 m 50 ft 50ft ans 15 m 15 m o 50 ft 50ft Run 4 DW asm 15 m i 0 minimize the dc power ampacity requirements staggering the Other System Design T he de p pacity req ggering th Considerations starting sequenced on of the ArmorStarts is recommended but only if the application does not require all the ArmorStarts to be commanded to start at the same time The separation of the control power and DeviceNet power is recommended as a good design practice This minimizes the load on the Device
42. 2 Set Parameter 193 AutoRstrt Delay to a value other than 0 Clear an Overvoltage Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive 1 Set Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries to a value other than 0 2 Set Parameter 193 AutoRstrt Delay to 0 PWM BECO Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines Auto Rstrt Delay Parameter Number 193 Sets time between restart attempts when Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries is set to a Related Parameters 192 value other than zero Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 300 0 sec Default Value 1 0 sec 6 46 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Start at PowerUp Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to automatically cause the drive to resume running at command speed after the drive input is restored Requires a digital input configured Run or Start and a valid start contact This parameter will not function if Parameter 136 Start Source is set to 4 2 W High Speed 0 Disabled 1 Enabled LDU ONE Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if
43. 50 1 1 97 Face View Pinout 6 pin 5 used Male T Red Color Code 2 Black 3 Green GND 4 Blank Not used 5 Blue S1 6 White S2 A 24 Specifications On Machine E Stop Stations 1 Hole Yellow Enclosure E Stop Station Enclosure Type Quick Connect Knockout Type Operator Illumination Contact Cat No Voltage Configuration 24V AC DC 800F 1YMO4 Plastic Mini Receptacle Metric Twist to Release BOOF 1YMQ E Stop Circuit 120V AC 240V AC 24V AC DC 120V AC 240V AC 800F IMYMGQ S00F 1YMO5 800F 1YMQ6 800F IMYMO4 800F 1MYMO5 800F 1MYMO6 1 NC 1 NO ArmorConnect Cordset Receptacle Pin Out ArmorStart Terminations Pin 1 RED RED No connection Pin 2 Black Black A2 Pin3 Green Green PE Pin 4 Blank Not used Blank Not Used Pin 5 Blue Blue A1 Pin 6 T gt L gt elg eg E Stop E E Station 1s L ArmorStart Media Aux Power In ArmorStart Media Aux Power In 2 ows Y Q 5 h z J 898N 653ES NKF 889A M65SP61 898N 653ES NKF Customer Supplied Electronic Data Sheets DOL Type Product Codes and Name Strings Appendix B Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information Electronic Data Sheets EDS files are specially formatted ASCII files that provide all of the information necessary for a configuration tool e g RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to access and alter the parameters
44. Available Protection Fault DNet Fault DNet Fault Connection Transitions to Established Receive dle Protection Fault Reset eq N399H Protection Fault Protection Fault Bulletin 284 CIP Information Power Off DOP Instances 1 2 9 and 10 Special Behavior Besides the sources that can affect output points 3 and 4 DOPs 1 and 2 can be affected by keypad inputs since they double as the Run Forward and Run Reverse outputs This adds complexity to their behavior so their behavior is defined in this section separately The following State Transition Diagram is used for DOP Instances 1 2 9 and 10 Figure D 2 DOP Instances 1 2 9 and 10 Non Existant Power Up Auto State Auto Init Keyad Hand Button Pressed Hand State Hand Stop Keyad Auto Button Pressed Auto State Auto Init Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 23 The following State Transition Diagram is used in Auto State for Unbound DOP Instances 1 2 9 and 10 Figure D 3 Auto State for Unbound DOP Instances 1 2 9 and 10 Auto Init DNet Fault Protection Fault DNet Fault DNet Fault Connection Transitions to Established Protection Fault DNet Fault Connection Tansitionsto Established yne4 UoHde Old DNet Fault Protection Fault Reset Recei e Data Protection Fault Protection Fault D 24 Bulletin 284 CIP Information The following State Transition Diagram
45. Dimensions are not Continued intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 20 Dimensions for 2 Hp 230V AC 3 Hp and above 460V AC and 3 Hp and above 575V AC NEMA Type 4X with Conduit Entrance 444 38 117 501 ti 42 ai R 4 i ott 268 10 55 287 5 Cit 32 a Lit SUL US C 3 02 tan tele fe NOTOR CONNECTION 266 9 10 51 373 14 69 Qt Eaa Piha E HEE oH YA Oe ep oe l la M lo e E O T RE aai l fe Qi S LAL J J e UY i LIS 7 o s 0 T TRF J ee opt 9 HYN nR TT Ge ql TOSTA 3 1 CONDUIT O
46. F12 HW OverCurrent 2 The drive output current has 12 Check programming Check for excess load improper programming of exceeded the hardware current Parameter 184 Boost Select DC brake volts set too high or other causes of limit excess current F13 Ground Fault 2 A current path to earth ground has 13 Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a been detected at one or more of the grounded condition drive output terminals F33 Auto Rstrt Tries Drive unsuccessfully attempted to 14 Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries F38 Phase U to Gnd 2 A phase to ground fault has been 15 Check the wiring between the drive and motor F39 Phase V to Gnd detected between the drive and 16 Check motor for grounded phase F40 Phase W to Gnd motor in this phase 17 Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared F41 Phase UV Short 2 Excessive current has been detected 18 Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition F42 Phase UW Short between these two output terminals 19 Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared F43 Phase VW Short F48 Params Defaulted 2 The drive was commanded to write 20 Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive default values to EEPROM 21 Program the drive parameters as needed F63 SW OverCurrent 2 Programmed Parameter 198 SW 22 Check
47. Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 0 disabled 50 S Curve ae I 1 2 S Curve W Acoal Time 26 Seoonds Total Time to Accelerate Acca Time S Curve Time 12 8 Ouve Time 10 Seconds 25 Seconds Y gt 5 44 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Boost Select Parameter Number 184 Sets the boost voltage of Parameter 131 Motor NP Volts and redefines the Volts Related Parameters 104 131 132 per Hz curve Active when Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode OV Hz Drive may Access Rule GET SET add additional voltage unless Option 5 is selected Data Type UINT See Table 5 E for details Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 14 Default Value 8 Table 5 E Boost Select Options Options Description 1 30 0 VT 2 35 0 VT Variable Torque Typical fan pump 3 40 0 VT curves 4 45 0 VT 5 0 0 no IR 6 0 0 7 2 5 CT Default for 5 Hp 3 7 kW Drive 8 5 0 CT Default an Constant Torque 11 12 5 CT 12 15 0 CT 13 17 5 CT 14 20 0 CT Figure 5 2 Parameter 131 Motor NP Volts 1 2 Motor NP Volts N S x a 2 5 S 2 Parameter 132 Motor NP Hertz Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 45 Maximum Voltage Parameter Number 188 Sets the highest voltage the drive will output Related Pa
48. Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 262 Default Value 5 Prod Assy Word 3 Parameter Number 16 This parameter is used to build bytes 6 7 for produced assembly 120 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 262 Default Value 6 Consumer 1 0 Size Parameter Number 17 This parameter maps to the Scanner Tx Size Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 8 4 Default Value 6 10 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Produced 1 0 Size Parameter Number 18 This parameter maps to the Scanners Rx Size Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 8 Default Value 4 Starter COS Mask Parameter Number 19 This parameter allows the installer to define the change of state conditions that will Access Rule GET SET result in a change of state message being produced Data Type WORD Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 16383 Default Value 16383 Bit Function 13 12 11 10 7 2 1 pan Tripped X Warning X Running Fwd Running Rev Ready Net Ctl Status Net Ref Status
49. Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 Default Value 9 Parameter Number 138 Related Parameters 101 102 112 139 140 151 152 153 154 169 170 173 174 177 210 211 213 232 240 247 and 250 257 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 7 Default Value 5 Parameter Number 139 Related Parameters 138 140 151 152 153 154 167 170 173 174 177 and 240 247 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 sec Maximum Value 600 0 sec Default Value 10 0 sec 6 30 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Decel Time 1 Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases Maximum Freq _ Decel Rate Parameter Number 140 Related Parameters 138 139 151 152 153 154 168 170 173 174 177 Decel Time and 240 247 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 1 sec Maximum Value 600 0 sec Default Value 10 0 sec Reset To Defaults Parameter Number 141 Access Rule GET SET Stop drive before changing this parameter Data Type BOOL es SLA to factory defaults Group Basic Program Group 1 Factory Rset Units Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Motor OL Ret Parameter Number 143 Access Rul
50. 0 5 0 5 280D SN 10 C 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 5 280D SN 10 C 1 1 5 5 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 280D SN 10 C 3 2 16 4 7 5 3 5 10 10 280D SN 25 C Table H 9 Motor Cables Description Current Rating A Cable Rating pea Cat No 0 24 1 2 3 9 8 280 MTRM22 M3 90 M22 Motor Cordset 0 5 2 5 IP67 NEMA Type 4 6 19 6 280 MTR22 M6 1 1 5 5 14 45 9 280 MTR22 M14 0 24 1 2 3 9 8 280S MTRM22 M3 90 M22 Motor Cordset 0 5 2 5 IP69k NEMA Type 4X 6 19 6 280S MTR22 M6 1 1 5 5 14 45 9 2805 MTR22 M14 3 9 8 280 MTRM35 M3 90 M35 Motor Cordset 3 2 16 IP67 NEMA Type 4 6 19 6 280 MTR35 M6 14 45 9 280 MTR35 M14 3 9 8 280S MTRM35 M3 90 M35 Motor Cordset 3 2 16 IP69k NEMA Type 4X 6 19 6 280S MTR35 M6 14 45 9 280S MTR35 M14 90 Male Straight Female ie 2 Perna 1 3 3 280 MTR22 M1D M22 Patchcords 11 55 3 9 8 280 MTR22 M3D 90 Male Straight Female 024 i 2 POURREN 1 3 3 280S MTR22 M1D M22 Patchcords 1155 3 9 8 280S MTR22 M3D 90 Male Straight Female 1 3 3 280 MTR35 M1D 3 2 16 IP67 NEMA Type 4 M35 Patchcords yp 3 9 8 280 MTR35 M3D o i 1 3 3 280S MTR35 M1D 90 Male Straight Female 9 9 16 IP69K NEMA Type 4X 3 3 M35 Patchcords 3 9 8 280S MTR35 M3D Table H 10 Internal Fuses Description Current Rating Cat No Control Voltage Fuse 7A W25172 260 17 Output Fuse 2 5A W25176 155 03 Table H 11 ArmorPoint Media Description Length Cat No ArmorPoint Bus Extension
51. 316 Stainless Steel Female Black anodized Aluminum or 316 Stainless Steel Insert Yellow PVC Contacts Brass gold over palladium Nickel Electrical Assembly Rating 600V 10A Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature Dimensions IP67 IP69K 1200 psi washdown 20 90 C 4 194 F Dimensions are approximate Illustrations are not drawn to scale 28 1 1 11 12 2 0 48 3 81 0 15 gt 0 1 2 in 14 NPT thread 7 32 0 28 I O 25 07 0 98 Dia A 4 78 0 18 7 8 in 16 UNS 2A thread 7 8 in 16 UNS 2A thread 152 4 203 2 6 0 8 0 Pinout and Color Code 177 8 7 0 3 81 0 15 21 3 0 84 Dia 30 5 1 2 1 2 in 14 NPT Face View Pinout 6 pin 5 used 1Red Not used 2 Black 3 Green GND Color Code Male 4 Blank Not used 5 Blue 6 White S2 Specifications A 23 Shorting Plugs Specifications Mechanical Coupling Nut Black epoxy coated zinc or 316 Stainless Steel Housing Riteflex TPE Insert Yellow Riteflex TPE Contacts Brass gold over palladium Nickel Electrical Assembly Rating 600V 10A Environmental Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature Dimensions IP67 IP69K 1200 psi washdown 20 90 C 4 194 F Dimensions are approximate Illustrations are not drawn to scale Pinout and Color Code
52. 73 Zone 4 Macld 74 Zone 1 Health 75 Zone 2 Health 76 Zone 3 Health 77 Zone 4 Health 78 Zone 1 Mask 79 Zone 2 Mask 80 Zone 3 Mask 81 Zone 4 Mask 82 Zone 1 Offset 83 Zone 2 Offset 84 Zone 3 Offset 85 Zone 4 Offset 86 Zone 1 EPR 87 Zone 2 EPR 88 Zone 3 EPR 89 Zone 4 EPR 90 Zone 1 Control 91 Zone 2 Control 92 Zone 3 Control 93 Zone 4 Control 94 Zone 1 Key 95 Zone 2 Key 96 Zone 3 Key 97 Zone 4 Key 98 Device Value Key 99 Zone Ctrl Enable Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers The Bulletin 284D ArmorStart contains ten parameter groups The parameters shown in the DeviceLogix DeviceNet Starter Protection User I O Misc Parameter Drive DeviceNet Display Group Basic Program and Advanced Program will be discussed in this chapter Table 6 1 Starter Protection 22 Breaker Type 23 PrFitResetMode 24 Pr Fault Enable 25 Pr Fault Reset 26 StrtrDN FitState 27 StrtrDN FitValue 28 StrtrDN IdlState 29 StrtrDN IdiValue 61 RAST Pr Fault 62 Warning Status Basic Setup 131 Motor NP Volts 132 Motor NP Hertz 133 Motor OL Current 134 Minimum Freq 135 Maximum Freq 136 Start Source 137 Stop Mode 138 Speed Reference 139 Accel Time 1 140 Decel Time 1 141 Reset To Defalts 142 Reserved 143 Motor OL Ret User 1 0 30 Off to On Delay 31 On to Off Delay 32 In Sink Source 33 OutA Pr FitState 34 OutA Pr FitValue 35 OutA DN FitState 36 OutA D
53. Bulletin 284 only An internal contactor will be sourced from control voltage to isolate the load side of the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller When control power is applied the output contactor is closed and when control power is removed the output contact opens There is no switching element such as a relay in the system If control power is lost then the output contactor will open since its coil power is lost A sequenced stop involving the output contactor cannot be performed Shielded Motor Cable Bulletin 284 only A 3 meter shielded 4 conductor cordset is provided instead of the 3 meter unshielded 4 conductor cordset If the EMI Filter is selected a 3 meter shielded 4 conductor cordset is provided as standard 0 10V Analog Input Bulletin 284 only The Bulletin 284 Distributed Motor Controller with Sensorless Vector Control provides a 0 10V analog input The 0 10V Analog Input is a factory installed option that provides a 0 10V external frequency command from the 0 10V or 10V analog input or remote potentiometer A 5 pin micro receptacle is provided for connectivity for customer connection A shielded 5 conductor cordset or patch cord is recommended 1 12 Product Overview Notes Receiving Unpacking Inspecting Storing Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight
54. DOP Instances 1 and 2 Special Behavior see eee B 17 Parameter Object CLASS CODE OxOOOF e B 21 Parameter Group Object CLASS CODE 0x0010 eee B 22 Discrete Input Group Object CLASS CODE Ox001D B 23 Discrete Output Group Object CLASS CODE OxO01E B 24 Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029 ceeee B 25 Acknowledge Handler Object CLASS CODE 0x002b B 26 Overload Object CLASS CODE Ox0026 sese eee B 27 DeviceNet Interface Object CLASS CODE Ox00B4 00 B 28 Electronic Data Sheets sse eee C 1 Soft Starter Type Product Codes and Name Strings sse C 1 DeviceNet Objects cccccccscsssssssssssssersessssecsessnsersseesseseesenaeeers C 3 Identity Object CLASS CODE Ox0001 sse eee C 3 Identity a o c C 4 Message Router CLASS CODE Ox0002 sss eee C 4 DeviceNet Object CLASS CODE OX0008 sse ee eee C 4 Assembly Object CLASS CODE Ox0004 sse eee C 5 Custom Parameter Based Word wise I O Assemblies sees eee eee ee C 6 Word wise Bit Packed Assembies eee eee C 6 Standard Distributed Motor Controller 1 0 Assemblies 005 C 8 Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output Appendix D Bulletin 284 CIP Information Table of Contents Consumed Assemblies sese ssse sese sese ees eees sese eee sees ereenn C 9 Standard Distributed Motor Controller Input Produced Assemblies sse eee eee eee eee C 9
55. Pin 3 5V O9 7 Pin 4 CAN Low 4 Pin 5 Enable In 5 Pin 7 Common Pin 8 PE Figure A 15 External Connections for ArmorPoint Interface OUT Pin 1 CAN High Pin 2 Common DD Pin 3 5V Pin 4 CAN Low Pin 5 Enable Out 4 3 Pin 7 Common Pin 8 NC No Connection Overload Trip Curves Class 10 10000 oO 2 1000 4 o Cold l 100 2 Hot k A 10 Q lt 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 of Full Load Current Specifications A 9 Bulletin 284 Electrical Ratings Power Circuit Rated Operation Voltage 200V 575V 200 575V Rate Insulation Voltage 600V 600 V Rated Impulsed Voltage 6 kV 6 kV Dielectric Withstand 2200V AC 2500V AC Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Utilization Category N A AC 3 Protection Against Shock N A IP2X 25A Rated Operating Current Max 5 5A 16A Short Circuit Current Rating Voltage 480Y 277V 480 480V 600Y 347V 600V Protection SCPD Performance 10A Sym Amps RMS 65 kA 65 kA 30 kA 30 kA 30 kA 30 kA 30 kA 30 kA SCPD List Size per NEC Group Motor Control 24V DC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at voltage source Circuit Rated Operation Voltage 120V AC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at voltage source 240V AC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at voltage source
56. Size of I O Produced Data in Bytes 24 Get 1 0 Consumed Size USINT 0 5 3 Size of I O Consumed Data in Bytes 30 Get DNet Voltage UINT XX XX DeviceNet Voltage xx xx Volts 50 Get Set PNB COS Mask WORD 0 to 0x00FF 0 Change of state mask for PNBs The following common services are implemented for the DeviceNet Interface Object Table C 57 DeviceNet Interface Object Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance Ox0E No Yes 0x10 No Yes Get_Attribute_Single Set_Attribute_Single Appendix D Electronic Data Sheets VFD Type Product Codes and Name Strings Bulletin 284 CIP Information Electronic Data Sheets EDS files are specially formatted ASCII files that provide all of the information necessary for a configuration tool e g RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Revision 3 21 Service Pack 2 or later to access and alter parameters of the device The EDS file contains all of the device information number of parameter groupings parameter name minimum maximum and default values units data format and scaling EDS files for all the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers units are available from the Internet at www ab com networks eds They may also be built automatically by some configuration tools since much of the information necessary for an EDS file may be extracted from the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Product codes for the Bulletin 284 variable frequency
57. Stop drive before changing this parameter Sets the Highest frequency the drive will output continuously Start Source Stop drive before changing this parameter ets the control scheme used to start the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart 2 2 wire 3 2 wire Level Sensitive 4 2 wire High Speed 5 RS485 DSI Port Stop Mode Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart are the following 0 Ramp CF Ramp to Stop Stop command clears active fault 1 Coast CF Coast to Stop Stop command clears active fault 2 DC Brake CF DC Injection Braking Stop Stop command clears active fault 3 DCBrkAuto CF DC injection Braking with Auto Shutoff Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 DC Brake Time or Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped Stop command clears active fault 4 Ramp Ramp to Stop 5 Coast Coast to Stop 6 DC Brake DC Injection Braking Stop 7 DC BrakeAuto DC Injection Stop with Auto Shutoff Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 DC Brake Time or Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded Speed Reference Valid Speed References for the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart are the following 1 Internal Freq 4 Preset Freq 5 Comm port Parameter Number 135 101 102 113 134 178 211 Related Parameters 213 215 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Setup
58. Table H 23 Bulletin 284 Control Module with Sensorless Vector Performance IP67 NEMA 4 Up to 480V Input Voltage kw Hp S S T AE 0 4 0 5 23A 284D FHB2P3Z N R 284D FHB2P3D N R 284D FHB2P3B N R S EE SEE ASR 10 45A 284D FHB4P5Z N R 284D FHB4P5D N R 284D FHB4P5B N R 15 2 0 76A 284D FHB7P6Z N R 284D FHB7P6D N R 284D FHB7P6B N R 0 4 05 14A 284D FHD1P4Z N R 284D FHD1P4D N R 284D FHD1P4B N R 075 10 23A 284D FHD2P3Z N R 284D FHD2P3D N R 284D FHD2P3B N R g EE S 15 2 0 4 0A 284D FHD4POZ N R 284D FHD4POD N R 284D FHD4POB N R 2 2 3 0 6 0A 284D FHD6POZ N R 284D FHD6POD N R 284D FHD6POB N R 3 0 5 0 76A 284D FHD7P6Z N R 284D FHD7P6D N R 284D FHD7P6B N R 0 4 0 5 23A 284A FHB2P3Z N R 284A FHB2P3D N R 284A FHB2P3B N R S Ee sonz ozs 10 4 5A 284A FHB4P5Z N R 284A FHB4P5D N R 284A FHB4P5B N R 15 2 0 76A 284A FHB7P6Z N R 284A FHB7P6D N R 284A FHB7P6B N R 0 4 0 5 14A 284A FHD1P4Z N R 284A FHD1P4D N R 284A FHD1P4B N R 075 10 23A 284A FHD2P3Z N R 284A FHD2P3D N R 284A FHD2P3B N R Kar E 15 2 0 400A 284A FHD4POZ N R 284A FHD4POD N R 284A FHD4POB N R 2 2 3 0 6 0A 284A FHD6POZ N R 284A FHD6POD N R 284A FHD6POB N R 3 0 5 0 76A 284A FHD7P6Z N R 284A FHD7P6D N R 284A FHD7P6B N R Table H 24 Bulletin 284 Control Module with Sensorless Vector Performance NEMA 4X Up to 480V Input Voltage kW Hp eae aD AW AE 0 4 0 5 23A 284D SHB2P3Z N R 284D SHB2P3D N R 284D SHB2P3B N R E gt ES
59. The Fault LED will flash a 4 blink pattern Ground Fault Indicates the drive has detected a ground fault This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 4 blink pattern Stall Indicates the drive has detected a stall condition indicating the motor has not reached full speed This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 5 blink pattern Control Power Indicates a loss of control power voltage or a blown control power fuse This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default The Fault LED will flash a 6 blink pattern 1 0 Fault This error can indicate a shorted sensor shorted input device or input wiring mistakes It can also indicate a blown output fuse This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default The Fault LED will flash a 7 blink pattern 13 4 Diagnostics Over Temperature Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 8 blink pattern Phase Imbalance Indicates an imbalance supply voltage This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default The Fault LED will flash a 9 blink pattern Over Current Indicates the drive has detected an over current fault This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 9 blink pattern DeviceNet Power Loss DeviceNet power has been lost or has dropped below the 12V threshold This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default The Fault LED will flash a 10 blink
60. Z Phase A Current Z Phase B Current Z Z Phase C Current Z Z Average Current Z Therm Utilized Z FLA Setting Overload Class Ol Reset Level DeviceNet Commissioning 8 9 Setting the Motor FLA Bulletin 283 The product should now be configured and communicating on the network The last step is to program the proper motor FLA setting parameter 106 This can be accomplished by using software such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet or a handheld DeviceNet tool Use the software to access the device parameters screen By default the motor FLA is set to the minimum FLA setting for the device and the overload trip class is set to 10 Set these parameters to the desired values and download to the device Select FLA setting parameter 106 and enter a value that corresponds to the FLA of the motor connected to the ArmorStart Make sure the Single radio button is selected and then select Download to Device The Overload Trip class for the Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controller is class 10 The proper motor protection is now in place Figure 8 3 RSNetWorx Parameter Screen E ArmorStart 283D 3A 120 AC E 215 General Device Parameters 0 Defaults EDS File DeviceLogix Groups r On Line fai parameters lt G Sinde Restore Default Values C All Parameter Help Z Parameter Current Value Z Z Phase A Current 0 0 Amps Z Phase B Current 0 0 Amps Z Z Phase C Current 0 0 Amps Z Z Average Current 0 0
61. and 2 Hp and below 575V AC IP67 NEMA Type 4 with ArmorConnect Connectivity a e on S 3 E L ol EA ArmorStart device with a 10 A short circuit protection rating 2 16 Installation and Wiring Dimensions for Bulletin 284 Continued 67 9 31 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 16 Dimensions for 2 Hp 230V AC 3 Hp and above 460V AC and 3 Hp and above 575V AC IP67 NEMA Type 4 with Conduit Entrance I CONDUIT OPENING 0 75 CONDUIT OPENING 236 13 H 7 5 oP i I S 287 5 B IE 2 NHY Olt HH Hf LE la 3 02 0 12 MOTOR CONNECTION 266 9 10 511 373 14 691 WE yA a HNHH O eo i oe O O 195 q Ib 7 681 I 1 43
62. gt Phase Short Drive Error The ArmorStart has detected a phase short Excessive current has been detected between two of Codes 41 43 the output terminals Check the motor for a shorted condition Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared This fault cannot be disabled 4 Ground Fault Drive Error A current path to earth has been detected at or more of the drive output terminals or a phase to Codes 13 38 40 ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase Check the motor for a grounded condition Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared This fault cannot be disabled 5 Motor Stalled Drive is unable to accelerate motor Increase Parameter 139 and or 167 Accel Time x or reduce Drive Error Code 6 load so drive output current does not exceed the current by Parameter 189 This fault cannot be disabled 6 Control a The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power voltage Check control voltage wiring and Power proper polarity Replace control voltage fuse if necessary This fault can be disabled and s disabled by default 7 10 Fault Depending on the types of modules in the configuration this error could be generated by a shorted sensor shorted input device wiring mistakes or a blown output fuse If this fault occurs the offending problem should be isolated or removed prior to restarting the system This fault can be disabled and js disabled by default 8 Heatsink Over tempera
63. 0 0 OFF 1 0N Parameter Number 25 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 26 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 27 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 28 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 29 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value 0 1 0 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 15 Last PR Fault 0 None 1 Hardware Short Circuit 2 Software Short Circuit 3 Motor Overload 4 SMC Motor OL 5 Phase Loss 6 10 Reserved 11 Shorted SCR 12 Phase Rotation 13 Control Power Loss 14 Control Power Fuse 15 1 0 Short 16 Output Fuse 17 Overtemp 18 Reserved 19 Phase Imbalance 20 Reserved 21 DNet Power Loss 22 Internal Comm 23 Reserved 24 Heatsink Over Temp 25 26 Reserved 27 MCB EEPROM 28 Base EEPROM 29 Reserved 30 Wrong Base 31 Wrong CTs 32 38 Reserved 39 Source Brok
64. 0 Bit 6 Acknowledge Suppression The following services are implemented for the DeviceNet Object Table B 9 DeviceNet Object Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x4B No Yes Allocate_Master Slave _Connection_Set ox4c No Yes Release_Master Slave _Connection_Set Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 5 Assembly Object CLASS CODE 0x0004 Custom Parameter Based Word wise 1 0 Assemblies The following class attributes are supported for the Assembly Object Table B 10 Assembly Object Class Attributes z m 79 All of the various instances of the assembly object will support attribute 3 The following table summarizes the various instances that are supported Table B 11 DeviceNet Assembly Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Type Description 3 Consumed Required ODVA Consumed Instance 52 Produced Required ODVA Produced Instance 120 Produced Custom Parameter Based Word Wise Assembly 160 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for DOL and SoftStart units 161 Produced Default Produced Instance for DOL and SoftStart units 162 Cons ied Standard Consumed Instance for DOL and SoftStart with Network Inputs Standard Produced Instance for DOL and SoftStart with ie Produced Network Outputs 181 Produced User Inputs 182 Consumed Consumed Network Bits
65. 0 VT 5 0 0 no IR 6 0 0 T 2 5 CT Default for 5 Hp 4 0 kW Drive 8 5 0 CT Default Constant Torque 11 12 5 CT 12 15 0 CT 13 17 5 CT 14 20 0 CT Figure 6 1 1 2 Motor NP Volts Motor NP Hertz Parameter 132 Motor NP Hertz 6 42 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Start Boost Sets the boost voltage of Parameter 131 Motor NP Volts and redefines the Volts per Hz curve when Parameter 184 Boost Select 0 Custom V Hz and Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode OV Hz Figure 6 3 Parameter 188 Maximum Voltage Parameter 131 Motor NP Volts Voltage 4 Parameter 186 Start Boost E Parameter 186 Break Voltage a vl Parameter 187 Break Frequency Parameter 134 Minimum Freq Parameter Number 185 131 132 134 135 184 186 Related Parameters 187 188 225 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 25 0 Default Value 2 5 Frequency Parameter 132 Motor NP Hertz Parameter 135 Maximum Freq Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 43 Brake Voltage Parameter Number 186 Sets the frequency where break voltage is applied when Parameter 184 Boost 131 132 134 135 184 185 Select 0 Custom V Hz and Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode OV Hz Re
66. 0 7 5 1 0 4 5A 284D SHB4P5Z N R 284D SHB4P5D N R 284D SHB4P5B N R 15 2 0 76A 284D SHB7P6Z N R 284D SHB7P6D N R 284D SHB7P6B N R 0 4 0 5 14A 284D SHD1P4Z N R 284D SHD1P4D N R 284D SHD1P4B N R 0 75 1 0 23A 284D SHD2P3Z N R 284D SHD2P3D N R 284D SHD2P3B N R S Ke S 02 15 2 0 4 0 A 284D SHD4P0Z N R 284D SHD4POD N R 284D SHD4POB N R 2 2 3 0 6 0A 284D SHD6POZ N R 284D SHD6POD N R 284D SHD6POB N R 3 0 5 0 76A 284D SHD7P6Z N R 284D SHD7P6D N R 284D SHD7P6B N R H 11 H 12 Renewal Parts Bulletin 284 Continued Table H 25 Bulletin 284 Control Module with Sensorless Vector Control IP67 NEMA 4 Up to 600V Input Voltage kw Hp Curent E NE NV UE S 0 4 0 5 2 3A 284D FVB2P3Z N R 284D FVB2P3D N R 284D FVB2P3B N R 50 60 Hz 0 75 1 0 5 0A 284D FVB5P0Z N R 284D FVB5POD N R 284D FVB5POB N R SS 1 5 2 0 7 6 A 284D FVB7P6Z N R 284D FVB7P6D N R 284D FVB7P6B N R 0 4 0 5 1 4 A 284D FVD1P4Z N R 284D FVD1P4D N R 284D FVD1P4B N R eee 0 75 1 0 2 3A 284D FVD2P3Z N R 284D FVD2P3D N R 284D FVD2P3B N R 50 60 Hz 15 2 0 4 0A 284D FVD4P0Z N R 284D FVD4P0D N R 284D FVD4P0B N R Blas 2 2 3 0 6 0A 284D FVD6P0Z N R 284D FVD6POD N R 284D FVD6POB N R 3 0 5 0 7 6A 284D FVD7P6Z N R 284D FVD7P6D N R 284D FVD7P6B N R 0 75 1 0 1 7A 284D FVE1P7Z N R 284D FVE1P7D N R 284D FVE1P7B N R 460 600V 50 60Hz 15 2 0 3 0A 284D F
67. 1 0 173 Preset Freq 3 Accel Time 2 Decel Time 2 0 0 1 174 Preset Freq 4 Accel Time 3 Decel Time 3 1 0 1 175 Preset Freq 5 Accel Time 3 Decel Time 3 0 1 1 176 Preset Freq 6 Accel Time 4 Decel Time 4 1 1 1 177 Preset Freq 7 Accel Time 4 Decel Time 4 Jog Frequency To activate 170 Preset Freq 0 set 138 Speed Reference to option 4 Preset Freq When a Digital Input is set to Accel 2 amp Decel 2 and the input is active that input overrides the settings in this table Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued Parameter Number 178 Related Parameters 135 151 152 153 154 179 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value 10 0 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 39 Jog Accel Decel Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is issued DC Brake Time Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor Refer to Parameter 181 DC Brake Level DC Brake Level Defines the maximum DC brake current in amps applied to the motor when Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set to either Ramp or DC Brake Parameter Number 179 Related Parameters 178 151 152 153 154 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advance
68. 1 3 Current Limit Start This starting mode is used when it is necessary to limit the maximum starting current It can be adjusted for 150 600 of full load amps Start times are selectable from 1 45 seconds 350 Percent Full Load Current 150 lt Start gt Time seconds Selectable Kick Start A kickstart or boost at the beginning of the start mode is intended to provide a current pulse of 450 of full load current The kickstart time is adjustable from 0 5 1 5 seconds This allows the motor to develop additional torque at start for loads which may need a boost to get started Kickstart when selected 100 Percent Voltage Initial Torque tart n R sta Time seconds w Soft Stop The Soft Stop function can be used with applications that require an extended coast to rest When enabled the voltage ramp down time can be selected from 1 90 seconds The motor will stop when the motor voltage drops to a point where the load torque is greater than the motor torque Motor Speed R Start gt Run Coast Is 7 lad Soft Stop e Time seconds Product Overview Torque Per Unit Torque Per Unit Bulletin 284 Sensorless Vector Performance Volts per Hertz e Drive automatically provides auto boost IR compensation and slip compensation e Provides excellent speed regulation and high levels of torque across the entire speed range of
69. 120 Produced Assy Word 1 This parameter is used to build bytes 2 3 for produced assembly 120 Prod Assy Word 2 This parameter is used to build bytes 4 5 for produced assembly 120 Prod Assy Word 3 This parameter is used to build bytes 6 7 for produced assembly 120 Consumed 1 0 Size This parameter reflects the consumed 1 0 data size in bytes Parameter Number 13 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 108 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 14 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 108 Default Value 4 Parameter Number 15 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 108 Default Value 5 Parameter Number 16 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 108 Default Value 6 Parameter Number 17 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 8 Default Value 1 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 9 Produced 1 0 Size Parameter Number 18 Access Rule GET This parameter reflects the Data Type USINT produced 1 0 data size in bytes Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Va
70. 192 Auto Rsirt Tries is exceeded 10 Above Anlg V Option not valid for Bulletin 284 ArmorStart 11 Logic In 1 An input is programmed as Logic In 1 and is active 12 Logic In 2 An input is programmed as Logic In 2 and is active 13 Logic In 1 amp 2 Both Logic inputs are programmed and active 14 Logic In 1 or 2 One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active 15 StpLogic Out Drive enters Step Logic step with Digit 3 of Command Word Parameters 240 247 16 Timer Out Timer has reached value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set threshold 17 Counter Out Counter has reached value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set threshold 18 Above PF Ang Power factor angle has exceeded the value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set threshold 19 Anlg In Loss Analog input loss has occurred Program parameter 122 Analog In Los for desired action when loss occurs Enables the output to be controlled over the network communications by writing to Parameter 156 Relay Out 20 ParamControl Level 0 Off 1 ON 21 NonRec Fault Value set in Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries is exceeded 99 EM Brk Cntrl EM Brake is energized Program Parameter 260 EM Brk Off Delay and Parameter 262 EM Brk On Delay for desired action Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 33
71. 200 mA Total w max Sensor Inputs 4 367 mA 24V DC 8 8 W DeviceNet Input Current Surge 15 A for 250 US DeviceNet Communications Baud Rates 125 250 500 kbps Distance Maximum 500 m 1630 ft 125 kbps 200 m 656 fi 250 kbps 100 m 828 ft 500 kbps Certifications cULus File No E96956 UL 508 EN IEC 60947 4 2 CE Marked per Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Primary Secondary Terminal Specifications A 7 Bulletin 283 Continued Figure A 9 External Connections for Input Connector X VS OO Pin 1 V Out Pin 2 Input Pin 3 Comm Pin 4 Input Pin 5 NC No Connection Figure A 10 External Connections for Output Connector Pin 1 PE Pin 2 Return Pin 3 Relay Out Figure A 11 External Connections for Motor Connector lt 5 Hp 460V AC Pin 1 T1 Black Pin 2 T2 White Pin 3 T3 Red Pin 4 Ground Green Yellow Figure A 12 External Connections for Motor Connector gt 5 Hp 460V AC T Pin 1 T1 Black Pin 2 Ground Green Yellow Pin 3 T3 Red Pin 4 T2 White Figure A 13 External Connections for Source Brake Connector Pin 1 L1 Black Pin 2 Ground Green Yellow Pin 3 L2 White A 8 Specifications Bulletin 283 Continued Figure A 14 External Connections for ArmorPoint Interface IN Pin 1 CAN High Pin 2 Common
72. 22 0x2C 19A 240V AC ArmorStart 283D 600V 19A 240V AC 133 PointBus Motor Starter 6 22 Motor Starter Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 3 DeviceNet Objects Identity Object CLASS CODE 0x0001 The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller supports the following DeviceNet object classes Table C 2 DeviceNet Object Classes Class Object 0x0001 Identity 0x0002 Message Router 0x0003 DeviceNet 0x0004 Assembly 0x0005 Connection 0x0008 Discrete Input Point 0x0009 Discrete Output Point 0x000F Parameter Object 0x0010 Parameter Group Object 0x001D Discrete Input Group 0x001E Discrete Output Group 0x0029 Control Supervisor 0x002B Acknowledge Handler 0x002C Overload Object 0x00B4 DN Interface Object Not available on the Bulletin 283A The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object Table C 3 Identity Object Class Attributes Attribute ID AccessRule Name Data Type Value wmo C 4 Bulletin 283 CIP Information Identity Objects A single instance of the Identity Object is supported The following instance attributes are supported Table C 4 Identity Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Value 1 Get UINT 1 2 Get Device Type UINT 22 or 133 3 Get Product Code UINT See Table C 1 Revision Structure of 4 Get Major Revision USINT Indicates Software Firmware Revision Number Minor
73. 22 ArmorPoint Media Description Length Cat No ArmorPoint Bus Extension Cable 1m 3 3 ft W40754 369 51 Terminating Resistor W40754 371 01 H 10 Renewal Parts Figure H 5 Bulletin 284 Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure 284 D F H D2P3 D N R Option1 Option2 Option3 Jais Bulletin Number Communications D DeviceNet A ArmorPoint Enclosure Type F Type 4 IP67 S Type 4X Torque Performance Mode H Volts per Hz Sensorless Vector Performance Vv Sensorless Vector Control Volts per Hz T Option 3 A10 0 10 mA Analog Input EMI EMI Filter oc Output Contactor SM Safety Monitor Control Module N Control Module Only PER Voltage Z 24V DC D 120V AC B 240V AC Output Current Output Code Current kW Hp A 230V Drive B2P3 2 3 0 4 0 5 B4P5 4 5 0 75 1 H only B5P0 5 0 75 1 V only B7P6 T5 15 2 4800V Drive D1P4 1 4 0 4 0 5 D2P3 2 3 0 75 1 D4P0 4 1 5 2 D6PO 6 2 2 3 D7P0 7 6 4 5 600V Drive E1P7 1 7 0 75 1 E3P0 3 16 2 E4P2 4 2 22 3 E6P6 6 6 4 5 Option 2 CB Control Brake Connector DB DB Brake Connector DB1 DB Brake Connector for IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor SB Source Brake Connector Option 1 3 Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad with Jog Function Blank Status Only Motor Media Type L R Round Bulletin 284 Continued Renewal Parts
74. 3 2 16 A 240V AC 0x8D _ 133 PointBus Motor Starter 22 Motor Starter B 2 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information DOL Reversing Type Product Codes and Name String DeviceNet Objects The following table lists the product codes for the Bulletin 281 Distributed Motor Controllers Table B 2 Bul 281 Distributed Motor Controller Product Codes and Name Strings nee ane Mre Product Contactor Overload Control Power o Code Size Code Current Rating Voltage 133 22 OxCA 100C 12 0 24 1 2A 24V DC 133 22 OxC1 100C 12 0 5 2 5A 24V DC 133 22 OxC2 100C 12 1 1 5 5A 24V DC 133 22 OxC3 100C 23 3 2 16A 24V DC 133 22 OxCB 100C 12 0 24 1 2A 120V AC 133 22 OxC4 100C 12 0 5 2 5A 120V AC 133 22 OxC5 100C 12 1 1 5 5A 120V AC 133 22 OxC6 100C 23 3 2 16A 120V AC 133 22 OxCC 100C 12 0 24 1 2A 240V AC 133 22 OxC7 100C 12 0 5 2 5A 240V AC 133 22 OxC8 100C 12 1 1 5 5A 240V AC 133 22 OxC9 100C 23 3 2 16A 240V AC OxCD OXxFF 133 PointBus Motor Starter 22 Motor Starter The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller supports the following DeviceNet object classes Table B 3 DeviceNet Object Classes Class Object 0x0001 Identity 0x0002 Message Router 0x0003 DeviceNet 0x0004 Assembly 0x0005 Connection 0x0008 Discrete Input Point 0x0009 Discrete Output Point 0x000F Para
75. 3 Hp 460V AC Pin 1 T1 Black Pin 2 T2 White Pin 3 T3 Red Pin 4 Ground Green Yellow Figure A 5 External Connections for Motor Connector gt 3 Hp 460V AC QO Pin 1 T1 Black Pin 2 Ground Green Yellow Pin 3 T3 Red Pin 4 T2 White Figure A 6 External Connections for ArmorPoint Interface IN 27 1 600 6 Pin 1 CAN High Pin 2 Common Pin 3 5V Pin 4 CAN Low Pin 5 Enable In Pin 7 Common Pin 8 PE Bulletin 280 281 Continued Specifications Figure A 7 External Connections for ArmorPoint Interface OUT Pin 1 CAN High Pin 2 Common DOD Pin 3 5V Pin 4 CAN Low 2 Pin 5 Enable Out 4 3 Pin 7 Common Pin 8 NC No Connection Figure A 8 Overload Trip Curves Class 10 10000 1000 Approximate Trip Time sec Cold 100 Hot 10 1 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 of Full Load Current Class 15 10000 1 G 3 FS E E a 2 Col G 100 Cold 2 Hot a gt x lt g a 2 lt 1 r t r t t r t O 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 of Full Load Current Class 20 10000 o 2 o E S E 2 2 Col G 1004 Cold 2 Hot T x lt 2 a 2 lt 1 T T T T t T 0 100 200 300 400 500 600
76. 3 Phase kW Rating 3 Phase Hp Rating Output Current A Input Current A Drive Ratings 0 4 2 3 3 65 200 50 0 75 45 6 40 15 7 6 10 65 2 3 3 10 4 5 5 70 7 6 9 45 1 4 2 15 2 3 3 80 4 0 6 40 6 0 9 00 3 12 40 0 5 1 85 1 3 45 2 5 57 3 8 20 5 12 5 1 2 78 2 4 73 3 6 64 C gt mz IP Dynamic Brake Resistor Ratings Table A 1 IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor Drive and Resistance Continuous Max Energy Max Braking A ae wae j Size Part Number Ohms 5 Power kW kJ D of Application Type 1 Application Type 2 Braking Braking Torque of p a Torque of p s Motor eee Motor mee 200 240 Volt AC Input Drives 0 37 0 5 284R 091P500 91 0 086 17 293 100 46 150 31 0 75 1 284R 091P500 91 0 086 17 218 100 23 150 15 1 5 2 284R 091P500 91 0 086 17 109 100 11 109 11 400 480 Volt AC Input Drives 0 37 0 5 284R 360P500 360 0 086 17 305 100 47 150 31 0 75 1 284R 360P500 360 0 086 17 220 100 23 150 15 1 5 2 284R 360P500 360 0 086 17 110 100 12 110 11 2 2 3 284R 120P1K2 120 0 26 52 197 100 24 150 16 4 5 284R 120P1K2 120 0 26 52 124 100 13 124 10 600 Volt AC Input Drives 0 37 0 5 284R 360P500 360 0 086 17 274 100 46 150 31 0 75 1 284R 360P500 360 0 086 17 251 100 23 150 15 1 5 2 284R 360P500 360 0 086 17 172 100 11 150 8 2 2 3 284R 120P1K2 120 0 26 52 193 100 24 150 16 4 5 284R 1
77. 3 established 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT O Explicit Message 0x83 Server 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT Transport Class 3 10xxxxxx011 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT XXXXXX node address 10xxxxxx100 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT XXXXXX node address 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x22 7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0x61 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0x61 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in ms S 01 auto delete 12 Get Watchdog Action USINT 03 defarrad dalete 13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 0 14 Get Produced Connection Path Empty 15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 0 16 Get Consumed Connection Path Empty C 12 Bulletin 283 CIP Information Instance 2 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Polled I O Message Connection The following instance 2 attributes are supported Table C 30 Connection Object Instance 2 Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Data Type Value O nonexistant 1 configuring Get SINT 3 established 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT 1 1 0 Connection 0x82 Server Transport Class 2 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT If alloc_choice polled and ack suppression is enabled then value 0x80 01111Xxxxxx 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT xxxxxx node address 10xxxxxx101 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT xxxxxx node address 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x21 T Get Produ
78. 3 pin cable for connection to the motor brake is provided as standard when the option is selected EMI Filter Bulletin 284 only The EMI Filter option is required if the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller must be CE compliant If the EMI Filter is selected a 3 meter shielded 4 conductor cordset is provided as standard This option is only available with sensorless vector control Dynamic Brake Bulletin 284 only A 3 meter 3 pin cable for connection to a dynamic brake module is provided as standard when this option is selected See Appendix G Accessories for available dynamic brake modules Product Overview 1 11 Dynamic Brake Resistor Bulletin 284 only The IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor plug and play design offers simplicity in writing and installation The factory installed option of DB1 must be selected in order to have the quick disconnect connectivity The cable length of the IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor is available in two lengths 0 5 meter and 1 meter See Appendix G Accessories for available IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistors Control Brake Contactor Bulletin 284 only An internal contactor is used to switch the electromechanical motor brake On Off The motor brake is powered from the control voltage circuit A customer accessible 3 0 A fuse is provided to protect the brake cable One 3 meter 3 pin cable for connection to the motor brake is provided as standard when this option is selected Output Contactor
79. 81 ie 0 150 12 09 0 476 7 62 2 54 732 l 1000 i 030 HA gao H 1288 Ae 0 288 39 37 6 35 0 25 15 95 5 Laa 1000 0628 T 39 37 51 61 2 032 280 M22M M1 ill G 280 M35M M1 H HE Hl i M 7 28 04 M 6 35 0 25 a 1 104 a 11 89 0 468 4 75 a 1000 1000 0 187 R 39 37 39 37 Pinout and Color Code Face View Pinout 4 pin Quick Change Connector Mini Connector Mini Connector Assembly Rating Color Code 4 a 1 4 1 32 QER Female Female Male 16 AWG 600V 10 A T Black 3 Red 14 AWG 600V 15A 2 White 4 Green Yellow Extended PIN T Black 2 Red 2 Green Yellow Extended PIN 4 White 10 AWG 600V 25 A A 20 Specifications ArmorConnect Control Power Trunk amp Drop Cables Media Specifications Mechanical Coupling Nut Black epoxy coated zinc or 316 Stainless Steel Overmold Red Riteflex TPE Insert Yellow Riteflex TPE Contacts Brass gold over palladium Nickel Cable Grey PVC 16 AWG dual rated UL TC Open Wiring and STOOW Cable Diameter 0 44 in 0 12 in 11 18 mm 0 5 mm Electrical UL Type TC 600V 90 C Dry 75 C Wet Open Wiring or Cable Rating MTW 600V 90 C or STOOW 105 C 600V CSA STOOW 600V FT2 Assembly Rating 600V 10A Environmental Enclosure Type Rating IP67 IP69K 1200 psi washdown Operating Temperature 20 90 C 4 194 F Dimensions Dimensions are approximate Illustrations
80. 90 M35 Motor Cordset Shielded NEMA Type 4X 6 m 19 6 284S MTRS22 M6 14 m 45 9 284S MTRS22 M14 90 Male Straight 1 m 3 3 280 MTR22 M1D Female M22 IP67 NEMA Type 4 Pathcords 3 0 m 9 8 280 MTR22 M3D 90 Male Straight 1 m 3 3 280S MTR22 M1D Female M22 NEMA Type 4X Patchcords 3 0 m 9 8 280S MTR22 M3D Table H 32 Dynamic Brake Cable Description Cable Rating Length m ft Cat No 90 M25 Source Brake Cable IP67 NEMA Type 4 3m 9 8 285 DBK22 M3 90 M25 Source Brake Cable NEMA Type 4X 3 m 9 8 285S DBK22 M3 Table H 33 Source Brake Cable Description Cable Rating Length m ft Cat No 3m 9 8 285 BRC25 M3 oo weg ls IP67 NEMA Type 4 6 m 19 6 285 BRC25 M6 14m 45 9 285 BRC25 M14 3 m 19 6 285S BRC25 M3 207 W Brake NEMA Type 4X 6 m 19 6 285S BRC25 M6 14m 45 9 285S BRC25 M14 H 16 Renewal Parts Notes PID Loop Appendix PID Setup The Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor with sensorless vector control has a built in PID proportional integral differential control loop The PID loop is used to maintain a process feedback such as pressure flow or tension at a desired set point The PID loop works by subtracting the PID feedback from a reference and generating an error value The PID loop reacts to the error based on the PID Gains and outputs a frequency to try to reduce the error value to 0 To enable the PID loop Parameter 232 PID Ref Sel must b
81. Amps Z Therm Utilized 0 Z FLA Setting 1 1 Amps Upload From Device Download To Device Start Monitor a Overload Class 10 Ol Reset Level 75 Starting Time 10 Sec Start Mode Soft Start Current Limit 350 FLA Initial Torque 60 LRT v U Corot s Help 8 10 DeviceNet Commissioning Setting the Motor FLA Bulletin 284 The product should now be configured and communicating on the network The last step is to program the proper motor OL current setting Parameter 133 This can be accomplished by using software such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet or a handheld DeviceNet tool Use the software to access the device parameters screen By default the motor OL current is set to the minimum motor OL current setting for the device Set this parameter to the desired value and download to the device Select Motor OL Current Parameter 133 and enter a value that corresponds to the FLA of the motor connected to the ArmorStart Make sure the Single radio button is selected and then select Download to Device The proper motor protection is now in place Figure 9 RSNetWorx Parameter Screen LX ArmorStart 284D PF4 240 0 5HP 2 xi General Device Parameters 10 Defaults EDS File DeviceLogix Groups On Line Upload From Device Jal parameters 7 Singe Wiest e Restore Default Values _Bestore Defaut Values C All Parameter Help Stat Monitor D Pa
82. Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Number of USINT 4 Instances 4 Get Binding Array of UINT STOD instances 6 Get Set Off 0n Delay UINT in usec 7 Get Set On_Off_Delay UINT In usec Note This object does not exist on the Bulletin 284A The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Group Object Table D 54 Discrete Input Group Object Common Services Implemented for Service Service Code Class Instance Name Ox0E Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Set_Attribute_Single Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 29 Discrete Output Group Object CLASS CODE 0x001E No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group Object Two instances of the Discrete Output Group Object are supported They contain the following attributes Table D 55 Discrete Output Group Instance 1Attributes Attribute Access Mame Data Value ID Rule Type 3 Get Number of USINT 10 Instances 4 Get Binding Array of List of DOP instances 1 2 3 4 5 UINT 6 7 8 9 10 6 Get Set Command BOOL 0 idle 1 run 104 Get Set Network Status BOOL 0 No Override go to safe state Override 1 Override run local logic 105 Get Set Comm Status BOOL 0 No override go to safe state Override 1 Override run local logic Table D 56 Discrete Output Group Instance 2 Attributes Attribute Access Data ID Rule Name Type Value 3 Get Number of usint 4 Instances
83. BOOL status for zone 2 Group ZIP Parameters 0 Healthy Units 1 Unhealthy MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 3 Health Parameter Number 76 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection Data Type BOOL status for zone 3 Group ZIP Parameters 0 Healthy Units 1 Unhealthy MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 4 Health Parameter Number 77 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection Data Type BOOL status for zone 4 Group ZIP Parameters 0 Healthy Units 1 Unhealthy MinimumValue Maximum Value Default Value 0 1 0 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 21 Zone 1 Mask Parameter Number 78 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data Data Type BYTE mask for zone 1 Each bit represents a byte in consumed Group ZIP Parameters data up to 8 bytes in length If a Units mask bit is set the MinimumValue 0 corresponding consumed data Maximum Value 255 byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table Default Value 0 Zone 2 Mask Parameter Number 79 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data Data Type BYTE mask for zone 2 Each bit represents a byte in consumed Group ZIP Parameters data up to 8 bytes in length If a Units mask bit is set the MinimumValue 0 corresponding consumed data l Maximum Valie 255 byte is placed i
84. Binding Array of 5 6 7 8 oet UINT 7 Get Set Fault Action BOOL 0 Fault Value Attribute 1 Hold Last State 8 Get Set Fault Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 ON 9 Get Set Idle Action BOOL 0 Idle Value Attribute 1 Hold Last State 10 Get Set Idle Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 ON 113 Get Set Pr Fault Action BOOL 0 Pr Fault Value Attribute 1 Ignore 114 Get Set Pr Fault Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 ON The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Group Object Table D 57 Discrete Output Group Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name OE o e a re Se oid No Yes Set true single D 30 Bulletin 284 CIP Information Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029 No class attributes will be supported A single instance instance 1 of the Control Supervisor Object will be supported Table D 58 Instance 1 Control Supervisor Object Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Set Run FWD BOOL These Run outputs also map to 4 Get Set Run REV BOOL DOP instances 1 and 2 7 Get Running FWD BOOL 8 Get Running REV BOOL 9 Get Ready BOOL 10 Get Tripped BOOL 12 Get Set Fault Reset BOOL 0 gt 1 Trip Reset 100 Get Set Keypad Mode BOOL 0 Maintained 1 Momentary 101 Get Set Keypad Disable BOOL 0 Not Disabled 1 Disabled Warning Status Bits 0 1 reserved Bit 2 reserved Bit 3 reserved Bit 4 reserved Bit 5 CP Warnin
85. Bit 0 and Bit 1 all other bits clear Data Type BYTE BitO Security Enable 1 Enable data security Bitl COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Group ZIP Parameters Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Units Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs MinimumValue 0 Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages Maximum Value 725 Default Value 3 Zone 4 Control Parameter Number 93 Access Rule GET SET Zone 3 Control Word Default Bit 0 and Bit 1 set all other bits clear Data Type BYTE Bit0 Security Enable 1 Enable data security Bitl COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Group ZIP Parameters Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Units Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs MinimumValue 0 Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages Maximum Value 3 Default Value 3 Zone 1 Key Parameter Number 94 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit Data Type UINT for zone 1 is enabled this value must match the value of the Group ZIP Parameters Device Value Key parameter in Units the device whose data is being MinimumValue 0 Consumed ror zoned Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Zone 2 Key Parameter Number 95 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit Data Type UINT for zone 2 is enabled this value must match the value of the Group ZIP Parameters Device Value Key parameter in Units the device
86. Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters StrtrDN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 27 defines how the starter will respond when a DeviceNet fault occurs When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to DnFit Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 27 StrtrDN FitValue This parameter determines how the starter will be commanded in the event of a Device Net fault 0 OFF 1 0N StrtrDN IdIState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 29 defines how the starter will respond when a DeviceNet network is idle When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to Dnidl Value on DN Idle as determined by Parameter 29 StrtrDN IdiValue This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 28 is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N Parameter Number 26 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 27 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 28 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 29 Access Rule GET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units
87. Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 5 Assembly Object CLASS CODE 0x0004 Table C 7 DeviceNet Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Set Node Address USINT 0 63 0 125K 1 250K 2 Get Set Baud Rate USINT 2 500K 3 1M0 Allocation Info Structure of gt x 5 Get Allocation Choice BYTE ae Master Node Addr USINT 255 unallocated 8 Get MAC ID Switch Value BOOL 0 63 1M baud is only available on the Bulletin 283A Allocation_byte Bit 0 Explicit messaging Bit 1 Polled 1 0 Bit 4 COS 1 0 Bit 5 Cyclic 1 0 Bit 6 Acknowledge Suppression The following services are implemented for the DeviceNet Object Table C 8 DeviceNet Object Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x4B No Yes Allocate_Master Slave _Connection_Set ox4c No Yes Release_Master Slave _Connection_Set The following class attributes are supported for the Assembly Object Table C 9 Assembly Object Class Attributes z Ga unt w All of the various instances of the assembly object will support attribute 3 The following table summarizes the various instances that are supported C 6 Bulletin 283 CIP Information Table C 10 DeviceNet Assembly Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Type Description 3 Consumed Required ODVA Consumed Instance 52 Produced Required O
88. Change of State data production 70 Zone 1 Macld The node address of the device whose data is to be consumed for zone 1 71 Zone 2 Macld The node address of the device whose data is to be consumed for zone 2 72 Zone 3 Macld The node address of the device whose data is to be consumed for zone 3 73 Zone 4 Macld The node address of the device whose data is to be consumed for zone 4 74 Zone 1 Health Read Only consumed connection status for zone 1 O Healthy 1 Not Healthy 75 Zone 2 Health Read Only consumed connection status for zone 2 O Healthy 1 Not Healthy 76 Zone 3 Health Read Only consumed connection status for zone 3 O Healthy 1 Not Healthy 77 Zone 4 Health Read Only consumed connection status for zone 4 O Healthy 1 Not Healthy 78 Zone 1 Mask Bit enumerated consumed data mask for zone 1 Each bit represents a byte in consumed data up to 8 bytes in length If a mask bit is set the corresponding consumed data byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table 79 Zone 2 Mask Bit enumerated consumed data mask for zone 2 Each bit represents a byte in consumed data up to 8 bytes in length If a mask bit is set the corresponding consumed data byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table 80 Zone 3 Mask Bit enumerated consumed data mask for zone 3 Each bit represents a byte in consumed data up to 8 bytes in length If a mask bit is set the corresponding consumed data byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table 81 Zone 4 Mask Bit enumerated
89. Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages 94 Zone 1 Key When the Security Enable bit for zone 1 is enabled this value must match the value of the Device Value Key parameter in the device whose data is being consumed for zone 1 95 Zone 2 Key When the Security Enable bit for zone 1 is enabled this value must match the value of the Device Value Key parameter in the device whose data is being consumed for zone 2 96 Zone 3 Key When the Security Enable bit for zone 1 is enabled this value must match the value of the Device Value Key parameter in the device whose data is being consumed for zone 3 97 Zone 4 Key When the Security Enable bit for zone 1 is enabled this value must match the value of the Device Value Key parameter in the device whose data is being consumed for zone 4 98 Device Value Key This value is produced in the last 2 bytes of data when one of the ZIP assemblies is chosen for data production 99 Zone Ctrl Enable Global enable for ZIP peer to peer messaging This parameter must be disabled before any changes to the ZIP configuration for the device can be made O Disable 1 Enable Data Production Data Consumption Mapping Consumed Data to the DeviceLogix Data Table ArmorStart ZIP Configuration 12 3 In a typical ZIP system each device on the network automaticall
90. Data SINT z Status Input Slot S E Status Dunu Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Logic Configuration Details Inside the Configurator file is a large User Defined structure called Armor_Start_System which contains all of the data for both the configuration of the routine and also storage space for all of the ArmorStart parameters With 20 devices the total memory needed to hold this structure in the Logix controller is 195K bytes The diagram below shows the upper part of the structure and 3 important elements Figure 11 5 Configurator File Armor_Start_System Scope Main_Brain controlle x Show Show All z Sot Aias For B Force l Style System_Array cH Armor_start_System Max_Devices 20 Decimal INT H Armor_start_S Sn Has Parameters 262 Decimal INT EH Armor_start_System Num_D evices 1 Decimal INT Armor_start_System Device L S H toads Device_dat Armor_Start_System Max_Devices defaults to 20 because the total number of devices that the structure is designed to hold initially is 20 This amount can be easily changed but doing so will also necessitate a change to the size of the System Array structure to match exactly Note The Logix memory that contains the structure will also change size proportionally 11 6 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity Shown below is the array size that will also need to be change
91. Device 0 a A tose Armor_start_System Device 0 Num_Parameters 108 Decimal HD Armor _start_ System Device 0 Logix Slot l Decimal Armor_start_System Device 0 ENET_IP_Addr 192 168 1 nn Armor_start_System Device 0 CNET_Address 0 EH Armor_start_System Device 0 PoinlO_Slot 2 Decimal Decimal Armor_start_System Device 0 Ammor_Descriptor First Arm Amor stant System Device 0 Device Msa path S H Armor_start_System Device 0 Data H IT Note To easily edit an ASCII string click on the string value field and a small icon with three dots appears Figure 11 9 String Browser Box EXrAmmor_Start_S ystem Device O ENET_IP_Addr el mzio J rm Moac a A gt MAIT att 11 8 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity Click on the three dots icon and a String Browser box appears Modify the text to what is desired and click on Apply then click on OK This works for ALL strings throughout the entire data array Figure 11 10String Browser Box fs String Browser Armor_Start_System Device O ENET IPs 192 168 1 10 zs Position 12 Count 12 of 82 lt lt Ernos gt gt Cancel Apply Help A Modifying Parameter Data for an ArmorStart The last configuration that will need to be done eventually is the writing of a parameter configuration change for an ArmorStart This is done by
92. Distributed Motor Controllers Table D 22 Instance 160 Default Consumed Standard Distributed Motor Controller Bit7 7 Bit 0 en e E Run Rev Run Fwd Reset Instance 162 is the standard output consumed assembly with Network Inputs for Bulletin 280 281 Distributed Motor Controllers Table D 23 Standard Consumed Starter with Network Inputs User Out User Out Fault Run Rev Run Fwd B A Reset NetIn8 NetIn7 NetIn6 NetIn5 NetIn4 NetIn3 Netin2 Netin 1 Net ln 16 Netin 15 Netin 14 Net ln 13 Netin 12 NetIn 11 Net ln 10 Netin 9 Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 9 Bulletin 284 Distributed Motor Controller 1 0 Assemblies Bulletin 284 Distributed Motor Controller IO Assemblies are available ONLY on the Bulletin 284 Distributed Motor Controller Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output Consumed Assemblies Instance 164 is the default output consumed assembly for Inverter Type Distributed Motor Controllers Table D 24 Instance 164 Default Consumed Inverter Type Distributed Motor Controller Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Jog Fault Run 0 User Out B User Out A Jog Rev Fwd Reset Run Rev Fwd l Decel 1 Driveln4 Driveln3 Drive In2 Drive In 1 2 Decel1 Accel2 Accel 1 2 Comm Frequency Command Low xxx x Hz 3 Comm Frequency Command High xxx x Hz Instance 166 is the standard output consumed assembly
93. Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 53 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 54 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value oOj o 5 24 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers ZIP Parameters AutoRun Zip Parameter Number 67 Access Rule GET SET Enables ZIP data production on power up Data Type BOOL Group ZIP Parameters 0 Disable Units T 1 Enable Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone Produced EPR Parameter Number 68 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in msec Defines the rate of at which ZIP data is Data Type UINT produced Defaults to 75 msec Group ZIP Parameters Units msec Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 Zone Produced PIT Parameter Number 69 Access Rule GET SET The Production Inhibit Time in msec Defines the minimum time between Change of Data Type UINT State data production Group ZIP Parameters Units msec Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 Zone 1 MAC ID Parameter Number 70 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device whose data is to be consumed for zone 1 When set
94. Expected Packet Rate for each of the 4 zone connections If no consumed data for a zone is received in 4 times the EPR then the zone connection times out and the value of the corresponding Zone Health parameter parameters 74 77 is set to the value 1 Not Healthy The Zone Health status of each zone is also available for use in DeviceLogix programs Consumed data for the 4 zones is placed in an 8 byte section of the DeviceLogix Data Table Individual bits in this section of the DeviceLogix Data Table can be used in DeviceLogix programs The table below shows the organization of the 8 bytes of the data table Byte Bit Number and Name 0 ZIP7 ZIP6 ZIP5 ZIP4 ZIP3 ZIP2 ZIP 1 ZIP 0 ZIP15 ZIP 14 ZIP 13 ZIP12 ZIP11 ZIP10 ZIP9 ZIP 8 ZIP 23 ZIP 22 ZIP21 ZIP20 ZIP19 ZIP 18 ZIP 17 ZIP 16 ZIP 31 ZIP30 ZIP29 ZIP 28 ZIP27 ZIP 26 ZIP25 ZIP 24 ZIP 39 ZIP 38 ZIP37 ZIP36 ZIP35 ZIP 34 ZIP 33 ZIP 32 ZIP 47 ZIP46 ZIP 45 ZIP 44 ZIP 43 ZIP 42 ZIP 41 ZIP 40 ZIP 55 ZIP 54 ZIP53 ZIP52 ZIP51 ZIP50 ZIP 49 ZIP 48 N o mn BY Go N ZIP 63 ZIP62 ZIP61 ZIP60 ZIP 59 ZIP 58 ZIP 57 ZIP 56 12 4 ArmorStart ZIP Configuration The Zone Mask parameters parameters 78 81 select individual bytes within a consumed message for placement in the DeviceLogix Data Table Each
95. FitState 27 StrtrDN FitValue 28 StrtrDN IdiState 29 StrtrDN IdlValue 61 Last Pr Fault 62 Warning Status Display Group 101 Output Freq 102 Commanded Freq 103 Output Current 104 Output Voltage 105 DC Bus Voltage 106 Drive Status 107 Fault 1 Code 108 Fault 2 Code 109 Fault 3 Code 110 Process Display 112 Control Source 113 Contrl In Status 114 Dig In Status 115 Comm Status 116 Control SW Ver 117 Drive Type 118 Elapsed Run Time 119 Testpoint Data 120 Analog In 0 10V 121 Analog In 4 20 mA 122 Reserved 123 Reserved 124 Drive Temp User 1 0 30 Off to On Delay 31 On to Off Delay 32 In Sink Source 33 OutA Pr FitState 34 OutA Pr FitValue 35 OutA DN FitState 36 OutA DN FitValue 37 OutA DN IdlState 38 OutA DN IdlValue 39 OutB Pr FitState 40 OutB Pr FitValue 41 OutB DN FitState 42 OutB DN FitValue 43 OutB DN IdlState 44 OutB DN IdiValue Basic Program 131 Motor NP Volts 132 Motor NP Hertz 133 Motor OL Current 134 Minimum Freq 135 Maximum Freq 136 Start Source 137 Stop Mode 138 Speed Reference 139 Accel Time 1 140 Decel Time 1 141 Reset To Defalts 142 Reserved 143 Motor OL Ret Miscellaneous 45 Keypad Mode 46 Keypad Disable 47 Set To Defaults 56 Base Enclosure 57 Base Option 58 Wiring Option 59 Starter Enclosure 60 Starter Option Drive DeviceNet 48 Drive Control 49 Drvin PrFitState 50 Drvin PrFitValue 51 Drvin DNFitState 52 Drvin DNFitValue 53 Drvin DNFitState 54 Drvi
96. Functions DeviceNet Interface Object CLASS CODE Ox00B4 D 32 Application of ArmorStart Controllers in Group Installation E 1 ArmorStart DC Control Voltage Application Information F 1 System Design Considerations When Using 16 AWG Control Wiring oo eee ceccesescecessesssessesecsecessesassesseseseesassesaesesaesesasanees F 4 Other System Design Considerations sese eee eee eee F 4 Bulletin 1738 ArmorPoint Distributed I O Products sss sss sss G 3 Renewal Parts c ccccccccscssssssssesssssssscssessesecsecsecseecseseeseeseeseesaesaess H 1 Exclusive ET eceiennnnnsnsnranss ninani naa aN S EE NEEN EEN NEA EREE l 1 TAA COTO leenen EE EEEE l 2 PID Reference and Feedback sese sese eee eee l 3 PID Deadband sse l 3 NIE lt T ocsam l 4 PID LIMIS ieiuna eae eaea ENE AEE EER l 4 PID GAINS a a E ON EA l 4 Guidelines For Adjusting PID Gang sss sese eee eee eee l 5 Step Logic Using Timed SIe0S vse ss esec sese ss seee sees ereer neee J 2 Step Logic Using Basic Logic FUNCTIONS c cseccesseeseeeeeeeees J 3 Timer FUNCTION sanansa iaa J 4 Counter svine aiT J 5 Introduction Description Chapter 1 Product Overview This chapter provides a brief overview of the features and functionality of the Bulletin 280 281 283 and 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers are integrated pre engineered starters with Bulletin 280 281 for full volta
97. GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1V AC Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 230 Default Value Based on Drive Rating Parameter Number 229 Related Parameter 227 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 01A Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value Motor NP Volts Default Value Based on Drive Rating Parameter Number 230 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value 60 0 Parameter Number 231 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value 0 1 Parameter Number 232 Related Parameters 138 222 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value 0 9 0 6 56 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers PID Feedback Sel Parameter Number 233 Valid PID Feedback Sel command for the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart is the following Access Rule GET SET 2 Comm Port Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 PID Prop Gain Parameter Number 234 Sets the value for the PID proportional component
98. Go on line using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet This can be accomplished by selecting the Network menu and then choosing Online y Choose the appropriate DeviceNet PC interface In this example a 1784 PCIDS module is chosen Other common DeviceNet interfaces are the 1770 KFD and 1784 PCD Note DeviceNet drivers must be configured using RSLinx prior to being available to RSNetWorx w Click OK A RSNetWorx will notify the user to upload or download devices before viewing configuration Click OK ba RSNetWorx will now browse the network and display all of the nodes it has detected on the network For some versions of RSNetWorx software the ArmorStart EDS files and icon may not be included and will show up as an Unregistered Device If the screen appears like the example below continue with Building and Registering an EDS file DeviceNet RSNetYYorx for DeviceNet Unrecognized Device 63 Barcode Scanner Communication Adag DPI to DeviceNet DeviceNet to SCANp Dodge EZLINK General Purpose Disq Generic Device Human Machine Inte N Inductive Proximity 2 N Limit Switch f HI Motor Overload af Motor Starter 6 If RSNetWorx recognizes the device as an ArmorStart skip ahead to the following section Changing the Node address MAC ID Building and Registering an EDS File DeviceNet Commissioning 8 3 The EDS file defines how RSNetWorx for DeviceNet will commu
99. Green The device is in a communication faulted state Power cycling the device may resolve the problem however if the problem continues it may be necessary to contact Technical Support Control Module Replacement Bulletin 280 281 Note DeviceNet base module is shown Troubleshooting 14 15 Removal of Starter Module aaa bate To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices 1 Disconnect from power source 2 Remove motor cable 3 Loosen the four mounting screws 4 Unplug the Control module from the base by pulling forward Installation of Control Module 5 Install control module 6 Tighten four mounting screws 7 Install motor cable Figure 14 1 Bulletin 280 281 Control Module Replacement 14 16 Troubleshooting Control Module Replacement Bulletin 283 Note DeviceNet base module is shown Removal of Starter Module Wada bate To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices 1 Disconnect from power source 2 Remove motor cable 3 Loosen the four mounting screws 4 Unplug the Control module from the base by pulling forward Installation of Control Module 5 Install control module 6 Tighten four mounting screws 7 Install motor cable Figure 14 2 Bulletin 283 Control Module Replacement lre A ZZ Go A A Control Module Replacement Bulletin 2
100. If na 3 Get USINT alloc_choice polled and ack suppression is enabled then value 0x80 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT 01111XXxXxxxx XXXXXX node address 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT 10xxxxxx101 XXXXXX node address 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x21 7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0 8 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0 8 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in milliseconds Watchdog Action 0 transition to timed out 12 Get Set USINT i auto delete 2 auto reset 13 Get Produced Connection Path UINT 8 Length Produced Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 14 Get Set 00 30 03 15 Get Consumed Connection Path UINT 8 Length Consumed Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 16 Get Set 00 30 03 Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 15 Instance 4 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Change of State Cyclic I O Message Connection The following Instance 4 attributes are supported Table D 36 Connection Object Instance 4 Attributes Attribute Access Name Data Value ID Rule Type State 0 non existent 1 configuring ou pene 3 established 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT 1 1 0 Connection Transport Class Trigger 0x00 Cyclic unacknowledged 0x03 Cyclic acknowledged 3 Get USINT 0x10 COS unacknowledged 0x13 COS acknowledged 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT 01101Xxxxxx XXXXXX node address 5 Get Consume
101. In4 20MA LO This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Anlg In4 20 mA HI This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Slip Hertz FLA Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor This frequency is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current Process Time Lo Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 134 Minimum Freq When set to a value other than zero Parameter 110 Process Display indicates the duration of the process Parameter Number 206 Related Parameters 115 205 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 1 sec Maximum Value 60 0 sec Default Value 15 0 sec Parameter Number 207 Parameter Number 210 Parameter Number 211 Parameter Number 212 Parameter Number 213 Parameter Number 214 Related Parameter 133 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 10 0 Hz Default Value 2 0 Hz Parameter Number 215 Related Parameters 110 134 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UNIT Group Advanced Setup Units Hz Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value 99 99 Default Value 0 00 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Process Time Hi Scales the time value when the drive is
102. Input Group Object Class CODE 0x001D Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 23 The following common services are implemented for the Parameter Group Object Table B 45 Parameter Group Object Service Common Services Dz ipat re et CLASS COE OTD Implemented for Service Code Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Get_Attribute_Single No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input Group Object A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported It contains the following attributes Table B 46 Discrete Input Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Number of Instances USINT 4 4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DIP instances 6 Get Set Off_On_Delay UINT in psec 7 Get Set On_Off_Delay UINT in psec The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Group Object Table B 47 Discrete Input Group Object Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance oo Woes BOSE This assembly does not exist on the Bulletin 280A 281A B 24 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information Discrete Output Group Object No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group CLASS CODE 0x001E Object A single instance of the Discrete Output Group Object is supported It contains the following attributes Table B 48 Discrete Output Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 G
103. Instance 184 Trip Status Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Control Phase SCR Phase S Short O OverTemp 1O Fault Power Rotation Short Loss OL Trip Circuit DNet Mi Heatsink Internal Koer Ph 1 Sc Reserved Hw Fault EEPROM oS ternal Loss ase Fault Temp Comm Imbalance Reserved 6 If Bulletin 283A is selected Table C 16 Instance 185 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Instance 185 Starter Status At Ref Net Ref Net Ctl Ready Status Status Contact HOA 20 140M 0n Status Refers to source brake contactor status C 8 Bulletin 283 CIP Information Table C 17 Instance 186 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Instance 186 DeviceNet Status 1 0 Idle ZIP3 CNXN Table C 18 Instance 187 This is a Read Write Assembly Instance 187 Starter Control Bits 1 Reserved Table C 19 Instance 189 This is a Read Only assembly Instance 189 Warning Status Bits Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Control 0 10 Warning Power PR Warning PL Warning Warning 1 a HW Warn DN Warn PI Warn Reserved for Bulletin 283 Table C 20 Instance 190 is the 1999 ZCIO Native Format Produced Assembly Instance 190 1799 ZCIO Native Format Produced Assembly Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 B
104. KV LN Earth Overload Characteristics 0 5 2 5 A Overload Current Range 1 1 5 5A 3 2 16A Trip Classes 10 15 20 Trip Rating 120 of FLC setting 3 Number of poles DeviceNet Specifications DeviceNet Supply Voltage Rating Range 11 25V DC 24V DC Nominal DeviceNet Input Current 167 mA 24V DC 4 0 W 364 mA 11V DC 4 0 W External Devices powered by DeviceNet Sensors Inputs 4 50 mA total 200 mA Total w max Sensor Inputs 4 367 mA 24V DC 8 8 W DeviceNet Input Current Surge 15 A for 250 US DeviceNet Communications Baud Rates 125 250 500 kbps Distance Maximum 500 m 1630 ft 125 kbps 200 m 656 ft 250 kbps 100 m 328 ft 500 kbps Certifications cULus File No E3125 UL 508 EN IEC 60947 4 1 CE Marked per Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Specifications A 3 Bulletin 280 281 Continued Figure A 1 External Connections for Input Connector Coe Pin 1 V Out Pin 2 Input Pin 3 Comm Pin 4 Input Pin 5 NC No Connection Figure A 2 External Connections for Output Connector Q Pin 1 PE Pin 2 Return Pin 3 Relay Out Figure A 3 External Connections for DeviceNet Connector Pin 1 Drain Not Connected Pin 2 VDNET Pin 3 VDNET Pin 4 CAN_H Pin 5 CAN_L Figure A 4 External Connections for Motor Connector lt
105. Maximum Freq when the process error is changing at 1 second A larger value for PID Diff Rate makes the differential term have more of an effect and a small value makes it have less of an effect In many applications the D gain is not needed Setting PID Diff Rate to 0 00 factory default disables the differential component of the PID loop Guidelines for Adjusting the PID Gains 1 Adjust the proportional gain During this step it may be desirable to disable the integral gain and differential gain by setting them to 0 After a step change in the PID Feedback e lT the response is too slow increase Parameter 234 PID Prop Gain e Ifthe response is too quick and or unstable see Figure I 1 decrease Parameter 234 PID Prop Gain e Typically Parameter 234 PID Prop Gain is set to some value below the point where the PID begins to go unstable Adjust the integral gain leave the proportional gain set as in Step 1 After a step change in the PID Feedback e Ifthe response is too slow see Figure I 2 or the PID Feedback does not become equal to the PID Reference decrease Parameter 235 PID Integ Time e If there is a lot of oscillation in the PID Feedback before settling out see Figure I 3 increase Parameter 235 PID Integ Time l 6 PID Setup 3 At this point the differential gain may not be needed However if after determining the values for Parameter 234 PID Prop Gain and Parameter 235 PID Integ Ti
106. Mode BOOL 0 Maintained 1 Momentary 101 Get Set Keypad Disable BOOL 0 Not Disabled 1 Disabled Bits 0 1 reserved Bit 2 PL Warning 283 Only Bit 3 reserved Bit 4 PR Warning 283 only Bit 5 CP Warning y Bit 6 10 Warning 115 Get Warning Status WORD Bit 7 reserved Bit 8 PI Warning 283 only Bit 9 DN Warning Bits 10 12 reserved Bit 13 HW Warning Bits 14 15 reserved 124 Get Set Trip Enable WORD Bit enumerated trip enable word 130 Get Set Trip Reset Mode BOOL Wata 1 auto 131 Get Set Trip Reset Level USINT 0 100 default 75 Bit 0 IP67 151 Get Base Enclosure WORD Bit 1 NEMA 4x Bits 2 15 reserved Bit 0 Output Fuse Bit 1 Safety Monitor Bit 2 CP Fuse Detect 152 Get Base Options WORD Bits 3 7 Reserved Bit 8 10A Base Bit 9 25A Base Bit 10 15 Reserved Bit 0 Conduit 153 Get Wiring Options WORD Bit 1 Round Media Bits 2 15 Reserved Bit 0 IP67 154 Get Starter Enclosure WORD Bit 1 NEMA 4x Bits 2 15 reserved Bit 0 Full Keypad Bit 1 Safety Monitor 155 Get Starter Options WORD Bit 2 Source Brake Bit 3 15 Reserved 156 Get Last PR Trip UINT See Parameter 61 for definitions C 26 Bulletin 283 CIP Information Acknowledge Handler Object CLASS CODE 0x002b The following common services are implemented for the Control Supervisor Object Table C 51 Control Supervisor Object Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance 0x0E
107. OFF Data Type UINT Group User 1 0 Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 000 Default Value 0 In Sink Source Parameter Number 32 This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to be sink or source Access Rule GET SET 0 Sink Data Type BOOL 1 Source Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Not available with the Bulletin 284A OutA Pr FitState Parameter Number 33 This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 34 defines how Output A will respond Access Rule GET SET when a trip When set to 1 Output A continue to operate as command via the Data Type BOOL network When set to 0 Output A will open or close as determined by setting in Group User I 0 Parameter 34 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutA Pr FitValue Parameter Number 34 This parameter determines the state the Out A assumes when a trip occurs and Access Rule GET SET Parameter 33 is set to 0 Data Type BOOL 0 Open Group User 1 0 1 Close Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 6 16 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers OutA DN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 36 defines how Output A will respond when a DeviceNet network fault occurs When set to 1 Output A will hold state prior to trip occurrence When set to 0 Output A will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 36 OutA DN FitValue This paramet
108. Off to On Delay This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before an input is reported ON On to Off Delay This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before an input is reported OFF In Sink Source This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to be sink or source 0 Sink 1 Source 1 Not available on the Bulleti OutA Pr FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 34 defines how Output A will respond when a protection trip occurs When set to 1 Output A continues to operate as command via the network When set to 0 Output A will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 34 Parameter Number 300 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group User 1 0 Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 000 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 310 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group User 1 0 Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 000 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 320 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 n 280A 281A Parameter Number 33 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutA Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state the Out A assumes when a trip occurs an
109. Overload 4 Drive Overload 5 Phase U to Gnd 6 Phase V to Gnd 7 Phase W to Gnd 8 Phase UV Short 9 Phase UW Short Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 15 PF Fault Code 7 PF Fault Code 64 PF Fault Code 38 PF Fault Code 39 PF Fault Code 40 PF4 Fault Code 41 PF Fault Code 42 10 Phase VW Short PF Fault Code 43 11 Ground Fault 12 Stall PF Fault Code 13 PF Fault Code 6 13 Control Pwr Loss 14 Control Pwr Fuse 15 Input Short 16 Output Fuse 17 Over Temp 18 Heatsink OvrTmp PF Fault Code 8 19 HW OverCurrent 20 SW OverCurrent 21 DNet Power Loss 22 Internal Comm PF Fault Code 12 PF Fault Code 63 23 Drive Comm Loss PF Fault Code 81 24 Power Loss PF Fault Code 3 25 Under Voltage PF Fault Code 4 26 Over Voltage PF Fault Code 5 27 MCB EEPROM 28 Base EEPROM 29 Drive EEPROM PF Fault Code 100 30 Wrong Base 31 Fan RPM 32 Power Unit PF Fault Code 70 33 Drive 10 Brd PF Fault Code122 34 Restart Retries PF Fault Code 33 35 Drive Aux In Fit PF Fault Code 2 36 Analog Input PF Fault Code 29 37 Drv Param Reset PF Fault Code 48 38 SCV Autotune PF Fault Code 80 39 Source Brake 40 Reserved 41 DB1 Comm 42 DB1 Fault Parameter Number 61 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 45 D
110. P M5 Z5 Mini Right Angle Female Mini Straight Male 1485C P W5 Z5 Length m ft Cat No 1m 3 3 193 DNCT 1m 3 3 193 CB1 1m 3 3 193 CM1 193 DNCT BZ1 Replace symbol with desired length in meters Example 1485G P1N5 M5 for a 1 m cable Standard cable lengths 1 m 2 m 3 m 4 m 5 m and 6 m Replace symbol with desired length in meters Example 1485C P1N5 M5 for a 1 m cable Standard cable lengths 1 m 2m 3 m 4 m 5 m 6 m 8m 10 m 12 m 18 m 24 m and 30 m NOTE Stainless steel versions may be ordered by adding an S to the cat no Example 1485CS P1N5 M5 G 2 Accessories Table G 2 Sensor Media ee igi oa Pin Count Connector Cat No Straight Female A l Straight Male 889D F4ACDM BC Input 5 Pin e Ny Straight Female bek Right Angle Male 889D F4AACDE DC Micro Patchcord No e Straight Female 879D F4ACDM 2 ins Se N e Le Input 5 pin R lt Right Angle Male 879D R4ACM 2 DC Micro V Cable Straight Female E Straight Male 889R F3AERM r Output 3 pin k Straight Female 4 Right Angle Male 899R F3AERE AC Micro Patchcord See Publication M116 CA001A EN P for complete cable selection information Replace symbol with desired length in meters Example 889D F4ACDM 1 for a 1 m cable Standard cable lengths 1 m 2 m 5 m and 10 m Table G 3 Sealing Caps Description For Use With Cat No Plastic Sealing C
111. Parameters 138 155 158 161 171 177 240 247 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 sec Maximum Value 999 9 sec Default Value 30 0 sec Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 61 EM Brk Off Delay Sets the time the drive will remain at minimum frequency before ramping to the commanded frequency and energizing the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set to option 8 or 9 Frequency 260 EM Brk Off Delay 5 1 1 amp ee Minimum Freq K Parameter Number 260 Related Parameters 137 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UNIT Group Advanced Setup Units 0 01 sec Minimum Value 0 01 sec Maximum Value 10 sec Default Value 0 0 sec G 261 EM Brk On Delay Dp i i A A Time a a Start EM Brk Stop EM Brk Drive Stops Commanded Energized Off Commanded De Energized On EM Brk On Delay Parameter Number 261 Sets the time the drive will remain at minimum frequency before stopping and de Related Parameters 137 eo the brake coil relay when Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set to option 8 or Access Rule GET SET Data Type UNIT Group Advanced Setup Units 0 01 sec Minimum Value 0 01 sec Maximum Value 10 00 sec Default Value 0 0 sec MOP Reset Sel Parameter Number 262 Sets the drive to save the current MOP Reference
112. Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 7 Default Value 0 Zone 3 Offset Parameter Number 84 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the Data Type UNIT chosen consumed data bytes for zone 3 Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 4 Offset Parameter Number 85 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the Data Type UNIT chosen consumed data bytes for zone 4 Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 1 EPR Parameter Number 86 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in msec for the zone 1 consuming connection T l Data Type UINT consumed data is not received in 4 times this value the zone connection will time Group ZIP Parameters out and Zone 1 Health will report 1 Not Healthy Units msec Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 5 28 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Zone 2 EPR Parameter Number 87 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in msec for the zone 1 consuming connection If l Data Type UNIT consumed data is not received in 4 times this value the zone connection will time Group ZIP Parameters out and Zone 2 Health will
113. Parameters data up to 8 bytes in length If a Units mask bit is set the MinimumValue 0 corresponding consumed data Maximum Value 255 byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table Default Value Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 25 Zone 1 Offset Parameter Number 82 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data Data Type UINT portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen Group ZIP Parameters consumed data bytes for zone 1 Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 7 Default Value 0 Zone 2 Offset Parameter Number 83 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data Data Type UNIT portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen Group ZIP Parameters consumed data bytes for zone 2 Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 7 Default Value 0 Zone 3 Offset Parameter Number 84 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data Data Type UNIT portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen Group ZIP Parameters consumed data bytes for zone 3 Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 4 Offset Parameter Number 85 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data Data Type UNIT portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen Group ZIP Parameters consumed data bytes for zone 4 Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Def
114. Programs 2 79 Motion Groups 2 Ungrouped Axes Trends 2 59 Data Types a Bl User Defined W Device_data toh 6 Members Data Type es ee de ow Error_Structure Num_Parameters INT ae Wi Paramter_Data Logix_Slot SINT Decimal En System_Array ENET_IP_Addr STRING oa Strings CNET Address SINT Decimal Ca Predefined PoinlO_Slot SINT Decimal N 0 Module Defined E Amo Descriptor STRING Configuration H Device gt _Msg_pat STRING Armor_Start_System Num_Devices defaults to zero and is defined as the total number of ArmorStart products connected to the control system that need to be configured It is important that this value be set before the configuration routine is executed 1 gt 9 1 1756 ENBT A ENet_Connection Data Paramter_ 7 29 1011738 AFNTIA ArmorPnint Fiet Z It is to the users best advantage to trim the structures down to the minimum values that match their system because this will save a considerable amount of Logix processor memory However some room should be left in the structures to handle any future additions of ArmorStart devices to the system ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity 11 7 Scope Main_Brain controle lt Show Show All Adding Devices to the Configuration Structure Once the three major System level parameters are entered it is up to the user to enter in each of the ArmorStart devices config
115. R 283A FB16Z N R 283A FB16D N R 283A FB16B N R 283A FB19Z N R 283A FB19D N R 283A FB19B N R H 6 Renewal Parts Bulletin 283 Continued Table H 13 Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controller NEMA Type 4X Up to 480V AC kW Hp Control Voltage Cat No Current A 230V AC 415 VAC 200V AC 230V AC 460 V AC 24V DC 120 V AC 240 V AC 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 1 1 3 0 0 55 0 75 283D SB3Z N R 283D SB3D N R 283D SB3B N R 283D SB9Z N R 283D SB9D N R 283D SB9B N R 5 3 7 6 283D SB16Z N R 283D SB16D N R 283D SB16B N R 283D SB19Z N R 283D SB19D N R 283D SB19B N R Table H 14 Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controller 1P67 NEMA Type 4 Up to 575V AC kW Hp Control Voltage Cat No Current Rating 230v ac 380 400 200v ac 230v ac 460v ac 575v AC A 50 Hz 415V AC 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 24V DC 120 V AC 240 V AC 50 Hz 1 1 3 0 0 55 0 75 15 2 283D FC3Z N R 283D FC3D N R 283D FC3B N R 3 0 5 5 1 1 2 2 3 3 283D FC9Z N R 283D FC9D N R 283D FC9B N R 5 37 06 15 3 5 5 283D FC16Z N R 283D FC16D N R 283D FC16B N R 6 3 16 4 55 10 283D FC19Z N R 283D FC19D N R 283D FC19B N R kW Hp Control Voltage Cat No Current Rating 230v ac 389 400 200v ac 230v ac 460v ac 575V AC A 50 Hz 415V
116. Revision USINT Bit 0 O not owned 1 owned by master Bit 2 0 Factory Defaulted 1 Configured Bit 8 Minor Recoverable fault 3 cal WORD Bit 9 Minor Unrecoverable fault Bit 10 Major Recoverable fault Bit 11 Major Unrecoverable fault 6 Get Serial Number UDINT Unique Number for Each Device Product Name Structure of T Get String Length USINT Product code specific ASCII String STRING See Table C 1 and Table C 2 8 Get USINT Returns the value 3 Operational 9 Get Configuration Consistency Value UINT Unique value depending on output of the parameter checksum algorithm 10 Get Set Heartbeat Interval USINT In seconds Default 0 Message Router CLASS CODE 0x0002 DeviceNet Object CLASS CODE 0x0003 The following common services are implemented for the Identity Object Table C 5 Identity Object Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x05 No Yes Reset 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single No class or instance attributes are supported The message router object exists only to rout explicit messages to other objects The following class attributes are supported for the DeviceNet Object Table C 6 DeviceNet Object Class Attributes Attribute ID AccessRule Name Data Type Value 1 Get UINT 2 A single instance instance 1 of the DeviceNet Object is supported The following instance attributes are supported
117. Rule Type 1 Get Set Acknowledge Timer UINT milliseconds 2 Get Retry Limit USINT 3 COS Producing Connection Instance UINT The following common services are implemented for the Acknowledge Handler Object Table D 61 Acknowledge Handler Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name 0x0E No Yes Get Attribute_Single 0x10 E Set_Attribute_Single D 32 Bulletin 284 CIP Information DeviceNet Interface Object CLASS CODE 0x00B4 This vendor specific object has no class attributes A single instance Instance 1 of the DeviceNet Interface Object is supported Table D 62 DeviceNet Interface Object Instance Attribute Attribute ID Fea Name Data Type Min Max Default Description 7 Get Set Prod Assy Word 0 USINT 1 Defines Word 0 of Assy 120 8 Get Set Prod Assy Word 1 USINT 5 Defines Word 1 of Assy 120 9 Get Set Prod Assy Word 2 USINT 6 Defines Word 2 of Assy 120 10 Get Set Prod Assy Word 3 USINT 7 Defines Word 3 of Assy 120 13 Get Set Starter COS Mask WORD 0 OxFFFF OXxFFFF Change of state mask for starter bits 15 Get Set Autobaud Enable BOOL 0 1 1 1 enabled 0 disabled 16 Get Set Consumed Assy USINT 0 185 a 3 160 162 164 166 170 182 187 188 17 Get Set Produced Assy USINT 100 187 H 5 n Pa 163 165 167 171 19 Get Set Set To Defaults BOOL 0 1 0 0 No action 1 Reset 23 Get 1 0 Produced Size 0 8 24 Get 1 0
118. SMC Dialog Plus Native Assembies eee ee eee ee C 10 Connection Object CLASS CODE Ox0005 sss C 11 Discrete Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0008 sss C 16 Discrete Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0009 C 16 Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements 00 C 18 DOP Instances 3 and 4 Special Behavior sees eee C 18 DOP Instances 1 and 2 Special Behavior sese C 19 Parameter Object CLASS CODE OxOO0F e C 21 Parameter Group Object CLASS CODE 0x0010 sese ee C 22 Discrete Input Group Object CLASS CODE Ox001D C 23 Discrete Output Group Object CLASS CODE 0X001E C 24 Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029 see C 25 Acknowledge Handler Object CLASS CODE 0x002b C 26 Overload Object CLASS CODE Ox0026 sese eee C 27 DeviceNet Interface Object CLASS CODE Ox00B4 C 28 Electronic Data Sheets sse sese seene D 1 Soft Starter Type Product Codes and Name Strings sss D 1 DeviceNet Objects sese s ses vesse sese e eers D 2 Identity Object CLASS CODE OxX0001 ou esse eee D 2 Identity Objects scceccccsscessssssesessseesesssssesessnseestsecseseeseesesssees D 3 Message Router CLASS CODE Ox0002 sese D 3 DeviceNet Object CLASS CODE 0Xx0003 sese D 4 Assembly Object CLASS CODE Ox0004 sss D 5 Custom Parameter Based Word wise I O Assemblies see eee eee D 6 Word wise Bit Packed Assembies ses
119. Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Setup Units Minimum Value Maximum Value 0 16383 Default Value 13 11 10 Function Short Circuit Overload Phase Loss Reserved Reserved Control Power 1 0 Fault Over Temperature Phase Imbalance Dnet Power Loss Reserved Reserved EEprom Not available on the Bulletin 280A 281A HW Fault Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 5 Starter Status Parameter Number 5 Access Rule GET This parameter provides the Data Type WORD status of the starter Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 16383 Default Value 0 Bit Function 1311211110191817 5 4 3 2 te T S P T Tripped lle ee Warning eX Running Fwd v l l s lL llls SSE a Running Rev ee a ta Sa Pea a Ready zls pe I NA ee ls Net Ctl Status S pa Reserved e llie les les lea ee ee le ee At Reference SSC la laal lis l Reserved leg ee YR a ee Reserved a E oe es Reserved x f _ lll Keypad Hand x j J I J J HOA Status X ls les les lr ee le 140M On DNet Status Parameter Number 6 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD This parameter
120. Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 240 Default Value 60 0 Parameter Number 136 Related Parameters 112 and 137 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 5 Parameter Number 137 Related Parameters 136 180 182 205 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 7 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 138 Related Parameters 101 102 112 139 140 151 152 169 170 173 210 211 213 232 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 5 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 37 Accel Time 1 Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases Maximum Freq Accel Rate Accel Time Decel Time 1 Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases Maximum Freq pecel Rate Decel Time Reset To Defaults Stop drive before changing this parameter Resets all parameter values to factory defaults 0 Ready Idle Default 1 Factory Rset Motor OL Ret Enables disables the Motor overload Retention function When Enabled the value held in the motor overload counter is saved at power down and restored at power up A change to this parameter setting resets the counter 0 Disabled Default 1 Enabled
121. User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 37 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 38 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 3 16 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters OutB Pr FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 40 defines how Output B will respond when a protection trip occurs When set to 1 Output B continue to operate as command via the network When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 40 OutB Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state the Out B assumes when a protection trip occurs and Parameter 39 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutB DN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 42 defines how Output B will respond when a DeviceNet network fault occurs When set to 1 Output B will hold state prior to trip occurrence When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 42 OutB DN FitValue This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when a DeviceNet network fault occurs and Parameter 41 is set to g 0 Open 1 Close OutB DN IdIState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 44 defines how Output B will respond when the Device
122. Volts Set to the motor nameplate rated volts Stop drive before changing this parameter Motor NP Hertz Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency Stop drive before changing this parameter Motor OL Current Set to the maximum allowable current The drive will fault on an F7 Motor Over load if the value of this parameter is exceeded by 150 for 60 seconds Minimum Freq Sets the lowest frequency the drive will output continuously Parameter Number 131 Related Parameters 104 184 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Setup Units 1V AC Minimum Value 20 Maximum Value 240V 460V or 600V AC Default Value Based on Drive Rating Parameter Number 132 Related Parameters 184 190 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Setup Units 1 Hz Minimum Value 10 Maximum Value 240 Default Value 60 Hz Parameter Number 133 Related Parameters 155 189 190 198 214 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Setup Units 0 1 A Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2 Default Value Based on Drive Rating Parameter Number 134 Related Parameters 101 102 k i 210 212 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Setup Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 240 Default Value 0 0 5 36 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Maximum Freq
123. ZIP Configuration We will configure node 10 to consume data as follows Zone data will come from node 11 Zone 2 data will come from node 12 Zone 3 data will come from node 13 Zone 4 data will come from node 14 First we must set up nodes 11 14 to Auto Produce data when ZIP is enabled ArmorStart 2810 1 1 5 54 120VAC 4 Generel Device Parameters VO Deteults EDS File DeviceLoge On Line err lt Sing Upload From Device Restore Dota Values Zone 2 Maid Zoe 3 Macid Zore 4 Mold eee aiH Zone 2 Heath Zone 3hHeath For the ArmorStarts at node 11 13 shown above this 1s done by setting parameter 67 AutoRun Zip to Enabled Note that we will leave parameters 68 and 69 at their default values so that data will be produced every 75 msec ArmorStart ZIP Configuration 12 7 1799 ICIOV Zone C 10in 100ut sinking Generel Device Parametars yO Deteults EOS File DevicoLog On Line AS Ca arle x bad Next we must configure data consumption for the 4 zones in the ArmorStart at node 10 First set the Zone MaclId parameters as shown below ArmorStart 281D 1 1 5 5A 120VAC 12 8 ArmorStart ZIP Configuration We will leave the Zone EPR parameters at their default value of 75 msec This tells our ArmorStart that if no data for a zone is consumed for a period of 300 msec 4 times the EPR the zone connection should time out and the health
124. ZIP Parameters not received in 4 times this value Units msec the zone connection will time out MinimumValue 0 and Zone 4 Health will report S 1 Not Healthy Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 Zone 1 Control Parameter Number 90 Access Rule GET SET Zone 1 Control Word Default Bit 0 and Bit 1 set all other bits clear Data Type BYTE Bit0 Security Enable 1 Enable data security Bitl COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Group ZIP Parameters Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Units Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs MinimumValue 0 Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages Maximum Value 255 Default Value 3 Zone 2 Control Parameter Number 91 Access Rule GET SET Zone 2 Control Word Default Bit 0 and Bit 1 set all other bits clear Data Type BYTE Bit0 Security Enable 1 Enable data security Bit COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Group ZIP Parameters Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Units Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs MinimumValue 0 Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages Maximum Value 225 Default Value 3 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 27 Zone 3 Control Parameter Number 92 Access Rule GET SET Zone 3 Control Word Default
125. Zone 3 Macld 107 Overload Class 112 Initial Torque ia d 16 Prod Assy Word 3 28 StrtrDN IdiState 36 OutA DN FitValue 59 Starter Enclosure 73 Zone 4 Macld 113 Soft Stop Time 8 Network Override 17 Consumed IO Size 29 StrtrDN IdiValue 37 OutA DN IdiState 60 Starter Options 74 Zone 1 Health 114 Kick Start 9 Comm Override 18 Produced 10 Size 19 Starter COS Mask 20 Net Out COS Mask 21 DNet Voltage 61 Last Pr Fault 62 Warning Status 38 OutA DN IdiValue 39 OutB Pr FitState 40 OutB Pr FitValue 41 OutB DN FitState 42 OutB DN FitValue 43 OutB DN IdiState 44 OutB DN IdiValue 75 Zone 2 Health 76 Zone 3 Health 77 Zone 4 Health 78 Zone 1 Mask 79 Zone 2 Mask 80 Zone 3 Mask 81 Zone 4 Mask 82 Zone 1 Offset 83 Zone 2 Offset 84 Zone 3 Offset 85 Zone 4 Offset 86 Zone 1 EPR 87 Zone 2 EPR 88 Zone 3 EPR 89 Zone 4 EPR 90 Zone 1 Control 91 Zone 2 Control 92 Zone 3 Control 93 Zone 4 Control 94 Zone 1 Key 95 Zone 2 Key 96 Zone 3 Key 97 Zone 4 Key 98 Device Value Key 99 Zone Ctrl Enable 115 SCR Temp Rest Mode 116 Phase Rotation Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 3 DeviceLogix Group Hdw Inputs Parameter Number 10 Access Rule GET This parameter provides status of Data Type WORD hardware inputs Group DeviceLogix Setup Units Mi
126. a k a Network Inputs 183 Produced Produced Network Bits a k a Network Outputs 184 Produced Trip Status Bits 185 Produced Starter Status Bits 186 Produced DeviceNet Status Bits 187 Consumed Starter Control Bits 189 Produced Warning Status Bits 190 Produced 1779 ZCI0 Bits BIT Not available on the Bulletin 280A 281A Table B 12 Custom Parameter Based Word Wise Produced Assembly Instance 120 Instance 120 Word Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Biti Bt 0 0 0 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 0 Param low byte 1 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 0 Param high byte 1 2 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 1 Param low byte 3 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 1 Param high byte 2 4 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 2 Param low byte 5 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 2 Param high byte 6 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 3 Param low byte i 7 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 3 Param high byte B 6 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information Word wise Bit Packed Assemblies whose instance numbers are 180 189 are all one word Assemblies 16 bits long They can be used stand alone but their main use is to assemble information for EDS file parameters These word wise as
127. before changing this parameter Enables disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to automatically cause the drive to resume running at command speed after the drive input is restored Requires a digital input configured Run or Start and a valid start contact This parameter will not function if Parameter 136 Start Source is set to 4 2 W High Speed 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this ATTENTION parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines Parameter Number 193 Related Parameters 192 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 300 0 sec Default Value 1 0 sec Parameter Number 194 Related Parameters 192 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 5 48 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Reverse Disable Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables the function that allows the direction of the motor rotation to be changed The reverse command may come from a digital command or serial command All reverse inputs including two wire Run Reverse will be ignored with r
128. company Check the item s received against the purchase order If any items are damaged it is the responsibility of the user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill Should any concealed damage be found during unpacking it is again the responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent The shipping container must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment Remove all packing material wedges or braces from within and around the starter Remove all packing material from device s After unpacking check the nameplate catalog number s against the purchase order The controller should remain in its shipping container prior to installation If the equipment is not to be used for a period of time it must be stored according to the following instructions in order to maintain warranty coverage e Store in a clean dry location e Store within an ambient temperature range of 25 C 85 C 13 F 185 F e Store within a relative humidity range of 0 95 noncondensing e Do not store equipment where it could be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere e Do not store equipment in a construction area 2 2 Installation and Wiring General Precautions In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual the following statements which are general to the system must be read and understood Wars tE The controll
129. consumed data mask for zone 4 Each bit represents a byte in consumed data up to 8 bytes in length If a mask bit is set the corresponding consumed data byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table 82 Zone 1 Offset The byte offset into the ZIP data portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen consumed data bytes for zone 1 83 Zone 2 Offset The byte offset into the ZIP data portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen consumed data bytes for zone 2 84 Zone 3 Offset The byte offset into the ZIP data portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen consumed data bytes for zone 3 85 Zone 4 Offset The byte offset into the ZIP data portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen consumed data bytes for zone 4 86 Zone 1 EPR The Expected Packet Rate in msec for the zone 1 consuming connection If consumed data is not received in 4 times this value the zone connection will time out and Zone 1 Health will report 1 Not Healthy 87 Zone 2 EPR The Expected Packet Rate in msec for the zone 2 consuming connection If consumed data is not received in 4 times this value the zone connection will time out and Zone 2 Health will report 1 Not Healthy 88 Zone 3 EPR The Expected Packet Rate in msec for the zone 3 consuming connection If consumed data is not received in 4 times this value the zone connection will time out and Zone 3 Health will report 1 Not Healthy 89 Zone 4 EPR The Expec
130. control inputs Bit 0 Start Run FWD input Bit 1 Direction Run REV Input Bit 2 Stop Input Bit 3 Reserved Dig In Status Status of the control terminal block digital inputs Bit 0 Digital IN 1 Sel Bit 1 Digital IN 2 Sel Bit 2 Reserved Bit 3 Reserved Comm Status Status of communications ports Bit 0 Receiving Data Bit 1 Transmitting Data Bit 2 RS485 Bit 3 Communication Error Control SW Ver Main Control Board software version for AC Drive Parameter Number 112 Related Parameters 136 138 151 152 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 Default Value 5 Parameter Number 113 Related Parameters 102 134 135 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 15 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 114 Related Parameters 151 152 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 15 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 115 Related Parameters 203 207 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 15 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 116 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 01 Minimum Value 1 00 Maximum Value 99 99 Default Value Read Only 5 34 Bulletin 284 Programmable Paramete
131. discussed in this chapter Table 3 1 Parameter Group Listing DeviceLogix DeviceNet Starter User 1 0 Misc ZIP Parameters Starter Display Starter Setup Protection 1 Hdw Inputs 10 Autobaud Enable 22 Breaker Type 30 Off to On Delay 45 Keypad Mode 67 AutoRun Zip 101 Phase A Current 106 FLA Setting 2 Network Inputs 11 Consumed 10 Assy 23 PrFitResetMode 31 On to Off Delay 46 Keypad Disable 68 Zone Produced EPR 102 Phase B Current 107 Overload Class 3 Network Outputs 12 Produced 10 Assy 24 Pr Fault Enable 32 In Sink Source 47 Set To Defaults 69 Zone Produced PIT 103 Phase C Current 108 OL Reset Level 4 Trip Status 13 Prod Assy Word 0 25 Pr Fault Reset 33 OutA Pr FitState 56 Base Enclosure 70 Zone 1 Macld 104 Average Current 5 Starter Status 14 Prod Assy Word 1 26 StrtrDN FitState 34 OutA Pr FitValue 57 Base Option 71 Zone 2 Macld 105 Therm Utilized 6 DNet Status 15 Prod Assy Word 2 27 StrtrDN FitValue 35 OutA DN FitState 58 Wiring Option 72 Zone 3 Macld 7 Starter Command 16 Prod Assy Word 3 28 StrtrDN IdiState 36 OutA DN FitValue 59 Starter Enclosure 73 Zone 4 Macld 8 Network Override 17 Consumed 10 Size 29 StrtrDN IdiValue 37 OutA DN IdiState 60 Starter Options 74 Zone 1 Health 9 Comm Override 18 Produced 10 Size 61 Last PR Fault 38 OutA DN IdiValue 75 Zone 2 Health 19 Starter COS Mask 62 Warning Status 39 OutB Pr FitState 76 Zone 3 Health 20 Net Out COS Mask 40 OutB
132. downloaded to the ArmorStart take effect immediately even during a running status Important Parameter setting changes made in a configuration tool such as RSNetworx for DeviceNet do not take effect in the ArmorStart until the installer applies or downloads the new settings to the device 6 2 Parameter Group Listing DeviceLogix 1 Hdw Inputs 2 Network Inputs 3 Network Outputs 4 Trip Status 5 Starter Status 6 DNet Status 7 Starter Command 8 Network Override 9 Comm Override Display Group 101 Output Freq 102 Commanded Freq 103 Output Current 104 Output Voltage 105 DC Bus Voltage 106 Drive Status 107 Fault 1 Code 108 Fault 2 Code 109 Fault 3 Code 110 Process Display 112 Control Source 113 Contrl In Status 114 Dig In Status 115 Comm Status 116 Control SW Ver 117 Drive Type 118 Elapsed Run Time 119 Testpoint Data 120 Analog In 0 10V 121 Analog In 4 20 mA 122 Output Power 123 Output Power Fctr 124 Drive Temp 125 Counter Status 126 Timer Status 127 Timer Stat Fract 128 Stp Logic Status 129 Torque Current DeviceNet 10 Autobaud Enable 11 Consumed 10 Assy 12 Produced 10 Assy 13 Prod Assy Word 0 14 Prod Assy Word 1 15 Prod Assy Word 2 16 Prod Assy Word 3 17 Consumed 10 Size 18 Produced 10 Size 19 Starter COS Mask 20 Net Out COS Mask 21 DNet Voltage ZIP Parameters 67 AutoRun Zip 68 Zone Produced EPR 69 Zone Produced PIT 70 Zone 1 Macld 71 Zone 2 Macld 72 Zone 3 Macld
133. drives are based on the Horse Power Rating and Supply Voltage rating of the Distributed Motor Controller Table D 1 lists the product codes and name strings for the Bulletin 284 Distributed Motor Controllers Table D 1 Bulletin 284 Product Codes and Name Strings _ 2BAD Product i Device Device Hp Supply Voltage Name String Drive Type Type Type Code 133 22 0x132 0 50 240V AC ArmorStart 284D PF4 240V 0 5 Hp PF4 133 22 0x134 240V AC ArmorStart 284D PF4 240V 1 Hp PF4 133 22 0x136 240V AC ArmorStart 284D PF4 240V 2 Hp PF4 133 22 0x142 0 50 480V AC ArmorStart 284D PF4 480V 0 5 Hp PF4 133 22 0x144 480V AC ArmorStart 284D PF4 480V 1 Hp PF4 133 22 0x146 2 480V AC ArmorStart 284D PF4 480V 2 Hp PF4 133 22 0x147 3 480V AC ArmorStart 284D PF4 480V 3 Hp PF4 133 22 0x148 5 480V AC ArmorStart 284D PF4 480V 5 Hp PF4 133 22 0x1B2 0 50 240V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 240V 0 5 Hp PF40 133 22 0x1B4 1 240V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 240V 1 Hp PF40 133 22 0x1B6 2 240V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 240V 2 Hp PF40 133 22 0x1C2 0 50 480V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 480V 0 5 Hp PF40 133 22 0x104 1 480V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 480V 1 Hp PF40 133 22 0x1C6 2 480V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 480V 2 Hp PF40 133 22 0x1C7 3 480V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 480V 3 Hp PF40 133 22 0x1C8 5 480V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 480V 5 Hp PF40 133 22 0x1D4 1 600V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 600V 1 Hp PF40 133 22 0x1D6 2 600V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 600V 2 Hp PF4
134. e ee ls ls A J Net Input 3 H eee ee ee Ee ee eS SS F 2 Net Input 4 D S H PT es S NetInput5 DT xX J J Net Input 6 X l J Net Input 7 ele X Net Input 8 lala l X lez lale le J Net Input 9 T a l l Net Input 10 e eae ae ee SS l IMIM Net Input 11 l _Tx es e eae as ee ae Net Input 12 srl el L Net Input 13 x le le Net Input 14 ae Net Input 15 Network Outputs Parameter Number 3 Access Rule GET This parameter provides status of Data Type WORD network outputs Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 3 4 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Function 14 13 12 Net Output 0 Net Output 1 Net Output 2 Net Output 3 Net Output 4 Net Output 5 Net Output 6 Net Output 7 Net Output 8 Net Output 9 Net Output 10 Net Output 11 Net Output 12 Net Output 13 Trip Status This parameter provides trip identification Parameter Number Net Output 14 4 Access Rule GET Data
135. feature with default Input and Output 1 0 Assemblies Default Input and Output 1 0 Assembly Formats DeviceNet Commissioning 8 7 The Automap feature available in all Rockwell Automation scanners will automatically map the information as shown below If manual mapping is not required the information below can be used to map a device based on the default configuration Table 8 1 Default Input and Output 1 0 Assemblies Default Message type Polled Consumed data size 1 byte Rx Produced data size 2 bytes Tx The I O assembly format for the ArmorStart is identified by the value in parameter 11 Consumed IO Assy and parameter 12 Produced IO Assy These values determine the amount and arrangement of the information communicated to the master scanner The tables below identify the default information produced and consumed by the standard starter For additional formats and advance configurations please reference Table B 11 on page B S Table 8 2 Instance 160 Default Consumed Data for Standard Distributed Motor Controller 1 byte 0 User Out B User Out A Not Used Not Used Not Used Fault Reset Run Fwd Table 8 3 Instance 161 Default Produced Data for Standard Distributed Motor Controller 2 bytes Not Used Not Used Not Used Ready Running Rev Running Fwd Warning Tripped 1 Not Used Not Used 140M On HOA User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 User In 0 Status 8 8 DeviceNet Commissioning Se
136. green when a start command and control power are present e Network LED This bi color red green LED indicates the status of the communication link e FAULT LED Indicates Controller Fault Trip condition The Reset Button provides local fault trip reset Figure 13 1 LED Status Indication and Reset Important Resetting the fault will not correct the cause of the fault condition Corrective action must be taken before resetting the fault 13 2 Clear Fault Fault Codes Diagnostics You may clear a fault using the following methods e Remotely via network communications e A remote reset will be attempted upon detection of a rising edge 0 to transition of the Fault Reset bit in the various I O assemblies A remote reset will also be attempted upon detection of the rising edge of the Fault Reset parameter e Locally via the Reset button on the LED Status indication keypad Table 13 1 provides a complete reference of the Fault LED indications for Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers Table 13 1 Fault Indication Blink Fault Types pattem Bulletin 280 281 Bulletin 283 Bulletin 284 1 Short Circuit Short Circuit Short Circuit 2 Overload Trip Overload Trip Overload Trip 3 Phase Loss Phase Loss Phase Short 4 Reserved Shorted SCR Ground Fault 5 Reserved Phase Rotation Stall 6 Control Power Control Power Control Power 7 1 0 Faul
137. intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 8 Dimensions for IP67 NEMA Type 4 with Conduit Entrance 373 6 15 290 236 ET S lt sI O O e O Bo o T1321 o O O o O O O L 1 2 KS elke 3 02 C121 MOTOR CONNECTION 274 10 8 M22 CORDSET MOTOR CONNECTION 330 13 M35 CORDSET 313 114 691 ii 1 431 la fe Akay RS N 7 00O rf O 195 Di 17 68 K K O 0 0 61 B S o 0 A 0 Z rE al le RIS 1 CONDUIT OPENING F 39 47 12 11 85 0 75 CONDUIT OPENING 2 10 Installation and Wiring Dimensions for Bulletin 283 Continued Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 9 Dimensions for IP67 NEMA Type 4 with ArmorConnect Connectivity A i prn il an An
138. is greater than the Max_Devices element in the structure Overview ZIP Parameter Overview Chapter 12 ArmorStart ZIP Configuration This chapter describes the steps necessary to configure the Zone Interlocking Parameters ZIP to configure peer to peer communication between an ArmorStart and another ZIP enabled device such as another ArmorStart or a 1977 ZCIO module First an overview of the ZIP parameter set is presented Then the steps necessary to enable peer to peer data production are described Next the steps necessary to enable peer to peer data consumption are described Finally the steps necessary to map the consumed peer to peer data to the DeviceLogix data table for use in local logic are described Each ArmorStart can consume ZIP data from up to 4 other devices The 4 devices are referred to as zones of data and these zones are numbered from 1 to 4 The following parameters are used to configure a device for ZIP peer to peer communication 12 2 ArmorStart ZIP Configuration Param Parameter Name Parameter Description 67 AutoRun ZIP Enables ZIP data production on power up 0 Disable 1 Enable 68 Zone ProducedEPR The Expected Packet Rate in msec Defines the rate of at which ZIP data is produced Defaults to 75 msec 69 Zone ProducedPIT The Production Inhibit Time in msec Defines the minimum time between
139. is used in Hand State for Bound or Unbound DOPs 1 2 9 and 10 with Parameter 45 Keypad Mode set to 1 momentary Figure D 4 Hand Forward Dir Key Hand Reverse Pressed Hand Key Hand Key Pressed Pressed Jog Key Jog Key Pressed Pressed Hand Jog Hand Jog Forward Forward Reverse Reverse Off Key Off Key Pressed Pressed Protection Fault Direction Direction Forward Reverse Protection Fault Protection Fault Protection Fault Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 25 The following State Transition Diagram is used in Hand State for Bound or Unbound DOPs 1 2 9 and 10 with Parameter 45 Keypad Mode set to maintained Figure D 5 Hand Forward Dir Key Hand Reverse Pressed Hand Key Hand Key Pressed Pressed Jog Key Jog Key Pressed Pressed Hand Jog Hand Jog Forward Forward Reverse Reverse Off Off No Key or Key Pressed Protection Fault Direction Reverse Direction Forward Protection Fault Fault Protection Fault Protection Fault Bulletin 284 CIP Information Parameter Object CLASS CODE 0x000F The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object Table D 47 Parameter Object Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type 1 Get Revision UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT 8 Get Parameter Class WORD Descriptor Configuration E Gel Assembly Instance badi The number of instances of the parameter object depends
140. location to minimize traffic flow is unavoidable other barriers to minimize inadvertent exposure to the cabling should be considered Routing cables should be done in such a manner to minimize inadvertent exposure and or damage 2 36 Installation and Wiring Additionally if conduit or other raceways are not used it is recommended that strain relief fittings be utilized when installing the cables for the control and power wiring through the conduit openings The working space around the ArmorStart may be minimized as the ArmorStart does not require examination adjustment servicing or maintenance while energized In lieu of this service the ArmorStart is meant to be unplugged and replaced after proper lockout tag out procedures have been employed Since the ArmorStart is available with a factory installed HOA keypad option this may require the ArmorStart to be selected and installed as follows if the application requires frequent use of the hand operated interface by the equipment operator 1 They are not less than 0 6 m 2 ft above the servicing level and are within easy reach of the normal working position of the operator 2 The operator is not placed in a hazardous situation when operat ing them 3 The possibility of inadvertent operation is minimized If the operated interface is used in industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons operate and servi
141. network providing the user with flexibility Programming the Motor OL Current parameter provides class 10 overload protection for the Bulletin 284 Distributed Motor Controller Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload Figure 1 3 Overload Trip Curves No Derate g Min Derate Max Derate E E Oo BU 90 S 60 g g 40 40 m Z 20 Lae os 0 a R a op 0 2 50 75 100 125 150 175 20 5 235 50 75 100 125 150 17520 5 0 2 50 75 100125 150 175 200 of P132 Motor NP Hertz xe of P132 Motor NP Hertz se of P132 Motor NP Hertz Product Overview 1 7 LED Status Indication The LED Status Indication provides 4 status LEDs and a Reset button The LEDs provide status indication for the following POWER LED The LED is illuminated solid green when control power is present and with the proper polarity RUN LED This LED is illuminated solid green when a start command and control power are present NETWORK LED This bi color red green LED indicates the status of the communication link FAULT LED Indicates Controller Fault Trip condition The Reset Button acts as a local trip reset Figure 1 4 Status Indication and Reset Fault Diagnostics Fault diagnostics capabilities built in the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting and quick re starting A
142. of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported Table D 44 summarizes the DOP instances Table D 44 Discrete Output Point Object Instance Attributes Instance Kame Alternate Description ID Mapping R Run Forward output For all starter types this output 1 Run Fwd 002950 is hard wired from the ArmorStart CPU to the Output 03 actuator i Run Reverse output For all starter types this output 2 Kun ney 0029 9 is hard wired from the ArmorStart CPU to the Output 04 actuator 3 User Output 1 none These are the two ArmorStart user outputs 4 User Output 2 none 5 Drive Input 1 none These four instances exist for Inverter units only 6 Drive Input 2 none They are connected to Drive Inputs 1 4 7 Drive Input 3 none 8 Drive Input 4 none Drive Jog This instances exists for Inverter units only 9 none Fwd 10 Drive Jog Rev none All instances will contain the following attributes Table D 45 Discrete Output Point Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 ON 0 Fault Value 5 Get Set Fault Action BOOL attribute 1 Hold Last State 6 Get Set Fault Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 O0N 0 Fault Value 7 Get Set Idle Action BOOL attribute 1 Hold Last State 8 Get Set Idle Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 O0ON 0 Pr Fault Value 113 Get Set Pr Fault Action BOOL attribute 1 Ignore 114 Get Set Pr Fault Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N 1
143. outputs Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Bit Function 14 13 12 11 10 7 3 2 Net Output 0 Net Output 1 X Net Output 2 X Net Output 3 Net Output 4 Net Output 5 Net Output 6 X Net Output 7 Net Output 8 Net Output 9 X Net Output 10 X Net Output 11 X Net Output 12 X Net Output 13 X Net Output 14 Trip Status This parameter provides trip identification Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 5 Parameter Number 4 Access Rule GET Data Type Group WORD DeviceLogix Setup Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value Function Short Circuit Overload Phase Short Ground Fault Stall Control Power 10 Fault Overtemperature Over Current Dnet Power Loss Internal Comm DC Bus Fault EEprom HW Fault Res
144. pattern Internal Communication Fault Indicates an internal communication fault has been detected This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash 11 blink pattern DC Bus Fault Indicates the drive has detected a DC Bus Fault This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 12 blink pattern EEPROM Fault This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 13 blink pattern Hardware Fault Indicates incorrect base starter assembly This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 14 blink pattern Restart Retries This fault is generated when the drive detects that the auto retries count has been exceeded This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 15 blink pattern Miscellaneous Faults For Bulletin 283 units this fault condition refers to the overload test for the SMC 3 For Bulletin 284 units this fault is actually the logical OR of the drive s Auxiliary Input fault fault code F2 Heatsink Over Temperature fault code F8 Params Defaulted fault fault code F48 and SVC Autotune fault fault code F80 This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 16 blink pattern Introduction Chapter 14 Troubleshooting The purpose of this chapter is to assist in troubleshooting the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller using the LED Status Display and diagnostic parameters Lxi Servicing ene
145. ready for operation Relay returns drive to Default shelf state when power is removed or a fault occurs 1 At Frequency Drive reached commanded frequency 2 MotorRunning Motor is receiving power from drive 3 Reverse Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction 4 Motor Overld Motor overload condition exists 5 Rano Re Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel decal times to avoid overcurrent or overvoltage fault from p neg occurring Drive exceeds the frequency Hz value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set 6 Above Freq threshold Drive exceeds the current Amps value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set 7 Above Cur threshold 8 Above DCVolt Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set threshold 9 Retries Exst Value set in Parameter 192 Auto Rsirt Tries is exceeded 10 Above Anlg V Option not valid for Bulletin 284 ArmorStart 11 19 Not Used Reserved Enables the output to be controlled over the network communications by writing to Parameter 156 Relay Out 20 ParamControl Level 0 Off 1 ON 21 NonRec Fault Value set in Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries is exceeded Relay Out Level Parameter Number 156 Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter 155 Relay Related Parameters 155 Out Sel is 6 7 8 10 16 17 18 or 20 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Parameter 155 Setting
146. set to 1 will set Data Type BOOL the device to the factory defaults Group Misc 0 N0 Operation Units 1 Set to Defaults Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Base Enclosure Parameter Number 56 Access Rule GET Indicates the ArmorStart Base Data Type WORD unit enclosure rating i Group Misc Bit 0 IP67 Units Bit 1 NEMA 4X MinimumValue 0 Bit 2 15 Reserved Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 21 Base Options Parameter Number 57 Indicates the options for the Access Rule GET ArmorStart Base unit Data Type WORD Bit 0 Output Fuse Group Misc Bit 1 Safety Monitor Bit 2 CP Fuse Detect oe Bits 3 7 Reserved MinimumValue 0 Bit 8 10A Base Bit 9 25A Base Maximum Value 65535 Bit 10 15 Reserved Default Value 0 Wiring Options Parameter Number 58 Access Rule GET Bit 0 Conduit Data Type WORD Bit 1 Round Media Bits 2 15 Reserved Group Misc Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Starter Enclosure Parameter Number 59 Access Rule GET Bit 0 IP67 Data Type WORD Bit 1 NEMA 4X i Bits 2 15 reserved Group Misc Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Starter Option Parameter Number 60 Access Rule GET Bit 0 HOA Keypad Data Type WORD Bit 1 Safety Monitor Bit 2 Source Brake Group Misc Bits 4 15 Reserve
147. the drive and improved speed regulation even as load increases e Most cost effective performance when sensorless vector control is not required e To select this method of operation select H for the Mode of Operation listed in the catalog structure See Publication 280 SG001_ EN P eo FPF M bh MM THM OHM OH G Frequency HZ Sensorless Vector Control e Sensorless Vector Control provides exceptional speed regulation and very high levels of torque across the entire speed range of the drive s The Autotune feature allows the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller to adapt to individual motor characteristics e To select this method of operation select V for the Mode of Operation listed in the catalog structure See Publication 280 SG001_ EN P NN w om B 1 5 1 0 G G oN Product Overview 1 5 Description of Features Overload Protection The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller incorporates as standard electronic motor overload protection This overload protection is accomplished electronically with an rt algorithm The ArmorStart s overload protection is programmable via the communication network providing the user with flexibility The Bulletin 280 281 overload trip class can be selected for class 10 15 20 protection Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload Figure 1 1 Overload Trip Curves
148. the drive will attempt to issue its own start command based on user selected programming Table 14 9 Fault Types Descriptions and Actions No Fault Va Description Action F2 Auxiliary Input 1 Auxiliary input interlock is open 1 Check remote wiring 2 Verify communications F3 Power Loss 2 DC bus voltage remained below 3 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption 85 of nominal 4 Check input fuses F4 UnderVoltage 1 DC bus voltage fell below the 5 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption minimum value F5 OverVoltage 1 DC bus voltage exceeded maximum 6 Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage value can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option F6 Motor Stalled 1 Drive is unable to accelerate motor 7 Increase Parameter 139 167 Accel Time x or reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 189 Current Limit 1 F7 Motor Overload 1 Internal electronic overload trip 8 An excessive motor load exists Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Parameter 133 Motor OL Current 9 Verify Parameter 184 Boost Select setting F8 Heatsink OvrTmp 1 Heatsink temperature exceeds a 10 Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins Verify that ambient temperature predefined value has not exceeded 40 C 11 Replace internal fan
149. the error will be logged into the structure called Error_Report 11 10 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity Triggering a System Wide Write Once a successful System Wide Read has been initiated and the Read_All_System_Done_Flag bit is energized a System Wide Write can be triggered To trigger the system wide write the contact Write_All_Condition_Here needs to be energized in the ladder logic This can be done through additional logic or simply by energizing the bit on line in the RSLogix5000 software Controller Tag monitor screen The Write_All_Condition_Here is handled as a one shot inside the logic but should be de energized at a later time This is so a System Wide Write is not triggered after every Logix power cycle or for each transition from Program to RUN mode When the write finishes successfully the Write_All_System_Done_Flag bit energizes in the logic If an error occurs during the write the Write_All_System_Error_Flag bit energizes and the error will be logged into the structure called Error_Report Interpreting the Error Report If an error occurs during the operation of the ladder logic either the Write_All_System_Error_Flag or Read_All_System_Error_Flag bits will energize depending on which function was being triggered Information will be logged inside the data structure Error_Report that will aid in troubleshooting the problem The format of this structure is shown below Figure 11 13
150. this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines Reverse Disable Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables the function that allows the direction of the motor rotation to be changed The reverse command may come from a digital command or serial command All reverse inputs including two wire Run Reverse will be ignored with reverse disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Flying Start En Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual RPM 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Compensation Enables disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability 0 Disabled 1 Electrical Default Some drive motor combinations have inherent instabilities which are exhibited as non sinusoidal motor currents This setting attempts to correct this condition 2 Mechanical Some motor load combinations have mechanical resonances which can be excited by the drive current regulator This setting slows down the current regulator response and attempts to correct this condition 3 Both Parameter Number 194 Related Parameters 192 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parame
151. this technology RSNetWorx for DeviceNet is required to program the device In addition to the actual programming DeviceLogix can be configured to operate under specific situations It is important to note that the DeviceLogix program will only run if the logic has been enabled This can be done within the Logic Editor of RSNetWorx The operation configuration is accomplished by setting the Network Override and Communication Override parameter The following information describes the varying levels of operation e If both overrides are disabled and the logic is enabled the ONLY time DeviceLogix will run is if there is an active I O connection with a master 1 e the master is in Run mode At all other times DeviceLogix will be running the logic but will NOT control the state of the outputs e If the Network Override is enabled and the logic is enabled then DeviceLogix controls the state of the outputs when the PLC is in Run mode and if a network fault such as Duplicate MAC ID or Module Bus off condition occurs e If the Communications Override is enabled and the logic is enabled the device does not need any I O connection to run the logic As long as there is control power and a DeviceNet power source connected to the device the logic will control the state of the outputs DeviceLogix has many applications and the implementation is typically only limited to the imagination of the programmer Keep in mind that th
152. to by Prod Assy Word 2 Param low byte 5 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 2 Param high byte 6 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 3 Param low byte 9 7 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 3 Param high byte Word wise Bit Packed Assemblies whose instance numbers are 180 189 are all one word Assemblies 16 bits long They can be used stand alone but their main use is to assemble information for EDS file parameters These word wise assemblies become the building blocks for the custom parameter based word wise assemblies described above Note that these word wise assemblies are designed for use with DeviceLogix so their contents reflect the various words in the DeviceLogix data table Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 7 Table C 12 Instance 181 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Instance 181 Hardware Inputs 1 16 Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Input3 Input2 Input1 Input 0 1 Reserved Note This assembly does not exist on the Bulletin 283A Table C 13 Instance 182 This is a Read Write Control Assembly Instance 182 Consumed Network Inputs 1 16 Table C 14 Instance 183 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Instance 183 Produced Network Outputs 1 15 Table C 15 Instance 184 This is a Read Only Status Assembly
153. to change Figure 2 11 Dimensions for NEMA Type 4X with ArmorConnect Connectivity ArmorStart device with a 10 A short circuit protection rating ArmorStart device with a 25 A short circuit protection rating ax Installation and Wiring 2 13 Local Disconnect as 2 Outputs Micro M12 4 Inputs Micro M12 DeviceNet Hp Figure 2 12 Bulletin 283D ArmorStart with DeviceNet Communication LED Status eee Indication od TP Source Brake Connector Motor Connection B Connection Mini M18 Ground Terminal Local Disconnect 2 Outputs Micro M12 ArmorPoint Interface IN ArmorPoint Interface OUT Ground Terminal er err K Figure 2 13 Bulletin 283A ArmorStart for the ArmorPoint Backplane LED Status Indication Source Brake Connector Motor Connection
154. whose data is being MinimumValue 0 Consumed tor zone a Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Zone 3 Key Parameter Number 96 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit Data Type UINT for zone 3 is enabled this value must match the value of the Group ZIP Parameters Device Value Key parameter in Units the device whose data is being MinimumValue 0 consumed tor zong 3 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 4 28 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Soft Start Display Zone 4 KEY Parameter Number 97 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit Data Type UINT for zone 4 is enabled this value must match the value of the Group ZIP Parameters Device Value Key parameter in Units the device whose data is being MinimumValue 0 consumed for zone 4 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Device Value Key Parameter Number 98 Access Rule GET SET This value is produced in the last Data Type UINT 2 bytes of data when one of the ZIP assemblies is chosen for data Group ZIP Parameters production Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Zone Ctrl Enable Parameter Number 99 Access Rule GET SET Global enable for ZIP peer to Data Type BOOL peer messaging This parameter must be disabled before any Group ZIP Parameters changes to the ZIP configuration Units for the device can be made Mi
155. zone 2 Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 7 Default Value 0 Zone 3 Offset Parameter Number 84 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data Data Type UNIT portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen Group ZIP Parameters consumed data bytes for zone 3 Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 4 Offset Parameter Number 85 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data Data Type UNIT portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen Group ZIP Parameters consumed data bytes for zone 4 Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 1 EPR Parameter Number 86 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in Data Type UINT msec for the zone 1 consuming connection If consumed data is Group ZIP Parameters not received in 4 times this Units msec value the zone connection will MinimumValue 0 time out and Zone 1 Health Mainin Valu 65535 will report 1 Not Healthy Default Value 15 Zone 2 EPR Parameter Number 87 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in Data Type UNIT msec for the zone 1 consuming connection If consumed data is Group ZIP Parameters not received in 4 times this Units msec value the zone connection will MinimumValue 0 time out and Zone 2 Health S will report 1 Not Healthy Maximum yalug 65535 Default Value 15 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 23
156. 0 10 HI 6 32 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 155 Relay Out Sel Parameter Number 155 Sets the condition that changes the state of the output relay contacts Belated Parameters 133 156 192 240 247 250 257 260 261 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 22 Default Value 22 Table 6 3 Options Description 0 Ready Fault Relay changes state when power is applied This indicates the drive is ready for operation Relay returns drive to Default shelf state when power is removed or a fault occurs 1 At Frequency Drive reached commanded frequency 2 MotorRunning Motor is receiving power from drive 3 Reverse Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction 4 Motor Overld Motor overload condition exists 5 Ramp Reg Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel decal times to avoid overcurrent or overvoltage fault from occurring Drive exceeds the frequency Hz value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set 6 Above Freq threshold Drive exceeds the current Amps value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set 7 Above Cur threshold 8 Above DCVolt Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in Parameter 156 Relay Out Level Use Parameter 156 to set threshold 9 Retries Exst Value set in Parameter
157. 0 133 22 0x1D7 3 600V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 600V 3 Hp PF40 133 22 0x1D8 4 600V AC ArmorStart 284D PF40 600V 5 Hp PF40 133 PointBus Motor Starter 6 22 Motor Starter D 2 Bulletin 284 CIP Information DeviceNet Objects The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller supports the following DeviceNet object classes Table D 2 DeviceNet Object Classes Class Object 0x0001 Identity 0x0002 Message Router 0x0003 DeviceNet 0x0004 Assembly 0x0005 Connection 0x0008 Discrete Input Point lt 0x0009 Discrete Output Point 0x000F Parameter Object 0x0010 Parameter Group Object 0x001D Discrete Input Group 2 0x001E Discrete Output Group 0x0029 Control Supervisor 0x002B Acknowledge Handler 0x00B4 DN Interface Object Not available on the Bulletin 284A Identity Object CLASS CODE 0x0001 The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object Table D 3 Identity Object Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get UINT 1 Identity Object A single instance of the Identity Object is supported The following instance attributes are supported Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 3 Table D 4 Identity Object Instance Attributes Attribute Access ID Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Vendor UINT 1 2 Get Device Type UINT 22 or 133 3 Get Product Code UINT See Table D 1 Revision Structure of 4 Get Major Revision US
158. 0 Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages Maximum Value 3 Default Value 3 Zone 1 Key Parameter Number 94 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit for zone 1 is enabled this value must match the 3 S Rl Data Type UINT value of the Device Value Key parameter in the device whose data is being consumed Garzone 1 Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Zone 2 Key Parameter Number 95 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit for zone 1 is enabled this value must match the i see Data Type UINT value of the Device Value Key parameter in the device whose data is being consumed for zone 2 Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Zone 3 Key Parameter Number 96 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit for zone 1 is enabled this value must match the i Dee Data Type UINT value of the Device Value Key parameter in the device whose data is being G JPP i consumed for zone 3 Toup S Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 5 30 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Zone 4 KEY Parameter Number 97 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit for zone 1 is enabled this value must match the S ri Data Type UINT value of the Device Value Key paramet
159. 0 0 Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2 Default Value 0 0 Disabled Parameter Number 199 Related Parameters 110 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 999 9 Default Value 30 0 Parameter Number 200 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 201 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 202 Related Parameters 119 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1 Hex Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value FFFF Default Value 400 6 48 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Comm Data Rate This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller CommNode Addr This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Comm Loss Action Selects the drive s response to a loss of the communication connection or excessive communication errors 0 Fault Default Drive will fault on an F81 Comm Loss and coast to stop 1 Coast Stop Stops drive via coast to stop 2 Stop Stops via Parameter 137 Stop Mode setting 3 Continu Last Drive continues operating at communication commanded speed saved in RAM Comm Loss Time Sets the time that the drive r
160. 0 583 0 292 Contactor Hold In Amps 0 63 0 075 0 038 0 063 0 075 0 038 Total Control Power Pick Up VA W 17 0 W 70 70 21 0 W 83 84 Total Control Power Hold In VA W 1 5 W 9 9 5 6 W 22 23 External Devices powered by Control Voltage Outputs 2 1 A max each Amps 2 2 2 2 2 2 Total Control Pick with Conto apa VA W 65 0 W 310 550 73 0 W 336 579 Total Contral Holdiin with VA W 50 0 W 249 489 58 0 W 275 518 max outputs Input Ratings Rated Operation Voltage 24V DC Input On State Voltage Range 10 26V DC Input On state Current sours 7 2 mA 24V DC Input Off state Voltage Range 0 5V DC Input Off state Current lt 1 5mA Input Filter Software Selectable Off to On Settable from 0 64 ms in 1 ms increments On to Off Settable from 0 64 ms in 1 ms increments Input Compatibility N A IEC 1 Number of inputs 4 Sensor Source Voltage Status Only 11 25V DC from DeviceNet Current Available 50 mA MAX per Input 200 mA Total Output Ratings Sourced Rated Operation Voltage 240V AC 30V DC 240V AC 30V DC from Control Circuit Rate Insulation Voltage 250V 250V Backplane Current Load 400 mA 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Type of control circuit Electromechanical Relay Kind of Current AC DC Conventional Thermal Current lin Total of both outputs lt 2 A Type of Contacts Normally Open N O Number of Contacts 2 ArmorPoint Ratings Backplane Current Load 400 mA
161. 05 100 47 150 31 0 75 1 284R 360P500 360 0 086 17 220 100 23 150 15 1 5 2 284R 360P500 360 0 086 17 110 100 12 110 11 2 2 3 284R 120P1K2 120 0 26 52 197 100 24 150 16 4 5 284R 120P1K2 120 0 26 52 124 100 13 124 10 600 Volt AC Input Drives 0 37 0 5 284R 360P500 360 0 086 17 274 100 46 150 31 0 75 1 284R 360P500 2 15 1 5 2 284R 360P500 8 2 2 3 284R 120P1K2 E 2 16 4 5 284R 120P1K2 9 Note Always check the resistor ohms against minimum resistance for drive being used Note Duty Cycle listed is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration For constance regen at full speed duty cycle capability is half of what is listed Application Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100 braking torque where possible Application Type 2 represents more than 100 braking torque where possible up to a maximum of 150 Figure G 2 Dynamic Brake Resistor Approximate Dimensions 5 3 4 ER ONS Bua Ol l lt D ry a ie ae tee een ae mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 284R 091P500 75 3 215 S 235 A 60 2 a 12 54 60 2 50 1 5 284R 360P500 2 95 0 12 2 36 0 08 0 49 2 36 0 08 1 97 0 06 284R120
162. 0V 25 A Symmetrical Amps RMS Fault 65 kA when used with Class CC T or J type fuses Environmental IP67 NEMA 4 IP69K 1200 psi washdown UL Type TC 600V 90 C Dry 75 C Wet Exposed Run ER or MTW 600V 90 C or STOOW 105 C 600V CSA STOOW 600V FT2 Enclosure Type Rating Operating Temperature Dimensions Dimensions are approximate Illustrations are not drawn to scale Female straight Male straight 88 9 3 50 88 9 3 50 a if 38 6 3 9 1 52 49 5 57 1 Male 90 deg 49 5 57 1 1 95 2 25 J NRG TT aC He i 74 7 i 2 94 2 94 38 6 1 52 Female 90 deg 1 52 1 52 Specifications A 15 Pinout and Color Code Face View Pinout 4 pin Female Color Code 1 Black 3 Red 2 Green Yellow Extended PIN 4 White Drop Cables Specifications Certifications UL Standards Compliance UL 2237 Mechanical Coupling Nut Black Anodized Aluminum or 316 Stainless Steel Housing Black PVC Insert Black PVC Cable Diameter 0 43 in 0 12 in 10 9 mm 0 5 mm Electrical Contacts Brass with Gold over Nickel Plating Cable Black PVC dual rated UL TC Open Wiring and STOOW Cable Rating 600V AC DC 600V 10 or 15 A Symmetrical Amps RMS Fault 65 kA Assembly Rating when used with Class CC T or J type fuses En
163. 0V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 05 0 5 280D FN 10 R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 280D FN 10 R 1 1 5 5 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 3 280D FN 10 R 3 2 16 4 7 5 3 5 10 10 280D FN 25 R kw Hp Current Rating c at No A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 0 5 280A FN 10 R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 280A FN 10 R 1 1 5 5 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 280A FN 10 R 3 2 16 4 7 5 3 5 10 10 280A FN 25 R H 4 Bulletin 280 Continued Renewal Parts Table H 7 Bul 280 Full Voltage Starters amp Bul 281 Reversing Starters NEMA Type 4X Up to 575V AC with Conduit Entrance kw Hp Current Rating c at No A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 0 5 280D SN 10 R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 5 280D SN 10 R 1 1 5 5 14 2 2 1 1 3 3 280D SN 10 R 3 2 16 4 75 3 5 10 10 280D SN 25 R Table H 8 Bul 280 Full Voltage Starters amp Bul 281 Reversing Starters NEMA Type 4X Up to 575V AC with ArmorConnect Connectivity kw Hp Current Rating c at No A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 S
164. 1 4 Data 1 3 Data 1 2 Data 1 1 Data 1 0 Status_ Status_ Tag Name warning tripped Data reserved reserved reserved Ready Running Rev Running Fwd Warning Tripped Byte 1 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Address Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Data 1 15 Data 1 14 Data 1 13 Data 1 12 Data 1 11 Data 1 10 Data 1 9 Data 1 8 Tag Name Status 140 Data reserved reserved 140M On HOA User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 User In 0 Table 9 10 Example ControlLogix Output Address Consumed Assembly Instance 160 Default Consumed Standard Distributed Motor Controller Byte 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Address Local 1 0 Local 1 0 Local 1 0 Local 1 0 Local 1 0 Local 1 0 Local 1 0 Local 1 0 Data 1 7 Data 1 6 Data 1 5 Data 1 4 Data 1 3 Data 1 2 Data 1 1 Data 1 0 Tag Name Control_Out Control Out _ _ _ Control_fault g B A Reset Data User Out B User Out A reserved reserved reserved Fault Reset Run Rev Run Fwd Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix Setting Up the MSG Instruction The ControlLogix platform requires significantly less structure to initiate an explicit message The explicit message Request and Response is configured within the MSG function The MSG function can be found in the Input Output tab of RSLogix 5000 Noti
165. 10 283 10 and 284 10 respectively to be used with ArmorConnect input cable media 280 PWRM22 M 280S PWRM22 M Cable Assembly branch circuit taps and 280 M22 M1 ArmorConnet Panel Mounting Fittings when the group motor branch circuits are protected with a maximum 40 A non time delay or a 20 A time delay Class CC T or F fuse These ArmorStart and ArmorConnect product UL Certification of Compliances effectively extend Table E 1 to allow ArmorConnect branch circuit taps and mounting fittings constructed with 16 AWG conductor sized to be connected to appropriate ArmorStart motor controllers See Table E 1 Group Motor Installations E 7 Table E 1 Extended NFPA 79 Table 7 210 4 Relationship Between Conductor Size and Maximum Rating or Setting of Short Circuit Protective Devices for Power Circuits Max Ratings Conductor Size K aa Time Delay or Dual Element AWG Breaker amperes Fuse amp res 16 40 20 14 60 30 12 80 40 10 100 50 8 150 80 6 200 100 4 250 125 For 16 AWG conductors the branch circuit breaker must be marked for use the 16 AWG wire NFPA 79 12 6 1 1 The UL Certificate of Compliance for the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers models 280 10 281 10 283 10 284 10 and ArmorConnect input cable media 280 M22 M 280S PWRM22 M cable assembly branch circuit taps and 280 M22 M1 ArmorConnect panel mounting fittings allows 16 AWG conductors to be use
166. 13 4 Hardware Fault ccccccccsssssssssscsscsscsscsessecsessesseseeseeseeees 13 4 Restart s 13 4 Miscellaneous Fau see eee eee 13 4 Introduction oo cece sese eee eee 14 1 Bulletin 280 281 Troubleshooting sese esse eee eee e 14 2 Bulletin 283 Troubleshooting se eee eee eee eee 14 4 Bulletin 284 Troubleshooting ccccccecseeesseeeeessessesseesseeeeeeeees 14 8 DeviceNet Troubleshooting Procedures sss eee eee 14 14 ArmorPoint Backplane Troubleshooting Procedures 00 14 15 Control Module Replacement sese eee e 14 16 Base Module Replacement sese 14 19 Bulletin 280 281 Specifications cccceccsesssssseesssesessseeseseseesees A 1 Bulletin 283 Specifications ccccssccsescsssseseessesessceeeseceseessees A 4 Bulletin 284 Specifications c ccsssccecsessssesscsecssesseeesseceseesnees A 9 ArmorConnect Three Phase Power Media sss sese A 14 Trunk Cables ss sssss cesses ses sss essen nenes enean nann A 14 Drop Cables sees eee eee A 15 Power Tees amp Reducer sese sese ss esse sese esse ereer nenen A 16 Power Receptacles cccccsssesccsssscssesssesessesssesseeesseseseesens A 18 ArmorConnect Control Power Media sss esse eee eee eee A 20 Trunk amp Drop Cables cececsccsssesssessscessessersesssseseseesenes A 20 M RONS N A 21 vi Table of Contents Appendix B Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information Appendix C Bulletin 283 CIP Information Receptacles cc cscsccaccsedezsct
167. 15 Get Set Force Enable BOOL SRDE Enable 116 Get Set Force Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N For DOP Instances 1 and 2 and 9 and 10 Attributes 113 and 114 have Get only access and their values are always 0 D 20 Bulletin 284 CIP Information The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Point Object Table D 46 Discrete Output Common Services g nie Implemented for Service Code Instance name w TO oto woo O vs _Set Atrbte_Single Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements DOP Instances 3 and 4 Special Behavior There are many sources that can affect an output point s value an I O message and explicit message local logic network fault and idle conditions and protection fault conditions An output point must know how to select which source of data to use to drive its value attribute An output that is not bound behaves much the same as in the DeviceNet Specification One notable addition to DOP behavior for the ArmorStart implementation is the Protection Fault Action and Protection Fault Value attributes determine the behavior of the DOP when the ArmorStart faults on a protection fault Connection Transitions to Established Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 21 The following State Transition Diagram is used for Unbound DOP Instances 3 8 when they are not used in a Devicelogix Program Figure D 1 State Transition Diagram Unbound DOP 3 8 Non Existant Power On
168. 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 0 5 280D F12Z NA R 280D F12D NA R 280D F12B NA R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 280D F12Z NB R 280D F12D NB R 280D F12B NB R 1 1 5 5 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 280D F12Z NC R 280D F12D NC R 280D F12B NC R 3 2 16 4 7 5 3 5 10 10 280D F23Z ND R 280D F23D ND R 280D F23B ND R kW Hp Cat No Current Rating A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50Hz 50Hz 60Hz 60Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz TRE LER GIS BIOENG 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 0 5 280A F12Z NA R 280A F12D NA R 280A F12B NA R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 280A F12Z NB R 280A F12D NB R 280A F12B NB R 1 1 5 5 1 1 2 2 1 1 3 280A F12Z NC R 280A F12D NC R 280A F12B NC R 3 2 16 4 75 3 5 10 10 280A F23Z ND R 280A F23D ND R 280A F23B ND R Table H 2 Full Voltage Starters NEMA Type 4X Up to 575V AC KW Hp Cat No Current Rating A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50Hz 50Hz 60Hz 60Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz ANG ovac AI A 0 24 1 2 0 18 0 37 0 5 0 5 280D S12Z NA R 280D S12D NA R 280D S12B NA R 0 5 2 5 0 37 0 75 0 5 0 5 1 1 5 280D S12Z NB R 280D S12D NB R 280D S12B NB R 1 1 5 5 1 3 2 2 1 1 3 280D S12Z NC R 280D S12D NC R 280D S12B NC R 3 2 16 4 75 3 5 10 10 280D S23Z ND R 280D S23D ND R 280D S23B ND R H 2 Bulletin 280 281 Continued Renewal Parts Table H 3 Reversing Starters IP67 NEMA Type 4 Up to 575V AC
169. 2 Accel 1 1 Drvin4 Drvin3 Drvin2 Dy ln Table D 19 Instance 189 This is a Read Only assembly Instance 189 Warning Status Bits Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Reserve 1 0 Contro 0 d Warning Power a a _ g Warning HW DN Warn 1 _ Warn _ o PI Warn Not available with Bulletin 284A D 8 Bulletin 284 CIP Information Table D 20 Instance 190 is the 1999 ZCIO Native Format Produced Assembly Instance 190 1799 ZCIO Native Format Produced Assembly Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Running Running S 0 Rev Fwd Warning Tripped Input3 Input2 Input 1 Input 0 1 Reserved Logic Reserved 140M On HOA Enable 2 Driveln4 Drive In 3 Drive In 2 Drive in User Ouk User dut Run Rev S 1 B A Fwd 3 Reserved Jog Rev Jog Fwd 4 Net Out S Net Out7 Net Out 6 i ma i Net Out 2 Kn 5 ZIP CCV Low 6 ZIP CCV High Standard Distributed Motor Controller 1 0 Assemblies Standard Distributed Motor Controller I O Assemblies are available on all Starter Types Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output Consumed Assemblies Instance 3 is the required output consumed assembly defined in the DeviceNet Motor Starter Profile Table D 21 ODVA Starter Ed Byte P l T fund Instance 160 is the default output consumed assembly for Bulletin 280 281
170. 20P1K2 120 0 26 52 185 100 13 150 9 Note Always check the resistor ohms against minimum resistance for drive being used Note Duty Cycle listed is based on full speed to zero speed deceleration For constance regen at full speed duty cycle capability is half of what is listed Application Type 1 represents maximum capability up to 100 braking torque where possible Application Type 2 represents more than 100 braking torque where possible up to a maximum of 150 A 12 Specifications Bulletin 284 Continued Figure A 16 External Connections for Input Connector Pin 1 V Out Pin 2 Input 1 or 3 3 Pin 3 Comm Pin 4 Input 0 or 2 Pin 5 NC No Connection N Figure A 17 External Connections for Output Connector Pin 1 PE Pin 2 Return Pin 3 Relay Out C3 Figure A 18 External Connections for DeviceNet Connector Pin 1 Drain Not Connected Pin 2 VDNET Pin 3 VDNET Pin 4 CAN_H O O Pin 5 CAN_L Figure A 19 External Connections for Motor Connector O Pin 1 11 Black Pin 2 T2 White Pin 3 T3 Red Pin 4 Ground Green Figure A 20 External Connections for Control Source Brake Connector Pin 1 L1 Black Pin 2 GND Green Yellow Pin 3 L2 White B Bulletin 284 Continued of P133 Motor OL Current No Cerale Z SN 78 100 125 180 178 200 hiak Motor LUS igi Specifications A 13 Figure A 21 Ex
171. 211 Ang In 0 10V Hi 212 Anlg In 4 20 mA Lo 213 Anlg In4 20 mA Hi 214 Slip Hertz FLA 215 Process Time Lo 216 Process Time Hi 217 Bus Reg Mode 218 Current Limit 2 219 Skip Frequency 220 Skip Freq Band 221 Stall Fault Time 222 Analog In Loss 223 10V Bipolar Enbl 224 Var PWM Disable 225 Torque Perf Mode 226 Motor NP FLA Drive DeviceNet 48 Drive Control 49 Drvin PrFitState 50 Drvin PrFitValue 51 Drvin DNFitState 52 Drvin DNFitValue 53 Drvin DNFitState 54 Drvin DNFitValue 55 High Speed Enable 227 Autotune 228 IR Voltage Drop 229 Flux Current Ref 230 PID Trim Hi 231 PID Trim Lo 232 PID Ref Sel 233 PID Feedback Sel 234 PID Prop Gain 235 PID Integ Time 236 PID Diff Rate 237 PID Setpoint 238 PID Deadband 239 PID Preload 240 Stp Logic 0 241 Stp Logic 1 242 Stp Logic 2 243 Stp Logic 3 244 Stp Logic 4 245 Stp Logic 5 246 Stp Logic 6 247 Stp Logic 7 248 Reserved 249 Reserved 250 Stp Logic Time 0 251 Stp Logic Time 1 252 Stp Logic Time 2 253 Stp Logic Time 3 254 Stp Logic Time 4 255 Stp Logic Time 5 256 Stp Logic Time 6 257 Stp Logic Time 7 258 Reserved 259 Reserved 260 EM Brk Off Delay 261 EM Brk On Delay 262 MOP Reset Sel Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 3 DeviceLogix Group Hdw Inputs Parameter Number 1 This parameter provides st
172. 3 0 1 4 4 0 A 280D FN 10 C 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 3 0 5 0 6 0 7 6A 280D FN 25 C To oN te 0 75 1 5 1 0 2 0 1 7 3 0 A 280D FN 10 C 3 Phase 2 2 4 0 3 0 5 0 4 2 6 6 A 280D FN 25 C 200 240V 0 4 0 75 0 5 1 0 2 34 280A FN 10 C 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 15 2 0 7 64 280A FN 25 C 380 480V 0 4 2 2 0 5 3 0 1 4 4 0A 280A FN 10 C 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 3 0 5 0 6 0 7 6A 280A FN 25 C EEE 0 75 1 5 1 0 2 0 1 7 3 0A 280A FN 10 C 3 Phase 2 2 4 0 3 0 5 0 4 2 6 6A 280A FN 25 C H 14 Renewal Parts Bulletin 284 Continued Table H 28 Bulletin 284 Base Module Renewal Part IP67 NEMA 4 Up to 600V AC with ArmorConnect Connectivity Input Voltage kW Hp Output Current Cat No 200 240V 0 4 0 75 0 5 1 0 23A 280D FN 10 R 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 1 5 2 0 7 6A 280D FN 25 R 380 480V 0 4 2 2 0 5 3 0 1 4 4 0 A 280D FN 10 R 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 3 0 5 0 6 0 7 6 A 280D FN 25 R dst boa 50 602 0 75 1 5 1 0 2 0 1 7 3 0 A 280D FN 10 R 3 Phase 2 2 4 0 3 0 5 0 4 2 6 6 A 280D FN 25 R 200 240V 0 4 0 75 0 5 1 0 2 3A 280A FN 10 R 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 1 5 2 0 7 6A 280A FN 25 R 380 480V 0 4 2 2 0 5 3 0 1 4 4 0A 280A FN 10 R 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 3 0 5 0 6 0 7 6A 280A FN 25 R 260 6000 50 60 0 75 1 5 1 0 2 0 1 7 3 0A 280A FN 10 R Sarnase 2 2 4 0 3 0 5 0 4 2 6 6A 280A FN 25 R Table H 29 Bulletin 284 Base Module Renewal Part NEMA 4X Up to
173. 4 Power Loss PF Fault Code 3 25 Under Voltage PF Fault Code 4 26 Over Voltage PF Fault Code 5 27 MCB EEPROM 28 Base EEPROM 29 Drive EEPROM PF Fault Code 100 30 Wrong Base 31 Fan RPM 32 Power Unit PF Fault Code 70 33 Drive 10 Brd PF Fault Code122 34 Restart Retries PF Fault Code 33 35 Drive Aux In Fit PF Fault Code 2 36 Analog Input PF Fault Code 29 37 Drv Param Reset PF Fault Code 48 38 SCV Autotune PF Fault Code 80 39 Source Brake 40 Reserved 41 DB1 Comm 42 DB1 Fault Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 45 Default Value 0 Warning Status This parameter warns the user of a condition without faulting Parameter Number 62 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Starter Protection Units a Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 15 User 1 0 Group Off to On Delay Parameter Number 30 This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported Access Rule GET SET ON Data Type UINT Group User 1 0 Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 000 Default Value 0 On to Off Delay Parameter Number 31 This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported Access Rule GET SET
174. 4 Length 32 j Rung When the explicit message response i ready the COP command moves the data from the M1 1 224 file to N7 10 Explicit Message Response ready i COP 0008 l f Copy Pile 13 Source 4 M1 1 224 1747 SDN Dest N7 10 Length 32 Explicit Meseage Response ready L CU 3 15 1747 SDN 0009 l END gt Programming the 1 0 Mapping 1756 ControlLogix The following example will use the standard distributed motor controller and the factory default input and output assembly of 160 and 161 Refer to Appendix B for additional assembly formats The default input and output assembly will again be used in the following example Note The addressing is different between the SLC 1747 and ControlLogix 1756 program It is important that the user understand how to create and use tags in order to properly follow the example Please see the RSLogix 5000 programming manual for additional help with defining tags The tables below list the data configuration for the ControlLogix platform and include the tag name as used in the example program Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet Table 9 9 Example ControlLogix Input Addressing Produced Assembly Instance 161 Default Produced Standard Distributed Motor Controller Byte 0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Address Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Local 1 1 Data 1 7 Data 1 6 Data 1 5 Data
175. 5 Total Control Running with max outputs VA W 56 0 W 268 508 Input Ratings E Input On State Voltage Range 10 26V DC Input On state Current 3 0 mA 10V DC 7 2mA 24V DC Input Off state Voltage Range 0 5V DC Input Off state Current lt 1 5mA Input Filter Software Selectable Off to On Settable from 0 64 ms in 1 ms increments On to Off Settable from 0 64 ms in 1 ms increments Input Compatibility N A IEC 1 Number of inputs 4 Sensor Source Voltage Status Only 11 25V DC from DeviceNet Current Available 50 mA MAX per Input 200 mA Total Output Ratings Sourced Rated Operation Voltage 240V AC 30V DC 240V AC 30V DC from Control Circuit Rate Insulation Voltage 250V 250V Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC 2000V AC Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Type of control circuit Kind of Current Electromechanical Relay Conventional Thermal Current lin AC DC Type of Contacts Total of both outputs lt 2 A Number of Contacts Normally Open N O ArmorPoint Ratings Backplane Current Load 2 400 mA A 6 Specifications Bulletin 283 Continued Electrical Ratings UL NEMA IEC Environmental Operating Temperature Range 20 40 C 4 104 F Storage and Transportation temperature range 25 85 C 13 185 F Altitude 2000 m Humidity 5 95 non condensing Pollution Degree 3 Mechani
176. 5 Step6 Step7 E Forward 0 K Reverse WwW Time Step Logic Sequence e Sequence begins with a valid start command e A normal sequence begins with Step 0 and transitions to the next step when the corresponding step logic time has expired e Step 7 is followed by Step 0 e Sequence repeats until a stop is issued or a fault condition occurs Step Logic Basic Logic and Timer Counter Functions J 3 Step Logic Using Basic Logic Digital input and digital output parameters can be configured to use Functions logic to transition to the next step Logic In1 and Logic In2 are defined by programming Parameters 151 154 Digital Inx Sel to Option 23 Logic In1 or Option 24 Logic In2 Example e Run at Step 0 e Transition to Step 1 when Logic In1 is true Logic senses the edge of Logic In1 when it transitions from Off to On Logic In1 is not required to remain On e Transition to Step 2 when both Logic In1 and Logic In2 are true The drive senses the level of both Logic In1 and Logic In2 and transitions to Step 2 when both are On e Transition to Step 3 when Logic In2 returns to a false or Off state Inputs are not required to remain in the On condition except under the logic conditions used for the transition from Step 2 to Step 3 Figure J 2 Start Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Frequency Logic In1 K Logic In2 K Time The step time value and the basic logic
177. 600V AC with Conduit Entrance Input Voltage kW Hp Output Current Cat No 200 240V 0 4 0 75 0 5 1 0 2 3 A 280D SN 10 C 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 15 2 0 7 6A 280D SN 25 C 380 480V 0 4 2 2 0 5 3 0 1 4 4 0 A 280D SN 10 C 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 3 0 5 0 6 0 7 6 A 280D SN 25 C er 0 75 1 5 1 0 2 0 1 7 3 0 A 280D SN 10 C 3 Phase 2 2 4 0 3 0 5 0 4 2 6 6 A 280D SN 25 C Table H 30 Bulletin 284 Base Module Renewal Part NEMA 4X Up to 600V AC with ArmorConnect Connectivity Input Voltage kW Hp Output Current Cat No 200 240V 0 4 0 75 0 5 1 0 23A 280D SN 10 R 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 1 5 2 0 7 6A 280D SN 25 R 380 480V 0 4 2 2 0 5 3 0 1 4 4 0 A 280D SN 10 R 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 3 0 5 0 6 0 7 6 A 280D SN 25 R 460 600V 50 60Hz 0 75 1 5 1 0 2 0 1 7 3 0 A 280D SN 10 R 3 Phase 2 2 4 0 3 0 5 0 4 2 6 6 A 280D SN 25 R Renewal Parts H 15 Bulletin 284 Continued Table H 31 Motor Cables Description Cable Rating Length m ft Cat No 3 m 9 8 280 MTR22 M3 90 M22 Motor Cordset IP67 NEMA Type 4 6 m 19 6 280 MTR22 M6 14 m 45 9 280 MTR22 M14 3 m 9 8 280S MTR22 M3 90 M22 Motor Cordset NEMA Type 4X 6 m 19 6 280S MTR22 M6 14 m 45 9 280S MTR22 M14 3 m 9 8 284 MTRS22 M3 90 M22 Motor Cordset Shielded IP67 NEMA Type 4 6 m 19 6 284 MTRS22 M6 14 m 45 9 284 MTRS22 M14 3 m 9 8 284S MTRS22 M3
178. 7 Zone 2 ZIP 18 Zone 2 ZIP 19 Zone 2 ZIP 20 Zone 2 ZIP 21 Zone 2 ZIP 22 Zone 2 ZIP 23 Zone 2 ZIP 24 Zone 2 ZIP 25 Zone 2 ZIP 26 Zone 2 ZIP 27 Zone 2 ZIP 28 Zone 2 ZIP 29 Zone 2 ZIP 30 Zone 2 ZIP 31 Zone 2 Tripped Warning Running Fwd Running Rev Ready reserved reserved reserved User In 1 User In 2 User In 3 User In 4 HOA 140M Stat reserved reserved Tripped Warning Running Fwd Running Rev Ready reserved reserved reserved User In 1 User In 2 User In 3 User In 4 HOA 140M Stat reserved reserved ArmorStart ZIP Configuration ZIP 32 Zone 3 ZIP 33 Zone 3 ZIP 34 Zone 3 ZIP 35 Zone 3 ZIP 36 Zone 3 ZIP 37 Zone 3 ZIP 38 Zone 3 ZIP 39 Zone 3 ZIP 40 Zone 3 ZIP 41 Zone 3 ZIP 42 Zone 3 ZIP 43 Zone 3 ZIP 44 Zone 3 ZIP 45 Zone 3 ZIP 46 Zone 3 ZIP 47 Zone 3 ZIP 48 Zone 4 ZIP 49 Zone 4 ZIP 50 Zone 4 ZIP 51 Zone 4 ZIP 52 Zone 4 ZIP 53 Zone 4 ZIP 54 Zone 4 ZIP 55 Zone 4 ZIP 56 Zone 4 ZIP 57 Zone 4 ZIP 58 Zone 4 ZIP 59 Zone 4 ZIP 60 Zone 4 ZIP 61 Zone 4 ZIP 62 Zone 4 ZIP 63 Zone 4 Tripped Warning Running Fwd Running Rev Ready reserved reserved reserved User In 1 User In 2 User In 3 User In 4 HOA 140M Stat reserved reserved Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 reserved reserved reserved reserve
179. 700 of Full Load Current Specifications A 5 Bulletin 283 Electrical Ratings IEC Power Circuit Rated Operation Voltage 200V 575V 200 600V Rated Impulsed Voltage 6 kV 6 kV Dielectric Withstand 2200V AC 2500V AC Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Utilization Category N A AC 3 Protection Against Shock N A IP2X Rated Operating Current Max 3 0A 5 5A 7 6A 16A Short Circuit Current Rating Voltage 480Y 277V 480 480V 600Y 347V 600V Protection SCPD performance Type 1 Sym Amps 65 kA 65 kA 30 kA 30 kA RMS 6 3 16A 30 kA 30 kA 30 kA 30 kA SCPD List Size per NEC Group Motor Control Circuit 24V DC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at voltage source Rated Operation Voltage 120V AC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at voltage source 240V AC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at voltage source Rate Insulation Voltage 250V 250V Rated Impulsed Voltage 4 kV Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC 2000V AC Overvoltage Category _ m Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Power Requirements Units Control Voltage Nom Volts 24V DC 120V AC 240V AC Power Supply Nom Amps 0 170 0 110 0 060 Total Control Power Starting Stopping VA W 90 0 W 35 35 Total Control Power Running VA W 8 0 W 28 28 External Devices powered by Control Voltage Outputs 2 1 A max each Amps 2 2 2 Total Control Starting Stopping with max outputs VA W 138 0 W 275 51
180. 80 281 Installation of Locking Clip 2 28 Installation and Wiring Operation of NEMA Type 4X Disconnect Handle To Open Disconnect Handle 1 Rotate locking ring 45 until it stops P 2 To open push the tab on the left hand side and lift the access cover et PM eee OLD Note The access door can not be closed when 140 black handle is in the OFF position To Close Disconnect Handle for Lockout Tag out With disconnect handle in the ON position rotate lockout tag out ring counterclockwise until the disconnect handle is in the OFF position pn lt D EA Note The disconnect handle is designed to be used with a 1 4 in lockout tag out padlock Installation and Wiring 2 29 ArmorConnect Power Media Enclosure Bulletin 1492FB Branch Circuit Protective Device Bulletin 1606 Power Supply Bulletin 280 281 ArmorStart Description The ArmorConnect power media offers both three phase and control power cable system of cord sets patch cords receptacles tees reducers and accessories to be utilized with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller These cable system components allow quick connection of ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers there by reducing installation time They provide for repeatable reliable connection of the three phase and control power to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller and motor by pro
181. 80 281 Programmable Parameters 3 25 Zone 1 Key Parameter Number 94 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit Data Type UINT for zone 1 is enabled this value must match the value of the Group ZIP Parameters Device Value Key parameter in Units the device whose data is being MinimumValue 0 consumed 10r Zong Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Zone 2 Key Parameter Number 95 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit Data Type UINT for zone 2 is enabled this value must match the value of the Group ZIP Parameters Device Value Key parameter in Units the device whose data is being MinimumValue 0 consumed for zone 2 Maximum Vala 65535 Default Value 0 Zone 3 Key Parameter Number 96 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit Data Type UINT for zone 3 is enabled this value must match the value of the Group ZIP Parameters Device Value Key parameter in Units the device whose data is being MinimumValue 0 lalla Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Zone 4 KEY Parameter Number 97 Access Rule GET SET When the Security Enable bit Data Type UINT for zone 4 is enabled this value must match the value of the Group ZIP Parameters Device Value Key parameter in Units the device whose data is being MinimumValue 0 laaa Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 De
182. 84 Note DeviceNet base module is shown Troubleshooting 14 17 Lxi To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices Removal of Control Module 1 Disconnect from power source 2 Remove motor cable 3 Loosen the four mounting screws 4 Unplug the Control module from the base by pulling forward Installation of Control Module 5 Install control module 6 Tighten four mounting screws 7 Install all cables to starter module Figure 14 3 Bulletin 284 Control Module Replacement 14 18 Troubleshooting Base Module Replacement Removal of Base Module Bulletin 280 281 Oyaide Lo avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices 1 Disconnect from power source 2 Remove motor cable comunication cables and all others connected to the inputs and outputs 3 Loosen four mounting screws on the Starter Module 4 Unplug the Control Module from the base by pulling forward 5 Loosen four mounting screws on the Terminal Access Cover Plate 6 Remove cover plate 7 Loosen terminal screws 8 Remove all wires from terminal block Figure 14 4 Bulletin 280 281 Base Module Removal Base Module Communication Cable g Motor Cable Terminal Access Cover Plate Note DeviceNet base module is shown Troubleshooting 14 19 Base Module Repl
183. AC 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 24V DC 120 V AC 240 V AC 50 Hz 1 1 3 0 0 55 0 75 1 5 2 283A FC3Z N R 283A FC3D N R 283A FC3B N R 3 0 5 5 1 1 2 2 3 3 283A FC9Z N R 283A FC9D N R 283A FC9B N R 5 3 7 6 15 3 5 5 283A FC16Z N R 283A FC16D N R 283A FC16B N R 6 3 16 4 5 5 10 283A FC19Z N R 283A FC19D N R 283A FC19B N R Table F 4 Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controller NEMA Type 4X Up to 575V AC kW Hp Control Voltage Cat No Current Rating 230v ac 289 400 200v ac 230v ac 460 v ac 575v AC A Ep MSV AC a ee ae eaa 24V DC 120 V AC 240 V AC 1 1 3 0 0 55 0 75 0 5 05 15 2 283D SC3Z N R 283D SC3D N R 283D SC3B N R 3 0 55 14 22 1 1 3 3 283D SC9Z N R 283D SC9D N R 283D SCOB N R 53 76 15 3 15 2 5 5 283D SC16Z N R 283D SC16D N R 283D SC16B N R 6 3 16 7 10 10 283D SC19Z N R 283D SC19D N R 283D SC19B N R Renewal Parts H 7 Figure H 4 Bulletin 283 Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure 280 D F N 10 C Option Bulletin Number es ae TT S 1 280 Starter Option Communications SM Safety Monitor D DeviceNet A ArmorPoint Line Connection Enclosure Type c Conduit F Type 4 IP67 S Type 4X L Short Circuit Protection Bul 140M 10 10 A Rated Device N Base Ony __ 25 25A Rated Device No Control Module Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection Table H 15 Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Con
184. Accel Decel and ramps to the value set in Parameter 178 Jog Frequency 2 Jog e When the input is removed drive ramps to a stop according to the value set in Parameter 179 Jog Accel Decel eA ec Start command will override this input 3 Aux Fault When enable an F2 Auxiliary Input fault will occur when the input is removed Preset Freq Refer to Parameters 170 173 and 174 177 4 Parameters 151 and 152 Default 5 Local Parameter Option not valid for Bulletin 284 ArmorStart 153 Default 6 Comm Port This option is the default setting 7 Clear Fault When active clears active fault 8 RampStop CF Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set 9 CoastStop CF Causes drive to immediately ramp to stop regardless of how Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set 10 DCInjStop CF Causes drive to immediately begin a DC Injection stop regardless of how Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set Jog Forward Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 Jog Frequency according to Parameter 179 Jog Accel Decel and ramps to 11 Parameter 154 stop when input becomes inactive A valid start will override this command Default 12 J Drive accelerates to Parameter 178 Jog Frequency according to Parameter 179 Jog Accel Decel and ramps to og Reverse ae S A S l stop when input becomes inactive A valid start will override this command Option with Factory Installed option A10 0 10V Analog Input Selects 0 10V or 10
185. ArmorPoint Connectivity 11 9 The value to be modified is the data element of the structure For reference the Min_value Max_value and Name_String for the parameter is also in the structure so that the user knows what the minimum and maximum allowable values are for the data It is important to realize that the data is in a raw format In other words this data could be considered a Boolean a bit mask an ASCII string an integer a byte etc depending on the definition of the parameter in the ArmorStart Also there could be an implied decimal point scaling and different units involved It is important that the user fully understand and verify the raw data value being modified with the user manual so that it is correctly interpreted by the ArmorsStart or undesired operation in the ArmorStart may occur Once the data is written during a System Wide Write function the ladder logic will read it back and put into the Last_Read_Value of the structure This will be a handy visual verification that the data was written correctly Triggering a System Wide Read Once the system configuration has been done a System Wide Read must be initiated The logic to trigger both a System Wide Read and Write is contained in a subroutine called Handle_All_Armor The rungs are shown below for reference Figure 11 12Handle_All_Armor Rungs Controler Main Brain 2 Controler Tags a Controler Fott Kander Create Msg Path B a srd Parameter BB
186. BYTE Bit0 Security Enable 1 Enable data security Group ZIP Parameters Bit1 COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Units Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs Minimum Value Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages Maximum Value Default Value wl wl o Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 29 Zone 3 Control Parameter Number 92 Access Rule GET SET Zone 3 Control Word Default Bits 0 and 1 set all other bits clear Data Type BYTE BitO Security Enable 1 Enable data security G 7P P i Biti C0S Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages OER ranpe Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Units Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs Minimum Value 0 Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages Maximum Value 3 Default Value 3 Zone 4 Control Parameter Number 93 Access Rule GET SET Zone 3 Control Word Default Bits 0 and 1 set all other bits clear Data Type BYTE BitO Security Enable 1 Enable data security G JPP i Biti COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages E SLARI Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Units T Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs Minimum Value
187. BYTE EPATH 4 Get Descriptor WORD 5 Get Data Type EPATH 6 Get Data Size USINT 7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING 8 Get Units String SHORT_STRING 9 Get Help String SHORT_STRING 10 Get Minimum Value Specified in Descriptor 11 Get Maximum Value Specified in Descriptor 12 Get Default Value Specified in Descriptor 13 Get Scaling Multiplier UINT 14 Get Scaling Divisor UINT 15 Get Scaling Base UINT 16 Get Scaling Offset INT 17 Get Multiplier Link UINT 18 Get Divisor Link UINT 19 Get Base Link UINT 20 Get Offset Link UINT 21 Get Decimal Precision USINT C 22 Bulletin 283 CIP Information Parameter Group Object CLASS CODE 0x0010 The following common services are implemented for the Parameter Object Table C 43 Parameter Object Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x01 No Yes Get_Attributes_AIl The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object Table C 44 Parameter Group Object Class Attributes 1 Get Revision UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT All Bulletin 283 Motor Starters have the following instances of the parameter group object e Instance 1 DeviceLogix Parameters e Instance 2 DeviceNet Parameters e Instance 3 Starter Protection Parameters e Instance 4 User I O Parameters e Instance 5 Miscellaneous Setup Parameters e Instance 6 ZIP Parameters e Insta
188. Cable 1m 3 3 ft W40754 369 51 Terminating Resistor ka W40754 371 01 Renewal Parts H 5 Figure H 3 Bulletin 283 Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure 283 D FB19Z N D R Option1 H Option 3 Bulletin SE Option S Number SB Source Brake Connector No Cable Communications D DeviceNet ne L Option 3 A ArmorPoint Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad SM Safety Monitor ___ Motor Connection R Round Enclosure Type F Type 4 IP67 S Type 4X Overload Selection Current Range Input Line Voltage B 200 460V AC 3 Phase 50 and 60 Hz g A 1 3 0 A C 200 575V AC 3 Phase 50 and 60 Hz B 30 554 Contactor Size Control Voltage C 5 3 7 6A D 6 3 16A Control Module N Control Module Only Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection Table H 12 Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controllers Up to 480V AC Cat No Current Rating 230v ac 380 400 A 50Hz TRV AC soi 24 V DC 120 V AC 240 V AC 50 Hz 283D FB3Z N R 283D FB3D N R 283D FB3B N R 283D FB9Z N R 283D FB9D N R 283D FB9B N R 283D FB16Z N R 283D FB16D N R 283D FB16B N R Current 283D FB19Z N R 283D FB19D N R 283D FB19B N R Cat No Rating 380 400 A 230V AC 415V AC 24 VDC 120 VAC 240 V AC 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 283A FB3Z N R 283A FB3D N R 283A FB3B N R 283A FB9Z N R 283A FB9D N R 283A FB9B N
189. Consumed Size USINT 0 8 30 Get DNet Voltage UINT DeviceNet Voltage 50 Get Set PNB COS Mask WORD 0 0x00FF 0 Change of state mask for PNBs 64 Get Set Unlock Identity Instances USINT 0 Unlock when set to 99 hex The following common services are implemented for the DeviceNet Interface Object Table D 63 DeviceNet Interface Object Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name 0x0E Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Set_Attribute_Single Application of ArmorStart Controllers in Group Installation Appendix E Group Motor Installations The following is a method of applying ArmorStart controllers using group motor installation rules as defined in the National Electric Code NEC 2005 and Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery NFPA 79 2002 1 List motors of the group in descending order of motor nameplate full load current 2 Select disconnect means a Sum all locked rotor currents of motors that can be started simultaneously using NEC Table 430 251 b Add to that value all the full load currents of any other motors or loads that can be operating at the same time as the motors that start simultaneously using NEC Table 430 250 c Use the total current from a and b above to get an equivalent horsepower value from Table 430 251 That value is the size of the disconnect means in horsepower NEC 430 110 3 Select fuse or circuit breaker protection Select fuse or circui
190. Controllers Possible Causes or Remedies 1 Short Circuit The motor circuit protector has tripped or the internal wiring protection algorithm has detected an unsafe current range Try to reset the protector if tripped If the condition continues check the power wiring This fault cannot be disabled Overload Trip The load has drawn excessive current and based on the trip class selected the device has tripped Verify that the load is operating correctly and the ArmorStart is properly set up This fault cannot be disabled Phase Loss The ArmorStart has detected a missing phase Verify that three phase voltage is present at the line side connections This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default Reserved Not Used Reserved Not Used Control Power The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power voltage or blown control power fuse Check control voltage wiring and proper polarity Replace control voltage fuse if necessary This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 1 0 Fault This error indicates a shorted sensor shorted input device or input wiring mistakes or a blown output fuse If this fault occurs the offending problem should be isolated or removed prior to restarting the system This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default Over Temperature Indicates that the operating temperature has been exceeded This fault cannot be disabled Phase Im
191. DVA Produced Instance 120 Produced Custom Parameter Based Word Wise Assembly 160 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for DOL and SoftStart units 161 Produced Default Produced Instance for DOL and SoftStart units 162 Consumed Standard Consumed Instance for DOL and SoftStart with Network Inputs 163 Produced Standard Produced Instance for DOL and SoftStart with Network Outputs 172 Consumed SMC Dialog Native Consumed 173 Produced SMC Dialog Native Produced 181 Produced User Inputs 182 Consumed Consumed Network Bits a k a Network Inputs 183 Produced Produced Network Bits a k a Network Outputs 184 Produced Trip Status Bits 185 Produced Starter Status Bits 186 Produced DeviceNet Status Bits 187 Consumed Starter Control Bits 189 Produced Warning Status Bits 190 Produced 1799 ZCIO Bits Not available on the Bulletin 283A Custom Parameter Based Table C 11 Custom Parameter Based Word Wise Produced Assembly Word wise 1 0 Assemblies Instance 120 Instance 120 Word Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit 0 0 0 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 0 Param low byte 1 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 0 Param high byte 1 2 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 1 Param low byte 3 Value of the parameter pointed to by Prod Assy Word 1 Param high byte 2 4 Value of the parameter pointed
192. Data Type BOOL 0 Open Group Drive DeviceNet 1 Close S Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value Gl kl o Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 23 Drvin DNFItState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 52 defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1 2 will respond when a DeviceNet fault occurs When set to 1 Drive Digital Inputs 1 2 hold last state occurs When set to 0 will go to DnFit Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 52 0 Go to Fault Value 1 Hold Last State Drvin DNFIt Value This parameter determines if the drive will be commanded in the event of a DeviceNet fault 0 OFF 1 0N Drvin DNidIState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 54 defines how the Drive Digital Input 1 2 will respond when a DeviceNet network is idle When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to DnFit Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 54 0 Go to Fault Value 1 Hold Last State StrtrDN IdiValue This parameter determines the state that Digital Inputs 1 2 assume when the network is idle and Parameter 53 is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N Parameter Number 51 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 52 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group
193. Data Type USINT to the value 64 data consumption is disabled Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Zone 2 MAC ID Parameter Number 71 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device whose data is to be consumed for zone 2 When set Data Type USINT to the value 64 data consumption is disabled Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 25 Zone 3 MAC ID Parameter Number 72 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device whose data is to be consumed for zone 3 When set Data Type USINT to the value 64 data consumption is disabled Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Zone 4 MAC ID Parameter Number 73 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device whose data is to be consumed for zone 4 When set Data Type USINT to the value 64 data consumption is disabled Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Zone 1 Health Parameter Number 74 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection status for zone 1 Data Type BOOL 0 Healthy Group ZIP Parameters 1 Unhealthy Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 2 Health Parameter Number 75 Access Rule GET Read
194. DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value Function 14 13 12 Net Output 0 Net Output 1 Net Output 2 Net Output 3 Net Output 4 Net Output 5 Net Output 6 Net Output 7 Net Output 8 Net Output 9 Net Output 10 Net Output 11 Net Output 12 Net Output 13 Net Output 14 Trip Status This parameter provides trip identification Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 5 Parameter Number 4 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value Function Short Circuit Overload Phase Loss Shorted SCR Phase Rotation Control Power 1 0 Fault Overtemperature Phase Imbalance Dnet Power Loss Internal Comm Heatsink Over Temp Eeprom HW Fault Reserved Not available on the Bulletin 283A Misc Fault 4 6 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Starter Status Parameter Number 5 Access Rule GET This parameter provides the Data Type WORD status of the starter Group DeviceLo
195. ENET_IP_Addt 192 168 1 teen STRING E Armor_start_System Device 0 CNET_Address 0 Decimal SINT Ex Armor_start_System Device 0 PoinlO_Slot 2 Decimal SINT Armor_start_System Device 0 Aimor_Descriptor First Arm STRING EH Armor_start_System Device 0 Device_Msa_path ee STRING Armor_start_System Device 0 Data p E S Paramter_D T Aimor_start_System Device 0 D ata 0 EE H loro Paramter_D Armor_start_System Device 0 Data 1 1 S H ee Paramter_D Armor_start_System Device 0 Data 2 Mood fleet Paramter_D Armor_start_System Device 0 D ata 3 OO 7 I I Paramter_D Armor_start_System Device 0 D ata 4 IT E Paramter_D Armor_start_System Device 0 D ata 5 I Y E E Paramter_D Armor_start_System Device 0 D ata 6 fee T E Paramter_D FH Armor_start_System Device 0 Datal S 0 S sists Partamter_D OTTS Sare DEVICE arate aa T Paramter_D Armor_start_System Device 0 D atal8 Size 1 Decimal INT EH Armor_start_System Device 0 D ata 8 Flags 16 0002 Hex INT Armor_start_System Device 0 Data 8 Parameter Name Network O STRING T Ae iS Sree Device 0 D ata 8 Min_value Decimal INT Armor_start_System Device 0 Data 8 Max_value Decimal INT Amor_start_System Device 0 Data 8 Data Decimal INT Armor_start_System Device 0 Data 8 Last_Read_Data Decimal INT Armon stentSystenrbericetat eatas eee Paramter_D ArmorStart to
196. Error Report gt E Enor Beno foals CER Error_Report Local_Error 0 Decimal HER En 160000 Hex Error_Report Msq_Ext_Error 16 0000_0000 Hex _ Error_Report Device_Index 0 Decimal C7 Error_Report Parameter_Index 1 Decimal The first element of this structure is Local_Error and will contain a number corresponding to an error interpretation The error numbers are described below Table 11 1 Error Definitions Error Error Description No 0 Success Function completed successfully 1 Read Number Parameter Error Num_Devices element in the configuration is either 0 or greater than the Max_Devices element 2 Read Message Block Error The Message block doing the data reads returned back an error Look at the Msg_Error and Msg_Ext_Error fields for the errors reported by the message 3 Write Data out of Limits The value of the data to be written is either less than the Min_value or greater than the Max_value 4 Write Message Block Error The Message block doing the data writes returned back an error Look at the Msg_Error and Msg_Ext_Error fields for the errors reported by the message 5 Write Disallowed The System Wide Write attempted without a successful System Wide Read done first 6 Data Write Error The data read back after a parameter write does not match 7 Number of Parameters Error The number of parameters read from an ArmorStart
197. FLC A Wire Current A 10 14 14A x 1 25 17 5A 5 7 6 7 6A 2 3 4 4 89 A 1 2A 3 15A 1 2 1 3 15A 1 2 1 3 15A Total Fuse Current 39 4A E 4 Group Motor Installations 10 HP DOL AS From NEC Table 310 16 we need to use 8 AWG for the motor branch circuit Per NEC 430 28 the individual motor tap conductors can be sized down to 1 3 the ampacity of the trunk but not less than 125 of the specific motor s FLC on the tap This reduction is further conditionally based on the tap being not more than 25 feet NFPA 79 7 2 10 4 and Table 7 2 10 4 restrict the size reduction by the size of the branch circuit fuse size and tap conductor size For the above case we have used a 40 A time delay fuse NFPA 79 Table 7 2 10 4 indicates that the smallest tap conductor can be 12 AWG NEC Table 310 16 for wire ampacity allows 12 AWG 25 A to be used in all taps for this application See the final Group motor circuit design in the following figure 8 AWG motor branch trunk XX 12 AWG motor trunk tap conductors are permissible with 40A Time Delay fuse 14 AWG are permissible with 50A Inverse Time circuit breaker NFPA 79 Table 7 2 10 4 40A Time Delay or 50A Inverse Time CB 10 HP DOL AS 2HP VFD AS 2 HP VFD AS 2 HP VFD AS 2 HP VFD AS Note the ArmorStart and motor cable are UL Listed together and supplied by Rockwell Automation Group Motor Installations E 5 If the Group motor design were carried out wit
198. Fault les _ les l X Overtemperature SS ee SS r Phase Imbalance Y lle l l Dnet Power Loss X le lelez lez lz Internal Com sl l lees lN S SS l lL SCR Heatsink Temp X lele lz le Eeprom x j J J J J HW Fault mpm Reserved x le lls lele Misc Fault Not available on the Bulletin 283A 4 14 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Pr Fault Reset This parameter resets the Protection Fault on a transition of 0 gt 1 StrtrDN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 27 defines how the starter will respond when a DeviceNet fault occurs When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to DnFit Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 27 StrtrDN FitValue This parameter determines how the starter will be commanded in the event of a Device Net fault 0 OFF 1 0N StrtrDN IdIState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 29 defines how the starter will respond when a DeviceNet network is idle When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to Dnidl Value on DN idle as determined by Parameter 29 StrtrDN IdiValue This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 28 is set to
199. Fault reset mode Group Starter Protection 0 Manual Units 1 Automatic Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Pr Fault Enable Parameter Number 24 Access Rule GET SET This parameter enables the i Data Type WORD Protection Fault by setting the bit to1 Group Starter Protection Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 16383 Default Value 12419 Bit Function 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 J X Short Circuit l l l l l l l l Overload e l e l l le l l l e l l X Phase Loss i X l _ Reserved X Reserved J X J J I Control Power J X J J 1 0 Fault X J J Over Temperature l a lal X Phase Imbalance j AS SS H Dnet Power Loss X SS HH SS SS m Reserved S X le S S SS l n l lL Reserved Xa la l e l le l a l Eeprom X l a L a al a a l HW Fault o Not available on the Bulletin 280A 281A Pr Fault Reset Parameter Number 25 Access Rule GET SET This parameter resets the l Data Type BOOL Protection Fault on a transition of z 0 gt 1 Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value 0 1 0 3 12
200. Hande AI_Armor R tog Eror BB ves al armor BB Read From Arma Starts eed Poran attrinte BB Reset Resi AI Reset Werte Al R wre ab armor BR wie Param Altriste BB wrte_to Armor Zata Gi Urecedded Prog ans E Mtin Graps E ungouped axes G Trends lt 2 Data Types 8 User Detined S Devier_data S trrer_svucture A pariter Dera BE oven aan a yy Resa AL Cerpen Here Wirte _Al_Cornition Here E SO Kl JSA Amp To Subroutine Roadie Nane Reed_Al_Amor Stort bead Al Fog Stort Vite AI Flog JSA 3 Jung To Sutroutine Roadie Nome Viie ALAmo Reset _rend_Condtion_ here Rezet yete _Condtion Here x 4 JE aaro To Subroutine Resina Nome Reset Romi At rli Amp To Subrodie pepe wame Reset vete al t RET Redan To trigger the system wide read the contact Read_All_Condition_Here needs to be energized in the ladder logic This can be done through additional logic or simply by energizing the bit on line in the RSLogix5000 software Controller Tag monitor screen The Read_All_Condition_Here is handled as a one shot inside the logic but should be de energized at a later time This is so a system wide read is not triggered after every Logix power cycle or for each transition from Program to RUN mode When the read finishes successfully the Read_All_System_Done_Flag bit energizes in the logic However if an error occurs during the read the Read_All_System_Error_Flag bit energizes and
201. INT Indicates Software Firmware Minor Revision USINT Revision Number Bit 0 0 not owned 1 owned by master Bit 2 0 Factory Defaulted 1 Configured 5 Get Status WORD Bit 8 Minor Recoverable fault Bit 9 Minor Unrecoverable fault Bit 10 Major Recoverable fault Bit 11 Major Unrecoverable fault 6 Get Serial Number UDINT Unique Number for Each Device Product Name Structure of 7 Get String Length USINT Product code specific ASCII String STRING See Table D 1 8 Get State uch comme the value 3 Operational Configuration Unique value depending on 9 Get Consistency UINT output of the parameter Value checksum algorithm 10 Get Set Heartbeat Interval USINT In seconds Default 0 The following common services are implemented for the Identity Object Table D 5 Identity Object Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x05 No Yes Reset 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Message Router CLASS CODE 0x0002 No class or instance attributes are supported The message router object exists only to rout explicit messages to other objects D 4 Bulletin 284 CIP Information DeviceNet Object CLASS CODE 0x0003 The following class attributes are supported for the DeviceNet Object Table D 6 DeviceNet Object Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Revision UINT 2 A single instance Insta
202. LISTEN THINK ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller ru i USER MANUAL Bulletin 280 281 283 284 Rockwell ALLEN BRADIEY ROCKWELL SOFTWARE Automation Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Rockwell Automation publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Allen Bradley sales office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or part without written pe
203. Logic X Torque Current The current value of the motor torque current Basic Program Group Motor NP Volts 68 Stop drive before changing this parameter Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Set to the motor name plate rated volts Motor NP Hertz Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency Stop drive before changing this parameter 6 27 Parameter Number 128 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 8 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 129 Related Parameters Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 01 Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value Drive Rated Amps x 2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 131 Related Parameters 104 184 185 187 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Units 1V AC Minimum Value 20 Maximum Value 240V 460V or 600V AC Default Value Based on Drive Rating Parameter Number 132 Related Parameters 184 185 187 and 190 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Units 1 Hz Minimum Value 15 Maximum Value 400 Default Value 60 Hz 6 28 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Motor OL Current Set to the maximum allowable current The drive fault on an F7 Motor Over load if the value of this parameter is exceeded by 150 for 60 se
204. N FitValue 37 OutA DN IdlState 38 OutA DN IdiValue 39 OutB Pr FitState 40 OutB Pr FitValue 41 OutB DN FitState 42 OutB DN FitValue 43 OutB DN IdlState 44 OutB DN IdiValue 151 Digital Ini Sel 152 Digital In2 Sel 153 Digital In3 Sel 154 Digital In4 Sel 155 Relay Out Sel 156 Relay Out Level 157 Relay Out LevelF 158 Opto Outi Sel 159 Opto Outi Level 160 Opto Outi LevelF 161 Opto Out2 Sel 162 Opto Out2 Level 163 DB Threshold 164 Opto Out Logic 165 Analog Out Sel 166 Analog Out High 167 Accel Time 2 168 Decel Time 2 169 Internal Freq 170 Preset Freq 0 171 Preset Freq 1 172 Preset Freq 2 173 Preset Freq 3 174 Preset Freq 4 175 Preset Freq 5 176 Preset Freq 6 177 Preset Freq 7 178 Jog Frequency 179 Jog Accel Decel 180 DC Brake Time 181 DC Brake Level 182 DB Resistor Sel 183 S Curve 184 Boost Select 185 Start Boost 186 Break Voltage 187 Break Frequency 188 Maximum Voltage Paramerer Group Listing Miscellaneous 45 Keypad Mode 46 Keypad Disable 47 Set To Defaults Advanced Setup 189 Current Limit 1 190 Motor OL Select 191 PWM Frequency 192 Auto Rsirt Tries 193 Auto Rstrt Delay 194 Start At PowerUp 195 Reverse Disable 196 Flying Start En 197 Compensation 198 SW Current Trip 199 Process Factor 200 Fault Clear 201 Program Lock 202 Testpoint Sel 203 Comm Data Rate 204 Comm Node Addr 205 Comm Loss Action 206 Comm Loss Time 207 Comm Format 208 Language 209 Anlg Out Setpt 210 Anlg In 0 10V Lo
205. N R 284D SVD1P4B N R aso Aa 0 75 1 0 2 3A 284D SVD2P3Z N R 284D SVD2P3D N R 284D SVD2P3B N R 50 60 Hz 15 2 0 4 0A 284D SVD4PO0Z N R 284D SVD4POD N R 284D SVD4POB N R Blas 2 2 3 0 6 0A 284D SVD6POZ N R 284D SVD6POD N R 284D SVD6POB N R 3 0 5 0 7 6A 284D SVD7P6Z N R 284D SVD7P6D N R 284D SVD7P6B N R 0 75 1 0 1 7A 284D SVE1P7Z N R 284D SVE1P7D N R 284D SVE1P7B N R 575V 50 60Hz 15 2 0 3 0A 284D SVE3P0Z N R 284D SVE3P0D N R 284D SVE3P0B N R 3 Phase 2 2 3 0 4 24 284D SVE4P2Z N R 284D SVE4P2D N R 284D SVE4P2B N R 4 0 5 0 6 6A 284D SVE6P6Z N R 284D SVE6P6D N R 284D SVE6P6B N R Renewal Parts H 13 Bulletin Figure H 6 Bulletin 284 Base Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure 284 D FN 10 C Options T Number l Communications D DeviceNet A ArmorPoint Option 2 amp 3 Brake Cable Options SM Safety monitor Line Media Enclosure Type C Conduit F Type 4 IP67 R ArmorConnect Power Media S Type 4X i Short Circuit Protection Base Bulletin 140 Current Rating A N Base Only no starter 10 10 A Rated Device Base Module Renewal Part Product Selection 25 25 A Rated Device Table H 27 Bulletin 284 Base Module Renewal Part IP67 NEMA 4 Up to 600V AC With Conduit Entrance Input Voltage kW Hp Output Current Cat No 200 240V 0 4 0 75 0 5 1 0 2 3 A 280D FN 10 C 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 1 5 2 0 7 6 A 280D FN 25 C 380 480V 0 4 2 2 0 5
206. Net network is idle When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by the setting in Parameter 44 The DN Fit parameters supersede the Dn idl parameters Parameter Number 39 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 40 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 41 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 42 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 43 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Misc Group Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 17 OutB DN IdiValue Parameter Number 44 Access Rule GET SET This parameter determines the Data Type BOOL state that Output B assumes when the network is idle and Group User 1 0 Parameter 43 is set to 0 Units 0 Open Minimum Value 0 1 Close Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Keypad Mode Parameter Number 45 Access Rule GET SET This parameter s
207. Net supply and prevents transients which may be present on the control power system from influencing the communication controls Accessories Table G 1 DeviceNet Media Description Appendix G Length m ft KwikLink pigtail drops are Insulation Displacement Connector IDC with integral Class 1 round cables for interfacing devices or power supplies to flat cable DeviceNet Mini T Port Tap Gray PVC Thin Cable Cat No Sealed 1m 3 3 1485P P1E4 B1 N5 2 m 6 5 1485P P1E4 B2 N5 3 m 9 8 1485P P1E4 B3 N5 6 m 19 8 1485P P1E4 B6 N5 Right Keyway 1485P P1N5 MN5NF Left Keyway 1485P P1N5 MN5KM Connector Cat No Mini Straight Female Mini Straight Male 1485G P N5 M5 Mini Straight Female Mini Right Angle Male 1485G P W5 N5 Mini Right Angle Female Mini Straight Male 1485G P M5 Z5 Mini Right Angle Female Mini Straight Male 1485G P W5 Z5 Thick Cable DeviceNet Configuration Terminal Used to interface with objects on a DeviceNet network Includes 1 m communications cable Communication cable color coded bare leads Communication cable microconnector male Panel Mount Adapter Door Mount Bezel Kit See publication M116 CA001A EN P for complete cable selection information Mini Straight Female Mini Straight Male 1485C P N5 M5 Mini Straight Female Mini Right Angle Male 1485C P W5 N5 Mini Right Angle Female Mini Straight Male 1485C
208. Netin 4 Netin 3 Netin 2 Netin 1 2 Netin 16 Net In 15 Net In 14 Net In 13 Net In 12 Net In 11 Net In 10 Net In 9 Table C 24 Instance 52 is the required input produced assembly defined in the DeviceNet Motor Starter Profile Instance 52 ODVA Starter Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 ec ia eT e R Table C 25 Instance 161 is the default input produced assembly for Standard Distributed Motor Controllers Instance 161 Default Produced Standard Distributed Motor Controller Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Running Fwd 0 Ready Warning Tripped User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 User In 0 Reserved Reserved 1 U HOA 1 140M On Reserved Reserved Stat o o For Bulletin 283A only C 10 Bulletin 283 CIP Information SMC Dialog Plus Native Assemblies Table C 26 Instance 163 is the standard input produced assembly with Network Outputs Instance 163 Standard Produced Starter with Network Outputs Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Running 0 Ready Fwd Tripped User In 4 User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 HOA 1 140M On Stat Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 1 o 1 2 Net Out 8 Net Out 7 Net Out 6 Net Out 5 Net Out 4 Net Out 3 Net Out 2 Net Out 1 Logic Net Out Net Out Net Out Ne
209. No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single No class attributes are supported for the Acknowledge Handler Object A single instance instance 1 of the Acknowledge Handler Object is supported The following instance attributes are supported Table C 52 Acknowledge Handler Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Set Acknowledge Timer UINT milliseconds 2 Get Retry Limit USINT 1 3 Get COS Producing Connection UINT 4 Instance The following common services are implemented for the Acknowledge Handler Object Table C 53 Acknowledge Handler Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 27 Overload Object CLASS CODE No class attributes are supported for the Overload Object 0x002c A single instance instance 1 of the Overload Object is supported for Bulletin 283 Table C 54 Overload Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Set FLA Setting BOOL XXx x AMps 4 Get Set Trip Class USINT 1 10 5 Get Average Current INT Xxx x AMPs 7 Get Thermal Utilized USINT xxx FLA 8 Get Current L1 INT XN X AMps 9 Get Current L2 INT XXX X Amps 10 Get Current L3 INT XXX X Amps 190 Get Set FLA Setting Times 10 BOOL Xxx x AMps 192 Get Avg Current Times 10 UINT X
210. OA ccceccssessssssseecseesesssessecsssssesecsesesseees 7 5 iv Table of Contents Chapter 8 DeviceNet Commissioning Chapter 9 Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet Chapter 10 Using DeviceLogix Chapter 11 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity Chapter 12 ArmorStart ZIP Configuration Establishing a DeviceNet Node Address sees eee eee eee 8 1 Node Commissioning using Hardware sss eee eee eee eee eee 8 1 Node Commissioning using Software sese eee eee ee eee eee 8 2 Building and Registering an EDS File sese eee eee ee ee 8 3 Using the Node Commissioning Tool Inside RSNetWorx TOF DeviceNet cacssesacscescusesseseszesessssexesscetecdeceacoseuscsdeecsseeedsensescuvnapeanes 8 5 System COnPiQuration T 8 6 Using Automap feature with default Input and Output 1 0 ASSOMDIGS cisesccsvcsesissevesscasdscdetsacss ceasbacisctecveckseitasisiscevesseateszesndves cs 8 7 Default Input and Output 1 0 Assembly Formats sss eee 8 7 Setting the Motor FLA and Overload Trip Class Bulletin 280 281 8 8 Setting the Motor FLA Bulletin 2821 sese eee 8 9 Setting the Morot FLA Bulletin 2841 sese 8 10 Logic Controller Application Example with Explicit MOSSAGIAG serieren anrr ionian anana naaar eara EOE ANTE tanczscieesedetdies 9 1 Programming the 1747 SLC sese 9 1 WO Mapping cceccsescscccceecssssesecessecsesessesessecassessesessesesersaeees 9 1 Explicit Messaging with SLC sees eee 9 2 Setting up the Data File sss cecsees
211. OP HAND STOP HAND STOP HAND STOP The following state transition matrix summarizes the Jog HOA behavior when Parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 0 maintained HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV JOG FWD JOG REV AUTO Command motor Command motor Command motor Command motor No Key a off and off and off and Ignore off and transition ba a si Ignore Pressed to HAND STOP transition to transition to transition to HAND STOP HAND STOP HAND STOP Bea f FY D LE D STREV LED Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore em Else If REV LED Set FWD LED 9 9 9 9 9 i If FWD LED transition to JOG FWD fibers eer inter iante lahore if REV LED Transition to JOG REV 9 9 9 9 9 Command motor off and Transition org og ange iannte ignore to AUTO 9 9 9 g g If FWD LED transition to HAND FWD innr mpa aniz ane ange if REV LED Transition to HAND REV 9 9 9 9 9 Command motor Command motor Command motor OFF Command motor Command motor O N off and off and off and Ignore SE transition to transition to transition to Sy hl transition to HAND STOP HAND STOP HAND STOP HAND stop HAND STOP Keypad Disable and HOA HOA Keypad Operation 7 5 Parameter 46 Keypad Disable disables the HAND FWD and REV buttons on the HOA keypad The OFF and AUTO buttons are always enabled even if parameter 46 is set to 1 disable Note In nearly all instances if the processor detects multiple buttons are pressed at the sam
212. Only consumed connection status for zone 2 Data Type BOOL 0 Healthy Group ZIP Parameters 1 Unhealthy Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 3 Health Parameter Number 76 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection status for zone 3 Data Type BOOL 0 Healthy Group ZIP Parameters 1 Unhealthy Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value oO kl o 5 26 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Zone 4 Health Parameter Number 77 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection status for zone 4 Data Type BOOL 0 Healthy Group ZIP Parameters 1 Unhealthy Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 1 Mask Parameter Number 78 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data mask for zone 1 Each bit represents a byte in Data Type BYTE consumed data up to8 bytes in length T a mask bit is set the corresponding Group ZIP Parameters consumed data byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table i L Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 Default Value 0 Zone 2 Mask Parameter Number 79 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data mask for zone 2 Each bit represents a byte in Data Type BYTE consumed data up to8 bytes in length If a mask bit is set the corresponding Group Fp Parameters consumed data byte is placed in the DeviceLogix
213. P1K2 70 nE 16 54 0 2 17 32 0 2 Length is user selectable based on the suffix added to the catalog number For a length of 500 10mm add M05 to the end of the catalog number For a length of 100 10mm add M1 to the end of the catalog number Accessories Appendix H 280 281 Communications D DeviceNet A ArmorPoint Full Voltage Starter Reversing Starter Enclosure Type Type 4 IP67 F S NEMA Type 4X Contactor Size Control Voltage 24V DC 120V AC 240V AC 12Z 12D 12B 23Z 23D 23B Not available with enclosure type S NEMA Type 4X Renewal Parts Figure H 1 Bulletin 280 281 Control Module Renewal Part Catalog Structure 280 D F 12Z N B R Option1 Option 2 Butetnnumber L TT e e viaaa Control Module E Option 2 SM Safety Monitor Option 1 3 Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad 3FR Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad with Forward Reverse Motor Connection R Round Overload Selection Current Range A 0 24 1 2 B 0 5 25A C 1 1 5 5A D 3 2 16 A N Control Module Only Control Module Renewal Part Product Selection Table H 1 Full Voltage Starters IP67 NEMA Type 4 Up to 575V AC kW Hp Cat No Current Rating A 230V AC 400V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50Hz 50Hz 60Hz 60Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz TRE LER Ne TT S 0 24 1
214. PENING U 38 972 ba 47 11 85 0 75 CONDUIT OPENING Installation and Wiring 2 21 Dimensions for Bulletin 284 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not Continued intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 21 Dimensions for 2 Hp 230V AC 3 Hp and above 460V AC and 3 Hp and above 575V AC NEMA Type 4X with ArmorConnect Connectivity ArmorStart device with a 25 A short circuit protection rating 68 LEI 2 681 2 22 Installation and Wiring Figure 2 22 Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Local Disconnect u LED Status Indication Z Allon Bradloy a 2 Outputs FN ann PPR Micro M12 ng mng a O 4 Inputs ee Micro M12 N 6 RR SSS Source Brake L Connector Motor DeviceNet Connector Connection D 0 10V Ground Mini M18 ynamic Terminal l Brake Connector Analog Input Available only with the Bulletin 284 with sensorless vector control
215. Parameter 135 Maximum Freq Parameter 134 Minimum Freq Parameter Number 210 Related Parameter 121 134 138 222 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 100 0 Default Value 0 0 Parameter 210 Parameter 211 Anlg In 0 10V Lo Anlg In 0 10V Hi Anlg In 0 10V HI Stop drive before changing this parameter Sets the analog input level that corresponds to parameter 135 Maximum Freq if a 0 10V input is used by parameter 138 Speed Reference Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value smaller than parameter 210 Anlg In 0 10V Lo Anlg In4 20MA LO This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Anlg In4 20 mA HI This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Parameter Number 211 Related Parameter 121 135 138 222 223 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 100 0 Default Value 0 0 Parameter Number 212 Parameter Number 213 6 50 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Slip Hertz FLA Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor This frequency is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current Process Time Lo Scales the time value
216. Parameter 156 Min Max Group Advanced Program Group 0 i 0 180 Minimum Value 0 0 8 0 815V Maximum Value 9999 10 0 100 20 0 1 Default Value 2 0 5 40 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Accel Time 2 When active sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog Maximum Freg Accel Rate Accel Time Parameter 135 Maximum Freq Time Param 0 139 or 140 or 167 168 Accel Decel Time x Time x Decel Time 2 When active sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog Maximum Freq Decel Rate Decel Time Parameter 135 Maximum Freq Qs Param a Time Param 0 139 or 140 or 167 168 Accel Decel Time x Time x Internal Freq Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 138 Speed Reference is set to 1 Internal Freq When enabled this parameter will change the frequency command in real time 170 Preset Freq 0 O 171 Preset Freq 1 172 Preset Freq 2 173 Preset Freq 3 Parameter Number 167 Related Parameters 139 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 600 0 Default Value 20 0 Parameter Number 168 Related Parameters 140 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Val
217. Parameter s 155 158 161 193 is set to a value greater than 0 a user configurable timer Parameter 193 AutoRstrt Delay Related Parameter s 192 begins When the timer reaches zero the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted 2 Non Resettable This type of fault may require drive or motor repair or is caused by wiring or programing errors The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared Automatically Clearing Faults Option Step Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive 1 Set Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries to a value other than 0 2 Set Parameter 193 Auto Rstrt Delay to a value other than 0 Clear an Overvoltage Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive 1 Set 192 Auto Rstrt Tries to a value other than 0 2 Set 193 Auto Rstrt Delay to 0 Auto Restart Reset Run 14 10 Troubleshooting The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application intervention This allows remote or unattended operation Only certain faults are allowed to be reset Certain faults Type 2 that indicate possible drive component malfunction are not resettable Caution should be used when enabling this feature since
218. Pr FitValue 77 Zone 4 Health 21 DNet Voltage 41 OutB DN FitState 78 Zone 1 Mask 42 OutB DN FitValue 79 Zone 2 Mask 43 OutB DN IdlState 80 Zone 3 Mask 44 OutB DN IdiValue 81 Zone 4 Mask 82 Zone 1 Offset 83 Zone 2 Offset 84 Zone 3 Offset 85 Zone 4 Offset 86 Zone 1 EPR 87 Zone 2 EPR 88 Zone 3 EPR 89 Zone 4 EPR 90 Zone 1 Control 91 Zone 2 Control 92 Zone 3 Control 93 Zone 4 Control 94 Zone 1 Key 95 Zone 2 Key 96 Zone 3 Key 97 Zone 4 Key 98 Device Value Key 99 Zone Ctrl Enable DeviceLogix Group Hdw Inputs Parameter Number 10 Access Rule GET This parameter provides status of Data Type WORD hardware inputs Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value Maximum Value 15 Default Value Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 3 Bit E Function 3 2 1 Input 0 X Input 1 X Input 2 X Input 3 o Not available on the Bulletin 280A 281A Network Inputs Parameter Number 2 Access Rule GET This parameter provides status of Data Type WORD network inputs S Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 a a las X Net Input 0 S D R D D T a Sy ER Net Input 1 ee ae La l e a llez lea ee ee n llles les Net Input 2
219. Pressed Auto State Auto Init B 18 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information The following State Transition Diagram is used in Auto State for Unbound DOP Instances 1 and 2 Figure B 3 Auto State for Unbound DOP Instances 1 and 2 Auto Init DNet Fault Protection Fault DNet Fault DNet Fault Connection Transitions to Established Protection Fault DNet Fault Connection Transitions to Established ng UOIB Og DNet Fault Protection Fault Reset Receive Data l Protection Fault Protection Fault Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 19 The following State Transition Diagram is used in Hand State for DOPs 1 and 2 with parameter 45 Keypad Mode set to 1 momentary Figure B 4 Hand State for DOPs 1 and 2 Momentary Hand Key Pressed Hand Key Pressed w Fwd Selected w Rev Selected Hand Stop Off Key Pressed Off Key Pressed Protection Fault Cleared Protection Fault Protection Fault Protection Fault Protection Fault Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information The following State Transition Diagram is used in Hand State for DOPs 1 and 2 with parameter 45 Keypad Mode set to 1 maintained Figure B 5 Hand State for DOPs 1 and 2 Maintained Hand Key Pressed Hand Key Pressed w Fwd Selected w Rev Selected Hand Stop Pressed Hand Forward Protection Fault Cleared Protection Fault Protection Fault Protection Fault Protec
220. Programmable Parameters 4 23 Zone 3 MAC ID Parameter Number 72 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device Data Type USINT whose data is to be consumed for zone 3 Group ZIP Parameters Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Zone 4 MAC ID Parameter Number 73 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device Data Type USINT whose data is to be consumed for zone 4 Group ZIP Parameters Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Zone 1 Health Parameter Number 74 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection Data Type BOOL status for zone 1 Group ZIP Parameters 0 Healthy Units 1 Unhealthy MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 2 Health Parameter Number 75 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection Data Type BOOL status for zone 2 Group ZIP Parameters 0 Healthy Units 1 Unhealthy MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 3 Health Parameter Number 76 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection Data Type BOOL status for zone 3 Group ZIP Parameters 0 Healthy Units 1 Unhealthy MinimumValue Maximum Value Default Value 0 1 0 4 24 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Zone 4 Heal
221. Rate Insulation Voltage 250V 250V Rated Impulsed Voltage 4 kV Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC 2000V AC Overvoltage Category Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz m 50 60 Hz Power Requirements Units No Options Brake or Output Contactor With Brake and Output Contactor Control Voltage Volts 24V DC 120V AC 240V AC 24V DC 120V AC 240V AC 24V DC 120V AC 240V AC Total Control Pick Up VA W 11 0 W 16 24 13 0 W 38 46 16 0 W 60 68 Total Control Hold In VA W 11 0 W 16 24 13 0 W 20 28 16 0 W 24 32 External Devices powered by Control Voltage Outputs 2 1 A max each Amps 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Total Control VA Pick Up with max outputs VA W 59 0 W 267 504 61 0 W 278 548 64 0 W 300 548 Total Control VA Hold In VA W 59 0 W 267 504 61 0 W 278 512 64 0 W 264 512 with max outputs Input Ratings Rated Operation Voltage 24V DC Input On State Voltage Range 10 26V DC 3 0 mA 10V DC 7 2 mA 24V DC Input On state Current Input Off state Voltage Range 0 5V DC Input Off state Current lt 1 5mA Input Filter Software Selectable Off to On Settable from 0 64 ms in 1 ms increments On to Off Settable from 0 64 ms in 1 ms increments Input Compatibility N A IEC 1 Number of inputs 4 Sensor Source Voltage Status Only 11 25V DC from DeviceNet Current Available 50 mA MAX per Input 200 mA Total Output Ratings Sourced Rated Operation Voltage 240
222. Stp Logic 7 Stop drive before changing this parameter Parameter Number 238 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 10 0 Default Value 0 0 Parameter Number 239 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 0 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 400 0 Hz Default Value 0 0 Hz Parameter Number 240 247 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0001 Maximum Value baFF Default Value 00F1 Parameters 240 247 are only active if 138 Speed Reference is set to 6 Stp Logic These parameters can be used to create a custom profile of frequency commands Each step can be based on time status of a Logic input or a combination of time and the status of a Logic input Digits 0 3 for each Stp Logic x parameter must be programmed according to the desired profile A Logic input is established by setting a digital input Parameters 151 154 Digital Inx Sel to 23 Logic In1 and or 24 Logic In2 A time interval between steps can be programmed using Parameters 250 257 Stp Logic Time x See Table 6 8 for related parameters The speed for any step is programmed using Parameters 170 177 Preset Freq x 6 58 Table 6 8 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Step Logic Paramete
223. T in milliseconds Watchdog Action 01 auto delete L oe USIN 03 deferred delete 13 Get Produced Connection Path UINT 0 Length 14 Get Produced Connection Path Empty 15 Get Consumed Connection Path UINT 0 Length 16 Get Consumed Connection Path Empty Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 17 Instances 8 11 are ZIP Consumers The following instance attributes will be supported Table D 38 Connection Object instance 8 11 Attributes Attribute Access Nam Data Value ID Rule Type State 0 nonexistant 1 Get USINT 1 configuring 3 established 2 Get Instance Type USINT 1 I 0 Connection Transport Class Trigger x20 CO 3 Ga a aul ran 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT FFFF not producing data 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT 01101Xxxxxx xxxxxx node address 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT OxFO unacknowledged 7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 8 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in milliseconds 12 Get Watchdog Action USINT 2 auto reset 13 Get ps Connection Path UINT 0 14 Get Produced Connection Path 0 15 Get ae Connection Path UINT 8 16 Get Consumed Connection Path 21 OE 03 25 01 00 30 02 The following services are implemented for the Connection Object Table D 39 Connection Objects Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name 0x05 No Yes Reset OxOE No Yes Get_Attrib
224. TO Command motor ON havo and transition to Ignore Ignore HAND FWD Command motor off Command motor off Ignore and transition to and Transition to HAND STOP HAND STOP HOA Keypad Operation 7 3 Figure 7 3 Bulletin 281 Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad with Forward Reverse Function The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA behavior when parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 1 momentary HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV AUTO w Set FWD LED Ignore Ignore Set FWD LED 4 Set REV LED Ignore Ignore Set REV LED Command motor off and ianore lanna AUTO Transition to AUTO g g 9 If FWD LED transition to hay ROND FWD Ignore Ignore Ignore If REV LED g g g Transition to HAND REV Command motor off and Command motor off and Command motor off and Ignore transition to HAND STOP transition to HAND STOP Transition to HAND STOP The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA behavior when parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 0 maintained HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV AUTO NO KEY Daar Command motor off and Command motor off and ingot PRESSED g transition to HAND STOP transition to HAND STOP g w Set FWD LED Ignore Ignore Set FWD LED ney Set REV LED Ignore Ignore Set REV LED Command motor off and ianor nre inore AUTO Transition to AUTO g 9 9 If FWD LED transition to PAND EWD Igno
225. Table B 55 Acknowledge Handler Object Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance 0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single B 28 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information DeviceNet Interface Object CLASS This vendor specific object has no class attributes CODE 0x00B4 A single instance instance 1 of the DeviceNet Interface Object is supported Table B 56 DeviceNet Interface Object Instance Attribute Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Min Max Default Description 7 Get Set Prod Assy Word 0 USINT 0 108 1 Defines Word 0 of Assy 120 8 Get Set Prod Assy Word 1 USINT 0 108 5 Defines Word 1 of Assy 120 9 Get Set Prod Assy Word 2 USINT 0 108 6 Defines Word 2 of Assy 120 10 Get Set Prod Assy Word 3 USINT 0 108 7 Defines Word 3 of Assy 120 13 Get Set Starter COS Mask WORD 0 OxFFFF OXxFFFF Change of state mask for starter bits 15 Get Set Autobaud Enable BOOL 0 1 1 1 enabled 0 disabled 16 Get Set Consumed Assy USINT 0 185 160 3 121 160 162 182 187 17 Get Set Produced Assy USINT 100 187 161 52 121 161 163 181 187 189 190 19 Get Set Set To Defaults BOOL 0 1 0 0 N0 action 1 Reset 23 Get 1 0 Produced Size USINT 0 8 Size of I O Produced Data in Bytes 24 Get 1 0 Consumed Size USINT 0 5 3 Size of I O Consumed Data in Bytes 30 Get DNet Voltage UINT XX XX _ DeviceNet Voltage xx xx Volts 50 Get Set PNB COS Ma
226. V AC 30V DC 240V AC 30V DC from Control Circuit Rate Insulation Voltage 250V 250V Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC 2000V AC Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Type of control circuit Electromechanical Relay Kind of Current AC DC Conventional Thermal Current lin Total of both outputs lt 2 A Type of Contacts Normally Open N O Number of Contacts 2 ArmorPoint Ratings Backplane Current Load 400 mA A 10 Specifications Bulletin 284 Continued Electrical Ratings UL NEMA IEC Environmental Operating Temperature Range 20 40 C 4 104 F Storage and Transportation temperature range 25 85 C 13 185 F Altitude 2000 m Humidity 5 95 non condensing Pollution Degree 3 Enclosure Ratings NEMA 4 12 13 or NEMA 4X IP67 or IP69K Approximate Shipping Weight 18 1 kg 40 Ibs Mechanical Resistance to Shock Operational 15G Non Operational 30G Resistance to Vibration Operational 1 G 0 15 mm 0 006 in displacement Non Operational 2 5 G 0 38 mm 0 015 in displacement Power and Ground Terminals WireSize Primary Secondary Terminal 1 5 mm 4 0 mm Primary Secondary Terminal 16 AWG 10 AWG Tightening Torque Wire Strip Length Primary Terminal 10 8 in Ib Secondary Terminal 4 5 in Ib Primary Terminal 1 2 N m Secondary Terminal 0 5 N m 0 35 in 9 mm Control and S
227. V as the frequency 13 RIRE reference Start source is not changed 14 20MA In Ctrl Option not valid for Bulletin 284 ArmorStart 15 PID Disable Disabled PID function Drive uses the next valid non PID speed reference 16 MOP Up Increases the value of Parameter 169 internal Freq at a rate 2 Hz per second Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz 17 MOP Down Decreases the value of Parameter 169 internal Freq at a rate 2 Hz per second Default of Parameter 169 is 60 Hz 18 Timer Start Clears and starts the timer function May be used to control the relay or opto outputs 19 Counter In Starts the counter function May be used to control the relay or opto outputs 20 Reset Timer Clears the active timer 21 Reset Countr Clears the active counter 22 Rset Tim amp Cnt Clear active timer and counter 23 Logic int Logic Function input number 1 May be used to control the relay or opto outputs see Parameters 155 158 161 options 11 14 May be used in conjunction with Step Logic Parameters 240 247 Stp Logic X 24 Logic In2 Logic Function input number 1 May be used to control the relay or opto outputs see Parameters 155 158 161 options 11 14 May be used in conjunction with Step Logic Parameters 240 247 Stp Logic X 25 CurrentLmt2 When active Parameter 218 Current Limit 2 determines the drive current limit level 2 Anig Invert Inverts the scaling of analog input levels set in parameter 210 Anlg In 0 10V LO and parameter 211 Anig In
228. VES3P0Z N R 284D FVE3PO0D N R 284D FVE3POB N R 3 Phase 2 2 3 0 4 2 A 284D FVE4P2Z N R 284D FVE4P2D N R 284D FVE4P2B N R 4 0 5 0 6 6 A 284D FVE6P6Z N R 284D FVE6P6D N R 284D FVE6P6B N R S 0 4 0 5 2 3A 284A FVB2P3Z N R 284A FVB2P3D N R 284A FVB2P3B N R 50 60 Hz 0 75 1 0 5 0A 284A FVB5P0Z N R 284A FVB5PO0D N R 284A FVB5POB N R aces 15 2 0 7 6A 284A FVB7P6Z N R 284A FVB7P6D N R 284A FVB7P6B N R 0 4 0 5 14A 284A FVD1P4Z N R 284A FVD1P4D N R 284A FVD1P4B N R TN 0 75 1 0 2 3 A 284A FVD2P3Z N R 284A FVD2P3D N R 284A FVD2P3B N R 50 60 Hz 1 5 2 0 4 0 A 284A FVD4P0Z N R 284A FVD4P0D N R 284A FVD4P0B N R Tass 2 2 3 0 6 0 A 284A FVD6P0Z N R 284A FVD6P0D N R 284A FVD6P0B N R 3 0 5 0 7 6 A 284A FVD7P6Z N R 284A FVD7P6D N R 284A FVD7P6B N R 0 75 1 0 1 7A 284A FVE1P7Z N R 284A FVE1P7D N R 284A FVE1P7B N R 575V 50 60Hz 1 5 2 0 3 0 A 284A FVE3P0Z N R 284A FVE3PO0D N R 284A FVE3P0B N R 3 Phase 2 2 3 0 4 2 A 284A FVE4P2Z N R 284A FVE4P2D N R 284A FVE4P2B N R 4 0 5 0 6 6 A 284A FVE6P6Z N R 284A FVE6P6D N R 284A FVE6P6B N R Table H 26 Bulletin 284 Control Module with Sensorless Vector Performance IP67 NEMA 4 Up to 480V Input Voltage kW Hp Output 24V DC 120 V AC 240 V AC Current Control Voltage Control Voltage Control Voltage o0 Ay 0 4 0 5 2 3A 284D SVB2P3Z N R 284D SVB2P3D N R 284D SVB2P3B N R 50 60 Hz 0 75 1 0 5 0A 284D SVB5P0Z N R 284D SVB5P0D N R 284D SVB5P0B N R S 15 2 0 7 6A 284D SVB7P6Z N R 284D SVB7P6D N R 284D SVB7P6B N R 0 4 0 5 1 4A 284D SVD1P4Z N R 284D SVD1P4D
229. X At Reference User Input 1 User Input 2 X User Input 3 X User Input 4 X HOA Status X 140M On Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 11 Net Out COS Mask Parameter Number 20 This parameter sets the bit that will trigger a COS message on the network output Access Rule GET SET Data Type WORD Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Bit Function 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ee ee eee ee ee ee Pe eS TS SS TS SH eT ero X Net Output 1 Z X Net Output 2 Tes a aa l l H I I l a a a I l S Il l Op X Net Output 4 X Net Output 5 X Net Output 6 X Net Output 7 X Net Output 8 S X Net Output 9 _ X Net Output 10 X Net Output 11 _ X
230. Xxx x AMPS 193 Get Current L1 Times 10 UINT 194 Get Current L2 Times 10 UINT XO X Amps 195 Get Current L3 Times 10 UINT The following common services are implemented for the Overload Object Table C 55 Acknowledge Handler Object Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance 0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single C 28 Bulletin 283 CIP Information DeviceNet Interface Object CLASS This vendor specific object has no class attributes CODE 0x00B4 A single instance instance 1 of the DeviceNet Interface Object is supported Table C 56 DeviceNet Interface Object Instance Attribute Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Min Max Default Description 7 Get Set Prod Assy Word 0 USINT 0 116 1 Defines Word 0 of Assy 120 8 Get Set Prod Assy Word 1 USINT 0 116 5 Defines Word 1 of Assy 120 9 Get Set Prod Assy Word 2 USINT 0 116 6 Defines Word 2 of Assy 120 10 Get Set Prod Assy Word 3 USINT 0 116 7 Defines Word 3 of Assy 120 13 Get Set Starter COS Mask WORD 0 0xFFFF OXxFFFF Change of state mask for starter bits 15 Get Set Autobaud Enable BOOL 0 1 1 1 enabled 0 disabled 16 Get Set Consumed Assy USINT 0 185 160 3 121 160 162 182 187 17 Get Set Produced Assy USINT 100 190 161 52 121 161 163 181 187 189 190 19 Get Set Set To Defaults BOOL 0 1 0 0 No action 1 Reset 23 Get 1 0 Produced Size USINT 0 8
231. able Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Output Power The output power present at T1 T2 and T3 Output Power Fctr The angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and current Drive Temp Present operating temperature of the drive power section Counter Status The current value of the counter when counter is enabled Timer Status The current value of the timer when timer is enabled Parameter Number 122 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Units Display Group Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value Drive rated power X 2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 123 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 180 0 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 124 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 C Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 120 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 125 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 126 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only Stp Logic Status When Parameter 138 Speed Reference is set to 6 Stp Logic this parameter will display the current step of step logic as defined by Parameters 240 247 Stp
232. abled 16 Miscellaneous Fault This fault cannot be disabled Not available on the Bulletin 283A 14 6 Troubleshooting Table 14 4 Motor Will Not Start No Output Voltage to the Motor Display Possible Cause Possible Solutions Fault displayed See fault description See Table 14 3 addressing fault conditions Display is blank Control voltage is absent Check control wiring and proper polarity Correct if necessary Starting Two or three power phases are missing Check power system Table 14 5 Motor Rotates but does not accelerate to full speed Display Possible Cause Possible Solutions Fault displayed See fault description See Table 14 3 addressing fault conditions Starting Mechanical problems Check for binding or external loading and correct Inadequate Current Limit setting Check motor Failed control module Adjust the Current Limit level to a higher setting Replace control module Table 14 6 Motor Stops While Running Display Possible Cause Possible Solutions Fault displayed See fault description See Table 14 3 addressing fault conditions RUN LED is blank Control voltage is absent Check control wiring and correct if necessary Failed control module Replace control module Starting Two or three power phases are missing Check power system Failed control module Replace control module Table 14 7 Miscellaneous Situations Display Possible Cause Possible Solutions Motor current a
233. abled Bits 0 4 reserved Bit 5 CP Warning Bit 6 10 Warning Bit 7 reserved 115 Get Warning Status WORD Bit 8 reserved Bit 9 DN Warning Bits 10 12 reserved Bit 13 HW Warning Bits 14 15 reserved 124 Get Set Trip Enable WORD Bit enumerated trip enable word 130 Get Set Trip Reset Mode BOOL 0 manual 1 auto 131 Get Set Trip Reset Level USINT 0 100 default 75 Bit 0 IP67 151 Get Base Enclosure WORD Bit 1 NEMA 4x Bits 2 15 reserved Bit 0 Output Fuse Bit 1 Safety Monitor Bit 2 CP Fuse Detect 152 Get Base Options WORD Bits 3 7 Reserved Bit 8 10A Base Bit 9 25A Base Bit 10 15 Reserved Bit 0 Conduit 153 Get Wiring Options WORD Bit 1 Round Media Bits 2 15 Reserved Bit 0 IP67 154 Get Starter Enclosure WORD Bit 1 NEMA 4x Bits 2 15 reserved Bit 0 Full Keypad 155 Get Starter Options WORD Bit 1 Safety Monitor Bits 2 15 reserved 156 Get Last Pr Trip UINT See Parameter 61 B 26 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information Acknowledge Handler Object CLASS CODE 0x002b The following common services are implemented for the Control Supervisor Object Table B 51 Control Supervisor Object Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance 0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single No class attributes are supported for the Acknowledge Handler Object A single instance instance 1 of the Acknowledge Handler Object is supported The f
234. acement Bulletin 280 281 Installation of Base Module Lxi To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices 1 Mount Base Module with four mounting screws 2 Re install conduit fittings and wires onto terminal block 3 Tighten the terminal screws 4 Install terminal cover plate 5 Tighten four mounting screws on the terminal access cover plate 6 Install Control Module 7 Tighten the four mounting screws 8 Install motor cable comunication cables and all others connected to the inputs and outputs Figure 14 5 Bulletin 280 281 Base Module Installation Base Module Terminal Access Cover Plate Communication Cable A z Motor Cable Control Module 14 20 Troubleshooting Base Module Replacement Bulletin 283 Removal of Base Module Caid WoE To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices 1 Disconnect from power source 2 Remove all cables from Starter Module comunication cables and all others connected to the inputs and outputs 3 Loosen four mounting screws on the Control Module 4 Unplug the Control Module from the base by pulling forward 5 Loosen four mounting screws on the Terminal Access Cover Plate 6 Remove cover plate 7 Loosen terminal screws 8 Remove all wires from terminal block 9 Remove conduit fittings 10 Loosen moun
235. acts to the magnitude of the error The proportional component of the PID regulator outputs a speed command proportional to the PID error For example a proportional gain of 1 would output 100 of maximum frequency when the PID error is 100 of the analog input range A larger value for PID Prop Gain makes the proportional component more responsive and a smaller value makes it less responsive Setting PID Prop Gain to 0 00 disables the proportional component of the PID loop PID Setup l 5 Parameter 235 PID Integ Time The integral gain units of seconds affects how the regulator reacts to error over time and is used to get rid of steady state error For example with an integral gain of 2 seconds the output of the integral gain component would integrate up to 100 of maximum frequency when the PID error is 100 for 2 seconds A larger value for PID Integ Time makes the integral component less responsive and a smaller value makes it more responsive Setting PID Integ Time to 0 disables the integral component of the PID loop Parameter 236 PID Diff Rate The Differential gain units of 1 seconds affects the rate of change of the PID output The differential gain is multiplied by the difference between the previous error and current error Thus with a large error the D has a large effect and with a small error the D has less of an effect This parameter is scaled so that when it is set to 1 00 the process response is 0 1 of
236. afety Monitor Inputs WireSize 18 AWG 10 AWG 1 0 mm2 4 0 mm Tightening Torque 6 2 in lb 0 7 Nem Wire Strip Length 0 35 in 9 mm Other Rating EMC Emission levels Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions Class A Radiated Emissions Class A EMC immunity levels Electrostatic Discharge 4 kV contact and 8 kV Air Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field 10 V m Fast Transient 2kV Surge Transient 1 kV L L 2 kV L N Earth Overload Characteristics Trip Class 10 Overload Protection Zt overload protection 150 for 60 seconds 200 for 30 seconds Number of poles 3 DeviceNet Specifications DeviceNet Supply Voltage Rating DeviceNet Input Current Range 11 25V DC 24V DC Nominal 167 mA 24V DC 4 0 W 364 mA 11V DC 4 0 W External Devices powered by DeviceNet Sensors Inputs 4 50 mA total 200 mA Total w max Sensor Inputs 4 DeviceNet Input Current Surge 367 mA 24V DC 8 0 W 15 A for 250 US DeviceNet Communications Baud Rates 125 250 500 kbps Distance Maximum 500 m 1630 ft 125 kbps 200 m 656 ft 250 kbps 100 m 828 ft 500 kbps Certifications cULus File No E207834 UL 508C EN 50178 EN 61800 3 EN 60947 1 CE Marked per Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Specifications A 11 Bulletin 284 Continued Line Voltage Frequency
237. alue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 41 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 42 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 43 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 44 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 6 18 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Miscellaneous Group Keypad Mode Parameter Number 45 This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary Access Rule GET SET 0 Maintained Data Type BOOL 1 Momentary Group Misc Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Keypad Disable Parameter Number 46 This parameter disables all keypad function except for the OFF and RESET buttons Access Rule GET SET 0 Not Disabled Data Type BOOL 1 Disabled Group Misc Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Set to Defaults Parameter Number 47 This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory defaults Access Rule GET SET 0 No Operation Data Type BOOL 1 Set to Defaults Group Mi
238. ameter Number 190 Related Parameters 132 133 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 Figure 6 4 Overload Trip Curves No Derate E oO mm 5 5 2 80 gt 80 2 60 Za 6 6 40 40 m 20 2 aa a S0 G 5 0 50 75 100 125 150 175 20 6 25 50 se of P132 Motor NP Hertz se PWM Frequency Sets the carrier frequency the PWM output waveform The Figure 6 5 provides derating guidelines based on the PWM frequency setting Figure 6 5 Min Derate 20 0 7 of Pia Motor NP Hertz 100 125 150 175 200 of P133 Motor OL Current o Qo 80 Max Derate 59 0 25 50 75 100125 150 175 200 of P132 Motor NP Hertz Parameter Number 191 Related Parameters 224 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 2 0 Hz Maximum Value 16 0 Hz Default Value 4 0 Hz Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 45 Auto Rstrt Tries Parameter Number 192 Set the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart Related Parameter 155 158 161 193 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 Default Value 0 Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive 1 Set Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries to a value other than 0
239. ameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 assumes when a Access Rule GET SET trip occurs and Parameter 49 is set to 0 Data Type BOOL 0 Open Group Drive DeviceNet 1 Close S Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value Gl kl o Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 21 Drvin DNFItState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 52 defines how the Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 will respond when a DeviceNet fault occurs When set to 1 Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to DnFit Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 52 0 Go to Fault Value 1 Hold Last State Drvin DNFIt Value This parameter determines the state of Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 when a DeviceNet Fault occurs and Parameter 51 is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N Drvin DNidIState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 54 defines how the Drive Digital Input 1 4 will respond when a DeviceNet network is idle When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to DnFit Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 54 0 Go to Fault Value 1 Hold Last State StrtrDN IdlValue This parameter determines the state that Drive Digital Inputs 1 4 assume when the network is idle and Parameter 53 is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N High Speed En 0 Disabled 1 Enabled
240. ammable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Network Outputs Parameter Number 3 This parameter provides status of network outputs Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Bit Function 14 13 12 11 10 7 3 2 Net Output 0 Net Output 1 X Net Output 2 X Net Output 3 Net Output 4 Net Output 5 Net Output 6 X Net Output 7 Net Output 8 Net Output 9 X Net Output 10 X Net Output 11 X Net Output 12 X Net Output 13 X Net Output 14 Trip Status This parameter provides trip identification Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 5 Parameter Number 4 Access Rule GET Data Type Group WORD DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value Function Short Circuit Overload Phase Short Ground Fault Stall Control Power 10 Fault Overtemperature Over Current Dn
241. ammable digital input options Parameters 151 154 such as Jog Local or PID Disable Option Description 0 Disables the PID loop default setting PID Disabled 1 Selects Exclusive Control Parameter 137 PID Setpoint will be used to set the value of PID Setpoint the PID Reference 4 Selects Exclusive Control The reference word from a communication network Comm Port DeviceNet becomes the PID Reference The value sent over the network is scaled so that Parameter 135 Maximum Freq x 10 100 reference For example with Maximum Freq 60 Hz a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100 reference 5 Selects Trim Control Parameter 137 PID Setpoint will be used to set the value of the Setpnt Trim PID Reference 8 Selects Trim Control The reference word from a communication network DeviceNet Comm Trim becomes the PID Reference The value sent over the network is scaled so that Parameter 135 Maximum Freq x 10 100 reference For example with Maximum Freq 60 Hz a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100 reference Parameter 233 PID Feedback Sel is used to select the source of the PID feedback Option Description 2 The Consumed Assembly Instance 164 Default Consumed Inverter Type Distributed Comm Port Motor Controller from a communication network seepage D 9 for details on the Consumed Assembly which becomes the PID Feedback The value sent over the network is scaled so that Paramet
242. anced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 60 0 Default Value 6 38 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 170 Preset Freq 0 Parameter Number 170 173 174 177 171 Preset Freq 1 Related Parameters 138 139 140 151 152 152 172 Preset Freq 2 153 167 168 240 247 173 Preset Freq 3 250 257 174 Preset Freq 4 Access Rule GET SET 175 Preset Freq 5 Data Type UINT 176 Preset Freq 6 Group Advanced Program Group 177 Preset Freq 7 Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value See Table 6 A Table 6 A 170 177 Preset Freq Options Values 170 Default 0 0 Hz Provides a fixed frequency command value when 151 153 Digital Inx Sel is set to 171 Default 5 0 Hz 4 Preset Frequencies 172 Default 10 0 Hz 173 Default 20 0 Hz 174 Default 30 0 Hz 175 Default 40 0 Hz 176 Default 50 0 Hz 177 Default 60 0 Hz Min Max 0 0 400 0 Hz Display 0 1 Hz Input State of Digital In Input State of Digital In Input State of Digital In Frequency Accel Decel 1 1 0 Terminal 05 when 2 I 0 Terminal 06 when 3 1 0 Terminal 07 when So rc Parameter Parameter 151 4 Parameter 152 4 Parameter 153 4 Used 0 0 0 170 Preset Freq 0 Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 1 0 0 171 Preset Freq 1 Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 0 1 0 172 Preset Freq 2 Accel Time 2 Decel Time 2 1
243. ap M12 Input I O Connection 1485A M12 Aluminum Sealing Cap M12 Output I O Connection 889A RMCAP Stainless Steel Sealing Cap M12 Input I O Connection 1485AS C3 Stainless Steel Sealing Cap M12 Output I O Connection To achieve IP 67 rating sealing caps must be installed on all unused I O connections To achieve IP 69k NEMA 4X rating sealing caps must be installed on all unused I O connections Table G 4 ArmorPoint Media 889AS RMCAP Description Length Cat No ArmorPoint Bus Extension Cable including Terminating Resistor m 3 3 ft 280A EXT1 Extension Cable to connect two ArmorStart Distributed Motor m 3 3 ft 280A EXTCABLE Controllers to ArmorPoint communication protocol Table G 5 Locking Clips Description The clam shell design clips over the ArmorStart motor connector and motor cable to limit customer access Package QTY Cat No 10 280 MTR22 LC 10 280 MTR35 LC Bulletin 1738 ArmorPoint Distributed 1 0 Products Table G 5 Digital 1 0 Products Description Cat No 24V DC 8 Source Output w 8 M12 connectors 1738 OB8EM12 Accessories Table G 9 AC and Relay Products Description Cat No 24V DC 8 Source Output w 8 M8 connectors 1738 OB8EM8 24V DC Coil N O DPST Relay w 2 M12 connectors 1738 OW4M12 24V DC 4 Source Output w 4 M12 connectors 1738 OB4EM12 24V DC 4 Source Output w 4 M8 connectors 1738 OB4EM8
244. arameter would result in the masked consumed data bytes being placed starting at byte 2 in the data table This would result in the following ZIP bit assignments ZIP 16 Zone 1 Tripped ZIP 17 Zone 1 Warning ArmorStart ZIP Configuration 12 5 ZIP 18 Zone 1 Running Fwd ZIP 19 Zone 1 Running Rev ZIP 20 Zone 1 Ready ZIP 21 Zone 1 reserved ZIP 22 Zone 1 reserved ZIP 23 Zone 1 reserved ZIP 24 Zone 1 User In 1 ZIP 25 Zone 1 User In 2 ZIP 26 Zone 1 User In 3 ZIP 27 Zone 1 User In 4 ZIP 28 Zone 1 HOA ZIP 29 Zone 1 140M Stat ZIP 30 Zone 1 reserved ZIP 31 Zone 1 reserved ZIP bits appear in the list of Network Input Points that are available for use in the DeviceLogix Editor in RSNetWorx for DeviceNet as shown below List of Network Input Points Consumed Bit DeviceNet RSNetWorx for DeviceNet RQ Mw A Bae Derug nadan e Edt vew Network pete Diagnostics Took Hep Hardware a ArmorStart ArmorStart ArmorStart ArmorStart 1799 ZCIOV 1770 KFD Deveetet 281D 2810 281D Zone Cnt RS232 O y E ornare P E EA DOARE N 6 or eee ee ii i ii i a v Barcode Scanner ER k Communication A 10 11 12 13 14 62 DP to DeviceNet DSI to DeviceNet 15 E i v D Devicetet Safety v Cevicetiet to SCA Dody ENIK YD Genera Purpose tg dw lt ae P M 4 b NL Graph Spreadsheet j Master Slave Contiguntion 12 6 ArmorStart
245. ard Change Graphic Image You can change the graphic image that is associated with a HH Motor Starter 8 When asked if you would like to register this device click the Next button DeviceNet Commissioning 8 5 9 Click the Finish button After a short while RSNetWorx will update your online screen by replacing the unrecognized device with the name and icon given by the EDS file you have just regis tered Using the Node Commissioning 1 Choose Node Commissioning from the Tools menu at the Tool Inside RSNetWorx for top of the screen DeviceNet 2 Clicking on Browse will prompt a screen similar to the one below to appear Device Selection gs TCP 1 Ethernet 3 Select the ArmorStart located at node 63 and then click OK The node commissioning screen will have the Current Device Set tings entries completed It will also provide the current network baud rate in the New ArmorStart Settings area Do not change the baud rate unless you absolutely sure that this value needs to be changed 4 Enter the desired node address in the New Device Settings sec tion In this example the new node address is 5 Click Apply to apply the new node address 8 6 DeviceNet Commissioning System Configuration 5 When the new node address has been successfully applied the Current Device Settings section of the window is updated as follows If an error occurs check to make sure th
246. ard Distributed Motor Controller and the factory default input and output assembly of 160 and 161 Refer to Appendix B Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information for additional assembly formats The default input and output assemblies are shown in the table below with the corresponding data size Table 9 1 Message Type I 0 Assembly Data Size bytes Instance 160 Consumed output 1 Rx Instance 161 Produced input 2 TX 9 2 Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet If a different I O assembly is selected the data size may change It is important to understand that the I O assembly selected here will directly affect the input and output mapping in the scanner s scanlist and the amount of Programmable Logic Controller PLC memory reserved for this information Table 9 2 Example SLC Input Addressing Produced Assembly Instance 161 Default Produced Standard Distributed Motor Controller Byte 0 Bit 7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Address 1 1 23 1 1 22 1 1 21 1 1 20 1 1 19 1 1 18 1 1 17 1 1 16 Data reserved Reserved reserved Ready Running Rev Running Fwd Warning Tripped Byte 1 Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Address 1 1 31 1 1 30 1 1 29 1 1 28 1 1 27 1 1 26 1 1 25 1 1 24 Data reserved Reserved 140M On HOA User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 User In 0 Table 9 3 Example SLC Output Addressing Consumed Assembly Instance 160 Default Consumed Standard Dist
247. are not drawn to scale 56 1 2 21 39 6 1 56 59 4 2 34 40 6 1 6 25 4 mel 254 if L L it 25 4 1 0 dia em 1 0 dia 32 5 me T 32 5 1 0 dia z a 1 28 Extended Pin 3 1 28 T emale straight s S 7 8 in Male straight nae fon ok Zo 5 Example of Patchcord Example of Cordset Male 90 deg Female 90 deg Pinout and Color Code Face View Pinout 08 Male 6 pin 5 used Female 1Red Not used 4 Blank Not used 2 Black 5 Blue 2 Green GND 6 White S2 Color Code Specifications A 21 T Ports Specifications Mechanical Coupling Nut Black epoxy coated zinc or 316 Stainless Steel Housing Riteflex TPE Insert Yellow Riteflex TPE Contacts Brass gold over palladium Nickel Electrical Assembly Rating 600V 10A Environmental Enclosure Type Rating IP67 IP69K 1200 psi washdown Operating Temperature 20 90 C 4 194 F Dimensions Dimensions are approximate Illustrations are not drawn to scale 71 8 2 8 T Pin 5 V j wo oo 8 0 38 nied 1 49 4 5 0 17 places Dia 2 places Pinout and Color Code Face View Pinout 6 pin 5 used 0 8 06 62 3 Female Male 1Red Not used 4 Blank Not used Color Code 2 Black 5 Blue 3 Green GND 6 White S2 A 22 Specifications Receptacles Specifications Mechanical Receptacle Shell Male Black epoxy coated zinc diecast or
248. are of the ArmorStart for these faults The Pr FltReset Mode parameter Parameter 23 determines the Auto Resettability of only the faults that are detected on the main control board These faults are listed as param 23 autoresettable in 14 8 The Auto Resettability of the faults that are detected in the internal drive is controlled by internal drive parameters These faults are listed as drive controlled in 14 8 The following flowchart for Bulletin 284 units is provided to aid in quick troubleshooting Faulted Display Yes Define Nature of the Problem Fault Network LED LED Motor will not start See See Table 14 8 Table 14 16 See Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions 14 8 Troubleshooting Fault Definitions Table 14 8 Fault LED indications for Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers fario Possible Causes or Remedies attern armorStart Drive Controlled 1 Short The circuit breaker has tripped Try to reset the breaker If the condition continues check the power 140M wiring This fault cannot be disabled 2 Overload Fault An excessive motor load exists Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current Drive Error Codes 7 and 64 set by Parameter 133 Motor OL Current and verify Parameter 184 Boost Select setting Reduce load or extend Accel Time This fault cannot be disabled 3
249. art Source matches your configuration e Verify that Parameter 195 Reverse Disable is not prohibiting movement Drive is Flashing red Clear fault Faulted status light e Press Stop e Cycle power e Set Parameter 200 Fault Clear to option 1 Clear Faults e Cycle digital input is Parameter 151 154 Digital Inx Sel is set to option 7 Clear Fault Table 14 11 Drive Does Not Respond to Changes in Speed Command Cause s Indication Corrective Action No value is The drive e Check Parameter 112 Control Source for correct source coming form Run e Ifthe source is an analog input check wiring and use a the source of indicator is meter to check for presence of signal the command lit and e Check Parameter 102 Commanded Freq to verify correct output is command 0 Hz Incorrect None e Check Parameter 112 Control Source for correct source reference Check Parameter 114 Dig In Status to see if inputs are source is being selecting an alternate source Verify settings for selected via Parameters 151 154 Digital Inx Sel remote device or digital inputs e Check Parameter 138 Speed Reference for the source of the speed reference Reprogram as necessary Table 14 12 Motor and or Drive Will Not Accelerate to Commanded Speed Cause s Acceleration time is excessive Indication Corrective Action None Reprogram Parameter 139 Accel Time 1 or Parameter 167 Accel Time 2 Excess loa
250. ase 1 5 2 0 97 AK R2 360P500 2 2 3 0 97 AK R2 120P1K2 4 0 5 0 77 AK R2 120P1K2 Dynamic brake modules are IP00 rated The resistors listed in this table are rated for 5 duty cycle Figure G 1 Dynamic Brake Modules Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are in millimeters inches and weights are in kilograms pounds Frame A Frame B 4 30 0 61 0 7 0 18 60 0 31 0_ 2 40 59 0 0 67 T 2 3601 1 22 2 32 1 rey W 9 a 316 0 335 0 386 0 405 0 12 44 13 19 15 20 15 94 y G ba CS 0 51 L g AK R2 091P500 AK R2 047P500 AK R2 360P500 1 1 2 5 B AK R2 030P1K2 AK R2 120P1K2 2 7 6 Accessories G 5 Table G 13 IP67 Dynamic Brake Resistor Drive and Resistance Continuous Max Energy Max Braking 9 TRAE Sings Motor Size Part Number Ohms 5 Power kW Torque of Application Type 1 Application Type 2 kW Motor Braking Torque of Motor Braking Torque of Motor Duty Cycle Duty Cycle 200 240 Volt AC Input Drives 0 37 0 5 284R 091P500 91 0 086 17 293 100 46 150 31 0 75 1 284R 091P500 91 0 086 17 218 100 23 150 15 1 5 2 284R 091P500 91 0 086 17 109 100 11 109 11 400 480 Volt AC Input Drives 0 37 0 5 284R 360P500 360 0 086 17 3
251. ase voltage is present at the line side connections This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default Shorted SCR Prior to every start the unit will check all SCRs for shorts and unit load connections to the motor If there is a shorted SCR in the SMC 3 and or open load the start will be aborted and a shorted SCR open load fault will be indicated This prevents damage from phase imbalance This fault cannot be disabled Phase Rotation When enabled 3 phase input power will be verified before starting If input power phasing is detected to be incorrect the start will be aborted and a fault indicated This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default Control Power The ArmorStart has detected a loss of the control power voltage or blown control power fuse Check control voltage wiring and proper polarity Replace control voltage fuse if necessary This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 1 0 Fault This error indicates a shorted sensor shorted input device wiring input mistakes or a blown output fuse If this fault occurs the offending problem should be isolated or removed prior to restarting the system This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default Over Temperature Indicates an over temperature condition This fault cannot be disabled Phase Imbalance The ArmorStart has detected a voltage imbalance Check the power system and correct if necessary This fault cannot be disab
252. assumes when a DeviceNet Access Rule GET SET network fault occurs and Parameter 35 is set to 0 Data Type BOOL 0 Open Group User 1 0 1 Close Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 5 18 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers OutA DN IdlState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 38 defines how Output A will respond when the DeviceNet network is idle When set to 0 Output A will open or close as determined by the setting in Parameter 38 The DN Fit parameters supersede the Dn Id parameters OutA DN IdlValue This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 37 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Closed OutB Pr FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 40 defines how Output B will respond when a trip When set to 1 Output B continue to operate as command via the network When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 40 OutB Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state the Out B assumes when a trip occurs and Parameter 39 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutB DN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 42 defines how Output B will respond when a DeviceNet network fault occurs When set to 1 Output B will hold state prior to trip occurrence When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 42
253. at 17 U 1 o Instance 163 is the standard input produced assembly with Network Outputs for the Bulletin 280 281 Distributed Motor Controller Table D 28 Instance 163 Standard Produced Starter with Network Outputs Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Running Running F 0 Ready Rev Fwd Alarm Tripped User In 4 User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 140M 1 On HOA Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 17 o o o 2 i ia ee Net Out 4 Net Out 3 Net Out 2 Net Out 1 3 ani Net Out Net Out NetOut NetOut Net Out Net Out Net Out 9 15 14 13 12 11 10 Stat 4 ZIP Device Value Key Low 5 ZIP Device Value Key High Inverter Type Distributed Motor Controller Input Produced Assemblies Instance 165 is the default input produced assembly for Inverter Type Distributed Motor Controllers Table D 29 Default Produced Inverter Type Distributed Motor Controller Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 At Net Ref Net CH Running Running P Reference Status Status Ready Rev Fwd Aleut Tripped 1 Contactor Contactori 140M User In 4 User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 E On HOA Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 17 o 1 o 2 Output Frequency Low YX X Hz 3 Output Frequency High xxx x Hz If 284 Ais selected Refers to output contactor status Refers to source brake contactor status Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 11 Instance 167 is input produced assembly for Inve
254. atus of hardware inputs Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value Maximum Value 15 Default Value Bit Function 3 2 1 Input 0 X Input 1 TEn X Input 2 X Input 3 Reserved for Bulletin 284A units Network Inputs Parameter Number 2 This parameter provides status of network inputs Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 X Net Input 0 Net Input 1 _ X Net input 2 X Net Input 3 X Net Input 4 X Net Input 5 X Net Input 6 X Net Input 7 X Net Input 8 Z Net Input 9 X Net Input 10 X Net Input 11 X _ Net Input 12 S X S Net Input 13 X Net Input 14 X Net Input 15 6 4 Bulletin 284 Progr
255. ault Value 0 Zone 1 EPR Parameter Number 86 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in l Data Type UINT msec for the zone 1 consuming connection If consumed data is Group ZIP Parameters not received in 4 times this value Units msec the zone connection will time out MinimumValue 0 and Zone 1 Health will report S 1 Not Healthy Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 4 26 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Zone 2 EPR Parameter Number 87 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in Data Type UNIT msec for the zone 1 consuming connection If consumed data is Group ZIP Parameters not received in 4 times this value Units msec the zone connection will time out MinimumValue 0 and Zone 2 Health will report Maximum Value 65535 1 Not Healthy Default Value 75 Zone 3 EPR Parameter Number 88 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in l Data Type UNIT msec for the zone 1 consuming connection If consumed data is Group ZIP Parameters not received in 4 times this value Units msec the zone connection will time out MinimumValue 0 and Zone 3 Health will report Maximum Value 65535 1 Not Healthy Default Value 75 Zone 4 EPR Parameter Number 89 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in Data Type UNIT msec for the zone 1 consuming connection If consumed data is Group
256. balance The ArmorStart has detected a voltage imbalance Check the power system and correct if necessary This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 100 DNet Power Loss DeviceNet power has been lost or has dropped below the 12 volt threshold Check the state of the network power supply and look for DeviceNet media problems This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 11 Reserved Not Used 12 Reserved Not Used 13 EEPROM Fault This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable Possible causes of this fault are transients induced during EEprom storage routines If the fault was initiated by a transient power cycling should clear the problem otherwise replacement of the ArmorStart may be required This fault cannot be disabled 14 Hardware Fault This fault indicates that a serious hardware problem exists Check for a base starter module mismatch If no mismatch exists the ArmorStart may need to be replaced Hdw Fit is the factory enabled default setting This fault cannot be disabled Not available on the Bulletin 280A 281A 14 4 Troubleshooting Table 14 2 Motor Will Not Start No Output Voltage to the Motor LED Status Indication Possible Cause Possible Solutions Fault or Network Status Led indicates a See Fault Description See Table 14 1 and or Table 14 16 addressing fault fault condition conditions No Fault conditio
257. ble 430 250 the full load current of the respective motors are Motor Hp Motor FLC A 10 14 5 7 6 2 3 4 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 Group Motor Installations E 3 To design the motor circuit using a time delay fuse from NEC Table 430 52 to the rules of NEC 430 53C we start with the largest motor 10 Hp and calculate 14 A x 175 24 5 A To this we add the FLC of the 5 Hp motor 7 6 A plus the other calculated drive currents for the motors controlled by the VFD ArmorStarts The calculated drive currents are given in the following Table ge p p r Calculated a Current Appendix A 2 3 4 5 57 A 4 0 A 1 39 3 4 x 1 39 4 72 A 1 2 1 3 45 A 2 3 A 1 5 2 1x1 5 3 15A 1 2 1 3 45 A 2 3 A 1 5 2 1x1 5 3 15A 1 2 1 3 45 A 2 3 A 1 5 2 1x1 5 3 15A The total current for the fuse ampacity is calculated in the following Table Motor Hp Motor FLC A TD Fuse Current A 10 14 24 5 A 5 7 6 7 6 A 2 3 4 4 72 A 1 2 1 3 15A 1 2 1 3 15A 1 2 1 3 15A Total Fuse Current 46 4 A Therefore the standard fuse available not exceeding 46 4 A is a 40 A fuse To calculate the wire ampacity and therefore the size of the motor branch conductor we use NEC 430 24 and calculate the sum of 125 of the largest motor s FLC plus the FLC of the other motors in the group The conductor ampacity calculation is given in the following Table Motor Hp Motor
258. ble for group motor installations 1 2 Product Overview The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can operate three Operation phase squirrel cage induction motors as follows Bulletin 280 281 0 24 16 A 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC 575V AC 50 60 Hz Bulletin 283 1 1 16 A 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC or 575V AC 50 60 Hz Bulletin 284 up to 2 0 Hp 1 5 kW 240V AC up to 5 Hp 3 0 kW 480V AC and up to 5 Hp 4 0 kW 575V AC 50 60 Hz Depending on the catalog number ordered the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller will accept a control power input of 120V AC 240V AC or 24V DC Mode of Operation Bulletin 280 281 Full Voltage Start This method is used in applications requiring across the line starting in which full inrush current and locked rotor torque are realized The ArmorStart Bulletin 280 offers full voltage starting and the Bulletin 281 offers full voltage starting for reversing applications 100 Percent Voltage Time seconds Bulletin 283 Soft Start This method has the most general application The motor is raised from an initial torque value to full voltage The initial torque is adjustable to 15 25 35 or 65 of locked rotor torque The motor voltage is gradually increased during the acceleration ramp time which can be adjusted from 1 to 45 seconds 100 c Percent l Voltage I Initial Torque 1 aR Start d E Run ke Time seconds Product Overview
259. bly does not exist on the Bulletin 283A C 24 Bulletin 283 CIP Information Discrete Output Group Object No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group CLASS CODE 0x001E Object A single instance of the Discrete Output Group Object is supported It contains the following attributes Table C 49 Discrete Output Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Number of Instances USINT 4 for DOL 4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DOP instances 1 2 3 4 6 Get Set Command BOOL O idle 1 run 0 No Override go to safe state 1 Override run local logic O No override go to safe state 1 Override run local logic 104 Get Set Network Status Override BOOL 105 Get Set Comm Status Override BOOL Table C 50 Discrete Output Group Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance 0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 25 Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029 No class attributes will be supported A single instance instance 1 of the Control Supervisor Object will be supported Attribute ID HEES Name Data Type Value Rule 3 Get Set Run 1 BOOL Run output also map to DOP instance 1 Get Running 1 BOOL Get Ready BOOL 10 Get Tripped BOOL 12 Get Set Fault Reset BOOL 0 gt 1 Trip Reset 100 Get Set Keypad
260. cal Resistance to Shock Operational 15G Non Operational 30 G Resistance to Vibration Operational 1 G 0 15 mm 0 006 in displacement Non Operational 2 5 G 0 38 mm 0 015 in displacement Control Power and Safety Monitor Primary Secondary Terminal Terminal Cable Size 18 10 AWG 1 0 4 0 mm Tightening Torque 6 2 in lb 0 7 Nem Line Power Terminal cable size 16 10 AWG 1 5 4 0 mm Tightening Torque 4 5 in lb 0 5 Nem Ground Terminal cable size 18 10 AWG 1 0 4 0 mm Tightening Torque 4 5 in lb 0 5 Nem Enclosure Ratings NEMA Type 4 12 13 or NEMA Type 4X IP67 or IP69K Approximate Shipping Weight 16 8 kg 37 lbs Other Rating Conducted Radio Frequency Emissions EMC Emission levels Class A Radiated Emissions Class A EMC immunity levels Electrostatic Discharge 4 kV contact and 8 kV Air Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field 10 V m Fast Transient 2kV Surge Transient TKV L L 2 kV LN Earth Overload Characteristics 1 1 3 0A 3 0 5 5A Overload Current Range 55 7 6A 6 3 16A Trip Class 10 Trip Rating 120 of FLC setting Number of poles 3 DeviceNet Supply Voltage Rating DeviceNet Specifications Range 11 25V DC 24V DC Nominal DeviceNet Input Current 167 mA 24V DC 4 0 W 364 mA 11V DC 4 0 W External Devices powered by DeviceNet Sensors Inputs 4 50 mA total
261. caled by the process factor Parameter 199 Parameter Number 106 Related Parameter 195 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Display Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 107 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units Minimum Value F122 Maximum Value F2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 108 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units Minimum Value F122 Maximum Value F2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 109 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units Minimum Value F122 Maximum Value F2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 110 Related Parameter 101 199 215 216 Access Rule GET Data Type LINT Group Display Group Units 0 01 1 Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 33 Control Source Displays the source of the Start Command and Speed Reference Valid Start Commands for the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart are the following 2 2 wire 3 2 wire Level Sensitive 4 2 wire High Speed 5 RS485 DSI Port 9 Jog Valid Speed Commands for the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart are the following 1 Internal Frequency 4 Preset Freq X 5 RS485 DSI port 9 Jog Freq Contri In Status Status of the control terminal block
262. ccel Time 10 Seconds S Curve Setting 50 S Curve Time 10 0 5 5 Seconds Total Time 10 5 15 Seconds Boost Select Sets the boost voltage of Parameter 131 Motor NP Volts and redefines the Volts per Hz curve Active when Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode OV Hz Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5 is selected See Table 6 6 for details Parameter Number 182 Related Parameters 137 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 99 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 183 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 0 disabled 50 S Curve I ta V2 S Ouve Tim 25 Seoonds K e l lg 12S cune TIM ee Acoal Time I 25 Seconds 10 Seconds Total Time to Acoeleraie Acca Time S Cuve Tma Parameter Number 184 Related Parameters 104 131 132 185 186 187 225 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 14 Default Value 8 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 41 Table 6 6 Boost Select Options Parameter 131 Motor NP Volts Options Description 0 Custom V Hz 1 30 0 VT f f 7 35 0 VT Variable Torque Typical fan pump curves 3 40 0 VT 4 45
263. ccsceessesssseesseseseesseseeseseseeees 9 4 Sequence of Events csccsessccsseessesscecsecessesseseseeceseesassesaesesersates 9 4 Programming the 1756 ControlLogix sees eee eee eee eee 9 7 VO Mapping cccececsccecsssesessseseececsesesecsessesassesseesaeseserseaees 9 7 Explicit Messaging with ControlLogix sese eee eee eee ee eee 9 8 Setting Up the MSG Instruction sse eee eee eee eee ee 9 8 DeviceLogix Programming csscessccssessssessssceseessesessseeseesrseeeees 10 1 DeviceLogix Programming Example sss esse eee eee 10 2 ArmorStart with ArmorPoint eee ee eee eee eee 11 1 ArmorStart for the ArmorPoint Backplane sese eee eee 11 1 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity sse 11 1 ArmorPoint Backplane COMMISSIONING sese eee 11 3 Details on Using the ArmorStart Ladder Logic Configurator sues sescezvsci esvateschscscesecsesck ecsessextesseinceess ved ves ndaid 11 3 Theory Of Operation sese eee eee 11 3 I O Tres OV rvieW ccccccscssssssccssssessesssssseeessensesensessssneaesons 11 4 Logic Configuration Details sss eee eee eee 11 5 Adding Devices to the Configuration Structure sss x 11 7 Modifying Parameter Data for an ArmorStart sss 11 8 Triggering a System Wide bead sees eee 11 9 Triggering a System Wide WS ee eee e 11 10 Interpreting the Error Reptes eee eee eee eee ee 11 10 OVEIVIGW cceccccccsesssseessssessssnsessnesssesanseesessesteaesonstessseseesenseeoss 12 1 ZIP Parameter Overview cccecccccssese
264. ce that in the ControlLogix program example rung 6 is the only required logic to complete the explicit message request MSG Message Message Control i 7 A tag name must be given to the MSG function before the rest of the information can be defined In this example a tag was created with the name explicit_mess After the instruction has been named click on the gray box 2 to define the rest of the instruction The following example shows the exact data format to perform a Get Attribute Single request This message will specifically access parameter 104 Average Current See Table 9 6 on page 9 4 for additional configurations Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet 9 9 Figure 9 3 Message Configuration Jessage Configuration explicit_mess E x Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic Service Get Attribute Single v Source Element lt l Type Source Length p Bytes le leg Cies Hex Destination Element fexplicit_data lt 104 Attribute 1 Hex New Tag O Enable Enable Waiting Start Done Done Length 0 Error Code Extended Error Code I Timed Out Error Path Error Text e Message Type Select CIP Generic from pull down menu to configure an explicit message e Destination Element This is the tag name of the location you are going to place the response information In this example a tag was created with the name explicit_data e Service Type The pull dow
265. ce the ArmorStart s operator interface and the installation is located so that inadvertent operation is minimized then other installation locations with acceptable access can be provided DeviceNet Network Installation Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Installation and Wiring 2 37 The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller contains the equivalent of 30 in 0 76 m of DeviceNet drop cable s electrical characteristics and therefore 30 in of drop cable must be included in the DeviceNet drop cable budget for each ArmorStart in addition to actual drop cable required for the installation Other DeviceNet System Design Considerations The separation of the control power and DeviceNet power is recommended as a good design practice This minimizes the load on the DeviceNet supply and prevents transients which may be present on the control power system from influencing the communication controls For additional information regarding 24V DC control power system design see Appendix D The following guidelines are provided for EMC installation compliance General Notes Bulletin 284 only e The motor Cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents e Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements Many factors can influence total machine installation compliance e Using an EMI fil
266. ced Connection Size UINT 0to8 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0to8 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in ms O transition to timed out 12 Get Set Watchdog Action USINT 1 auto delete 2 auto reset 13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 8 14 Get Set Produced Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 00 30 03 15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 8 16 Get Set Consumed Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 00 30 03 Instance 3 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Bit Strobe IO Message Connection The following instance 3 attributes will be supported Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 13 Instance 4 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Change of State Cyclic I O Message Connection The following instance 4 attributes are supported Table C 31 Connection Object Instance 4 Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 0 nonexistant 1 configuring 1 Get State USINT 3 established 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT 1 1 0 Connection 0x00 Cyclic unacknowledged 0x03 Cyclic acknowledged 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT 0x10 COS unacknowledged 0x13 COS acknowledged 01101Xxxxxx 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT XXXXXX node address 10xxxxxx101 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT XXXXXX node address Ji G 0x02 acknowledged 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT OxOF unacknowledged Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0to8 Get Consumed Connection S
267. ceseessesessesessesaesessesasaesesseseusessesasenses 2 37 masi l a 3 1 Parameter Programming sese eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 3 1 Parameter Group Listing ccsssescsccsseessessessssseesecssesessesesersens 3 2 DeviGeLOgix GrOUD sssrinin e aE a 3 2 Deyi eNet Group T 3 7 Starter Protection Group sees eee eee 3 10 WS Or LO cece ses tec nesa A setts dicta 3 14 Mise Group eats sca TTT 3 17 ZIP STT 3 18 Starter DISPIAY e2esciecscciesies sve chases ee ste seats vce oda sd edatdace seecui selon eves 3 26 Stater SOLU P seis cs isd cus axe dex szedis shed ie i dia deas ssdeabsbienschicasdeedeedeedeedvees 3 27 IMTPOCUCTION T T T T R E EE 4 1 Parameter Programming sese ee eee eee ee eee ee 4 1 Parameter Group Listing cccsssecsccseecsessessesseessesssesesseeesersens 4 2 DeviC LOgix ET 4 3 DeviceNet Group Sirsi n ei 4 9 Starter Protection ea 4 12 US6r 1 0 TT 4 16 Misc EaU 4 20 ZIP PAPAMETELS cccccccecseesscscsscsssensesssseescsesessssecsnesesanssessseseeses 4 22 Soft Start DISPIAY iesse essere e N EE aae Ea eee 4 28 Soft Start 860 asses sees sees eee esse ener nenen 4 29 Chapter 5 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Chapter 6 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Chapter 7 HOA Keypad Operation Table of Contents iii IMtPOCUCTION sisii aiaei aladi 5 1 Parameter Programming sese eee eee eee eee ee eee 5 1 Parameter Group LiSting omisi
268. ch the same as in the DeviceNet Specification One notable addition to DOP behavior for the ArmorStart implementation is that Protection Fault Action and Protection Fault Value attributes determine the behavior of the DOP when the ArmorStart faults on a protection fault The following State Transition Diagram is used for DOP Instances 3 and 4 when they are not in use in a DeviceLogix Program Figure C 1 State Transition Diagram Unbound DOP Instances 3 and 4 Non Existant Power On Available Connection Transitions to Established Protection Fault DNet Fault DNet Fault Connection Transitions to Established WIN UOI DE O1d DNet Fault Protection Fault Reset Protection Fault Protection Fault DOP Instances 1 and 2 Special Behavior Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 19 Besides the sources that can affect output points 3 and 4 DOPs 1 and 2 can be affected by keypad inputs since they double as the Run Forward and Run Reverse outputs This adds complexity to their behavior so their behavior is defined in this section separately The following State Transition Diagram is used for DOP Instances 1 and 2 Figure C 2 DOP Instances 1 and 2 Non Existant Power Up Auto State Auto Init Power Off Keyad Hand Button Pressed Hand State Hand Stop Keyad Auto Button Pressed Auto State Auto Init Connection Transitions to Established Bulletin 283 CIP Informati
269. command Related Parameters 169 0 Zero MOP Ref oe l Access Rule Get Set This option clamps Parameter 169 Internal Freq at 0 0 Hz when drive is not running 1 Save MOP Ref Default Data Type UINT Reference is saved in Parameter 169 Internal Freq Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value 0 1 0 6 62 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers DB Threshold Parameter Number 263 Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for Dynamic Brake operation If the DC bus Access Rule GET SET voltage falls below the value set in this parameter the Dynamic Brake will not turn Data Type UINT on Lower values will make the Dynamic Braking function more responsive but may result in nuisance Dynamic Brake activation Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 110 0 Default Value 100 Chapter HOA Keypad Operation Introduction This chapter provides a basic understanding of the programming of the factory installed optional built in Hand Off Auto HOA keypad The HOA keypad can be programmed for maintained or momentary operation Figure 7 1 Optional HOA Keypads Available on Available on Bulletin 281 Available on Bulletin 284 Bulletin 280 281 or Bulletin 283 Keypad Description The keys found on the optional HOA keypads are described below Table 7 1 HOA Keypad Key Description HAND The Hand key
270. conds Minimum Freq Sets the lowest frequency the drive will output continuously Maximum Freq Stop drive before changing this parameter Sets the Highest frequency the drive will output continuously Start Source Stop drive before changing this parameter Sets the control scheme used to start the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart 2 2 wire 3 2 wire Level Sensitive 4 2 wire High Speed 5 RS485 DSI Port Parameter Number 133 155 158 161 189 190 198 Related Parameter 214 218 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2 Default Value Based on Drive Rating Parameter Number 134 101 102 113 135 185 186 Related Parameter 187 210 212 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 Default Value 0 0 Parameter Number 135 Related Parameter 101 102 113 134 135 178 185 186 187 211 213 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 Default Value 60 0 Parameter Number 136 Related Parameters 112 and 137 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value aj aj Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 29 Stop M
271. ction Size UINT 0to8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0to8 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in ms 0 transition to timed out 12 Get Watchdog Action USINT 1 auto delete 2 auto reset 13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 8 14 Get Produced Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 00 30 03 15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 8 16 Get Set Consumed Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 00 30 03 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 13 Instances 5 through 7 are available group 3 explicit message connections that are allocated through the UCMM The following attributes are supported Table B 31 Connection Object Instance 5 7 Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 0 nonexistant 1 Get State USINT Laser ihe 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT Paap 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT 0x83 Server Transport Class 3 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT Depends on message group and Message ID 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT Depends on message group and Message ID 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x33 Group 3 7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT OXFFFF 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in ms 1 auto delete 12 Get Watchdog Action USINT Pai PR m 13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 0 14 Get Produced Connection Path Empty 15 Get Consumed Connection Pa
272. ctivity ArmorStart devices with 10 A short ArmorStart devices with 25 A short circuit protection rating circuit protection rating a oO N e 1 Control Power Receptacle Three Phase Power Receptacle al Control Power Receptacle Three Phase Power Receptacle Installing ArmorConnect Power Media using CordSets Cord Grips for ArmorStart Devices with 10 A short circuit protection rating 3 4 in Lock Nut B gt d N L d 1in Lock Nut o s h Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Part Number 2931NM Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip U 4 a Part Number 2940NM 3 4 in Stain Relief Cord Connector 1 in Stain Relief Cord Connector Cable Range 031 aE IN g 9 Cable Range 0 31 0 56 in Used with Control Power Media Used with Three Phase Power Cordset Example Part Number Media Cordset Example Part 889N M65GF M2 Number 280 PWR22G M1 Cord Grips for ArmorStart Devices with 25 A short circuit protection rating 3 4 in Lock Nut gt gt Y lt q _ 1in Lock Nut gt ke Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Part Number 2931NM 3 4 in Stain Relief Cord Connector Cable Range 0 31 0 56 in Used with Control Power Media Cordset Example Part Number 889N M65GF M2 Thomas amp Betts Cord Grip Part Number 2942NM a 1 in Stain Relief Cord Connector Cable Range 0 70 0 95 in Used with Three Phase Power Media Cordset Example Part Number 280 PWR35G M1 Installation and Wiring
273. d Logic Ena reserved 12 11 12 12 ArmorStart ZIP Configuration Finding ZIP bits in the DeviceLogix The 64 ZIP bits are available for use in DeviceLogix programs in the Editor list of Network Input Points S Function Block Editor File Edit View Communications Tools Help aj ele of a8 Network Input Points For Help press F1 Available Function Blocks 80 Saved Select Network Input Points in the DeviceLogix editor toolbar and scroll down past the first 16 Network Inputs The 64 ZIP bits are available for use in the list as shown below List of Network Input Points Overview Fault Display Chapter 13 Diagnostics This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller and the conditions that cause various faults to occur Protection Programming Many of the protective features available with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller can be enabled and adjusted through the programming parameters provided For further details on programming refer to Chapter 3 4 5 or 6 Program and Status Parameters The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller comes equipped with a built in LED status indication which provides four status LEDs and a Reset button The LEDs provide status indication for the following e Power LED The LED is illuminated solid green when control power is present and with the proper polarity e RUN LED This LED is illuminated solid
274. d Connection ID UINT 10xxxxxx101 XXXXXX node address Initial Comm Characteristics 0x02 acknowledged a sa USINT 0x0F unacknowledged 7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0 8 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0 8 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in milliseconds Watchdog Action 0 transition to timed out ie oe USINT 1 auto delete 2 auto reset 13 Get Produced Connection Path UINT 8 Length 14 Get Produced Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 00 30 03 15 Get Consumed Connection Path UINT 8 Length Consumed Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 16 Get Set 00 30 03 D 16 Bulletin 284 CIP Information Instances 5 6 will be available Group 3 explicit message connections that are allocated through the UCMM The following attributes are supported Table D 37 Connection Object Instance 5 7 Attributes Attribute Access Name Data Value ID Rule Type State 0 non existent 1 configuring 1 Gel USINT 3 established 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT 0 Explicit Message 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT 0x83 Server Transport Class 3 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT Depends on message group and Message ID 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT Depends on message group and Message ID 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x33 Group 3 7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UIN
275. d Parameter 33 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutA DN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 36 defines how Output A will respond when a DeviceNet network fault occurs When set to 1 Output A will hold state prior to trip occurrence When set to 0 Output A will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 36 OutA DN FitValue This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when a DeviceNet network fault occurs and Parameter 35 is set to g 0 Open 1 Close OutA DN IdIState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 38 defines how Output A will respond when the DeviceNet network is idle When set to 0 Output A will open or Close as determined by the setting in Parameter 38 The DN Fit parameters supersede the Dn Id parameters OutA DN IdiValue This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 37 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 15 Parameter Number 34 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 35 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 36 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group
276. d Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 600 0 Default Value 10 0 Parameter Number 180 Related Parameters 137 181 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Setting of a Continuous Default Value 0 0 Parameter Number 181 Related Parameters 137 180 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value Drive rated amps X 1 8 Default Value Drive rated amps X 0 05 ATTENTION Volts Speed Stop Command Ramp to Stop Mode DC Injection Braking Mode Volts Speed Skp Commend e If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used e This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during braking 6 40 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers DB Resistor Sel Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables external dynamic braking Setting Min Max 0 Disabled 1 Normal RA Res 5 Duty Cycle 2 No Protection 100 Duty Cycle 3 99 x Duty Cycle Limited 3 99 of Duty Cycle S Curve Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to ramp as S Curve Time is added half at the beginning and half at the end of the ramp Figure 6 2 Example A
277. d Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 66535 Default Value 4 22 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters ZIP Parameters AutoRun Zip Parameter Number 67 Access Rule GET SET Enables ZIP data production on Data Type BOOL power up Group ZIP Parameters 0 Disable Units 1 Enable MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone Produced EPR Parameter Number 68 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in Data Type UINT msec Defines the rate at which ZIP data is produced Defaults to Group ZIP Parameters 75 msec Units msec MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 Zone Produced PIT Parameter Number 69 Access Rule GET SET The Production Inhibit Time in Data Type UINT msec Defines the minimum time between Change of State Group ZIP Parameters data production Units msec MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 15 Zone 1 MAC ID Parameter Number 70 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device Data Type USINT whose data is to be consumed for zone 1 Group ZIP Parameters Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Zone 2 MAC ID Parameter Number 71 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device Data Type USINT whose data is to be consumed for zone 2 Group ZIP Parameters Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Bulletin 283
278. d on the condition of one or both inputs based on basic logic functions such as AND OR NOR The basic logic functions can be used with or without step logic e Timer Function A digital input can be programmed for Timer Start A digital output can be programmed as a Timer Out with an output level programmed to the desired time When the timer reaches the time programmed into the output level the output will change state The timer can be reset via a digital input programmed as Reset Timer e Counter Function A digital input can be programmed for Counter In A digital output can be programmed as Counter Out with an output level programmed to the desired number of counts When the counter reaches the count programmed into the output level the output will change state The counter can be reset via a digital input programmed as Reset Counter J 2 Step Logic Basic Logic and Timer Counter Functions Step Logic Using Timed Steps To activate this function set Parameter 138 Speed Reference to 6 Stp Logic Three parameters are used to configure the logic speed reference and time for each step e Logic is defined using Parameters 240 247 Stp Logic x e Preset Speeds are set with Parameters 170 177 Preset Freq x e Time of operation for each step is set with Parameters 250 257 Stp Logic Time x The direction of motor rotation can be forward or reverse Figure J 1 Using Timed Steps Step0 Step1 Step2 Step3 Step4 Step
279. d or short None e Compare Parameter 103 Output Current with acceleration times Parameter 189 Current Limit1 force the drive into e Remove excess load or reprogram Parameter 139 current limit Accel Time 1 or Parameter 167 Accel Time 2 slowing or stopping e Check for improper setting of Parameter 184 Boost acceleration Select Speed command None e Verify Parameter 102 Commanded Freq source or value is not e Check Parameter 112 Control Source for the proper as expected Speed Command Programming is None Check Parameter 135 Maximum Freq to insure that preventing the drive speed is not limited by programming output from exceeding limiting values Torque performance None e Set motor nameplate full load amps in Parameter does not match 226 Motor NP FLA motor e Use Parameter 227 Autotune to perform Static characteristics Tune or Rotate Tune procedure e Set Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode to option OV Hz Table 14 13 Motor Operation is Unstable Cause s Motor data was incorrectly entered Corrective Action Correctly enter motor nameplate data into Parameters 131 132 and 133 Enable Parameter 197 Compensation Use Parameter 184 Boost Select to reduce boost level Table 14 14 Drive Will Not Reverse Motor Direction Cause s Digital input is not selected for reversing control Indication Corrective Action None Check Digital Inx Sel Choose correct input and
280. d to match the Armor_Start_System Max_Devices value Figure 11 6 System Array Size 2 79 Controller Main Brain Controller Tags Controller Fit Handler Power Up Haridler 09 Tasks BA MainTask amp 3 MainProgram E Unscheduled Programs E E Motion Groups 5 Ungrouped Axes Trends 2 729 Data Types 1G User Defined eh Name System_Array Description Ma Members Data Type Size 531448 Bi Device_data He ee a i Error_Structure Max_Devices _ INT se it Paramter_Data Max_Parameters INT Decimal E System_Array Ga Strings Gi Predefined Num_Devices INT Decimal HE S Device Device da Armor_Start_System Max_Parameters defaults to 262 because the maximum number of parameters in any existing ArmorStart product is 262 or less This amount can be easily be changed and doing so will also proportionally change the size of the System Array structure and the Logix memory that holds it Shown below is the array size that will also need to be changed to be 1 greater than the Armor_Start_System Max_Parameters value This is because the parameters are stored by parameter number and since there is no parameter 0 that storage location is unused Figure 11 7 Array Size Parameter B Controller Main_Brain Controller Tags A Controller Fault Handler Name Device_data Power Up Handler at 0 Tasks Description IS fa MainTask Ej amp MainProgram Ga Unscheduled
281. d when part of ArmorStart and ArmorConnect components The 280 PWRM22 M ArmorConnect cable assembly taps and 280 22 M1 panel mounted fittings with 16 AWG conductors are suitably protected when protected in the branch circuit by a 40A non time delay fuse The 280 PWRM22 M ArmorConnect Cable Assembly taps and 280 22 M1 Panel Mounted Fittings with 16 AWG conductors are suitably protected when protected in the branch circuit by a 20A time delay fuse The Listed ArmorStart motor controllers with their factory supplied motor cable carries the marked maximum ratings shown in the following table Max Ratings Voltage 480Y 277 480 600 347 600 Sym AmpsRMS 65k GSKA 30k T 30A Circuit Breaker 100 A 100 A 100 A Fuse 100 A 100 A 100 A 60 A 9 ArmorConnect 60A 60A 60A 60A Class J CC and T fuses only ArmorConnect power media and tees may only be used with fuses E 8 Group Motor Installations To summarize the design of the ArmorStart controllers in group motor applications is to be carried out as described above The user supplied line side SCPD and wiring has to meet the minimum requirements determined above however the SCPD is required to protect the ArmorStart controller s associated line side wiring only and can be increased to the values allowed in the maximum ratings tables above Because the maximum line side conductor for the ArmorStart is 10 AWG this is the maximum
282. data table E L Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 Default Value 0 Zone 3 Mask Parameter Number 80 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data mask for zone 3 Each bit represents a byte in Data Type BYTE consumed data up to8 bytes in length T a mask bit is set the corresponding Group Ap Parameters consumed data byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table ES lt Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 Default Value 0 Zone 4 Mask Parameter Number 81 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data mask for zone 4 Each bit represents a byte in Data Type BYTE consumed data up to8 bytes in length If a mask bit is set the corresponding Group IP Parameters consumed data byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table ime lt Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 Default Value 0 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 27 Zone 1 Offset Parameter Number 82 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the Data Type UINT chosen consumed data bytes for zone 1 Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 7 Default Value 0 Zone 2 Offset Parameter Number 83 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the Data Type UNIT chosen consumed data bytes for zone 2 Group ZIP
283. details of doing this are outside of the scope of these instructions but screen captures of the completed configuration are included below for reference The configuration below shows the EtherNetIP card in the Logix chassis slot 1 The 1738 AENT module is always located at slot zero in the subnet and the ArmorStart device is located in slot 2 on the subnet These slots are circled below for you reference Figure 11 3 Logix Processor 1 0 Tree a 63 1 0 Configuration E J WS ENet_Connection E 0 1738 AENT A ArmorPoint_ENet J 1 1738 OB4EM8 4 Outputs N 2 1738 MODULE ArmorStart ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity 11 5 The only configuration that the user needs to be concerned with for the ArmorPoint communication adapter is either the EtherNet IP address or the ControlNet node address Since there currently is no profile for an ArmorStart device in the DO Tree the 1738 MODULE profile needs to be used as a generic profile The standard configuration for an ArmorStart 280A 281A using this profile is shown below Figure 11 4 ArmorStart Configuration using 1738 Module Profile fal Module Properties ArmorPoint_ENet 2 1738 MOD General Connection Module Info Type 1738 MODULE Generic 1738 Module Parent ArmorPoint_ENet r Connection Parameters Assembly N Instance Size Name JArmorStar Input fi 61 je H B bit Description aj Output fiso fi 4 B bit Configuration fi 82 je 8 bit Comm Format
284. ds Start Mode Parameter Number 110 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows the Data Type BOOL installer to select either soft stop or current limit Group Soft Start Setup Units 1 Current Limit Minimum Value 0 0 Soft Start Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Current Limit Parameter Number 111 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows the Data Type UINT installer to select the value of the current limit setting of Group Soft Start Setup 150 600 of the full load amps Units of Motor FLA Minimum Value 150 Maximum Value 600 Default Value 350 2 Recommended maximum current limit setting is 350 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 31 Initial Torque Parameter Number 112 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows the Data Type USINT installer to select the initial torque value to full voltage The Group Soft Start Setup initial torque value is adjustable Units of LRT 0 90 of locked rotor torque Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 90 Default Value 60 U Recommended maximum initial torque setting is 65 Soft Stop Time Parameter Number 113 The Soft Stop function can be Pees GET SET used with applications that Data Type USINT require an extended coast to rest When enabled the voltage ramp Group Soft Start Setup down time can be selected from Units Sec 0 90 seconds The motor will stop when the motor voltage Minimum Value 0 d
285. e 40 Reserved Parameter Number 61 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Starter Protection Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 40 Default Value 0 4 16 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Warning Status Parameter Number 62 Access Rule GET This parameter warns the user of a condition Data Type WORD without faulting Group Starter Protection Setup Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bit Warning 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 X reserved X reserved X Phase Loss X reserved X reserved X Control Power X 10 Warning X reserved X Phase Imbalance DeviceNet X reserved X reserved X reserved X Hardware X reserved X reserved Not available with the Bulletin 283A User 1 0 Group Off to On Delay Parameter Number 300 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows the Data Type UINT installer to program a time duration before an input is Group User 1 0 reported ON Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 000 Default Value 0 Not available with the Bulletin 283A On to Off Delay This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before an input is reported OFF In Sink Source This parameter allows the installer to program the inputs to be sink or source
286. e This parameter maps to the Scanners Rx Size Parameter Number 15 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 216 Default Value 5 Parameter Number 16 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 216 Default Value 6 Parameter Number 17 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 8 Default Value 4 Parameter Number 18 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 8 Default Value 4 Starter COS Mask This parameter allows the installer to define the change of state conditions that will result in a change of state message being produced 13 12 11 10 Bit Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 11 Parameter Number 19 Access Rule GET SET Data Type Group WORD DeviceNet Units Minimum Value Maximum Value 0 16383 Default Value 16383 Function Tripped Warning Running Fwd Running Rev Ready Net Ctl Status Net Ref Status At Reference User Input 1 User Input 2 User Input 3 User Input 4 HOA Status Reserved for Bu letin 284A units 140M On
287. e GET SET Enables disables the Motor overload Retention function When Enabled the value Data Type BOOL held in the motor overload counter is saved at power down and restored at power up A change to this parameter setting resets the counter Group Basic Program Group 0 Disabled Default Units 1 Enabled Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Advanced Program Group 151 Digital In 1 SEL 152 Digital In 2 SEL 153 Digital In 3 SEL 154 Digital In 4 SEL Stop drive before changing this parameter Selects the function for the digital inputs Parameter Number 151 152 153 154 Related Parameters 112 114 138 140 167 168 170 173 174 177 178 179 240 247 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value See Table 6 2 for details Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 31 Table 6 2 Digital Inputs Options Options Description 0 Not Used Terminal has no function but can be read over network communication via Parameter 114 Dig In Status e When active Parameter 167 Accel Time 2 and Parameter 168 Decel Time 2 are used for all ramp rates i Acc amp Dec2 except Jog e Can only be tied to one input e When input is present drive accelerates according to the value set in Parameter 179 Jog
288. e application of DeviceLogix is only designed to handle simple logic routines DeviceLogix is programmed using simple Boolean math operators such as AND OR NOT timers counters and latches Decision making is done by combining these Boolean operations with any of the available I O The inputs and outputs used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the device hardware Hardware I O is the physical Inputs and Outputs located on the device such as push buttons and pilot lights that are connected to the ArmorStart 10 2 Using DeviceLogix DeviceLogix Programming Example There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality but some of the most common are listed below e Increased system reliability e Fast update times 1 2 ms possible e Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting e Operation independent of PLC or Network status e Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions e Critical operations can be safely shutdown through local logic The following example will show how to program a simple logic routine to interface the ArmorStart with a remote hard wired start stop station In this case the I O is wired as shown in the table Table 10 1 Hardware Bit Assignments and Description for the ArmorStart Input Table Output Table Bit Description Bit Description Input 0 Start Button Run Fwd Contactor Coil Input 1 Stop Button N A N A Input 2 N A l Input 3 N A
289. e device is prop erly powered up and connected to the network Node Commissioning 6 Click Close to exit the node commissioning tool 7 Choose Single Pass Browse from the Network menu to update RSNetWorx and verify that the node address is set cor rectly Selection of produced and consumed I O assemblies sometimes referred to as input and output assemblies define the format of I O message data that is exchanged between the ArmorStart and other devices on the network The consumed information is generally used to command the state of its outputs and produced information typically contains the state of the inputs and the current fault status of the device The default consumed and produced assemblies are shown below for additional formats refer to Appendix B page B 1 The ArmorStart default configuration varies depending on the type of starter Choosing the size and format of the I O data that is exchanged by the ArmorStart is done by choosing a consumed assembly instance number This instance number is written to the Consumed IO Assy parameter The different instances formats allow user programming flexibility and network optimization Important The Consumed and Produced IO Assy parameter values can not be changed while the ArmorStart is online with a scanner Any attempts to change the value of this parameter while online with a scanner will result in the error message Object State Conflict Using Automap
290. e eee ee D 6 Standard Distributed Motor Controller 1 0 Assemblies 008 D 8 Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output Consumed Assemblies sese sere ee essere eee D 8 Standard Distributed Motor Controller Input Produced Assemblies sse eee eee eee D 9 Inverter Type Distributed Motor Controller Input Produced Assemblies ccccecsccceecseessssseseessesssseeeserseeeasens D 10 PowerFlex Native Assembies sse eee eee D 11 Connection Object CLASS CODE Ox0005 sees eee D 13 Discrete Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0008 sse D 18 Discrete Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0009 D 19 Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements 004 D 20 DOP Instances 3 and 4 Special Behavior sese D 20 DOP Instances 1 2 9 and 10 Special Behavior D 22 Parameter Object CLASS CODE OxOO0F ee D 24 Parameter Group Object CLASS CODE 0x0010 ee D 27 Discrete Input Group Object CLASS CODE Ox001D ss D 28 Discrete Output Group Object CLASS CODE 0X001E D 29 Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029 sese D 30 Acknowledge Handler Object CLASS CODE 0x002b D 31 vii viii Table of Contents Appendix E Group Motor Installations Appendix F 24V DC Control Design Considerations Appendix G Accessories Appendix H Renewal Parts Appendix PID Setup Appendix J Step Logic Basic Logic and Timer Counter
291. e set to an option other than 0 PID Disabled Exclusive Control and Trim Control are two basic configurations where the PID loop may be used Exclusive Control In Exclusive Control the Speed Reference becomes 0 and the PID Output becomes the entire Freq Command Exclusive Control is used when Parameter 232 PID Ref Sel is set to option 1 2 3 or 4 This configuration does not require a master reference only a desired set point such as a flow rate for a pump PID Ref 1 PID Loop KN PID Prop Gain PID PID L gt PID Diff Rate i _ Error Output PID Fdbk PID Integ Time gt ere LHS PID Enabled Example e Ina pumping application the PID Reference equals the Desired System Pressure set point e The Pressure Transducer signal provides PID Feedback to the drive Fluctuations in actual system pressure due to changes in flow result in a PID Error value e The drive output frequency increases or decreases to vary motor shaft speed to correct for the PID Error value e The Desired System Pressure set point is maintained as valves in the system are opened and closed causing changes in flow e When the PID Control Loop is disabled the Commanded Speed is the Ramped Speed Reference PID Feedback Pressure Transducer Signal Pump i i i 5 _ 6 U O LJ LI PID re Desired System Pressure
292. e time the software interprets this as a no button pressed condition The only exception to this rule is if multiple buttons are pressed and one of them is the OFF button If the OFF button is pressed in combination with any combination of other buttons the processor will interpret this the same as if the OFF button were pressed by itself 7 6 Notes HOA Keypad Operation Establishing a DeviceNet Node Address Node Commissioning using Hardware Chapter 8 DeviceNet Commissioning This chapter refers to Bulletin 280D 281D 283D and 284D products Refer to Chapter 11 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity for commissioning the Bulletin 280A 281A 283A and 284A products The ArmorStart is shipped with a default node address of 63 and Autobaud enabled Each device on a DeviceNet network must have a unique node address or MAC ID which can be set to a value from 0 to 63 Keep in mind that most DeviceNet systems use address 0 for the master device Scanner and node address 63 should be left vacant for introduction of new slave devices The ArmorStart offers two methods for node commissioning as shown below The node address for a device can be changed using software or by setting hardware switches that reside on the back of the control module While both methods yield the same result it is good practice to choose one method and deploy it throughout the system The ArmorStart is shipped with the
293. ectivity Figure 11 1 Connectivity Diagram for One ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller a LA O L w T o B 2 MQ g v When connecting to the Bulletin 1738 ArmorPoint Distributed I O product a network adapter and at least one ArmorPoint Digital Output Digital Input Analog AC and Relay product or Specialty product must be selected The ArmorPoint Distributed I O can accommodate up to 63 modules per network node The cable that connects the ArmorPoint Distributed I O product to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller is the Bulletin 280A EXT1 The 280A EXT1 includes an ArmorPoint bus extension cable and a network terminating resistor The network terminating resistor must be connected to the ArmorPoint Interface Out connector ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity Figure 11 2 Connectivity Diagram for Two ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers If an additional ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller is to be connected the Bulletin 230A EXTCABLE will be required A maximum of two ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can be connected to the Bulletin 1738 Distributed I O The Bulletin 280A EXTCABLE is connected from the ArmorPoint Interface Out on the first unit to the ArmorPoint Interface In on the second unit The network terminating r
294. efault Value 0 Warning Statuss This parameter warns the user of a condition without faulting Parameter Number 62 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 5 16 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Bit Warning 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 Reserved Reserved X Reserved X Reserved X Reserved X Control Power X 10 Warning X Reserved X Phase Imbalance X DeviceNet X Reserved X Reserved X Reserved X Hardware X Reserved X Reserved U Not available on Bulletin 284A units User 1 0 Group Off to On Delay Parameter Number 30 This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported Access Rule GET SET ON Data Type UINT Group User 1 0 Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 000 Default Value 0 On to Off Delay Parameter Number 310 This parameter allows the installer to program a time duration before being reported Access Rule GET SET OFF Data Type UINT Group User 1 0 Units ms Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65 000 Default Value 0 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 17
295. elects if the Data Type BOOL keypad operation is maintained or momentary Group Misc Units 0 Maintained Minimum Value 0 1 Momentary Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Keypad Disable Parameter Number 46 Access Rule GET SET This parameter disables all Data Type BOOL keypad function except for the OFF and RESET buttons Group Misc Units O Not Disabled Minimum Value 0 1 Disabled Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Set to Defaults Parameter Number 47 Access Rule GET SET This parameter if set to 1 will set Data Type BOOL the device to the factory defaults Group Misc O No Operation Units 1 Set to Defaults Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Base Enclosure Parameter Number 56 Access Rule GET Indicates the Armorstart Base Data Type WORD unit enclosure rating S Group Misc Bit 0 IP67 Units Bit 1 Nema 4X MinimumValue 0 Bit 2 15 Reserved Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 3 18 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters ZIP Parameters Base Options Parameter Number 57 Access Rule GET Indicates the options for the Data Type WORD ArmorStart Base unit Group Misc Bit 0 Output Fuse Units Bit 1 Safety Monitor MinimumValue 0 Bit 2 CP Fuse Detect S Bits 3 7 Reserved Maximum Value 65535 Bit 8 10A Base Bit 9 25A Base Default Value 0 Bit 10 15 Rese
296. emain in communication loss before implanting the option selected in Parameter 205 Comm Loss Action Comm Format This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Language This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Anlg Out Setpnt When parameter 165 Analog Out Sel is set to option 18 this sets the percentage of the analog output desired Parameter Number 203 Parameter Number 204 Parameter Number 205 Related Parameters 115 137 206 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 206 Related Parameters 115 205 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 1 sec Maximum Value 60 0 sec Default Value 15 0 sec Parameter Number 207 Parameter Number 208 Parameter Number 209 Related Parameter 165 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 100 0 Default Value 0 0 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 49 Anlg In 0 10V Lo Stop drive before changing this parameter Sets the analog input level that corresponds to parameter 134 Minimum Freq if a 0 10V input is used by parameter 138 Speed Reference Figure 6 6
297. epending on output of the parameter checksum algorithm 10 Get Set Heartbeat Interval USINT In seconds Default 0 Message Router CLASS CODE 0x0002 The following common services are implemented for the Identity Object Table B 6 Identity Object Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x05 No Yes Reset 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single No class or instance attributes are supported The message router object exists only to rout explicit messages to other objects B 4 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information DeviceNet Object CLASS CODE 0x0003 The following class attributes are supported for the DeviceNet Object Table B 7 DeviceNet Object Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value m A single instance instance 1 of the DeviceNet Object is supported The following instance attributes are supported 1 Table B 8 DeviceNet Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Set Node Address USINT 0 63 0 125K 1 250K 2 Get Set Baud Rate USINT 2 500K 3 1MO Allocation Info Structure of F x 5 Get Allocation Choice BYTE a Ga a Master Node Addr USINT 255 unallocated 8 Get MAC ID Switch Value BOOL 0 63 1M baud is only available on the Bulletin 280A 281A Allocation_byte Bit 0 Explicit messaging Bit 1 Polled 1 0 Bit 4 COS 1 0 Bit 5 Cyclic 1
298. eq 0 3 When a Digital Input is set to Accel 2 amp Decel 2 and the input is active that input overrides the settings in this table Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued Jog Accel Decel Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is issued DC Brake Time Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor Refer to Parameter 181 DC Brake Level Parameter Number 178 Related Parameters 135 151 152 179 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 240 0 Default Value 10 0 Parameter Number 179 Related Parameters 151 152 178 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 600 0 Default Value 10 0 Parameter Number 180 Related Parameters 137 181 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 90 0 Default Value 0 0 5 42 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers DC Brake Level Parameter Number 181 Defines the maximum DC brake current in amps applied to the motor when Related Parameters 137 180 Parameter 137 Stop Mode is set to either Ramp or DC Brake Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1A Minim
299. er 135 Maximum Freq x 10 100 Feedback For example with Maximum Freq 60 Hz a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100 Feedback PID Deadband Parameter 238 PID Deadband is used to set a range in percent of the PID Reference that the drive will ignore Example e PID Deadband is set to 5 0 s The PID Reference is 25 0 e The PID Regulator will not act on a PID Error that falls between 20 0 and 30 0 PID Setup PID Enabled PID Output _ a foe l Freq Cmd PID Preload The value set in Parameter 239 PID Preload in Hertz will be pre loaded into the integral component of the PID at any start or enable This will cause the drive s frequency command to initially jump to that preload frequency and the PID loop starts regulating from there P D Pre load Value PID Pre load Value gt 0 PID Limits Parameter 230 PID Trim Hi and Parameter 231 PID Trim Lo are used to limit the PID output and are only used in trim mode PID Trim Hi sets the maximum frequency for the PID output in trim mode PID Trim Lo sets the reverse frequency limit for the PID output in trim mode Note that when the PID reaches the Hi or Lo limit the PID regulator stops integrating so that windup does not occur PID Gains The proportional integral and differential gains make up the PID regulator e Parameter 234 PID Prop Gain The proportional gain unitless affects how the regulator re
300. er Current Dnet Power Loss Internal Comm DC Bus Fault EEprom HW Fault Restart Retries X Misc Fault Not available with the Bulletin 284A Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 13 Pr Fault Reset This parameter resets the Protection Fault on a transition 0 gt 1 StrtrDN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 27 defines how the starter will respond when a DeviceNet fault occurs When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to DnFit Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 27 StrirDN FitValue This parameter determines if the starter will be commanded in the event of a DevceNet fault 0 OFF 1 0N StrtrDN IdIState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 29 defines how the starter will respond when a DeviceNet network is idle When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to DnFit Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 29 0 Go to Idle Value 1 Hold Last State StrirDN IdlValue This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 28 is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N Parameter Number 25 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 26 Access Rule GET SET Da
301. er In 2 User In 1 HOA 1 140M On Stat Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved o 0 2 Net Out 8 Net Out 7 Net Out 6 Net Out 5 Net Out 4 Net Out 3 Net Out 2 Net Out 1 Logic Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out Enabled 15 14 13 12 11 10 ZIP CCV Low ZIP CCV High 0 Ready Net Out 9 Available on the Bulletin 280A 281A Table B 27 Instance 190 is the 1999 ZCIO Native Format Produced Assembly Instance 190 1799 ZCIO Native Format Produced Assembly Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit3 Bit 2 Bit1 Bit 0 Running Running s 0 Ray Fwd Warning Tripped Input3 Input2 Input1 Input 0 1 Reserved Logic Reserved 140M On HOA Enabled 2 Reserved ran aea Run Rev Run Fwd 3 Reserved 4 Net Out 8 Net Out 7 Net Out 6 Net Out 5 Net Out 4 Net Out 3 Net Out 2 Net Out 1 5 ZIP CCV Low 6 ZIP CCV High B 10 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information Connection Object CLASS CODE No class attributes are supported for the Connection Object 0x0005 Multiple instances of the Connection Object are supported instances 1 2 and 4 from the group 2 predefined master slave connection set instances 5 and 6 are available through explicit UCMM connections Instance 1 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Explicit Message Connection The following instance attrib
302. er contains ESD electrostatic discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing the assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures refer to Publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding against Electrostatic Discharge or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks Caid An incorrectly applied or installed controller can damage components or reduce product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to do this may result in personal injury and or equipment damage Precautions for Bulletin 284 Applications ATTENTION FRENTE The drive contains high voltage capacitors which drive contains high voltage capacitors which take time to discharge after removal of mains supply Before working on drive ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs R S T L1 L2 L3 Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death Darkened display LEDs are not an indication that capacitors have discharged
303. er determines the state that Output A assumes when a DeviceNet network fault occurs and Parameter 35 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutA DN IdlState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 38 defines how Output A will respond when the DeviceNet network is idle When set to 0 Output A will open or close as determined by the setting in Parameter 38 The DN Fit parameters supersede the Dn Id parameters OutA DN IdiValue This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 37 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Closed OutB Pr FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 40 defines how Output B will respond when a trip When set to 1 Output B continue to operate as command via the network When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 40 Parameter Number 35 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 36 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 37 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 38 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 De
304. er in the device whose data is being consumed for zone 4 Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Device Value Key Parameter Number 98 Access Rule GET SET This value is produced in the last 2 bytes of data when one of the ZIP assemblies is Data Type UINT chosen for data production Group ZIP Parameters Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Zone Ctrl Enable Parameter Number 99 Access Rule GET SET Global enable for ZIP peer to peer messaging This parameter must be disabled Data Type BOOL before any changes to the ZIP configuration for the device can be made 0 Disable Group ZIP Parameters 1 Enable Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value Gl kl o Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 31 Display Group Output Freq Output frequency present at T1 T2 T3 Commanded Freq Value of the active frequency command Displays the commanded frequency even if the drive is not running Output Current Output Current present at T1 T2 T3 Output Voltage Output Current present at T1 T2 T3 DC Bus Voltage Present DC Bus voltage level Parameter Number 101 Related Parameters 102 110 134 135 138 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Val
305. erload Class 15 7 3 Overload Class 20 Maximum vaus 2 Default Value 1 OL Reset Level Parameter Number 108 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows the Data Type USINT installer select the Thermal Capacity which an overload can Group Starter Setup be cleared Units FLA Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 75 3 28 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Notes Introduction Chapter 4 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function Parameter Programming Each Distributed Motor Controller type will have a common set of parameters followed by a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type Refer to Chapter 8 DeviceNet Commissioning for instructions in using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to modify parameter settings Refer to Chapter 11 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity for instructions to modify parameter settings when using the Bulletin 283A with the ArmorPoint distributed I O products Important Resetting the Factory Default Values Parameter 47 Set to Defaults allows the installer to reset all parameters to the factory default values It also resets the MAC ID to its factory default after DeviceNet Power is cycled if switches are set gt 63 Important Parameter setting changes downloaded to the ArmorStart take effect immediately even during a running status Important Parameter setting changes
306. ers 5 19 Parameter Number 42 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 43 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 44 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 5 20 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Miscellaneous Group Keypad Mode Parameter Number 45 This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary Access Rule GET SET 0 Maintained Data Type BOOL 1 Momentary Group Misc Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Keypad Disable Parameter Number 46 This parameter disables all keypad function except for the OFF and RESET buttons Access Rule GET SET 0 Not Disabled Data Type BOOL 1 Disabled Group Misc Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Set to Defaults Parameter Number 47 This parameter if set to 1 will set the device to the factory defaults Access Rule GET SET 0 No Operation Data Type BOOL 1 Set to Defaults Group Misc Units _ Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Base Enclosure Parameter Number 56 Access Rule GET Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure
307. ery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage 14 2 Troubleshooting ATTENTION A ATTENTION A Prep This drive contains electrostatic discharge ESD _ drive contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures refer to Allen Bradley Publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system Bulletin 280 281 Troubleshooting The following flowchart for Bulletin 280 281 units is provided to aid in quick troubleshooting Yes Cne No y Yy Fault Network Motor will not LED LED Start See See See Table 14 1 Table 14 12 Table 14 11 Blink Pattern Troubleshooting 14 3 Table 14 1 Fault LED Indications for Bulletin 280 and 281 ArmorStart Definitions Distributed Motor
308. esesssecsecssssssceesseseseessesetseees 12 1 Data Te Hien 12 3 Data CONSUMPTION cccccceecssesesceessecessesesessecessessesesseseseesersaseess 12 3 Chapter 13 Diagnostics Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Appendix A Specifications Table of Contents Mapping Consumed Data to the DeviceLogix Data Table 12 3 Finding ZIP bits in Device Logix Edot sese eee eee ee 12 12 OVEIVICW E 13 1 Protection Programming ses esse eee eee ee eee eee 13 1 IST eai UTE 13 1 Clear RAUNT T 13 2 TEA E e o a E A A aaa ahaha 13 2 Fault Definitions anat ccc ccceeceecssessessessesseseesesessecsecsesecseseesseees 13 3 Short Circuit oo eee ceecsecsecssesssssesseseeeeessessessecsessessesseees 13 3 Overload TTD oo eecceeesccsseecseesescseseecsessesesessesessassnsessesesereers 13 3 Phase LOSS aisicc 13 3 Phase SHOW 2 25 eeea iecleciechesiacnnthssdesdebhiahviedceterewlehed 13 3 Shorted SG 4 2sics levies esse tele RL AAs As enced a Ta da 13 3 Ground FaUlt TT 13 3 Stall TTT 13 3 Control POWER ccsiesceseesecsccscsiesicssseisejennctactactactisdacnaseadeadsadsadondee 13 3 S AUN is TT 13 3 Over T Mpe rature c ccccsesssceseessessssssseseseessesssesessesaesers 13 4 Phase IMBALANCE cccccsssssssccesssessesssessessesnseessseseesesaesoss 13 4 Over CUON arna AANER 13 4 DeviceNet Power LOSS sese eee eee eee 13 4 Internal Communication Fault sees eee 13 4 DC BUS FaUl z coreeana 13 4 EEPROM Fault at RS 22 Ta r STs aar
309. esign Considerations F 3 Figure F 3 Centrally Located Power Supply Distribution 24V DC 14 AW Power Distance 1 g E Section 1 Conveyor ral D1 Distance 2 Conveyor Conveyor gt E aron 9 ction Conveyor gt aca g ction Conveyor NL ate Section ral Section 2 ns Y ns gif a if a if ai a 14 AW D2 Supply Distance 3 Distance 4 Distance 5 Equivalent Distance Run 1 50 ft 15 m 50 ft 15 m 2 150 ft 46 m Run 2 0 ft 0m 3 50 ft 15 m 2 50 ft 15 m 150 ft 46 m Therefore both runs can be 14 AWG The controllers on section 3 are considered to have no length since the power supply is very close to the units 24V DC Power Supply Capacity Sizing The 24V DC power supply current rating required for an ArmorStart system can be calculated by the following formula I supply N 25A K 3A J 3A L 425A M No of 280 281 ArmorStart units with the HOA plus 283 ArmorStart units No of ArmorStart 280 281 and 283 that will be commanded start simultaneously K 1 minimum No of ArmorStart 280 281 and 283 that will be commanded to hold in at any time No of 284 ArmorStart Units Current drawn by customer loads Example Calculation of 24V DC Power Supply Requirements Size the power supply for Example 1 Conveyor Line Configuration Each starter has a 1A customer load I supply
310. esistor is connected to the ArmorPoint Interface Out on the second unit ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity 11 3 ArmorPoint Backplane Commissioning Establishing a Backplane Node Address Backplane node addresses are established automatically by the ArmorPoint system on power up Node addresses for the backplane modules are allocated from left to right starting at address 1 Note The rotary address switches are ignored on the starter module when using the ArmorPoint backplane Note When using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet with the 280A 281A 283A and 284A ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers DO NOT use the node commissioning outlined in Chapter 8 DeviceNet Commissioning Details on Using the ArmorStart Ladder Logic Configurator The ArmorStart Ladder Logic Configurator is a ladder logic routine File Name ArmorStart_ConfiguratorACD designed so that under program control the entire product family of the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can be configured easily from a Logix based controller The family of ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers includes the following Bulletin Numbers 280A 281A 283A and 284A The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can be networked over ControlNet or EtherNetIP when on the appropriate ArmorPoint backplane The ladder logic file is designed to be merged into an existing ladder logic file or it can be used as the basic program and other logic can be added to it Thi
311. espective Stp Logic Time x parameter TIMED 2 Step if Logic In1 is active logically true TRUE 3 Step if Logic In2 is active logically true TRUE 4 Step if Logic In1 is not active logically false FALSE 5 Step if Logic In2 is not active logically false FALSE 6 Step if either Logic In1 or Logic In2 is active logically true OR 7 Step if both Logic In1 and Logic In2 is active logically true AND 8 Step if neither Logic In1 or Logic In2 is active logically true NOR J 6 Step Logic Basic Logic and Timer Counter Functions Setting Description Logic 9 Step if Logic In1 is active logically true and Logic In2 is not active logically false XOR A Step if Logic In2 is active logically true and Logic In1 is not active logically false XOR b Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In1 is active logically true TIMED AND C Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In2 is active logically true TIMED AND d Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In1 is not active logically false TIMED OR E Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In2 is not active logically false TIMED OR F Do not step OR no jump to so use Digit 0 logic IGNORE Setting Description Logic 0 Skip Step jump immediately SKIP 1 Step based on the time programmed in the respective Stp Logic Time x parameter TIMED 2 Step if Logic In1 is active logically true TRUE 3 Step if Logic In2 is active logical
312. et Number of Instances USINT 4 for DOL 4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DOP instances 1 2 3 4 6 Get Set Command BOOL O idle 1 run 104 Get Set Network Status Override BOOL Over ide go to safe S ate 1 0verride run local logic 105 Get Set Comm Status Override BOOL oo oyermide go to safe state 1 0verride run local logic The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Group Object Table B 49 Discrete Output Group Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Class Instance 0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 25 Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029 No class attributes are supported The following instance attributes are supported A single instance instance 1 of the Control Supervisor Object will be supported Table B 50 Control Supervisor Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Set Run 1 BOOL These Run outputs also map to DOP instances 1 4 Get Set Run 2 BOOL and 2 7 Get Running 1 BOOL Status of RUN FWD contact 8 Get Running 2 BOOL Status of RUN REV contact 9 Get Ready BOOL Device not faulted 10 Get Tripped BOOL Device faulted 12 Get Set Fault Reset BOOL 0 gt 1 Trip Reset 100 Get Set Keypad Mode BOOL 0 Maintained 1 Momentary 101 Get Set Keypad Disable BOOL 0 Not Disabled 1 Dis
313. et Power Loss Internal Comm DC Bus Fault EEprom HW Fault Restart Retries Not available with the Bul etin 284A Indicates DB1 Comm Fault for Bulletin 284 Misc Fault 6 6 Starter Status ParameterNumber 5 This parameter provides the status of the starter Access Rule Default Value Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 5 GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Function Tripped Warning Running Fwd Running Rev Ready Net Ctl Status Net Ref Status At Reference DrvOpto1 DrvOpto2 Keypad Jog Keypad Hand HOA Status 140M On Contactor 1 Refers to Source Brake contactor status Refers to Output contactor status Contactor 2 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 7 Dnet Status Parameter Number 6 This parameter provides status of the DeviceNet connection Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 31 Default Value 0 Function 15 Exp Cnxn 10 Cnxn E
314. et its baud rate to the same provided network traffic exists At least one node with an established baud rate must exist on the network for autobaud to occur 0 Disable 1 Enable Consumed 1 0 Assy This parameter selects the format of the I O data consumed Enter a Consumed 1 0 assembly instance number to select a data format Produced 1 0 Assy This parameter selects the format of the 1 0 data produced Enter a Produces 1 0 assembly instance number to select a data format Prod Assy Word 0 This parameter is used to build bytes 0 1 for produced assembly 120 Parameter Number 10 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 11 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 187 Default Value 160 Parameter Number 12 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 190 Default Value 161 Parameter Number 13 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 116 Default Value 4 10 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Produced Assy Word 1 This parameter is used to build bytes 2 3 for produced assembly 120 Prod Assy Word 2 This parameter is used to build bytes 4 5 for produced assembly 120 Prod A
315. eter Number 227 Related Parameters 225 226 228 229 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 0 Important Used when motor is uncoupled from the load Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor during this procedure Wes ee Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure To guard against possible injury and or equipment damage it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding If the Autotune routine fails an F80 SVC Autotune fault is displayed Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 55 IR Voltage Drop Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator Flux Current Ref Value of amps for full motor flux PID Trim Hi Sets the maximum positive value that is added to a PID reference when PID trim is used PID Trim Lo Sets the minimum positive value that is added to a PID reference when PID trim is used PID Ref Select Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables PID mode and selects the source of the PID reference Valid PID Ref Select for the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart are the following 0 PID Disable 1 PID Setpoint 4 Comm Port 5 Setpnt Trim 8 Comm Trim Parameter Number 228 Related Parameters 227 Access Rule
316. everse disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Flying Start En Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual RPM 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Compensation Enables disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability 0 Disabled 1 Electrical Default Some drive motor combinations have inherent instabilities which are exhibited as non sinusoidal motor currents This setting attempts to correct this condition 2 Mechanical Some motor load combinations have mechanical resonances which can be excited by the drive current regulator This setting slows down the current regulator response and attempts to correct this condition 3 Both SW Current Trip Enables disables a software instantaneous within 100 ms current trip Process Factor Scales the output frequency value displayed by Parameter 110 Process Display Output Freq x Process Factor Process Display Parameter Number 195 Related Parameters 106 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 196 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 197 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units
317. eviceNet Assembly Object Instance Attributes ute Type Description 3 Consumed Required ODVA Consumed Instance 52 Produced Required ODVA Produced Instance 120 Produced Custom Parameter Based Word Wise Assembly 160 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for DOL and SoftStart units 161 Produced Default Produced Instance for DOL and SoftStart units Standard Consumed Instance for DOL and SoftStart with Network 162 Consumed Inputs 163 Produced Standard Produced Instance for DOL and SoftStart with Network Outputs 164 Consumed Default Consumed Instance for Inverter type units 165 Produced Default Produced Instance for Inverter type units 166 C nsum d Standard Consumed Instance for Inverter type units with Network Inputs 167 Produced Standard Produced Instance for Inverter type units with Network Outputs 170 Consumed Power Flex Native Format Consumed Instance 171 Produced Power Flex Native Format Produced Instance 181 Produced User Inputs 182 Consumed Consumed Network Bits a k a Network Inputs 183 Produced Produced Network Bits a k a Network Outputs 184 Produced Trip Status Bits 185 Produced Starter Status Bits 186 Produced DeviceNet Status Bits 187 Consumed Starter Control Bits 188 Consumed Drive Control Bits 189 Produced Warning Status Bits 190 Produced 1799 ZCIO Bits D 6 Bulletin 284 CIP Information Cus
318. fault Value 0 Parameter Number 39 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutB Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state the Out B assumes when a trip occurs and Parameter 39 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutB DN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 42 defines how Output B will respond when a DeviceNet network fault occurs When set to 1 Output B will hold state prior to trip occurrence When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 42 OutB DN FitValue This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when a DeviceNet network fault occurs and Parameter 41 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutB DN IdlState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 44 defines how Output B will respond when the DeviceNet network is idle When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by the setting in Parameter 44 The DN Fit parameters supersede the Dn Id parameters OutB DN IdlValue This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 43 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 17 Parameter Number 40 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum V
319. first equating a particular ArmorStart to a device number in the data array Again this device number is determined by the Logix slot of the communication card ETherNetIP or CNet address of the communication adapter and subnet slot of ArmorStart The optional Armor_Descriptor field is extremely handy for doing a functional lookup of the device number Once the device number is determined the parameter number to be modified must be obtained The best way to do this is to go to the ArmorStart user manual and get the parameter number of the value to be modified The parameter numbers all start with 1 and are numbered sequentially to the last parameter number The user manual is important because it will thoroughly describe each parameter for example whether or not a parameter is writable and what the parameter limits interpretation are Once the device and parameter number is obtained the next step is to modify the configuration data for that parameter The following screen capture shows the data array and particularly the parameter 8 for Device 0 Figure 11 11Data Array Armor_start_System Device 0 actly nee Device_data H Armor_start_System Device 0 Num_Parameters 108 Decimal INT E Armor_start_System Device 0 Logix_Slot 1 Decimal SINT Ee Armor_start_System Device 0
320. for Inverter Type Distributed Motor Controllers with network inputs Table D 25 Instance 166 Consumed Inverter Type Starter with Network Inputs Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 User Out User Out Fault 0 B A Jog Rev Jog Fwd Reset Run Rev Run Fwd 1 Drive In Driveln Driveln Drive In Decel Decel Accel Accel 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1 Comm Frequency Command Low xxx x Hz Comm Frequency Command High xxx x Hz NetIn8 amp NetIn7 NetIn6 NetIn5 NetIn4 NetIn3 NetIn2 Netin 1 Net In 16 NetIn 15 Netin 14 NetIn 13 NetIn 12 Netin 11 NetIn10 NetIn9 Standard Distributed Motor Controller Input Produced Assemblies El ow Pp o Instance 52 is the required input produced assembly defined in the DeviceNet Motor Starter Profile Table D 26 Instance 52 ODVA Starter ae aS Running Faut D 10 Bulletin 284 CIP Information Instance 161 is the default input produced assembly for the Bulletin 280 281 Distributed Motor Controller Table D 27 Instance 161 Default Produced Standard Distributed Motor Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 _ _ _ Running Running 0 Ready Rav Fwd Tripped 140M HOA User In 3 User In 2 User ln 1 User In 0 1 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved On St
321. g Bit 6 10 Warning ite Get WORD Bit 7 reserved Bit 8 reserved Bit 9 DN Warning Bits 10 12 reserved Bit 13 HW Warning Bits 14 15 reserved 124 Get Set Trip Enable WORD Bit enumerated trip enable word 130 Get Set Trip Reset Mode BOOL 0 manual 1 auto 131 Get Set Trip Reset Level USINT 0 100 default 75 150 Get Set High Speed Ena BOOL 0 Disable 1 Enable Base Enclosure Bit 0 IP67 151 Get WORD Bit 1 NEMA 4x Bits 2 15 reserved Base Options Bit 0 Output Fuse Bit 1 Safety Monitor Bit 2 CP Fuse Detect 152 Get WORD Bits 3 7 Reserved Bit 8 10A Base Bit 9 25A Base Bit 10 15 Reserved Wiring Options Bit 0 Conduit 153 Get WORD Bit 1 Round Media Bits 2 15 Reserved Starter Enclosure Bit 0 IP67 154 Get WORD Bit 1 NEMA 4x Bits 2 15 reserved 156 Get Last PR Trip UINT Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 31 The following common services are implemented for the Control Supervisor Object Table D 59 Control Supervisor Object Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name Ox0E Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Set_Attribute_Single Acknowledge Handler Object CLASS CODE 0x002b No class attributes are supported for the Acknowledge Handler Object A single instance Instance 1 of the Acknowledge Handler Object is supported The following instance attributes are supported Table D 60 Acknowledge Handler Instance Attributes Attribute Access Data Value ID
322. ge and reversing applications Bulletin 283 for solid state motor control and Bulletin 284 for variable frequency AC drives applications The ArmorStart offers a robust IP67 NEMA Type 4 enclosure design which is suitable for water wash down environments The ArmorStart products are also offered with NEMA Type 4X rating suitable for environment wash down with caustic chemical used in the food and beverage industry The wash down rating is 1000 psi for the NEMA Type 4X rated devices The modular plug and play design offers simplicity in wiring the installation The quick disconnects for the I O communications and motor connections reduce the wiring time and eliminate wiring errors The ArmorStart offers as standard four DC inputs and two relay outputs to be used with sensors and actuators respectively for monitoring and controlling the application process The ArmorStart s LED status indication and built in diagnostics capabilities allow ease of maintenance and troubleshooting The optional Hand Off Auto HOA keypad configuration allows local start stop control at the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller offers short circuit protection per UL508 and IEC 60947 The ArmorStart is rated for local disconnect service by incorporating the Bulletin 140 Motor Protector as the local disconnect eliminating the need for additional components The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers are suita
323. gix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 6 5 4 3 a fa J Tripped a les llen le a laz lel M Warning Running Fwd _ lez S lea lN la Reserved a a eX ee Ready as a a ee ee ee Ee ee Net Ctl Status SS 2S Sa aS a aS ee eS Net Ref Status SSS SSeS SS Se eae At Speed E ee le Starting lele lee les ls N l ee ee ee l Stopping x J Bypass x J J l l Keypad Hand le lel X le HOA Status X j 140M On x J J J J J J l Reserved X j J J J J Contactor 2 U Refers to source brake contactor status Bit DNet Status This parameter provides status of the DeviceNet connection Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 7 15 14 13 12 Parameter Number 6 Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Function Explicit Connection 1 0 Connection Explicit Fault 1 0 Fault 1 0 Idle Reserved ZIP 1 Cn
324. h the intent to use an inverse time circuit breaker from NEC Table 430 52 to the rules of NEC 430 53C we start with the largest motor 10 Hp and calculate 14A x 250 35 A to this we add the FLC of the 5 Hp motor 7 6 A plus the other calculated drive currents for the motors controlled by the VFD ArmorStarts The calculated drive currents are given in the following table Motor Hp Motor FLC A Inverse Time CB Current A 10 14 35A 5 7 6 7 6A 2 3 4 4 89 A 1 2 1 3 15A 1 2 1 3 15A 1 2 1 3 15A Total Fuse Current 56 94 A Therefore for the standard inverse time circuit breaker available not exceeding 56 94 A we need to use a 50 A inverse time circuit breaker This design will also allow the use of 8 AWG for the motor branch circuit Continuing than and applying NEC 430 28 the individual motor tap conductors can be sized down to 1 3 the ampacity of the trunk and following the restrictions in NFPA 79 7 2 10 4 and Table 7 2 10 4 for this case where we have used a 50 A inverse time circuit breaker NFPA 79 Table 7 2 10 4 indicates that the smallest tap conductor can now be 14 AWG See the above figure for this Group motor circuit design The above method instructs one on applying ArmorStart controllers using group motor installation rules Because of the ArmorStart s capability rating and Listing this method provides the minimum branch circuit wire and SCPD protection size that can be used The Armor Start ha
325. hardware rotary switches set to a value of 99 If the switches are set to a value 64 or above the device will automatically configure itself to the software node address If the switches are set to a value of 63 or less the device will be at the node address designated by the switch configuration To set an address using the hardware rotary switches simply set the switches to the desired node address and cycle power to the unit The Device will re start at the new address Figure 8 1 Rotary Node Address Configuration See Detail A Detail A 8 2 DeviceNet Commissioning Node Commissioning using Software To set the node address of the ArmorStart using software or other handheld tools leave the hardware switches in there default position 99 or insure that they are set to something greater than 63 With the hardware switches set use the software or handheld tool to change the address To begin the configuration of ArmorStart using software execute the RSNetWorx software and complete the following procedure You must use RSNetWorx Revision 3 21 Service Pack 2 or later
326. he NEC and NFPA 79 In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation and where the exposed cable is continuously supported and protected against physical damage using mechanical protection such as struts angles or channels Type TC tray cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type MC Metal Clad cable and is identified for such use with the marking Type TC ER Exposed Run shall be permitted between a cable tray and the utilization equipment or device as open wiring The cable shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 1 8 m 6 ft and installed in a good workman like manner Equipment grounding for the utilization equipment shall be provided by an equipment grounding conductor within the cable Historically cable meeting these crush and impact requirements were designated and marked Open Wiring Cable so marked is equivalent to the present Type TC ER and can be used While the ArmorStart is intended for installation in factory floor environments of industrial establishments the following must be taken into consideration when locating the ArmorStart in the application Cables including those for control voltage including 24V DC and communications are not to be exposed to an operator or building traffic on a continuous basis Location of the ArmorStart to minimize exposure to continual traffic is recommended If
327. he cursor When a connection can be made the tip of the RSL function will also turn green Click the on Input and the line will be drawn from Input 0 to the Set Input of the RSL function Note If this was not a valid connection one of the pin tips would have turned red rather than green Left double clicking on the unused portion of the grid or pressing the Esc key at any time will cancel the connection process File Edit View Communications Tools Help cof ae Fell cl sonore ono ol a S AIS B Logic Editor File Edit View S i 11 From the toolbar Click on the Discrete Input button and select Input 1 from the pull down menu This is the remote stop button based on the example I O table 12 Place the input to the left of the RSL function 13 Connect the input to the reset input of the RSL latch Communications Tools Help e Sl alal NSS R RIN EINS 10 4 Using DeviceLogix 14 15 16 B Logic Editor File Edit View Climunications Tools Help 19 20 21 22 23 From the toolbar Click on the Discrete Output button and select Run Fwd from the pull down menu Run Fwd is the relay controlling the coil of the contactor Click OK Move the cursor into the grid and place the Output to the right of the RSL function block Connect the output of the RSL function block to Run Fwd Click on the Verify button located in the toolbar or select
328. ia Factory installed receptacles are provided for connectivity to both three phase and control power media Motor Cable With every ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller a 3 meter unshielded 4 conductor cordset is provided with each unit as standard If the optional EMI filter is selected for Bulletin 284 units a shielded 4 conductor cordset is provided with each unit as standard ArmorStart with DeviceNet Network Capabilities The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller delivers advanced capabilities to access parameter settings and provides fault diagnostics and remote start stop control DeviceNet is the communication protocol provided with the ArmorStart Bulletin 280D 281D 283D or 284D Distributed Motor Controller ArmorStart with ArmorPoint 1 0 The Bulletin 280A 281A 283A and 284A ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller allows connectivity to the ArmorPoint backplane The ArmorPoint I O system can communicate using DeviceNet ControlNet or EtherNet communication protocols In addition to the different network protocols the ArmorPoint Distributed I O products allow the I O capability to be expanded beyond the standard two outputs Two dual key relay output connectors are supplied as standard The outputs are sourced from control power A1 and A2 LED status indication is also provided as standard for each output When using the ArmorPoint backplane a maximum of two ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers can be connected t
329. ies secscscesecesseatescusivaessesd asisieaseessessdsscstds tse vesSuvecveeses 1 8 ArmorStart with DeviceNet Network Capabilities sss 1 8 ArmorStart with ArmorPoint U sss ss eee eee eee eee 1 8 DeviGe Logix esros sgeine isinden ansa iniiai iiaia 1 9 Peer to Peer Communications ZIP sss sese ss sese eee esse 1 9 Factory Installed Options cccccescesscssesssssssssssscssssesesensesees 1 9 Safety Monitor Option cceesceesccssccssessseceseesesesseseserseees 1 9 Optional HOA Keypad Configuration sss 1 9 HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function sss eee eee 1 10 Source Brake COntactOr ccesscecsccssccsssssseseseessesseeseserees 1 10 EMI lT 1 10 DYNAMIC Brak ccccccsesesssessssessseessssssessesseserstecceeseesenseeess 1 10 Dynamic Brake Resistor cccccceessssessseseesseessesesseeeseeeens 1 11 Control Brake Contactor sss sees eee eee 1 11 OUTPUT CONMTAGOF os2sessesceseesecsseveuecticcyesesteeds antveasusscessesrndeseyscs 1 11 Shielded Motor Cable sss 1 11 0 1OV Analog INDUt cece cccccecseesssseecsesescssesetesesersens 1 11 IEIZ 2 1 UnpacKINg T 2 1 Sisil 2 1 ONMO T 2 1 General Precautions eee eee eee ee eee 2 2 DIMENSIONS sizscessc scvaeseestetescaieessgesessececsesteed aiea aaan aa 2 3 Bulletin 280 281 PTT 2 3 Bulletin 283s ccisccescthihstic a eiaa iad sei ie aie Peels 2 9 Buletin 284 ss occ seccecos tes ces is dus due ap4 acs cat abt acs ht astesdssdahde verdes 2 14 T E R A E A 2 24 Po
330. ill open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 36 OutA DN FitValue This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when a DeviceNet network fault occurs and Parameter 35 is set to g 0 Open 1 Close OutA DN IdIState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 38 defines how Output A will respond when the DeviceNet network is idle When set to O Output A will open or close as determined by the setting in Parameter 38 The DN Fit parameters supersede the Dn Id parameters OutA DN IdiValue This parameter determines the state that Output A assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 37 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutB Pr FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 40 defines how Output B will respond when a protection trip occurs When set to 1 Output B continue to operate as command via the network When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 40 Parameter Number 35 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 36 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 37 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximu
331. in 283 CIP Information Table C 1 Bul 283 Distributed Motor Controller Product Codes and Name Strings ae Dea Cera Current Control Name String Type Type ode Rating Power 133 22 0x11 3A 24V DC ArmorStart 283D 3A 24V DC 133 22 0x12 9A 24V DC ArmorStart 283D 9A 24V DC 133 22 0x13 16A 24V DC ArmorStart 283D 16A 24V DC 133 22 0x14 19A 24V DC ArmorStart 283D 19A 24V DC 133 22 0x15 3A 120V AC ArmorStart 283D 3A 120V AC 133 22 0x16 9A 120V AC ArmorStart 283D 9A 120V AC 133 22 0x17 16A 120V AC ArmorStart 283D 16A 120V AC 133 22 0x18 19A 120V AC ArmorStart 283D 19A 120V AC 133 22 0x19 3A 240V AC ArmorStart 283D 3A 240V AC 133 22 Ox1A 9A 240V AC ArmorStart 283D 9A 240V AC 133 22 0x1B 16A 240V AC ArmorStart 283D 16A 240V AC 133 22 0x1C 19A 240V AC ArmorStart 283D 19A 240V AC 133 22 0x21 3A 24V DC ArmorStart 283D 600V 3A 24V DC 133 22 0x22 9A 24V DC ArmorStart 283D 600V 9A 24VDC 133 22 0x23 16A 24V DC ArmorStart 283D 600V 16A 24VDC 133 22 0x24 19A 24V DC ArmorStart 283D 600V 19A 24VDC 133 22 0x25 3A 120V AC ArmorStart 283D 600V 3A 120VAC 133 22 0x26 9A 120V AC ArmorStart 283D 600V 9A 120VAC 133 22 0x27 16A 120V AC ArmorStart 283D 600V 16A 120V AC 133 22 0x28 19A 120V AC ArmorStart 283D 600V 19A 120V AC 133 22 0x29 3A 240V AC ArmorStart 283D 600V 3A 240V AC 133 22 0x2A 9A 240V AC ArmorStart 283D 600V 9A 240V AC 133 22 0x2B 16A 240V AC ArmorStart 283D 600V 16A 240V AC 133
332. into a file in the SLC 500 processor using the file copy instruction COP The following example shows the exact data format to perform a Get Attribute Single request This message will specifically access parameter 104 Average Current The first three words are shown segmented into two bytes corresponding to the upper and lower bytes shown in the explicit message request table Table 9 4 Note The data in the table is shown in a hexadecimal format Therefore parameter 104 decimal is equal to 68 hexadecimal 0x68 Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet 9 5 Table 9 7 Get_Attribute_Single Request TXID Command Port Size Service MAC ID Class Instance Attribute Word 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 N7 x 01 01 00 06 OE 04 000F 0068 0001 Table 9 8 Get Attribute_Single Response TXID Status Port Size Service MAC ID Data Word 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 N7 x 01 XX 00 06 OE 04 X Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet Figure 9 2 SLC Example of Ladder Logic Program Rung 0 The 1747 SDN scanner module will map output data from its scanner output MO and discrete outputs to each node only when it is in the nun mode This is accomplished by setting bit 0 of the 1747 SDN command word word 0 Scanner Run Bit 0 1 9 1747 SDN Rung 1 If tit B3 0 0 is momentanly set the Run Fwd tums ON provided that a binh condition does not exist This will start the forward contactor Set out
333. inued intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 2 Dimensions for IP67 NEMA Type 4 with ArmorConnect Connectivity LA pi me N m 2 aes Alisn Bradiey Allen Gradisy CAUTION CAUTION i L Q Z ArmorStart with a 10 A ArmorStart with a 25 A Short Circuit Protection Rating Short Circuit Protection Rating 6 25 Cl 2 68 Cl 2 68 Installation and Wiring 2 5 Dimensions for Bulletin 280 281 Continued 1 CONDUIT OPENING 0 75 CONDUIT OPENING Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 3 Dimensions for NEMA Type 4X with Conduit Entrance 287 5 11 32 Ste r 02 Lo 12 150 LS fe MOTOR CONNECTION 185 7 3 M22 CORDSET e a MOTOR CONNECTION 243 9 57 M35 CORDSET gt 373 14 69
334. ion Tripped Reserved Running Fwd Warning Ready Net Ctl Status Net Ref Status At Reference Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 HOA Status 140M On 4 12 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Net Out COS Mask Parameter Number 20 Access Rule GET SET This parameter sets the bits that Data Type WORD will trigger a COS message when network outputs change state Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Bit Function 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 2 1 _ S Net Output 0 X Net Output 1 X Net Output 2 Net Output 3 mR X Net Output 4 X Net Output 5 2 X Net Output 6 X Net Output 7 Net Output 8 Net Output 9 X Net Output 10 X Net Output 11 X am Net Output 12 X Net Output 13 X Net Output 14 Dnet Voltage Parameter Number 21 Access Rule GET This paramete
335. it 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Running Rev Running Fwd Warning Tripped Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Input 0 1 Reserved Logic Enable Reserved 140M On HOA 2 Reserved User Out B User OutA Reserved Run Fwd 3 Reserved 4 Net Out 8 Net Out 7 Net Out 6 Net Out5 NetOut4 NetOut3 Net Out 2 Net Out 1 5 ZIP CCV Low 6 ZIP CCV High Standard Distributed Motor Controller 1 0 Assemblies Standard Distributed Motor Controller IO Assemblies are available on all Starter Types Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output Consumed Assemblies Standard Distributed Motor Controller Input Produced Assemblies Bulletin 283 CIP Information c 9 Table C 21 Instance 3 is the required output consumed assembly defined in the DeviceNet Motor Starter Profile Instance 3 ODVA Starter Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 T Table C 22 Instance 160 is the default output consumed assembly for Standard Distributed Motor Controllers Instance 160 Default Consumed Standard Distributed Motor Controller Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 User Out User Out Fault oe E ane Table C 23 Instance 162 is the standard output consumed assembly with Network Inputs Instance 162 Standard Consumed Starter with Network Inputs Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 User Out User Out E Fault B A Reset Run Fwa 1 Netin 8 Netin 7 NetIn6 Netin 5
336. ize UINT 0to8 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in ms 0 transition to timed out 12 Get Watchdog Action USINT 1 auto delete 2 auto reset 13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 8 14 Get Produced Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 00 30 03 15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 8 16 Get Set Consumed Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 00 30 03 C 14 Bulletin 283 CIP Information Instances 5 through 7 are available group 3 explicit message connections that are allocated through the UCMM The following attributes are supported Table C 32 Connection Object Instance 5 7 Attributes Attribute Access ID Rule Name Data Type Value 0 nonexistant 1 configuring 1 Get State USINT 3 lt established 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT Peale Message 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT 0x83 Server Transport Class 3 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT Depends on message group and Message ID 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT Depends on message group and Message ID 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x33 Group 3 7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT OXFFFF 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in ms 01 auto delete 12 Get Watchdog Action USINT 03 deferred dalate 13 Get Produced Connection Path UINT 0 Length 14 Get Produced Connection Path Empty 15 Get Consumed Connection Path UINT 0 Length 16 Get Consumed Connectio
337. l logic to override the absence of an 1 0 connection 0 Disable 1 Enable Autobaud Enable When this parameter is enabled the device will attempt to determine the network baud rate and set its baud rate to the same provided network traffic exists At least one node with an established baud rate must exist on the network for autobaud to occur 0 Disable 1 Enable Consumed 1 0 Assy This parameter selects the format of the I O data consumed Enter a Consumed 1 0 assembly instance number to select a data format Produced 1 0 Assy This parameter selects the format of the 1 0 data produced Enter a Produces 1 0 assembly instance number to select a data format Parameter Number 9 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 10 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 11 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 187 Default Value 160 Parameter Number 12 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 190 Default Value 161 3 8 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Prod Assy Word 0 This parameter is used to build bytes 0 1 for produced assembly
338. lated aramerers 187 188 225 E Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 100 0 Default Value 25 0 Brake Frequency Parameter Number 187 Sets the frequency where break frequency is applied when Parameter 184 Boost palais Parameters 131 132 134 135 184 185 Select 0 Custom V Hz and Parameter 225 Torque Perf Mode OV Hz 186 188 225 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 400 0 Hz Default Value 15 0 Hz Maximum Voltage Parameter Number 188 Sets the highest voltage the drive will output Related Parameters 104 185 186 187 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1V AC Minimum Value 20V AC Maximum Value Drive Rated Volts Default Value Drive Rated Volts Current Limit 1 Parameter Number 189 Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs Related Parameters 133 218 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 1A Maximum Value Drive rated amps X 1 8 Default Value Drive rated amps X 1 5 6 44 Motor OL Select Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection Setting 0 2 select the derating factor for It overload function 0 No Derate 1 Min Derate 2 Max Derate Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Par
339. led 100 DNet Power Loss DeviceNet power has been lost or has dropped below the 12V threshold Check the state of the network power supply and look for DeviceNet media problems This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 11 Internal Communication This fault occurs when communication between the main board and the SMC 3 is lost This fault cannot be disabled 12 Heatsink Over temperature JAM This fault indicates either an over temperature fault or a JAM fault The heatsink is monitored by thermistors and the SCR temperature is tracked by an algorithm When a maximum temperature is reached by either the microcomputer switches off the SMC and indicates a fault code of 12 A fault code of 12 could also indicate a JAM fault This fault cannot be disabled 13 EEPROM Fault This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable Possible causes of this fault are transients induced during EEprom storage routines If the fault was initiated by a transient power cycling should clear the problem otherwise replacement of the ArmorStart may be required This fault cannot be disabled 14 Hardware Fault This fault indicates that a serious hardware problem exists Check for a base stater module mismatch or a blown source brake fuse If no mismatch exists or the source brake fuse is OK the ArmorStart may need to be replaced Hdw Fit is the factory enabled default setting This fault cannot be dis
340. leshooting Procedures The following table identifies possible causes and corrective actions when troubleshooting ArmorPoint Backplane failures using the NETWORK STATUS LED Table 14 17 ArmorPoint Backplane Troubleshooting Proceduresd Definition Possible Causes Off The device has not completed the initialization is not on an active network or may not be powered up Check to make sure the product is properly wired and configured on the network Flashes green red off While waiting to detect the network baud rate the LED will flash this pattern about every 3 seconds If the product stays in this state it means that there is no set baud rate Ensure that at least one device on the network has a set baud rate Solid Green The device is operating in a normal condition and is on line but has no connection to another device No action Required Flashing Green The ArmorPoint module cannot successfully establish a connection on the backplane The wrong connection parameter for the ArmorStart was entered in the Module Properties page in RSLogix 5000 or the 1 0 Tree was not properly configured Flashing Red The ArmorPoint module has stopped Check control power connections to the ArmorPoint communicating over the backplane with Module and ArmorStart ArmorsStart Solid Red Backplane media issue Check backplane media and ArmorStart backplane cable connections Flashing Red and
341. load requirements and Parameter 198 SW Current Trip setting Current Trip has been exceeded F64 Drive Overload 2 Drive rating of 150 for 1 min or 23 Reduce load or extend Accel Time 200 for 3 sec has been exceeded F70 Power Unit 2 Failure has been detected in the 24 Cycle power drive power section 25 Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared F80 SVC Autotune The autotune function was either 26 Restart procedure cancelled by the user or failed Troubleshooting 14 11 No Fault Description Action F81 Comm Loss RS485 DSI port stopped 27 Turn off using Parameter 205 Comm Loss Action communicating 28 Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared F100 Parameter The checksum read from the board 29 Set Parameter 141 Reset To Defaults to option 1 Reset Defaults Checksum does not match the checksum calculated F122 1 0 Board Fail Failure has been detected in the 30 Cycle power drive control and 1 0 section 31 Replace starter module if fault cannot be cleared See Table 14 8 for internal drive fault Types Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions Table 14 10 Motor Does Not Start Cause s Indication Corrective Action No output None Check the power circuit voltage to e Check the supply voltage the motor e Check all fuses and disconnects Check the motor e Verify that the motor is connected properly e Verify that I O Terminal 01 is active e Verify that Parameter 136 St
342. log In Loss Selects drive action when an input signal loss is detected Signal loss is defined as an analog signal less than 1V The signal loss event ends and normal operation resumes when the input signal level is greater than or equal to 1 5V If using a 0 10V analog input set parameter 210 Anlg In 0 10V Lo to a minimum of 20 i e 2 volts Parameter Number 221 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 222 Related Parameters 210 211 232 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Miniman vae See Table 6 7 for details Maximum Value Default Value Description F29 Analog Input Loss Uses P037 Stop Mode Drive runs at zero speed reference Drive runs at minimum frequency Drive runs at maximum frequency Table 6 7 Options 0 Disabled Default 1 Fault F29 2 Stop 3 Zero Ref 4 Min Freq Ref 5 Max Freq Ref 6 Int Freq Ref 10V Bipolar Enbl Enables disables bipolar control In bipolar mode direction is commanded by the sign of the reference Options 0 Unipolar In Default 0 10V only 1 Bipolar In 10V Drive runs at internal frequency Parameter Number 223 Related Parameters 138 211 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value Maximu
343. lt Bit 0 and Bit 1 set all other bits pecess rule GENSET clear Bit0 Security Enable 1 Enable Data Type BYTE data security Bit1 C0S Cnxn 1 Consume Group ZIP Parameters DNet Group 2 COS messages Bit2 Poll Cnxn Units 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs MinimumValue 0 Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Maximum Value 255 Strobe Response msgs Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Default Value 3 Response messages Zone 3 Control Parameter Number 92 Zone 3 Control Word Default Bit O and Bit 1 set all other bits Access Hule BENEI clear Bit0 Security Enable 1 Enable Data Type SE data security Bitt COS Cnxn 1 Consume Group ZIP Parameters DNet Group 2 COS messages Bit2 Poll Cnxn Units 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs MinimumValue 0 Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Maximum Value 255 Strobe Response msgs Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Default Value 3 Response messages Zone 4 Control Parameter Number 93 Zone 3 Control Word Default Bit O and Bit 1 set all other bits Access Rule GENEI clear Bit0 Security Enable 1 Enable Data Type BYTE data security Bitl COS Cnxn 1 Consume Group ZIP Parameters DNet Group 2 COS messages Bit2 Poll Cnxn Units 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs MinimumValue 0 Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Maximum Value 255 Strobe Response msgs Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Default Value 3 Response messages Bulletin 2
344. lue 8 Default Value 2 Starter COS Mask Parameter Number 19 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows the Data Type WORD installer to define the change of state conditions that will result in Group DeviceNet a change of state message Units being produced Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 16383 Default Value a ja U Bulletin 280 products 2 Bulletin 281 products Bit Function 13 12 11 10 6 5 4 2 1 _ Tripped _ _ X Warning X Running Fwd l Running Rev _ Ka X Ready a X Kas E Reserved _ X 5 Reserved _ a E Reserved Input 0 _ zZ Input 1 ka X Input 2 X E Input 3 X HOA Status X 140M On 3 10 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Net Out COS Mask Parameter Number 20 Access Rule GET SET This parameter sets the bits that Data Type WORD will trigger a COS message when network outputs change state Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Bit Function 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 5 4 2 1 _ S
345. ly dictated by the required motor Hp their locations and the practical concerns of wire cable routing on the equipment It should be noted that Group motor installation are designed to use the actual motor Hp and current ratings in NEC Table 430 250 and not the ArmorStart controller s rating This allows for the possible standardization of ArmorStart controllers in an installation An application can be designed using 5 Hp controllers for all motors between say 5 and 2 Hp and 1 Hp controllers for motors 1 Hp and less without having to oversize the wiring and short circuit protection that would result from using the larger ArmorStart controller s rating In the case of using the Bulletin 284 VFD ArmorStart the actual full load current of the motor needs to multiplied by the ratio of the drive s ratio of rated input current to output current to arrive at the actual full load current For example in the case of a 2 Hp VFD ArmorStart being used to control a 1 Hp 2 1 A 460 V motor the full load amperes to be used for the Group motor calculation would be the 2 Hp VFD ArmorStart s Rated Input Current Rated Output Current x 1 Hp motor s rated full load current 5 7 A 4 0 A 2 1 A 3 0 A The following is a group motor example calculation for a 460 V distributed application that requires two 10 Hp DOL ArmorStart controlling 10 Hp and 5 Hp motors and four 2 Hp VFD ArmorStarts controlling one 2 Hp motor and three 1 Hp motors From NEC Ta
346. ly true TRUE 4 Step if Logic In1 is not active logically false FALSE 5 Step if Logic In2 is not active logically false FALSE 6 Step if either Logic In1 or Logic In2 is active logically true OR 7 Step if both Logic In1 and Logic In2 is active logically true AND 8 Step if neither Logic In1 or Logic In2 is active logically true NOR 9 Step if Logic In1 is active logically true and Logic In2 is not active logically false XOR A Step if Logic In2 is active logically true and Logic In1 is not active logically false XOR b Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In1 is active logically true TIMED AND C Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In2 is active logically true TIMED AND d Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In1 is not active logically false TIMED OR E Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In2 is not active logically false TIMED OR F Use logic programmed in Digit 1 IGNORE www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Copyright 2008 Rockwell Automati
347. m needs to be of sufficient capacity and the wire gauge of sufficient size to handle the maximum current required The total capacity of the system also includes any additional loads connected to the ArmorStart I O outputs max 2 A for each ArmorStart The maximum distance can still be utilized if each of the ArmorStarts that will be commanded to start simultaneously is wired directly back to the dc power supply or if a 100ms delay between consecutive starts can be insured When more than one ArmorStart is commanded to pick up at the same time the length of each wire segment in the system should be multiplied by the number of units that can simultaneously pick up through that section of wire This calculation represents the equivalent starting distance The sum of the equivalent starting distances should be less than the maximum distance allowed for the selected gauge Example 1 Conveyor Line Configuration We want to wire up five sections of Conveyor See Figure F 1 Each section of conveyor has a conveyor motor and a diverter motor Let s assume that they are 50 feet apart The conveyor motors may be started in sequence but it is possible that all 5 of the diverter motors could start simultaneously All controllers are 280 ArmorStart units with the HOA keypad Let us assume that the conveyor motors are sequenced on and are running before the diverters start F 2 24V DC Control Design Considerations Figure F 1 gt l Conve
348. m Value Default Value Gl kl o Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 53 Var PWM Disable Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform defined by Parameter 191 PWM Frequency 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Disabling this feature when low frequency condition exists may result in IGBT stress and nuisance tripping Torque Perf Mode Stop drive before changing this parameter Enables disables sensorless vector control operation 0 V Hz 1 Sensrls Vect Motor NP FLA Set to the motor nameplate full load amps Parameter Number 224 Related Parameters 191 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 225 Related Parameters 184 185 186 187 227 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 226 Related Parameters 227 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 A Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2 Default Value Drive rated amps 6 54 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Autotune Stop drive before changing this parameter Provides an auto
349. m Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 38 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 39 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group User 1 0 Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 OutB Pr FitValue This parameter determines the state the Out B assumes when a protection trip occurs and Parameter 39 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close OutB DN FitState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 42 defines how Output B will respond when a DeviceNet network fault occurs When set to 1 Output B will hold state prior to trip occurrence When set to 0 Output B will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 42 OutB DN FitValue This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when a DeviceNet network fault occurs and Parameter 41 is set to g 0 Open 1 Close OutB DN IdIState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 44 defines how Output B will respond when the DeviceNet network is idle When set to 0 Output B will open or Close as determined by the setting in Parameter 44 The DN Fit parameters supersede the Dn ld parameters OutB DN IdiValue This parameter determines the state that Output B assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 43 is set to 0 0 Open 1 Close
350. m Value 400 0 Hz Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 102 Related Parameters 101 113 134 135 138 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Hz Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 103 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 01 Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 104 Related Parameters 131 184 188 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1V AC Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 230V 460V or 600V AC Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 105 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1V DC Minimum Value S Based on Drive Rating Maximum Value Default Value Read Only Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 23 Drive Status Present operating condition of the drive Bit 0 running Bit 1 Forward Bit 2 Accelerating Bit 3 Decelerating Fault 1 Code A code that represents drive fault The code will appear in this parameter as the most recent fault that has occurred Fault 2 Code A code that represents a drive fault The code will appear in this parameter as the second most recent fault that has occurred Fault 3 Code A code that represents a drive fault The code will appear in this parameter as the third most recent fault that has occurred Process Display The output frequency scaled by the proce
351. m output current allowed before current limiting occurs This parameter is Related Parameters 133 151 152 153 154 189 only active if Parameters 151 152 153 and 154 Digital Inx Sel is set to 25 Access Rule GET SET Current Lmt2 and is active Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 1A Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 1 8 Default Value Drive rated amps x 1 5 Skip Frequency Parameter Number 219 Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate Related Parameters 220 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 400 0 Hz Default Value 0 0 Hz Skip Frq Band Parameter Number 220 Determines the brand width around Parameter 219 Skip Frequency Parameter Related Parameters 219 220 Skip Frquency is split applying 1 2 above and 1 2 below the actual skip Access Rule GET SET frequency A setting of 0 0 disables this parameter Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 30 0 Hz Default Value 0 0 Hz Figure 6 7 Frequency Command Senor aZ A Drive Output requency Se ee ee Skip Frequency K r Band y Time 6 52 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Stall Fault Time Sets for the fault time that the drive will remain in stall mode before a fault is issued 0 60 sec Default 1 120 sec 2 240 sec 3 360 sec 4 480 sec 5 Fit Disabled Ana
352. made in a configuration tool such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet do not take effect in the ArmorStart until the installer applies or downloads the new settings to the device 4 2 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Parameter Group Listing The Bulletin 283 ArmorStart contains eight parameter groups The parameters shown in the DeviceLogix DeviceNet Starter Protection User I O Misc Parameter ZIP Parameters Soft Start Display and SoftStart Setup are discussed in this chapter Table 4 1 Parameter Group Listing DeviceLogix DeviceNet Starter Protection User 1 0 Misc ZIP Parameters Soft Start Display Soft Start Setup 1 Hdw Inputs 10 Autobaud Enable 22 Breaker Type 30 Off to On Delay 45 Keypad Mode 67 AutoRun Zip 101 Phase A Current 106 FLA Setting 2 Network Inputs 11 Consumed I0 Assy 23 PrFitResetMode 31 On to Off Delay 46 Keypad Disable 68 Zone Produced EPR 102 Phase B Current 108 OL Reset Level 3 Network Outputs 12 Produced 10 Assy 24 Pr Fault Enable 32 In Sink Source 47 Set To Defaults 69 Zone Produced PIT 103 Phase C Current 109 Start Time 4 Trip Status 13 Prod Assy Word 0 25 Pr Fault Reset 33 OutA Pr FitState 56 Base Enclosure 70 Zone 1 Macld 104 Average Current 110 Start Mode 5 Starter Status 14 Prod Assy Word 1 26 StrtrDN FitState 34 OutA Pr FitValue 57 Base Option 71 Zone 2 Macld 105 Therm Utilized 111 Current Limit 6 DNet Status 15 Prod Assy Word 2 27 StrtrDN FitValue 35 OutA DN FitState 58 Wiring Option 72
353. matic method for setting Parameter 228 IR Voltage Drop and Parameter 229 Flux Current Ref which affect sensorless vector performance Parameter 226 Motor NP FLA must be set to the motor nameplate full load amps before running the Autotune procedure Provides an automatic method for setting A128 IR Voltage Drop and A129 Flux Current Ref which affect sensorless vector performance Parameter A126 Motor NP FLA must be set to the motor nameplate full load amps before running the Autotune procedure 0 Ready Idle Default 1 Static Tune 2 Rotate Tune Ready 0 Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune Static Tune 1 A temporary command that initiates a non rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of A128 IR Voltage Drop A start command is required following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to Ready 0 following the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Used when motor cannot be uncoupled from the load Rotate Tune 2 A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of A129 Flux Current Ref A start command is required following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to Ready 0 following the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Param
354. may be used together to satisfy machine conditions For instance the step may need to run for a minimum time period and then use the basic logic to trigger a transition to the next step Figure J 3 Start Step 0 Step 1 7 Frequency Logic In1 gt Logic In2 K Time J 4 Step Logic Basic Logic and Timer Counter Functions Timer Function Counter Function Digital inputs and outputs control the timer function and are configured with Parameters 151 154 Digital Inx Sel set to 18 Timer Start and 20 Reset Timer Digital outputs relay and opto type define a preset level and indicate when the level is reached Level Parameters 156 Relay Out Level 159 Opto Out1 Level and 162 Opto Out2 Level are used to set the desired time in seconds Parameters 155 Relay Out Sel 158 Opto Out Sel and 161 Opto Out2 Sel are set to option 16 Timer Out and cause the output to change state when the preset level is reached Digital inputs and outputs control the counter function and are configured with Parameters 151 154 Digital Inx Sel set to 19 Counter In and 21 Reset Counter Digital outputs relay and opto type define a preset level and indicate when the level is reached Level Parameters 156 Relay Out Level 159 Opto Out Level and 162 Opto Out2 Level are used to set the desired count value Parameters 155 Relay Out Sel 158 Opto Out Sel and 161 Opto Out2 Sel are set to 17 Counte
355. me e Response is still slow after a step change increase Parameter 236 PID Diff Rate e Response is still unstable decrease Parameter 236 PID Diff Rate The following figures show some typical responses of the PID loop at different points during adjustment of the PID Gains Figure I 1 Unstable PID Reference PID Feedback Time Figure 1 2 Slow Response Over Damped PID Reference soaceae2 ego sensete a PID Feedback PID Reference PID Feedback Time Figure I 4 Good Response Critically Damped PID Reference Z z E PID Feedback Time Appendix J Step Logic Basic Logic and Timer Counter Functions Four Bulletin 284 ArmorStart logic functions provide the capability to program simple logic functions without a separate controller e Step Logic Function Steps through up to eight preset speeds based on programmed logic Programmed logic can include conditions that need to be met from digital inputs programmed as Logic In1 and Logic In2 before stepping from one preset speed to the next A timer is available for each of the eight steps and is used to program a time delay before stepping from one preset speed to the next The status of a digital output can also be controlled based on the step being executed e Basic Logic Function Up to two digital inputs can be programmed as Logic In1 and or Logic In2 A digital output can be programmed to change state base
356. meter Object 0x0010 Parameter Group Object 0x001D Discrete Input Group 0x001E Discrete Output Group 0x0029 Control Supervisor 0x002B Acknowledge Handler 0x002C Overload Object 0x00B4 DN Interface Object Not available on the Bu letin 280A 281A Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 3 Identity Object CLASS CODE 0x0001 The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object Table B 4 Identity Object Class Attributes i mT Identity Objects A single instance of the Identity Object is supported The following instance attributes are supported Table B 5 Identity Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Vendor UINT 1 2 Get Device Type UINT 22 or 133 3 Get Product Code UINT See Table B 1 and Table B 2 Revision Structure of 4 Get Major Revision USINT Indicates Software Firmware Revision Number Minor Revision USINT Bit 0 O not owned 1 owned by master Bit 2 0 Factory Defaulted 1 Configured Bit 8 Minor Recoverable fault cel palig k Bit 9 Minor Unrecoverable fault Bit 10 Major Recoverable fault Bit 11 Major Unrecoverable fault 6 Get Serial Number UDINT Unique Number for Each Device Product Name Structure of 7 Get String Length USINT Product code specific ASCII String STRING See Table B 1 and Table B 2 8 Get State USINT Returns the value 3 Operational 9 Get Configuration Consistency Value UINT Unique value d
357. mum Value 0 Maximum Value 800 Default Value 100 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 37 Parameter Number 167 Accel Time 2 When active sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog Related Parameters 139 151 152 153 154 170 173 174 177 Maximum Freg Accel Rate Accel Time 240 247 Access Rule GET SET R Poa Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group SE Units 0 1 sec Gl Param je Time m Param Minimum Value 0 0 oe er Maximum Value 600 0 fime x ee Default Value 20 0 168 Decel Time 2 When active sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog Maximum Freq pecel Rate Decel Time Parameter 135 Maximum Freq Os Param W Time Param W 0 139 or 140 or 167 168 Accel Decel Time x Time x Internal Freq Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 138 Speed Reference is set to 1 Internal Freq When enabled this parameter will change the frequency command in real time Parameter Number Related Parameters 140 151 152 153 154 170 173 174 177 240 247 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 600 0 Default Value 20 0 Parameter Number 169 Related Parameters 138 162 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Adv
358. n Table B 18 Instance 186 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Instance 186 DeviceNet Status 0 1 0 Idle 1 0 Fit Exp Fit 1 0 Cnxn Exp Cnxn ZIP FLT ZIP4 CNX ZIP3 FLT ZIP2 CNX ZIP2 FLT ZIP2 CNX ZIP1 FLT ZIP1 CNX Table B 19 Instance 187 This is a Read Write Assembly Instance 187 Starter Control Bits Run Fwd Table B 20 Instance 189 This is a Read Only Assembly Instance 189 Warning Status Bits Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 lo Control PL 0 Warning Power a Warnin 9 Warning 9 1 HW Warn Reserved for 280A 281A Standard Distributed Motor Controller IO Assemblies are available on all Starter Types Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output Consumed Assemblies Table B 21 Instance 3 is the required output consumed assembly defined in the DeviceNet Motor Starter Profile Instance 3 ODVA Starter Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 a2 Be T eee B 8 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information Table B 22 Instance 160 is the default output consumed assembly for Standard Distributed Motor Controllers Instance 160 Default Consumed Standard Distributed Motor Controller Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 User Out User Out Fault ee ee Table B 23 Instance 162 is the standard output consumed assembly with Network Inputs Instance 162 Standard C
359. n DNFitValue 55 High Speed En Advanced Program 151 Digital Ini Sel 152 Digital In2 Sel 153 Digital In3 Sel 154 Digital In4 Sel 155 Relay Out Sel 156 Relay Out Level 157 Relay Out LevelF 158 Reserved 159 Reserved 160 Reserved 161 Reserved 162 Reserved 163 Reserved 164 Reserved 165 Reserved 166 Reserved 167 Accel Time 2 168 Decel Time 2 169 Internal Freq 170 Preset Freq 0 171 Preset Freq 1 172 Preset Freq 2 173 Preset Freq 3 174 Reserved 175 Reserved 176 Reserved 177 Reserved 178 Jog Frequency 179 Jog Accel Decel 180 DC Brake Time 181 DC Brake Level 182 DB Resistor Sel 183 S Curve 184 Boost Select 185 Reserved 186 Reserved 187 Reserved 188 Maximum Voltage 189 Current Limit 1 190 Motor OL Select 191 PWM Frequency 192 Auto Rstrt Tries 193 Auto Rstrt Delay 194 Start At PowerUp 195 Reverse Disable 196 Flying Start En 197 Compensation 198 SW Current Trip 199 Process Factor 200 Fault Clear 201 Program Lock 202 Testpoint Sel 203 Comm Data Rate 204 Comm Node Addr 205 Comm Loss Action 206 Comm Loss Time 207 Comm Format 208 Language Set 209 Reserved 210 Anlg In 0 10V Lo 211 Anlg In 0 10V Hi 212 Anlg In 4 20 mA Lo 213 Anlg In4 20 mA Hi 214 Slip Hertz FLA 215 Process Time Lo 216 Process Time Hi Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 3
360. n Path Empty Instances 8 11 are ZIP Consumers The following instance attributes will be supported Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 15 Table C 33 Connection Object Instance 8 11 Attributes a bag gg Name Data Type Value 0 nonexistant 1 Get State USINT 1 configuring 3 established 2 Get Instance Type USINT 1 1 0 Connection 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT soa d 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT FFFF not producing data 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT M ee 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT OxFO unacknowledged 7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 8 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in milliseconds 12 Get Watchdog Action USINT 2 auto reset 13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 0 14 Get Produced Connection Path 0 15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 8 16 Get Consumed Connection Path 21 OE 03 25 01 00 30 02 The following services are implemented for the Connection Object Table C 34 Connection Objects Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name 0x05 No Yes Reset 0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single C 16 Bulletin 283 CIP Information Discrete Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0008 o Discrete Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0009 The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Inp
361. n indicated Three Phase is absent Check power system Check three phase power wiring and correct if necessary Display is blank Control voltage is absent Check control wiring and polarity Correct if necessary Bulletin 283 Troubleshooting The following flowchart for Bulletin 283 units is provided to aid in quick troubleshooting Faulted Display Yes Fault Network Motor will not Motor rotates but Motor stops Miscellaneous LED LED start no output does not accelerate while running situations voltage to motor to full speed See See See Table See See See Table 14 3 Table 14 16 14 4 Table 14 5 Table 14 6 Table 14 7 Blink Pattern Definitions Troubleshooting 14 5 Table 14 3 Fault LED indications for Bulletin 283 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers Possible Causes or Remedies Short Circuit The motor circuit protector has tripped or the internal wiring protection algorithm has detected an unsafe current range Try to reset the protector if tripped If the condition continues check the power wiring This fault cannot be disabled Overload trip Phase Loss The load has drawn excessive current and based on the trip class selected the device has tripped Verify that the load is operating correctly and the ArmorStart is properly set up This fault cannot be disabled The ArmorStart has detected a missing phase Verify that three ph
362. n menu has several options however only the Get Attribute Single is used for this example The Class Instance and Attribute define the actual information being requested Additional configurations of these parameters can be found in Appendix B e Class In this example the value is F e Instance In this example the value is 104 e Attribute In this example the value is 1 After the above information has been entered click on the communication tab e Path The path will define the route the message will take to get to the device it is intended for In this example the path is Scanner 2 4 where scanner is the name of the 1756 DNB in the rack 2 represents the DeviceNet port and 4 represents the physical node address of the ArmorStart 9 10 Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet Figure 9 4 Scanner Path guration explicit_mess Communi on Method CIP C DH Channel P Destination Link G FE 7a source Link Destination Node j Octal connections End Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet 9 11 Figure 9 5 ControlLogix Example of Ladder Logic Program Rung 0 The 1756 ONb scanner module wil map output data and discrete outputs to each node only when it is in the run mode i Geka ae OP oaiae wot tha aian E aan ON piaia tatu faut bing weran T TER E L E me ene lt gt Control_RunFwo a Rung Z if a warning exists the Control OUB wil be bi
363. n the DeviceLogix data table Default Value 0 Zone 3 Mask Parameter Number 80 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data Data Type BYTE mask for zone 3 Each bit represents a byte in consumed Group ZIP Parameters data up to 8 bytes in length If a Units mask bit is set the MinimumValue 0 corresponding consumed data l Maximum Value 255 byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table Default Value 0 Zone 4 Mask Parameter Number 81 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data Data Type BYTE mask for zone 4 Each bit represents a byte in consumed Group ZIP Parameters data up to 8 bytes in length If a Units mask bit is set the MinimumValue 0 corresponding consumed data Maximum Value 255 byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table Default Value 0 Zone 1 Offset Parameter Number 82 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data Data Type UINT portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen Group ZIP Parameters consumed data bytes for zone 1 Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 7 Default Value 0 3 22 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Zone 2 Offset Parameter Number 83 Access Rule GET SET The byte offset into the ZIP data Data Type UNIT portion of the DeviceLogix data table to place the chosen Group ZIP Parameters consumed data bytes for
364. nalog In Default Value 0 Bits 8 15 Reserved 6 20 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Drive DeviceNet Group Drive Control Parameter Number 48 This parameter provides the status of drive parameters Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group Drive DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4095 Default Value 0 Bit Function 11 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 0 5 I X Accel 1 En SS SS S Accel 2 En s Ml 9 Decel 1 En X Decel 3 En IH Xl Freq Sel 0 l s l Xo Freq Sel 1 SSS S l Freq Sel 2 X e l Reserved S SK Drv In 1 oS JIT Drv In 2 S OK SS S Drv In3 Xo a a SS Drv In 4 Drvin PrFltState Parameter Number 49 This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 50 defines how the Drive Digital Access Rule GET SET Inputs 1 4 will respond when a protection trip occurs When set to 1 Drive Digital Data Type BOOL Inputs 1 4 continue to operate as command via the network When set to 0 Drive Group Drive DeviceNet Digital Inputs 1 4 will open or close as determined by setting in Parameter 50 Units 0 Go to PrFit Value 1 Ignore PrFit Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Drvin PrFltValue Parameter Number 50 This par
365. nce Four instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported All instances contain the following attributes Table B 35 Discrete Input Point Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0N 115 Get Set Force Enable BOOL 0 Disable 1 Enabl e 116 Get Set Force Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Point Object Table B 36 Discrete Input Point Object Instance Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name 0 Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single This assembly does not exist on the Bulletin 280A 281A Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 15 Discrete Output Point Object The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output CLASS CODE 0x0009 Point Object Table B 37 Discrete Output Point Object Class Attributes Revision Max Instance Four instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported The following table summarizes the DOP instances Table B 38 Discrete Output Point Object Instance Attributes Instance ID Name Anema te Description Mapping Run Forward output For all starter 1 Run Fwd Output 0029 01 03 types this output is hard wired from the ArmorStart CPU to the actuator Run Reverse output For all starter 2 Run Rev Output 0029 01 04 types thi
366. nce 1 of the DeviceNet Object will be supported The following instance attributes are supported Table D 7 DeviceNet Object Instance Attributes Attribute Access ID Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Set Node Address USINT 0 63 0 125K 1 250K 2 Get Set Baud Rate USINT gt 500K 3 1M0 Allocation Info Structure of Allocation _byte 5 Get e Allocation Choice e BYTE 0 63 address e Master Node Addr e USINT 255 unallocated 8 Get MAC ID Switch Value BOOL 0 63 1M baud is only available on the Bulletin 284A 2 See Table D 8 Table D 8 Allocation_byte Bit 0 Explicit messaging Bit 1 Polled 1 0 Bit 4 COS 1 0 Bit 5 Cyclic 1 0 Bit 6 Acknowledge Suppression The following services are implemented for the DeviceNet Object Table D 9 DeviceNet Object Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x4B No Yes Allocate_Master Slave _Connection_Set 0x4C No Yes Release_Master Slave _Connection_Set Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 5 Assembly Object CLASS CODE 0x0004 The following class attributes are supported for the Assembly Object Table D 10 DeviceNet Assembly Object Attribute ID 2 Ga mo w All of the various instances of the assembly object will support Attribute 3 Table D 11 summarizes the various instances that are supported Table D 11 D
367. nce 7 SoftStart Display e Instance 8 Soft Start Setup The following instance attributes are supported for all parameter group instances Table C 45 Parameter Group Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type 1 Get Group Name String SHORT_STRING 2 Get Number of Members UINT 3 Get 15t Parameter UINT 4 Get 24 Parameter UINT n Get Nth Parameter UINT The following common services are implemented for the Parameter Group Object Discrete Input Group Object CLASS CODE 0x001D o Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 23 Table C 46 Parameter Group Object Service Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance Ox0E Get_Attribute_Single No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input Group Object A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported It contains the following attributes Table C 47 Discrete Input Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Number of Instances USINT 4 4 Get Binding Array of UINT List of DIP instances 6 Get Set Off_On_Delay UINT in psec 7 Get Set On_Off_Delay UINT in psec The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Group Object Table C 48 Discrete Input Group Object Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance 0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single This assem
368. nd voltage fluctuates with Motor Verify type of motor as a standard squirrel cage steady load Erratic load induction motor Check load conditions Erratic operation Loose connections Shut off all power to controller and check for loose connections Accelerates too fast Starting time Increase starting time Initial torque Lower initial torque setting Current limit setting Decrease current limit setting Kickstart Lower kickstart time or turn off Accelerates too slow Starting time Decrease starting time Initial torque Increase initial torque setting Current limit setting Increase current limit setting Kickstart Increase kickstart time or turn off Motor stops too quickly with Soft Stop Time setting Verify the programmed stopping time and correct it or increase Motor stops too slowly with Soft Stop Stopping time setting Verify the programmed stopping time and correct if Misapplication necessary The Soft Stop is intended to extend the stopping time for loads that stop suddenly when power is removed from the motor Troubleshooting 14 7 Bulletin 284 Troubleshooting Fault Definitions Some of the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller faults are detected by the internal hardware of the ArmorStart while others are detected by the internal drive For internal drive faults the internal hardware of the ArmorStart simply polls the drive for the existence of faults and reports the fault state No fault latching is done by the internal hardw
369. ng data 12 10 ArmorStart ZIP Configuration Instance 163 Standard Produced Starter with Network Outputs and ZIP CCV Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1 Ready Running Rev Running Fwd Warning Tripped 2 140M On HOA User In 4 User In 2 User In 2 User In 1 3 Net Out 8 Net Out7 NetOut6 NetOut5 Net Out 4 Net Out3 NetOut2 Net Out 1 4 Net Out 15 Net Out 14 Net Out 13 Net Out12 NetOut11 NetOut10 Net Out9 5 Device Value Key low 6 Device Value Key high And assuming that the 1799 ZCIO module is producing the following data 1799 ZCIO Produced Assembly Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Input 0 2 Logic Ena Input 9 Input 8 3 Output 7 Output 6 Output5 Output4 Output3 Output2 Output1 Output 0 4 Output9 Output 8 5 Net Out7 NetOut6 NetOut5 Net Out4 Net Out3 NetOut2 NetOut1 Net Out 0 6 ZIP CCV Low 7 ZIP CCV High The above configuration results in the following DeviceLogix ZIP Data Table mapping ZIPO lt Zone 1 ZIP 1 lt Zone 1 ZIP 2 Zone ZIP 3 Zone ZIP 4 Zone l ZIP 5 Zone ZIP 6 Zone 1 ZIP 7 Zone ZIP 8 Zone 1 ZIP 9 Zone 1 ZIP 10 Zone 1 ZIP 11 Zone 1 ZIP 12 Zone 1 ZIP 13 Zone 1 ZIP 14 Zone 1 ZIP 15 Zone 1 ZIP 16 Zone 2 ZIP 1
370. ng determines the next step or to end the program Digit 3 Step Settings This digit defines what accel decel profile the speed command will follow and the direction of the command for the current step In addition if a relay or opto output Parameters 155 158 and 161 is set to 15 StpLogic Out this parameter can control the status of that output Any Step Logic parameter can be programmed to control a relay or opto output but you cannot control different outputs based on the condition of different Step Logic commands Step Logic Settings The logic for each function is determined by the four digits for each step logic parameter The following is a listing of the available settings for each digit Refer to Appendix J for details Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 59 Table 6 9 Digit 3 Settings Required Accel Decel Step Logic Commanded Setting Parameter Used Output State Direction 0 Accel Decel 1 Off FWD 1 Accel Decel 1 Off REV 2 Accel Decel 1 Off No Output 3 Accel Decel 1 On FWD 4 Accel Decel 1 On REV 5 Accel Decel 1 On No Output 6 Accel Decel 2 Off FWD 7 Accel Decel 2 Off REV 8 Accel Decel 2 Off No Output 9 Accel Decel 2 On FWD A Accel Decel 2 On REV b Accel Decel 2 On No Output Table 6 10 Digit 2 Settings Jump to Step 0 Jump to Step 1 Jump to Step 2 Jump to Step 3 Jump to Step 4 Jump to Step 5 Jump t
371. nicate to the ArmorStart Follow the steps below to build and register the EDS file To register a device you must first obtain the EDS file from the following web page hitp www ab com networks eds After obtaining the files do the following 1 Right mouse click on the Unrecognized Device icon and choose Register Device from the menu 2 Click Next The following screen appears Rockwell Software s EDS Wizard Options What task do you want to complete 3 Choose Register an EDS file s as shown above and then click the Next button 4 Choose to Register a single file and specify the file name or use the Browse button to locate the EDS file on your computer If connected to the Internet you may use the Download EDS file button to automatically search for the correct EDS file DeviceNet Commissioning Rockwell Software s EDS Wizard Registration Electronic Data Sheet file s will be added to your system for Software applications 4 0001 001600810100 eds Q 5 Click the Next button 6 The following screen will display any warning or errors if a prob lem occurs while registering the file If a problem occurs insure that you have the correct file and try again Click the Next button when no errors occur 7 Select an alternative icon by highlighting the new device and clicking Change Icon Once you have selected an icon choose OK and then click the Next button Rockwell Software s EDS Wiz
372. nimum Value Maximum Value 15 Default Value Bit Function 3 2 1 Input 0 X Input 1 X Input 2 X Input 3 U Not available on the Bulletin 283A Network Inputs Parameter Number 2 Access Rule GET This parameter provides status of Data Type WORD network inputs Group DeviceLogix Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 s ls l Ml X Net Input 0 aa a ae N E Net Input 1 a a E Netinput 2 S ps Se X Net Input 3 S a ae a PS xX J Net Input 4 a ee ae ee if las lW NetInput5 S a T I x sI l e Net Input 6 x j _ Net Input 7 a X Net Input 8 T a l l Net Input 9 s laa lla l ellil l Net Input 10 a Il f S l H Net Input 11 e le lel x Net Input 12 G l Net Input 13 y E ee l ae J Net Input 14 4S S ae ae ae ae ee NetInput 15 4 4 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Network Outputs This parameter provides status of network outputs Parameter Number Access Rule 3 GET Data Type WORD Group
373. nimumValue 0 05 Disable Maximum Value 65535 1 Enable Default Value 0 Phase A Current Parameter Number 101 Access Rule GET SET This parameter provides the Data Type INT current of Phase A measured n S increments of 1 10 of an Group Soft Start Display ampere Units XX X A Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Phase B Current Parameter Number 102 Access Rule GET SET This parameter provides the Data Type INT current of Phase B measured in increments of 1 10 of an Group Soft Start Display ampere Units XX X A Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 29 Soft Start Setup Phase C Current This parameter provides the current of Phase C measured in increments of 1 10 of an ampere Average Current This parameter provides the average current measured in increments of 1 10 of an ampere Therm Utilized This parameter displays the Thermal Capacity used Overload Class This parameter allows the installer to select the overload Class 1 Overload Class 10 FLA Setting The motor s full load current rating is programmed in this parameter Parameter Number 103 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Soft Start Display Units Xx x AMps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 104 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Gr
374. o Step 6 Jump to Step 7 End Program Normal Stop End Program Coast to Stop gt oO Co NN mM om Aa ew re l oO Table 6 11 Digit 1 and Digit 0 Settings End Program and Fault F2 Skip Step Jump Immediately Step Based on Stp Logic Time x Step if Logic In1 is Active Step if Logic In2 is Active Step if Logic In1 is Not Active Step if Logic In12 is Not Active Stop if either Logic In1 and Logic In2 is Active Stop if both Logic Ini and Logic In2 is Active Stop if neither Logic In1 and Logic In2 is Active Step if Logic In1 is Active and Logic In2 is Not Active Step if Logic In2 is Active and Logic In1 is Not Active Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In1 is Active Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In2 is Active Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In1 is Not Active Step after Stp Logic Time x and Logic In2 is Not Active TM Al ala gt oloon ajaj B ew rp o Do Not Stop lgnore Digit 2 Settings 6 60 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers A250 Stp Logic Time 0 A251 Stp Logic Time 1 A252 Stp Logic Time 2 A253 Stp Logic Time 3 A254 Stp Logic Time 4 A255 Stp Logic Time 5 A256 Stp Logic Time 6 A257 Stp Logic Time 7 Sets the time to remain in each step if the corresponding StpLogic command is set to Step after Time Parameter Number 250 257 Related
375. o action Required Flashing Green The device is operating in a normal condition and is on line but has no connection to another device This is the typical state for new devices The device may need to be mapped to a master scanner placed in a scanlist or have another device communicate to it Flashing Red Recoverable fault has occurred Check to make sure the PLC and scanner are operating correctly and that there are no media cabling issues Check to see if other networked devices are in a similar state Solid Red The device has detected a major error that has Troubleshooting should be done to ensure that the rendered it incapable of communicating on the network Duplicate MAC ID Bus off media issue network is correct terminators lengths etc and there is not a duplicate node problem If other devices on the network appear to be operating fine and power cycling the device does not work contact Technical Support Flashing Red and Green The device has detected a network access error and is in a communication faulted state The device has subsequently received and accepted an Identify Communication Faulted Request Long Protocol message This is not a common state for DeviceNet products Power cycling the device may resolve the problem however if the problem continues it may be necessary to contact technical support 14 14 Troubleshooting Network Status LED ArmorPoint Backplane Troub
376. o the ArmorPoint Distributed I O product Factory Installed Options Product Overview 1 9 If the I O capability of the Bulletin 280D 281D 283D or 284D ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller needs to be expanded beyond the standard four inputs and two outputs the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller with the DeviceNet communication protocol can be configured to the ADNX Architecture in which the ArmorStart is part of the DeviceNet subnet using the Bulletin 1738 ADNX ArmorPoint Distributed I O product DeviceLogix DeviceLogix is a stand alone Boolean program that resides within the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller DeviceLogix is programmed using Boolean math operations such as AND OR NOT Timers Counters and Latches DeviceLogix can run as a stand alone application independent of the network However 24V DC must be supplied at the DeviceNet connector to power the inputs Peer to Peer Communications ZIP The zone control capabilities of ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers is ideal for large horsepower 0 5 10 Hp motored conveyors The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers have built in DeviceNet communications DeviceLogix technology and the added Zone Interlocking Parameters ZIP which allow one ArmorStart to receive data directly from up to four other DeviceNet nodes without going through a network scanner These direct communications between conveyor zones are beneficial in a merge diverte
377. occurring 6 Above Freq Drive exceeds the frequency Hz value set in Parameter 159 Opto Out 1 Level or Parameter 162 Opto Output 2 Level Use Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold Drive exceeds the current Amps value set in Parameter 159 Opto Out 1 Level or Parameter 162 Opto Output 7 Above Cur 2 Level Use Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold Important Value for Parameter 159 or 162 must entered in percent of the drive rated output current 8 Above DCVolt Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in Parameter 159 Opto Out 1 Level Use Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold 9 Retries Exst Value set in Parameter 192 Auto Rsirt Tries is exceeded 10 Above Anlg V Option not valid for Bulletin 284 ArmorStart 6 34 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Options Description 11 Logic In 1 An input is programmed as Logic In 1 and is active 12 Logic In 2 An input is programmed as Logic In 2 and is active 13 Logic In 1 amp 2 Both Logic inputs are programmed and active 14 Logic In 1 or 2 One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active 15 StpLogic Out Drive enters Step Logic step with Digit 3 of Command Word Parameters 240 247 16 Timer Out Timer has reached value set in Parameter 159 Opto Out 1 Level or Parameter 162 Opto Output 2 Level Use Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold Counter has reached value set in Parameter 159 Opto Out 1 Level o
378. ode Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart are the following 0 Ramp CF Ramp to Stop Stop command clears active fault 1 Coast CF Coast to Stop Stop command clears active fault 2 DC Brake CF DC Injection Braking Stop Stop command clears active fault 3 DCBrkAuto CF DC injection Braking with Auto Shutoff Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 DC Brake Time or Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped Stop command clears active fault 4 Ramp Ramp to Stop 5 Coast Coast to Stop 6 DC Brake DC Injection Braking Stop 7 DC BrakeAuto DC Injection Stop with Auto Shutoff Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 180 DC Brake Time or Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded 8 Ramp EM B CF Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control Stop command clears active fault 9 Ramp EM Brk Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control Speed Reference Valid Speed References for the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart are the following 1 Internal Freq 2 0 10V Input 4 Preset Freq 5 Comm port 6 Stp Logic 9 Jog Freq Note Option 2 must be selected when using 0 10V Analog Input Accel Time 1 Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases Maximum Freq Accel Rate Accel Time Parameter Number 137 Related Param ters 136 180 181 182 205 260 261 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Basic Program Units
379. of the device The EDS file contains all of the device information number of parameters groupings parameter name minimum maximum and default values units data format and scaling EDS files for all the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller units are available from the Internet at http www ab com networks eds They may also be built automatically by some configuration tools since all of the information necessary for a basic EDS file may be extracted from the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Product codes for DOL starters and DOL Reversing starters are based on the Overload relay current rating and the control power rating of the starter The following table lists the product codes for the Bulletin 280 Distributed Motor Controllers Table B 1 Bul 280 Distributed Motor Controller Product Codes and Name Strings 280A 280D Device Device Product Contactor Overload Control Power Type Type Code Size Code Current Rating Voltage U 133 22 0x8A 100C 12 0 24 1 2A 24V DC 133 22 0x81 100C 12 0 5 2 5A 24V DC 133 22 0x82 100C 12 1 1 5 5A 24V DC 133 22 0x83 100C 23 3 2 16 A 24V DC 133 22 0x8B 100C 12 0 24 1 2A 120V AC 133 22 0x84 100C 12 0 5 2 5A 120V AC 133 22 0x85 100C 12 1 1 5 5A 120V AC 133 22 0x86 100C 23 3 2 16 A 120V AC 133 22 0x8C 100C 12 0 24 1 2A 240V AC 133 22 0x87 100C 12 0 5 2 5A 240V AC 133 22 0x88 100C 12 1 1 5 5A 240V AC 133 22 0x89 100C 23
380. ollowing instance attributes are supported Table B 52 Acknowledge Handler Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Set Acknowledge Timer UINT milliseconds 2 Get Retry Limit USINT 1 3 Get COS Producing Connection UINT 4 Instance The following common services are implemented for the Acknowledge Handler Object Table B 53 Acknowledge Handler Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance 0x0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Overload Object CLASS CODE 0x002c Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 27 No class attributes are supported for the Overload Object A single instance instance 1 of the Overload Object is supported for Bulletin 280 281 Table B 54 Overload Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Set FLA Setting BOOL Xxx x Amps 1 10 4 Get Set Trip Class USINT 2 15 3 20 5 Get Average Current UINT Xxx x AMps 7 Get Thermal Utilized USINT Xxxx FLA 8 Get Current L1 UINT XO X Amps 9 Get Current L2 UINT XN X AMps 10 Get Current L3 UINT XXX X Amps 190 Get Set FLA Setting Times 10 BOOL Xxx x Amps 192 Get Avg Current Times 10 UINT Xxx x AMPs 193 Get Current L1 Times 10 UINT 194 Get Current L2 Times 10 UINT Xxx x AMps 195 Get Current L3 Times 10 UINT The following common services are implemented for the Overload Object
381. on Auto Init DNet Idle Ready Receivelldle Receive Data The following State Transition Diagram is used in Auto State for Unbound DOP Instances 1 and 2 Figure C 3 Auto State for Unbound DOP Instances 1 and 2 DNet Fault Protection Fault DNet Fault DNet Fault D S DNet Fault 2 al l l z E Connection Transitions to Established LL 2 T a Protection Fault Reset Protection Fault Protection Fault Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 21 Parameter Object CLASS CODE 0x000F The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object Table C 41 Parameter Object Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type 1 Get Revision UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT 8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD 9 Get Configuration Assembly Instance UINT The number of instances of the parameter object will depend upon the type of Distributed Motor Controller There is a standard set of instances reserved 1 99 for all starters These instances are followed by a unique set of instances for each starter type Across the Line Soft start or Inverter type The following instance attributes are implemented for all parameter attributes Table C 42 Parameter Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type 1 Get Set Value Specified in Descriptor 2 Get Link Path Size USINT Array of 3 Get Link Path
382. on Inc All Rights Reserved Printed in USA Publication 280 UM002A EN P July 2008 Supercedes Publications 280 UMO001F EN P 283 UM001E EN P 284UM001F EN P December 2007
383. onsumed Starter with Network Inputs Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 User Out User Out _ Fault B A Reset Run Rev Run Fwd 1 Net In 8 NetIn7 NetIn6 NetIn5 Netin 4 Netin 3 Netin 2 Netin 1 2 NetIn 16 Net In 15 Net In 14 Net In 13 Net In 12 Net In 11 Net In 10 Net In 9 Standard Distributed Motor Controller Input Produced Assemblies Table B 24 Instance 52 is the required input produced assembly defined in the DeviceNet Motor Starter Profile Instance 52 ODVA Starter Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Ss CS eS Se See Table B 25 Instance 161 is the default input produced assembly for Standard Distributed Motor Controllers Instance 161 Default Producted Standard Distributed Motor Controller Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Running Running 0 Ready Warning Tripped Rev Fwd User In 3 User In 2 User In 1 User In 0 HOA 1 _ 140M On Stat Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved U U Available on the Bulletin 280A 281A Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 9 Table B 26 Instance 163 is the standard input produced assembly with Network Outputs Instance 163 Standard Produced Starter with Network Outputs Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit1 Bit 0 Running Running Rev Fwd Tripped User In 4 User In 3 Us
384. ontrol Board software version for AC Drive Drive Type Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel Elapsed Run Time Accumulated time drive is outputting power Time is displayed in 10 hour increments Testpoint Data The present value of the function selected in Parameter 202 Analog In 0 10V The percent value of the voltage at 1 0 terminal 13 100 10V Analog In 4 20 mA This parameter is not available for use with the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Parameter Number 116 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 01 Minimum Value 1 00 Maximum Value 99 99 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 117 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 1001 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 118 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 10 hrs Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 119 Related Parameter 202 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Hex Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value FFFF Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 120 Related Parameter 210 211 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 100 0 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 121 6 26 Bulletin 284 Programm
385. ors OA2M12AC3 Table G 10 Specialty Products Description Cat No ArmorPoint I O RS 232 ASCII Serial Interface 1738 Module 232ASCM12 ArmorPoint I O RS 485 ASCII Serial Interface 1738 Module 485ASCM12 24V DC Very High Speed Counter Module U IS Te VHSC24M23 ArmorPoint 5V Encoder Counter Module 1738 IJM23 ArmorPoint Synchronous Serial Interface Module with Absolute Encoder TES Table G 11 Adapter Products Description Cat No ArmorPoint DeviceNet Adapter Module Drop or Pass through with male and female M12 1738 ADN12 connectors ArmorPoint DeviceNet Adapter Module Drop 1738 ADN18 1738 ADN18P ArmorPoint DeviceNet 24V dc Adapter Module 24V DC 2 Thermocouple Input 1738 IT2IM12 24V DC 2 RTD Input 1738 IR2M12 Table G 8 Power Supply Products Description Cat No Point I O Field Potential Distributor Module 1738 FPD ak 24V DC Expansion Power Supply 1738 EP24DC with subnet expansion A L ArmorPoint Redundant ControlNet Adapter Module 1738 ACNR ArmorPoint Ethernet IP 10 100 Mbps Adapter 1738 AENT Module G 4 Accessories Table G 12 Dynamic Brake Modules Bulletin 284 only O Drive Ratings Cat No Input Voltage kW Hp Min Resistance Q 0 4 0 5 48 AK R2 091P500 0 75 1 0 48 AK R2 091P500 240V 50 60 Hz 3 Phase 1 5 2 0 48 AK R2 091P500 2 2 3 0 32 AK R2 047P500 37 5 0 19 AK R2 047P500 0 4 0 5 97 AK R2 360P500 0 75 1 0 97 AK R2 360P500 480V 50 60 Hz 3 Ph
386. oup Soft Start Display Units XX x AMps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 105 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group Soft Start Display Units FLA Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 107 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Soft Start Display Setup Units Amps Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Parameter Number 106 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Soft Start Setup Units A Minimum Value See Table 3 2 Maximum Value See Table 3 2 Default Value See Table 3 2 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Table 4 2 FLA Setting Ranges and Default Values with indicated setting precision FLA Current Range A Default Value Minimum Value Maximum Value 1A 3 0 1 1 3 0 5 5 3 0 5 3 76 5 3 6 3 16 0 6 3 OL Reset Level Parameter Number 108 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows the Data Type USINT installer select the Thermal Capacity which an overload can Group Soft Start Setup be cleared Units FLA Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 75 Start Time Parameter Number 109 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows the Z Data Type USINT installer to select the start time of 1 45 seconds Group Soft Start Setup Units Sec Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 45 Default Value 10 o Recommended maximum start time is 15 secon
387. over Plate 6 Remove cover plate 7 Loosen terminal screws 8 Remove all wires from terminal block 9 Remove conduit fittings 10 Loosen mounting screws and remove Figure 14 8 Bulletin 284 Base Module Removal Base Module Input Output Cable oe oi A Communicatio Cable 4 e BN X Control L Module Terminal Access Cover Plate Troubleshooting 14 23 Base Module Replacement Bulletin 284 Lxi To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices Installation of Base Module 1 Mount Base Module with four mounting screws 2 Re install conduit fittings and wires onto terminal block 3 Tighten terminal screws 4 Install terminal cover plate 5 Tighten four mounting screws on the terminal access cover plate 6 Install Control Module 7 Tighten four mounting screws 8 Install all cables to Control Module comunication cables and all others connected to the inputs and outputs Figure 14 9 Bulletin 284 Base Module Installation Base Module Terminal Access Cover Plate Input Output E Cable Dhi Air L Cable Control module 14 24 Troubleshooting Figure 14 10 Control Voltage and Output Fuse Replacement Output Fuse Control Voltage Fuse Troubleshooting 14 25 Figure 14 11 Source Brake Fuse Replacemen
388. ovided network traffic exists At least Data Type BOOL one node with an established baud rate must exist on the network for autobaud to Group DeviceNet occur Units 0 Disable 1 Enable Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value if Consumed 1 0 Assy Parameter Number 11 This parameter selects the format of the I O data consumed Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 188 Default Value 164 Produced 1 0 Assy Parameter Number 12 This parameter selects the format of the I O data produced Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 190 Default Value 165 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 9 Prod Assy Word 0 Parameter Number 13 This parameter is used to build bytes 0 1 for produced assembly 120 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 262 Default Value 1 Produced Assy Word 1 Parameter Number 14 This parameter is used to build bytes 2 3 for produced assembly 120 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 262 Default Value 4 Prod Assy Word 2 Parameter Number 15 This parameter is used to build bytes 4 5 for produced assembly 120 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units
389. production Units msec MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 Zone 1 MAC ID Parameter Number 70 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device Data Type USINT whose data is to be consumed for zone 1 Group ZIP Parameters Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Zone 2 MAC ID Parameter Number 71 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device Data Type USINT whose data is to be consumed for zone 2 Group ZIP Parameters Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Zone 3 MAC ID Parameter Number 72 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device Data Type USINT whose data is to be consumed for zone 3 Group ZIP Parameters Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 3 20 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Zone 4 MAC ID Parameter Number 73 Access Rule GET SET The node address of the device Data Type USINT whose data is to be consumed for zone 4 Group Misc Option Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 64 Default Value 64 Zone 1 Health Parameter Number 74 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection Data Type BOOL status for zone 1 Group ZIP Parameters 0 Healthy Units 1 Unhealthy MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 2 Health Parameter Number 75 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection Data Type
390. program for reversing mode Motor wiring is improperly None Switch two motor leads phased for reverse Reverse is disabled None Check Parameter 195 Reverse Disable Table 14 15 Drive Does Not Power Up Cause s No input power to drive Indication Corrective Action None Check the power circuit e Check the supply voltage e Check all fuses and disconnects Jumper between 1 0 Terminals P2 None Install jumper or connect DC Bus Inductor and P1 not installed and or DC Bus Inductor not connected Network Status LED Troubleshooting 14 13 DeviceNet Troubleshooting Procedures The following table identifies possible causes and corrective actions when troubleshooting DeviceNet related failures using the NETWORK STATUS LED Table 14 16 DeviceNet Troubleshooting Procedures Definition Possible Causes Off The device has not completed the initialization is not on an active network or may not be powered up Check to make sure the product is properly wired and configured on the network Flashes green red off While waiting to detect the network baud rate the LED will flash this pattern about every 3 seconds If the product stays in this state it means that there is no set baud rate Ensure that at least one device on the network has a set baud rate Solid Green The device is operating in a normal condition and is communicating to another device on the network N
391. provides Access Rule GET SET derating guidelines based on the PWM frequency setting Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 2 0 Hz Maximum Value 16 0 Hz Default Value 4 0 Hz Figure 5 4 a 1 7 S 2 46 678 8 0 11 12 t4 tE Graty Frequency oa Auto Rstrt Tries Parameter Number 192 Set the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart Related Parameter 155 193 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 Default Value 0 Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive 1 Set Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries to a value other than 0 2 Set Parameter 193 AutoRstrt Delay to a value other than 0 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 47 Clear an Overvoltage Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive 1 Set Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries to a value other than 0 2 Set Parameter 193 AutoRstrt Delay to 0 ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used ATTENTION in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines Auto Rstrt Delay Sets time between restart attempts when Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries is set to a value other than zero Start at PowerUp Stop drive
392. provides status of the DeviceNet connection Group Devicekogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32 767 Default Value 0 3 6 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Function 15 14 0 X Explicit Connection 1 0 Connection Explicit Fault 1 0 Fault 1 0 Idle Reserved ZIP 1 Cnxn ZIP 1 Fit ZIP 2 Cnxn ZIP 2 Fit ZIP 3 Cnxn ZIP 3 Fit X N ZIP 4 Cnxn ZIP 4 Fit Starter Command Parameter Number 7 Access Rule GET The parameter provides the Data Type WORD status of the starter command z S Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 Default Value 0 Bit Function 7 6 5 4 3 1 cil a e 1 X Run Fwd SS X Run Rev a e ad yl Fault Reset Xx Reserved X m Reserved 9 M Reserved X User Out A User Out B Network Override Parameter Number 8 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows for the Data Type BOOL local logic to override a Network s s fault Group DeviceLogix 0 Disable Units 1 Enable Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 7 DeviceNet Group Comm Override This parameter allows for loca
393. pter describes each programmable parameter and its function Parameter Programming Each Distributed Motor Controller type will have a common set of parameters followed by a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type Refer to Chapter 8 DeviceNet Commissioning for instructions in using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to modify parameter settings Refer to Chapter 11 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity for instructions to modify parameter settings when using the Bulletin 280A 281A with the ArmorPoint distributed I O products Important Resetting the Factory Default Values Parameter 47 Set to Defaults allows the installer to reset all parameters to the factory default values It also resets the MAC ID to its factory default after DeviceNet Power is cycled if switches are set gt 63 Important Parameter setting changes downloaded to the ArmorStart take effect immediately even during a running status Important Parameter setting changes made in a configuration tool such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet do not take effect in the ArmorStart until the installer applies or downloads the new settings to the device 3 2 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Parameter Group Listing The Bulletin 280 281 ArmorStart contains eight parameter groups The parameters shown in the DeviceLogix DeviceNet Starter Protection User I O Misc Parameter ZIP Parameters Starter Display and Starter Setup are
394. put A ON 140M On Tnpped Run Fwd 83 0 hil it On 0 S 16 16 1747 SDN 1747 SDN 1747 SDN Run Fwd Ol 16 1747 SDN Rung 2 Ifa fault warning exists the User Out B will be latched ON This can be used to signal the warming condition Warning User Out B tl Ol J lt L gt 17 23 1747 SDN 1747 SDN Rung 3 Ifa trip condition occurs the User Out A wall be latched ON This can be used to gnnl the fault condition Tripped User Out A i Ou r J E L 16 22 1747 SDN 1747 SDN Rung 4 Tf a trip condition exists momentarily setting B3 0 1 will reset the fault B3 0 0 will need to be re initiated to start the run Fwd contactor Reset Fault Tripped Fault Reset B3 0 tl Q l 1 16 18 1747 3DN 1747 SDN Rung 5 The fault reset bit will unlatch the trip and warning User Out A and B bit Fault Reset User Out B Ol Ol L d E lt U gt 18 23 1747 SDN 1747 SDN User Out A Ol U 22 1747 SDN Rung 6 Once Run Fwd is ON and a trip docs not exist the timer wall call the explicit message once every 10 seconds Run Pwd Tnpped Q l LL T40 TON JE i i e e Timer On Delay CEND 16 16 DN Timer T40 1747 SDN 1747 8DN Time Base 10 CDN gt Preset 10 lt Accum 0 lt Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet 9 7 Rung 7 The COP function sends the explicit message to the MO file for processing each time the timer dome bit T4 0 DN is vet Tripped T4 0 hi 4 COP i 0007 d _ e Copy File DN 16 Source N7 0 1747 SDN Dest MO0 1 22
395. r Active when 138 6 Stp Related Preset Frequency Parameter Can be activated Related Step Logic Time Parameter Active when Logic independent of Step Logic 240 247 Digit 0 or 1 are set N Parameters to 1 b C d or E 240 Stp Logic 0 170 Preset Freq 0 250 Stp Logic Time 0 241 Stp Logic 1 171 Preset Freq 1 251 Stp Logic Time 1 242 Stp Logic 2 172 Preset Freq 2 252 Stp Logic Time 2 243 Stp Logic 3 173 Preset Freq 3 253 Stp Logic Time 3 244 Stp Logic 4 174 Preset Freq 4 254 Stp Logic Time 4 245 Stp Logic 5 175 Preset Freq 5 255 Stp Logic Time 5 246 Stp Logic 6 176 Preset Freq 6 256 Stp Logic Time 6 247 Stp Logic 7 177 Preset Freq 7 257 Stp Logic Time 7 How Step Logic Works The step logic sequence begins with a valid start command A normal sequence always begins with 240 Stp Logic 0 Digit 0 Logic For Next Step This digit defines the logic for the next step When the condition is met the program advances to the next step Step 0 follows Step 7 Example Digit 0 is set 3 When Logic In2 becomes active the program advances to the next step Digit 1 Logic to Jump to a Different Step For all settings other than F when the condition is met the program overrides Digit 0 and jumps to the step defined by Digit 2 Digit 2 Different Step to Jump When the condition for Digit 1 is met the Digit 2 setti
396. r or accumulation conveyor application Safety Monitor Option Bulletins 280 281 283 and 284 The Safety Monitor Option allows for independent monitoring of the output status of the device The function is implemented using a normally closed contact which complies with EN IEC 60947 5 1 for mechanically linked contacts Two terminal blocks are provided as the inputs which may be used with an external safety circuit The external safety circuit monitors the status of the contactor Optional HOA Keypad Configuration Bulletin 280 281 only The ArmorStart offers two optional factory installed Hand Off Auto HOA configurations Standard and Forward Reverse HOA Figure 1 5 Optional HOA Configuration Product Overview Optional HOA Keypad Configuration Bulletin 283 only The ArmorStart offers an optional factory installed Hand Off Auto HOA configuration Figure 1 6 Optional HOA Configuration Optional HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function Bulletin 284 only The HOA Selector Keypad with Jog Function allows for local start stop control with capabilities to jog in forward reverse motor directions Figure 1 7 Optional HOA with Jog Function Configuration Source Brake Contactor Bulletins 283 and 284 only An internal contactor is used to switch the electromechanical motor brake on off The motor brake is powered from the main power circuit A customer accessible 3 0 A fuse is provided to protect the brake cable A 3 meter
397. r Out which causes the output to change state when the level is reached Example e A photo eye is used to count packages on a conveyor line e An accumulator holds the packages until five are collected e A diverter arm redirects the group of five packages to a bundling area e The diverter arm returns to its original position and triggers a limit switch that resets the counter e Parameters are set to the following options e 151 Digital In1 Sel set to 19 to select Counter In e 152 Digital In2 Sel set to 21 to select Reset Counter e 155 Relay Out Sel set to 17 to select Counter Out e 156 Relay Out Level set to 5 0 counts Step Logic Basic Logic and Timer Counter Functions J 5 Step Logic Parameters Digit 3 Digit 1 Digit 0 0 F 1 Setting Accel Decel Parameters Used Step Logic Output State Commanded Direction 0 1 Off FWD il 1 off REV 2 1 off No Output 3 1 On FWD 4 1 On REV 5 1 On No Output 6 2 Off FWD 7 2 Off REV 8 2 Off No Output 9 2 On FWD A 2 On REV b 2 On No Output Setting Logic 0 Jump to Step 0 1 Jump to Step 1 2 Jump to Step 2 3 Jump to Step 3 4 Jump to Step 4 5 Jump to Step 5 6 Jump to Step 6 7 Jump to Step 7 8 End Program Normal Stop 9 End Program Coast to Stop A End Program and Fault F2 Setting Description Logic 0 Skip Step jump immediately SKIP 1 Step based on the time programmed in the r
398. r Parameter 162 Opto Output 2 Level Use 17 Counter Out Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold 18 Above PF Ang Power factor angle has exceeded the value set in Parameter 159 Opto Out 1 Level or Parameter 162 Opto Output 2 Level Use Parameter 159 or 162 to set threshold 19 Anlg In Loss Analog input loss has occurred Program parameter 122 Analog In Los for desired action when loss occurs Enables the output to be controlled over the network communications by writing to Parameter 159 Opto Out 1 eU dala Level or Parameter 162 Opto Output 2 Level 0 Off 1 ON Value set in Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries is exceeded Vee PRO Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries is not enabled A non resettable fault has occurred 21 NonRec Fault 22 EM Brk Cntrl EM Brake Is energized Program Parameter 260 EM Brk Off Delay and Parameter 262 EM Brk On Delay for desired action 159 Opto Outi Level Parameter Number 159 162 162 Opto Out2 Level Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of Parameter 158 Opto Access Rule GET SET Outi Sel or Parameter 161 Opto Out2 Sel is 6 7 8 10 16 17 18 or 20 Data Type UINT Parameters 158 and 161 Parameters 159 and 161 Setting Min Max Group Advanced Program Group 6 0 400 Hz Units 7 0 180 8 0 815V Minimum Value 0 0 10 0 100 16 0 1 9999 sec Maximum Value 9999 17 1 9999 counts 18 1 180 Default Value 0 0 20 0 1
399. r Receptacles Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads Part Number 280 M35F M1 2 30 Installation and Wiring Figure 2 31 Control Power Media System Overview Enclosure eee e i N PLC I I L e 4 H 1 Bulletin 1492FB S 1606 XLSDNET4 I I Branch Circuit eheee DeviceNet I H Protective Device Ply Power Supply I I I I I I I I I I I I I I oe k i ee ee ee e aet aesa Bulletin 280 281 Bulletin 283 Bulletin 284 ArmorStart ArmorStart ArmorStart Bulletin 800F Emergency Stop Pushbutton Control Power Media Patchcords PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end Example Part Number 889N F65GFNM Control Power Tees The E stop In Tee Part Number 898N 653ST NKF is used to connect to the Bulletin 800F On Machine E Stop station using a control power media patchcord The E stop Out tee Part Number 898N 653ES NKF is used with cordset or patchcord to connect to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Control Power Receptacles Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads Part Number 888N D65AF1 Installation and Wiring 2 31 ArmorStart with ArmorConnect Conne
400. r provides the Data Type UINT voltage measurement for the DeviceNet network Group DeviceNet Units Xx Xx Volts Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 6500 Default Value 0 Starter Protection Group Breaker Type Parameter Number 22 Access Rule GET This parameter identifies the Data Type BOOL Bulletin 140M used in this product Group Starter Protection 0 140M D8N C10 Units 1 140M D8N C25 Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value 0 1 0 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 13 PrFit Reset Mode Parameter Number 23 Access Rule GET SET This parameter configures the Data Type BOOL Protection Fault reset mode Group Starter Protection 0 Manual Units Z 1 Automatic Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Pr Fault Enable Parameter Number 24 Access Rule GET SET This parameter enables the i Data Type WORD Protection Fault by setting the bit to1 Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 16383 Default Value 8195 Bit Function 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5143 sel e ls lass lele lles ls lie leas lles lz X Short Circuit ele ls les Overload ss l les leal le a ls Phase Loss mS ee Shorted SCR J ee ee N laal J Phase Rotation J x J J J J Control Power S a ae es a E S 1 0
401. rameter If the parameter is writable then the logic will read the size min allowed value max allowed value the parameter name help string and the raw data of each parameter These attributes are stored in the data array for use later when the configuration is written to each ArmorStart The logic requires that a system wide read function be completed prior to a system wide write function being requested Note A system wide read function should be done anytime that a new ArmorStart is added to the system or an ArmorStart is updated with a more recent version This assures that the data array in the logic matches the total system Once a system wide read is done the raw data of the individual parameters in the data array can be modified and a system wide write function activated from a bit in the ladder logic Only parameters that changed will be written to the ArmorStart devices and after a write is done the parameter is read back and stored in the data array for comparison If the write and reread value do not match an Error Report is generated If an error occurs for any reason during a system wide read or write an error report will be logged containing the device and parameter it occurred on Also the status and extended status of the message block is logged in case the error originated there 1 0 Tree Overview In order to transfer I O information the ArmorStart needs to be added to the I O tree of the Logix processor The
402. rameter Current Value Motor NP Yolts 230 V Motor NP Hertz 60 Hz Motor OL Current 2 34 Minimum Freq 0 0 Hz Maximum Freq 60 Hz Start Source Comm Port Download To Device Stop Mode Ramp CF i Speed Reference Comm Port Accel Time 1 10 0 Sec Decel Time 1 10 0 Sec Reset To Defalts Ready Idle Reserved 0 of b Cancel Apply Help Logic Controller Application Example with Explicit Messaging Programming the 1747 SLC Chapter 9 Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet This chapter is designed to demonstrate programming and explicit message examples for both the SLC family of programmable controllers and ControlLogix family of programmable controllers The examples will show how to develop a program for simple control and use a simple explicit message to retrieve data that is not automatically acquired based on the input and output assembly of the device The user of the device can use this example as a guide in developing their own programs Below is the RSNetWorx view of the simple network used in this example Figure 9 1 Simple Network 1756 DNB A ArmorStart 1784 PCIDS N DeviceNet Scanner To assist in the development of the example the network will consist only of the ArmorStart and scanner Therefore the only mapped information in the scanner will be the ArmorStart Refer to Chapter 8 DeviceNet Commissioning for assistance in mapping 1 0 Mapping The following example will utilize the Stand
403. rameter determines if the starter will be commanded in the event of a DevceNet fault and Parameter 26 is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N StrirDN IdiState This parameter in conjunction with Parameter 29 defines how the starter will respond when a DeviceNet network is idle When set to 1 hold to last state occurs When set to 0 will go to DnFit Value on DN faults as determined by Parameter 29 0 Go to Idle Value 1 Hold Last State StrtrDN IdlValue This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 28 is set to 0 0 OFF 1 0N Parameter Number 25 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 26 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 27 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 28 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 29 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Last PR Fault 1 Hdw Short Ckt 2 Reserved 3 Motor
404. rameters 104 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1V AC Minimum Value 20V AC Maximum Value Drive Rated Volts Default Value Drive Rated Volts Current Limit Parameter Number 189 Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs Related Parameters 133 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1A Minimum Value 0 1A Maximum Value Drive rated amps X 1 8 Default Value Drive rated amps X 1 5 Motor OL Select Parameter Number 190 Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection Setting 0 2 select the derating Related Parameters 132 factor for 1 t overload function Access Rule GET SET 0 No Derate Data Type UINT 1 Min Derate Group Advanced Program Group 2 Max Derate z Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 of P133 Motor OL Current Figure 5 3 Overload Trip Curves No Derate 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of P132 Motor NP Hertz of P133 Motor OL Current 100 8 6 40 2 0 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 of P132 Motor NP Hertz Min Derate of P133 Motor OL Current Max Derate 0 25 50 75 100125 150 175 200 of P132 Motor NP Hertz 5 46 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers PWM Frequency Parameter Number 191 Sets the carrier frequency the PWM output waveform The Figure 5 4
405. rating Data Type WORD 0 IP67 Group Misc 1 Nema 4X Units 2 15 Reserved Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Default Value 0 Base Options Parameter Number 57 Access Rule GET Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Base unit Data Type WORD Group Misc Bit 0 Output Fuse Units Bit 1 Safety Monitor Bit 2 CP Fuse Detect Minimum Value 0 Bits 3 7 Reserved Maximum Value Bit 8 10A Base Bit 9 25A Base Default Value 0 Bit 10 15 Reserved Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 21 Wiring Options Parameter Number 58 Access Rule GET Bit 0 Conduit Data Type WORD Bit 1 Round Media Group Misc Bits 2 15 Reserved S Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Default Value 0 Starter Enclosure Parameter Number 59 Access Rule GET Bit 0 IP67 Data Type WORD BIT NEMA 4x Group Misc Bits 2 15 reserved Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Starter Option Parameter Number 60 Access Rule GET Bit 0 HOA Keypad Data Type WORD Bit 1 Safety Monitor Group Misc Bit 2 Source Brake Bit 3 Control Brake Units m Bit 4 Dynamic Brake Minimum Value 0 Bit 5 Output Contactor Maximum Value 66535 Bit 6 EMI Filter Bit 7 0 10V Analog In Default Value 0 Bits 8 15 Reserved 5 22 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Drive DeviceNet Group
406. re Ignore Ignore If REV LED g g 9 Transition to HAND REV Ignore Command motor off and transition to HAND STOP Command motor off and transition to HAND STOP Command motor off and transition to HAND STOP HOA Keypad Operation Figure 7 4 Bulletin 284 Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad with JOG and Direction Arrow Functions The following state transition matrix summarizes the Jog HOA behavior when Parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 1 momentary HAND STOP HAND FWD HAND REV JOG FWD JOG REV AUTO If FWD LED If FWD LED k ie If FWD LED Set REV LED Set REV LED Set REV LED oes aie K E Else If REV LED Set FWD LED Else If REV LED Else If REV LED g g g Set FWD LED Set FWD LED If FWD LED transition to JOG FWD lange anar ianare janet inore if REV LED Transition to JOG REV 9 9 9 9 9 Command motor off and Transition longs la re nors anga nara to AUTO 9 9 9 9 9 If FWD LED transition to HAND FWD ano Else If REV LED Transition to HAND Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore REV Command Command No Key ignore lanne ignore motor off and motor off and ignore Pressed 9 9 9 transition to transition to 9 HAND STOP HAND STOP Command Command Command Command motor Command motor OFF S S motor off and motor off and motor off and L gnore oit and transitan tt anid transition transition to transition to Transition to to HAND STOP j toHANDST
407. report 1 Not Healthy Units msec Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 Zone 3 EPR Parameter Number 88 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in msec for the zone 1 consuming connection if l Data Type UNIT consumed data is not received in 4 times this value the zone connection will time Group ZIP Parameters out and Zone 3 Health will report 1 Not Healthy Units msec Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 Zone 4 EPR Parameter Number 89 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in msec for the zone 1 consuming connection if l Data Type UNIT consumed data is not received in 4 times this value the zone connection will time Group ZIP Parameters out and Zone 4 Health will report 1 Not Healthy Units msec Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 Zone 1 Control Parameter Number 90 Access Rule GET SET Zone 1 Control Word Default Bits 0 and 1 set all other bits clear Data Type BYTE Bit0 Security Enable 1 Enable data security Group ZIP Parameters Bit1 COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Units Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs Minimum Value 0 Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 Zone 2 Control Parameter Number 91 Access Rule GET SET Zone 2 Control Word Default Bits 0 and 1 set all other bits clear Data Type
408. response that matches the request downloaded by the SLC 500 processor The TXID data size is one byte e Command This code instructs the scanner how to administer the request A listing of these codes can be found in the 1747 SDN User Manual Publication 1747 5 8 The Command data size is one byte e Status The Status code provides the communication module s status and its response e Port The physical channel of the scanner where the transaction is to be routed The port setting can be zero channel A or one channel B The Port data size is one byte Please note that the 1747 SDN has only one channel and so this value is always set to zero e Size This identifies the size of the transaction body in bytes The transaction body begins at word 3 The maximum size is 58 bytes The Size data size is one byte e Service This code specifies the type of request being delivered The Service data size is one byte e MAC ID The DeviceNet network node address of the device for which the transaction is intended is identified here The slave device must be listed in the scanner module s scan list and be on line for the explicit message transaction to be completed e Class The desired DeviceNet class is specified here 9 4 Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet Setting up the Data File Sequence of Events e Instance This code identifies the specific instance within the object class towards which the transaction is direc
409. rgized industrial control equipment A ATTENTION A ATTENTION A ATTENTION A can be hazardous Electrical shock burns or unintentional actuation of controlled industrial equipment may cause death or serious injury For safety of maintenance personnel as well as others who might be exposed to electrical hazards associated with maintenance activities follow the local safety related work practices for example the NFPA7OE Part II in the United States Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices procedures and requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments Do not attempt to defeat or override fault circuits The cause of the fault indication must be determined and corrected before attempting operation Failure to correct a control system of mechanical malfunction may result in personal injury and or equipment damage due to uncontrolled machine system operation The drive contains high voltage capacitors that take time to discharge after removal of mains supply Before working on drive ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs R S T L1 L2 L3 Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death Darkened display LEDs is not an indication that capacitors have discharged to safe voltage levels Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machin
410. ributed Motor Controller Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Address 0 1 23 0 1 22 0 1 21 0 1 20 0 1 19 0 1 18 0 1 17 0 1 16 Data User Out B User Out A reserved reserved reserved Fault Reset Run Rev Run Fwd Explicit Messaging with SLC The example PLC program for the SLC will use the Tripped and the 140M On bit from the produced assembly and the Fault Reset User Out A and Run Fwd bit from the consumed assembly The 1747 SDN module uses the MO and M1 file areas for data transfer Only words 224 through 256 are used to execute the Explicit Message Request and Response function The minimum data size for the explicit message request is 6 words and the maximum is 32 words The following tables illustrate the standard format of the explicit message request and response Table 9 4 Explicit Message Request Get_Attribute_Single Bit location within Word 15 8 7 0 TXID COMMAND Word 0 PORT SIZE Word 1 SERVICE MAC ID Word 2 CLASS Word 3 INSTANCE Word 4 ATTRIBUTE Word 5 Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet 9 3 Table 9 5 Explicit Message Response Get_Attribute_Single Bit location within Word 15 8 7 0 TXID STATUS Word 0 PORT SIZE Word 1 SERVICE MAC ID Word 2 DATA Word 3 e Transmission ID TXID The scanner uses this value to track the transaction to completion and returns the value with the
411. rmission of Rockwell Automation is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Attention statements help you to e identify a hazard e avoid a hazard e recognize the consequences MPORTAN Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Trademark List ArmorStart ArmorPoint and ControlLogix are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc ArmorConnect DeviceLogix PLC RSNetWorx RSLogix 5000 and SLC are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc DeviceNet and the DeviceNet logo are trademarks of the Open Device Vendors Association ODVA ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International LTD Europ ean Communities EC If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the Directive C li European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet Irective Lompiiance the following directives Low Voltage and EMC Directives This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73 23 EEC Low Voltage and 89 336 EEC and Council Directive 89 336 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC by applying the following standard s e Bulletin 280 281 EN 60947 4 1 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 4 1 Contactors and motor starters
412. rops to a point where the load Maximum Value 90 torque is greater than the motor torque Default Value 0 2 Recommended maximum soft stop time is 45 seconds Kick Start Parameter Number 114 A kickstart or boost at the Access Rule GET SET beginning of the start mode is Data Type USINT intended to provide a current pulse of 450 of full load Group Soft Start Setup current The kickstart time is adjustable from Units 0 0 Sec 0 0 1 5 seconds This allows Minimum Value 0 0 the motor to develop additional torque at start for loads which Maximum Value 1 5 may need a boost to get you started Default Value 0 0 SCR Temp Reset Mode Parameter Number 115 The SMC 3 monitors the SCR Access Rule GET SET temperature by means of internal thermistors When the power Data Type BOOL poles maximum rated Group Soft Start Setup temperature is reached the microcomputer switches off the Units SMC and a Heat Sink Temperature fault is indicated via Minimum Value 0 LED Maximum Value 1 0 Manual Default Value 0 1 Auto Reset 4 32 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Phase Rotation When enabled the 3 phase input power will be verified before starting If input power phasing is detected to be incorrect the start will be aborted and a fault indicated o Disabled 1 Enabled Parameter Number 116 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Soft Start Setup Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Val
413. rs for Volts per Hertz Controllers Drive Type Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel Elapsed Run Time Accumulated time drive is outputting power Time is displayed in 10 hour increments Testpoint Data The present value of the function selected in Parameter 202 Analog In 0 10V This parameter is not available for use with the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Analog In 4 20 mA This parameter is not available for use with the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Drive Temp Present operating temperature of the drive power section Parameter Number 117 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 1001 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 118 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 10 hrs Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 119 Related Parameter 202 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Hex Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value FFFF Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 120 Parameter Number 121 Parameter Number 124 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 C Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 120 Default Value Read Only Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 35 Basic Program Group Motor NP
414. rt inoperable Possible causes of this fault are Fit transients induced during EEprom storage routines If the fault was initiated by a transient power Drive Error Codes 81 and cycling should clear the problem Otherwise replacement of the starter module may be required 100 This fault cannot be disabled 14 Hardware Fault Indicates incorrect base starter assembly Auxiliary input interlock is open Failure has been Drive Error Codes 2 70 and detected in the drive power section Failure has been detected in the Drive control and 1 0 section 122 Cycle power and replace drive if fault cannot be cleared This fault cannot be disabled 15 Auto Restart Tries Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of Drive Error Code 33 Parameter 192 Auto RstrtTries Correct the cause of the fault This fault cannot be disabled 16 Miscellaneous Fault This fault is actually the logical OR of the drive s Auxiliary Input fault Fault Code 2 Heatsink Overtemperature fault Fault Code 8 Parameter Defaulted fault Fault Code 48 and SVC Autotune fault Fault Code 80 Fan RPM Fault This fault cannot be disabled Not available on the Bulletin 284A Troubleshooting 14 9 Internal Drive Faults A fault is a condition that stops the drive There are two fault types Type Description 1 Auto Reset Run When this type of fault occurs and Parameter 192 Auto Rstrt Tries Related
415. rter Type Distributed Motor Controllers with Network Outputs Table D 30 Instance 167 Produced Inverter Type Starter with Network Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 At Net Ref NetCtl Running Running S 0 Reference Status Status Ready Rev Fwd Aarm Tripped 1 In4 In2 In1 Contactor 2 Contactori 140M HOA userin Ser In Usern Userin On Status Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 17 o o o 2 Output Frequency Low xxx x Hz 3 Output Frequency High xxx x Hz 4 Netouts Netout7 Net Net vet outa Net out3 Net out 2 Net out 1 Out6 Out5 Net Net Net Out Net Out Net Out 3 Net Out 15 aun 14 outi3 12 11 qo Na DS 6 ZIP Device Value Key Low 7 ZIP Device Value Key High Options If 284A is selected Refers to output contactor status Refers to source brake contactor status Power Flex Native Assemblies These assembly instances have the same data format as the Power Flex Drives with a DNet adapter Power Flex Native Consumed Assembly Instance 170 is the Power Flex Native Format Consumed Assembly Table D 31 Instance 170 Power Flex Native Format Consumed Assembly 0 MOP Inc Direction Cmd Fit Reset Stop Freq Select Freq Select Freq Decel Decel Accel Accel I clas 3 S Select 1 2 1 2 1 2 Comm Frequency Command Low 3 Comm Frequency Command High Bulletin 284 CIP Information Table D 32 Logic Command
416. running at Parameter 135 Maximum Freq When set to a value other than zero Parameter 110 Process Display indicates the duration of the process Parameter Number 5 51 216 Related Parameters 110 135 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UNIT Group Advanced Setup Units Hz Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value 99 99 Default Value 0 00 5 52 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Notes Parameter Programming Chapter 6 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function for Bulletin 284 Sensorless Vector Controllers Each Distributed Motor Controller type will have a common set of parameters followed by a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type Refer to Chapter 8 DeviceNet Commissioning for instructions in using RSNetworx for DeviceNet to modify parameter settings Refer to Chapter 11 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity for instructions to modify parameter settings when using the Bulletin 284A with the ArmorPoint distributed I O products Important Resetting the Factory Default Values Parameter 47 Set to Defaults allows the installer to reset all parameter to the factory default values It also resets the MAC ID to its factory default after DeviceNet Power is cycled if switches are set gt 63 Important Parameter setting changes
417. rved Wiring Options Parameter Number 58 Access Rule GET Bit 0 Conduit Data Type WORD Bit 1 Round Media Bits 2 15 Reserved Group Misc Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Starter Enclosure Parameter Number 59 Access Rule GET Bit 0 IP67 Data Type WORD Bit 1 NEMA 4x Bits 2 15 reserved Group Misc Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value Starter Option Parameter Number 60 Access Rule GET Bit 0 HOA Keypad Data Type WORD Bit 1 Safety Monitor S Bit 2 Source Brake Group Misc Bits 4 15 Reserved Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 66535 Default Value AutoRun Zip Parameter Number 67 Access Rule Get Set Enables ZIP data production on Data Type BOOL power up Group ZIP Parameters 0 Disable Units 1 Enable MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 19 Zone Produced EPR Parameter Number 68 Access Rule GET SET The Expected Packet Rate in Data Type UINT msec Defines the rate at which ZIP data is produced Defaults to Group Zip Parameter 75 msec Units msec MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 75 Zone Produced PIT Parameter Number 69 Access Rule GET SET The Production Inhibit Time in Data Type UINT msec Defines the minimum time between Change of State data Group ZIP Parameters
418. s All instances contain the following attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0N 5 Get Set Fault Action BOOL 0 Fault Value attribute 1 Hold Last State 6 Get Set Fault Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0N 7 Get Set Idle Action BOOL 0 Fault Value attribute 1 Hold Last State 8 Get Set Idle Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 ON 113 Get Set Pr Fault Action BOOL 0 Pr Fault Value attribute 1 Ignore 114 Get Set Pr Fault Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N 115 Get Set Force Enable BOOL 0 Disable 1 Enable 116 Get Set Force Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N For DOP instances 1 and 2 attributes 113 and 114 have Get only access and their values are always 0 The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Point Object Table C 40 Discrete Output Object Common Services Implemented for Service Service Code Instance Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single C 18 Bulletin 283 CIP Information Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements DOP Instances 3 and 4 Special Behavior There are many sources that can affect an output point s value an I O message an explicit message local logic network fault and idle conditions and protection fault conditions An output point must know how to select which source of data to use to drive its value attribute An output that is not used in a DeviceLogix program behaves mu
419. s 2s ct des seszest esdesdesd bes sdasdgrdirts shaweeavecs A 22 Shorting PIUGS 0 ceecsesescesssscecssssesecsececeesaesesseseseseesesseeesenses A 23 Electronic Data Sheets sse eee B 1 DOL Type Product Codes and Name Strings sss sese eee eee ee B 1 DOL Reversing Type Product Codes and Name String 0 B 2 DeviceNet Objects cccccccscssssssssssserssssssecsessnssesssessessesenaneers B 2 Identity Object CLASS CODE 0xX0001 ou eee eee B 3 Identity Objects sss eee eee eee B 3 Message Router CLASS CODE Ox0002 sss eee B 3 DeviceNet Object CLASS CODE Ox00038 sss B 4 Assembly Object CLASS CODE 0x0004 sss B 5 Custom Parameter Based Word wise 1 0 Assemblies cccccccccccccsccsccsecsecsecsessecsecseeseeneens B 5 Word wise Bit Packed Assembies eee eee B 6 Standard Distributed Motor Controller 1 0 Assemblies 005 B 7 Standard Distributed Motor Controller Output Consumed Assemblies ccccccescssesesseecsecssesesesecseceserssnees B 7 Standard Distributed Motor Controller Input Produced Assemblies ccsscesecssssssceesecesssescsessecesersasees B 8 Connection Object CLASS CODE Ox0005 sese B 10 Discrete Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0008 sss se B 14 Discrete Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0009 B 15 Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements 00 B 16 DOP Instances 3 and 4 Special Behavior sese eee B 17
420. s been evaluated and tested for group motor installations when being feed by a power source having 65 000 Amps available fault current The ArmorStart is not a listed combination motor controller however but is Listed as Industrial Control Equipment per UL 508 for group motor installations per NFPA 79 Under this Listing the NEC and actually NFPA 79 puts an upper bound on the SCPD to be used That upper bound is dictated by the maximum ratings in Table 7 2 10 4 E 6 Group Motor Installations The rules and allowances for sizing of the over current protection for NFPA 79 motor groups is covered by 7 2 10 4 Table 7 2 10 4 and Table 13 5 6 These rules in Tables 7 2 10 4 and 13 5 6 are intended to limit the maximum SCPD for a group Therefore each ArmorStart controller with its factory supplied output motor cable is suitable for single motor or multiple motor group installations on industrial machinery when installed according to NFPA 79 2002 The controller and output motor cable have been evaluated as a single system The maximum over current device rating or setting is limited to the value in Table E 1 for the smallest user supplied input line conductor by the controller s maximum rating or as allowed by the UL Certificate of Compliances 012607 E3 125 E96956 and E207834 for the combined use of ArmorStart and ArmorConnect components The Certificate of Compliances allow the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers Models 280 10 281
421. s document assumes that the reader has an average knowledge of the use of RSLogix5000 and Logix based controllers Device configuration is done inside the Controller tag editor under the Monitor Tags tab Note The ArmorStart Ladder Logic Configurator File Name ArmorStart_Configurator ACD is provided on the CD shipped with every ArmorStart product with the ArmorPoint Communications protocol Theory of Operation It is possible to connect an ArmorStart product to the Point I O based subnet of the ArmorPoint I O system This allows the ArmorStart to be connected to EtherNetIP and ControlNet along with the original DeviceNet The easiest way to program these ArmorStarts is to use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software bridging through the appropriate network This ladder logic has been developed as an alternate method of configuration 11 4 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity Once the appropriate device configuration is done to a User Defined Structure in the ladder logic file a bit will need to be turned on in the logic to trigger a system wide read of the system This system wide read goes out and reads certain attributes of every parameter of every ArmorStart in the system and stores the information into a large data array The first attribute is a flag word that tells the ladder logic if the parameter is read only If the read only bit is set then the ladder logic will skip the additional attribute reads and will go to the next pa
422. s output is hard wired from the ArmorStart CPU to the actuator 3 User Output A none These are the 2 ArmorStart user 4 User Output B none outputs All instances contain the following attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 ON 5 Get Set Fault Action BOOL 0 Fault Value attribute 1 Hold Last State 6 Get Set Fault Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0N 7 Get Set Idle Action BOOL 0 Fault Value attribute 1 Hold Last State 8 Get Set Idle Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N 113 Get Set 2 Pr Fault Action BOOL 0 Pr Fault Value attribute 1 Ignore 114 Get Set 2 Pr Fault Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N 115 Get Set Force Enable BOOL 0 Disable 1 Enable 116 Get Set Force Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N For DOP instances 1 and 2 attributes 113 and 114 have Get only access and their values are always 0 The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Output Point Object Table B 39 Discrete Output Object Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Instance Name Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single B 16 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements DOP Instances 3 and 4 Special Behavior There are many sources that can affect an output point s value an I O message an explicit message local logic network fault and idle conditions and protection fault conditions An output point must know how to select which source of data to
423. sc Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Base Enclosure Parameter Number 56 Access Rule GET Indicates the ArmorStart Base unit enclosure rating Data Type WORD 0 IP67 Group Misc 1 Nema 4X Units 2 15 Reserved Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Default Value 0 Base Options Parameter Number 57 Access Rule GET Indicates the options for the ArmorStart Base unit Data Type WORD Bit 0 Output Fuse Group Misc Bit 1 Safety Monitor Units Bit 2 CP Fuse Detect Minimum Value 0 Bits 3 7 Reserved Maximum Value Bit 8 10A Base Bit 9 25A Base Default Value 0 Bit 10 15 Reserved Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 19 Wiring Options Parameter Number 58 Access Rule GET Bit 0 Conduit Data Type WORD Bit 1 Round Media Group Misc Bits 2 15 Reserved Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Default Value 0 Starter Enclosure Parameter Number 59 Access Rule GET Bit 0 IP67 Data Type WORD Bit TE NEMAS Group Misc Bits 2 15 reserved Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Default Value 0 Starter Option Parameter Number 60 Access Rule GET Bit 0 HOA Keypad Data Type WORD Bit 1 Safety Monitor Group Misc Bit 2 Source Brake Units S Bit 3 Control Brake Bit 4 Dynamic Brake Minimum Value 0 Bit 5 Output Contactor Maximum Value 66535 Bit 6 EMI Filter Bit 7 0 10V A
424. semblies become the building blocks for the custom parameter based word wise assemblies described above Note that these word wise assemblies are designed for use with DeviceLogix so their contents reflect the various words in the DeviceLogix data table Table B 13 Instance 181 This is a Read Only Status Assembly O Instance 181 Hardware Inputs 1 16 Reserved Note This assembly does not exist on Bulletin 280A 281A Table B 14 Instance 182 This is a Read Write Control Assembly Instance 182 Consumed Network Inputs 1 16 Net Input Net Input Net Input Net Input Net Input Net Input Net Input Net Input 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Net Input Net Input Net Input Net Input Net Input Net Input Net Input Net Input 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Table B 15 Instance 183 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Instance 183 Produced Network Outputs 1 15 Table B 16 Instance 184 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Instance 184 Trip Status Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 In SS Fit Control Short 0 te Reserved Power Circuit Phase 1 Hw Fit Imbal Available on the Bulletin 280A 281A Standard Distributed Motor Controller 1 0 Assemblies Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 7 Table B 17 Instance 185 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Instance 185 Starter Status Net Ctl Status 140M O
425. set INT 17 Get Multiplier Link UINT 18 Get Divisor Link UINT 19 Get Base Link UINT 20 Get Offset Link UINT 21 Get Decimal Precision USINT B 22 Parameter Gr CODE 0x0010 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information The following common services are implemented for the Parameter Object Table B 42 Parameter Object Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x01 No Yes Get_Attributes_AIl oup Object CLASS The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object Table B 43 Parameter Group Object Class Attributes 1 Get Revision UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT All Bulletin 280 281 Motor Starters have the following instances of the parameter group object e Instance 1 DeviceLogix Parameters e Instance 2 DeviceNet Parameters e Instance 3 Starter Protection Parameters e Instance 4 User I O Parameters e Instance 5 Miscellaneous Setup Parameters e Instance 6 ZIP Parameters e Instance 7 Starter Display e Instance 8 Starter Setup The following instance attributes are supported for all parameter group instances Table B 44 Parameter Group Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type 1 Get Group Name String SHORT_STRING 2 Get Number of Members UINT 3 Get 1 t Parameter UINT 4 Get 2nd Parameter UINT n Get Nth Parameter UINT Discrete
426. single bit in the mask represents a corresponding byte in the consumed message packet For example consider an ArmorStart that has zone 1 configured to consume data from another ArmorStart that is producing data of the following format Instance 163 Standard Produced Starter with Network Outputs and ZIP CCV Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 1 Ready Running RevRunning Fwd Warning Tripped 2 140M On HOA User In 4 UserIn3 UserIn2 User In 1 3 NetOut8 Net Out7 Net Out6 Net Out5 Net Out4 Net Out3 Net Out2 Net Out1 4 Net Out 15 Net Out 14 Net Out 13 Net Out 12 Net Out 11 Net Out 10 Net Out 9 5 Device Value Key low 6 Device Value Key high The user can choose to place only bytes 1 and 2 of the above consumed data in the DeviceLogix Data Table by selecting a Zone Mask value of 00000011 binary as shown in the following RSNetWorx for DeviceNet screen Zone 1 Mask M Zone 1 Byte 1 Zone 1 Byte 2 C Zone 1 Byte 3 C Zone 1 Byte 4 C Zone 1 Byte 5 C Zone 1 Byte 6 Zone 1 Byte 7 C Zone 1 Byte 8 The Zone Offset parameters parameters 82 85 determine where in the DeviceLogix Data Table to place the consumed data bytes chosen for mapping The Zone Offset value corresponds to a byte in the DeviceLogix Data Table where the data should be placed Continuing our example from above a value of 2 in the Zone 1 Offset p
427. sk WORD 0 to 0x00FF 0 Change of state mask for PNBs The following common services are implemented for the DeviceNet Interface Object Table B 57 DeviceNet Interface Object Common Services Implemented for Service Code Service Name Instance Ox0E No Yes 0x10 No Yes Get_Attribute_Single Set_Attribute_Single Electronic Data Sheets Soft Starter Type Product Codes and Name Strings Appendix C Bulletin 283 CIP Information Electronic Data Sheets EDS files are specially formatted ASCII files that provide all of the information necessary for a configuration tool e g RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to access and alter the parameters of the device The EDS file contains all of the device information number of parameters groupings parameter name minimum maximum and default values units data format and scaling EDS files for all the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller units are available from the Internet at http www ab com networks eds They may also be built automatically by some configuration tools since all of the information necessary for a basic EDS file may be extracted from the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Product codes for the Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controllers are based on the Overload relay current rating and the control power rating of the starter The following table lists the product codes for the Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controllers C 2 Bullet
428. splay Units XXX Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 103 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Starter Display Units xx x Amps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 104 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Starter Display Units XXX AMPS Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters 3 27 Starter Setup Therm Utilized This parameter displays the Thermal Capacity used FLA Setting The motor s full load current rating is programmed in this parameter Parameter Number 105 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group Starter Display Units FLA Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 106 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Starter Setup Units XXX Amps Minimum Value See Table 3 2 Maximum Value See Table 3 2 Default Value See Table 3 2 Table 3 2 FLA Setting Ranges and Default Values with indicated setting precision FLA Current Range A Default Value Minimum Value Maximum Value 0 24 1 2 0 24 0 5 2 5 0 5 1 1 5 5 1 1 3 2 16 0 3 2 Overload Class Parameter Number 107 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows the Data Type USINT installer to select the overload class Group Starter Setup Units xx x Amps 1 Overload Class 10 Minimum Value 1 2 Ov
429. ss factor Parameter 199 Parameter Number 106 Related Parameter 195 Access Rule GET Data Type Byte Group Display Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 107 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units Minimum Value F122 Maximum Value F2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 108 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units Minimum Value F122 Maximum Value F2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 109 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units Minimum Value F122 Maximum Value F2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 110 Related Parameter 101 199 Access Rule GET Data Type LINT Group Display Group Units 0 01 1 Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value 9999 Default Value Read Only 6 24 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Control Source Displays the source of the Start Command and Speed Reference Valid Start Commands for the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart are the following 2 2 wire 3 2 wire Level Sensitive 4 2 wire High Speed 5 RS485 DSI Port 9 Jog Valid Speed Commands for the Bulletin 284 ArmorStart are the following 1 Internal Frequency 2 0 10V Input Remote Potentiometer 4 Preset Freq X 5 RS485 DSI port 6 Step Logic Control 9 Jog Freq Contrl In Sta
430. sse 5 1 DeviceLOgix Group ssccccssssssssssccsscseserssssssessesessnsonseesesenaesons 5 3 DeviceNet Group sese eee eee eee 5 9 Starter Protection Group eee eee eee 5 13 WSU NO THT 5 16 MISC GVO respinse Dec eradeegeadss Sede ae E ain 5 20 Drive DeviceNet Group ccccccccscssesssscsssessseessssesersssesseeesseeees 5 22 ZIP Srl T 5 24 Display ETT TT 5 31 Basic Program GrOUD cscccsecssesssccssersesseseeeseesesessesessesersasees 5 35 Advanced Program GOUD sees sees eee eee 5 38 Clear an Overvoltage Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the DWB css ss sss sese se sese ss sees sees ee sees 5 47 IMtPOCUCTION 00 ccsesesccsseecseecescsecsecasseescsessesessesarsesaesessesarsessesatanses 6 1 Parameter Programming sese eee eee eee ee eee 6 1 Parameter Group Listing cccccccsscesssscsecsseessesssseesseessesssesesseees 6 2 Devic LOgix Group ssccccssssssssssccssssesenssssssesseseeaesonssesssenaesons 6 3 Starter Protection GrOUP cccceccceccssssessssseessessesesecsesessessnsesseees 6 12 N TTT 6 15 Drive DeviceNet GOUD sse esse eee eee eee 6 20 Display ETT 6 22 Clear Type 1 Fault and Restart eee eee eee 6 45 Clear an Overvoltage Undervoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive cccccsscsseesssssessseseessssssenseeeeees 6 45 Step LOGIC T 6 58 MOJON eeren aeter ae eee ee 7 1 Keypad DESCrIDUON sorset dem Aaa etn es 7 1 Keypad Disable and H
431. ssy Word 3 This parameter is used to build bytes 6 7 for produced assembly 120 Consumed 1 0 Size This parameter reflects the consumed 1 0 data size in bytes Produced 1 0 Size This parameter reflects the produced 1 0 data size in bytes Parameter Number 14 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 116 Default Value 4 Parameter Number 15 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 116 Default Value 5 Parameter Number 16 Access Rule GET SET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 116 Default Value 6 Parameter Number 17 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 8 Default Value 2 Parameter Number 18 Access Rule GET Data Type USINT Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 8 Default Value 2 Starter COS Mask This parameter allows the installer to define the change of state conditions that will result in a change of state message being produced Bit Parameter Number Access Rule Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 11 19 GET SET Data Type WORD Group DeviceNet Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 16383 Default Value 13 12 11 10 16383 Funct
432. status should be set to Not Healthy We will also leave the Zone Control parameters at their default telling the ArmorStart to consume Change of State Data for each zone and to disable data security checking Since data security checking is disabled we can also leave parameters 94 98 at their default values of 0 ArmorStart 281D 1 1 5 5A 120VAC Genara Device Parameters VO Datauhs EDS File DeviceLogix Groups OnLine Ai peramoators l Upload From Device Restore Dieu Values Download To Dewice 1 RE Pwrameter 83 Zor 2 Offset Zone 3 Offset Zone 4 Offset Zone 2 EPR 75 mSec Zone 3 EPR 75 mSec Zone 4 EPR 75 mSec Zone 1 Contra OOK800 10 Zona 2 Control x00 10 Zone 3 Control 0000010 Zone 4 Control xxxx0010 Zone 1 Key Zone 2 Key D Zone 3 Key We will set the Zone Masks to the value of 00000011 binary This tells each zone to map bytes 1 and 2 to the DeviceLogix Data Table ArmorStart ZIP Configuration 12 9 ArmorStart 281D 1 1 5 5A 120VAC We will set the Zone Offsets as shown below This maps zone 1 data to byte 0 of the DeviceLogix Data Table zone 2 data to byte 2 of the DeviceLogix Data Table zone 3 data to byte 4 of the DeviceLogix Data Table and zone 4 data to byte 6 of the DeviceLogix Data Table ArmorStart 281D 1 1 5 5A 120VAC General Device Paramotis yO Datauhs EDS Fie Deorai par Assuming the ArmorStarts mapped to zones 1 to 3 are producing the followi
433. t Bulletin 283 only Source Brake Fuses Figure 14 12 Source Brake Fuse Replacement Bulletin 284 only Source Control Brake Fuses 14 26 Troubleshooting Appendix A Specifications Bulletin 280 281 Electrical Ratings EC Power Circuit Rated Operation Voltage 200V 575V 200 575V Rate Insulation Voltage 600V 600 V Rated Impulsed Voltage 6 kV 6 kV Dielectric Withstand 2200V AC 2500V AC Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Utilization Category N A AC 3 Protection Against Shock N A IP2X 1 2A i 25A Rated Operating Current Max BBA 16A Control 24V DC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at voltage source Circuit Rated Operation Voltage 120V AC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at voltage source 240V AC 10 15 A2 should be grounded at voltage source Rate Insulation Voltage 250V 250V Rated Impulsed Voltage 4 kV Dielectric Withstand 1500V AC 2000V AC Overvoltage Category m Operating Frequency 50 60 Hz 50 60 Hz Short Circuit Current Rating Voltage 480Y 277V 480 V 600Y 347 V 600 V Protection 0 24 1 2A SCPD Performance Type 1 0 5 2 5A Sym Amps RMS 65kA 65kA 30kA 30kA 1 1 5 5A 3 2 16 A 30kA 30kA 30kA 30kA SCPD List Size per NEC Group Motor Power Requirements Units W O HOA W HOA Control Voltage Volts 24V DC 120V AC 240V AC 24V DC 120V AC 240V AC Contactor Pick Up Amps 0 71 0 583 0 292 0 71
434. t breaker size for the largest motor per NEC Table 430 52 and add that ampere value to the total of the full load currents of the rest of the motors The final value is the fuse or circuit breaker size required NEC 430 53C 4 Select wire Ampacity of wire feeding a group of motors is not less than 125 of the full load current rating of the highest rated motor plus the sum of the full load current ratings of all the motors in the group NEC 430 24 5 The code states that any taps supplying a single motor shall have an ampacity not less than one third the ampacity of the branch circuit conductors NEC 430 53D The branch circuit conductors can be defined as the conductors on the load side of the fuse block or circuit breaker This requirement actually defines the size of the group of motors For example if the wire from the fuses or circuit breaker is AWG 8 with rated ampacity of 50 A the smallest wire you can use as a tap and to the motors is AWG 14 with an ampacity of 20 A NEC Table 310 16 for 75 C wire Note that the Bulletin 280 283 ArmorStart controllers will not accept wire greater than 10 wires at its input terminal blocks The ArmorStart cabling to the motor is UL Listed for the controller s Hp and is supplied with the ArmorStart controller or as an accessory when longer lengths are required E 2 Group Motor Installations Group motor installations using the ArmorStart in distributed control applications will be large
435. t 1 0 Fault 1 0 Fault 8 Over Temperature Over Temperature Over Temperature 9 Phase Imbalance Phase Imbalance Over Current 10 DeviceNet Power DeviceNet Power DeviceNet Power Loss Loss Loss 11 Reserved Internal Internal Communications Communications 12 Reserved Heatsink Over DC Bus Fault Temperature 13 EEPROM Fault EEPROM Fault EEPROM Fault 14 Hardware Fault Hardware Fault Hardware Fault 15 Reserved Reserved Restart Retries 16 Reserved Misc Fault Misc Fault o Not available on the Bulletin 280A 281A 283A or 284A Fault Definitions Diagnostics 13 3 Short Circuit Short Circuit indicates that the Bulletin 140M motor protector has tripped or that the internal wiring protection algorithm has detected an unsafe current surge This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 1 blink pattern Overload Trip The load has drawn excessive current and based on the overload trip class selected the device has tripped This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 2 blink pattern Phase Loss Indicates a missing supply phase This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default The Fault LED will flash a 3 blink pattern Phase Short Indicates the drive has detected a phase short This fault cannot be disabled The Fault LED will flash a 3 blink pattern Shorted SCR This fault is generated when the SMC 3 detects a short circuit condition in the SMC 3 SCRs This fault cannot be disabled
436. t Out Net Out Net Out 3 Enable 15 14 13 12 11 10 Net Out 9 Stat ZIP CCV low ZIP CCV high For Bulletin 283A only These assembly instances have the same data format as the ScanPort control and status registers on the SMC Dialog Plus soft starter They are intended for use by customers that are accustomed to using the SMC Dialog Plus product on DeviceNet Table C 27 SMC Dialog Plus Native Consumed Assembly Instance 172 SMC Dialog Plus Native Consumed Assembly Byte Bit7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Reserved Reserved FLT Reserved Start Stop Reset 1 Reserved Table C 28 SMC Dialog Plus Native Produced Assembly Instance 172 SMC Dialog Plus Native Produced Assembly Reserved In 4 Stat In 3 Stat In 2 Stat In 1 Stat Reserved Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 11 Connection Object CLASS CODE No class attributes are supported for the Connection Object 0x0005 Multiple instances of the Connection Object are supported instances 1 2 and 4 from the group 2 predefined master slave connection set instances 5 and 6 are available through explicit UCMM connections Instance 1 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Explicit Message Connection The following instance attributes is supported Table C 29 Connection Object Instance 1 Attributes Attribute Access Name Data Value ID Rule Type O nonexistant 1 configuring 1 Get State USINT
437. ta Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 27 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 28 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 29 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group Starter Protection Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value 0 1 0 6 14 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers Last PR Fault 1 Hdw Short Ckt 2 Reserved 3 Motor Overload 4 Drive Overload 5 Phase U to Gnd 6 Phase V to Gnd 7 Phase W to Gnd 8 Phase UV Short 9 Phase UW Short PF Fault Code 7 PF Fault Code 64 PF Fault Code 38 PF Fault Code 39 PF Fault Code 40 PF4 Fault Code 41 PF Fault Code 42 10 Phase VW Short PF Fault Code 43 11 Ground Fault 12 Stall PF Fault Code 13 PF Fault Code 6 13 Control Pwr Loss 14 Control Pwr Fuse 15 Input Short 16 Output Fuse 17 Over Temp Parameter Number 61 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT 18 Heatsink OvrTmp PF Fault Code 8 19 HW OverCurrent PF Fault Code 12 20 SW OverCurrent PF Fault Code 63 21 DNet Power Loss Starter Protection 22 Internal Comm 23 Drive Comm Loss PF Fault Code 81 2
438. tance 1 attributes is supported Table D 34 Connection Object Instance 1 Attributes Attribute Access Name Data Val ID Rule Type State 0 non existent 1 configuring i E USINT 3 established 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT 0 Explicit Message 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT 0x83 Server Transport Class 3 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT 10xxxxxx011 XXXXXX node address Consumed Connection ID 10xxxxxx100 S Get UINT XXXXXX node address 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x22 7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0x61 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0x61 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in milliseconds Watchdog Action 01 auto delete i Get USINT 03 deferred delete 13 Get Produced Connection Path UINT 0 Length 14 Get Produced Connection Path Empty 15 Get Consumed Connection Path UINT 0 Length 16 Get Consumed Connection Path Empty D 14 Bulletin 284 CIP Information Instance 2 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Polled I O Message Connection The following Instance 2 attributes are supported Table D 35 Connection Object Instance 2 Attributes Abie Access Name Data Value ID Type State 0 non existent 1 configuring 1 nee USINT 3 established 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT 1 1 0 Connection Transport Class Trigger 0x82 Server Transport Class 2
439. tance 182 Consumed Network Inputs 1 16 Instance 182 This is a Read Write Control Assembly Table D 15 Instance 183 Produced Network Outputs 1 15 Instance 183 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out 7 6 5 4 3 8 1 0 Net Out 8 1 Reserved Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out Net Out 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 7 Table D 16 Instance 184 Trip Status Instance 184 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Byte Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 BitO Over Control Gnd Phase 140M Temp eeu Power gia Fault Short OL Trip Trip 1 Misc Retries HW Fault EEPROM DeBus t pust pn Her Fault Comm Current Table D 17 Instance 185 Starter StatusT Instance 185 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Net Ref Net Ctl Ready Running Running Reference Status Status Tripped Contactor2 Contactori 140M HOA 27 On Status KP Hand KP Jog DrvOpto2 DrvOpto1 Refers to output contactor status Refers to source brake contactor status Table D 18 Instance 186 DeviceNet Status Instance 186 This is a Read Only Status Assembly VOldle 1 0 Fit ZIP 3 pnn ZIP 2 Fit Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Decel 2 Decel1 Accel
440. tap wire or daisy chain wiring that can be used to take advantage of the ArmorStart s maximum input ratings A benefit to the ArmorStart rating and the above design process using NFPA rules is that the industrial equipment that utilizes several group motor installations on different branch circuits can standardize the size of the SCPD and the branch wiring for all the branch circuits of the installation as long as they do not exceed the maximum ratings of Table E las extended by the UL Certificate of Compliances for combined ArmorStart and ArmorConnect installations ArmorStart which ever is less ArmorStart DC Control Voltage Application Information Appendix F 24V DC Control Design Considerations The maximum distance that an ArmorStart can be located from a nominal 24V DC supply is determined by the inrush current requirements 3 1A for 100 msec of the 280 281 and 283 ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers The following table gives the maximum distance from the power source that a single ArmorStart can be placed Table F 1 Wire Gauge Sizes Wire Gauge mm2 Meters Feet 16 1 31 38 125 14 2 08 62 205 12 3 31 100 325 10 5 26 158 520 In systems with multiple ArmorStarts 280 281 and 283 where more than one unit will be commanded to start at the same time provisions must be made to account for maximum inrush current 710 mA for 100 msec for each unit The dc power supply and distribution syste
441. tart Retries Indicates Not available on Bulletin 284A units DB1 Comm Fault for Bulletin 284 Misc Fault 5 6 Starter Status Parameter Number This parameter provides the status of the starter Access Rule Default Value Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 GET Data Type Group WORD DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Function Tripped Warning Running Fwd Running Rev Ready Net Ctl Status Net Ref Status At Reference DrvOpto1 DrvOpto2 Keypad Jog Keypad Hand HOA Status 140M On Contactor 1 Refers to Source Brake contactor status Refers to Output contactor status Contactor 2 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 7 Dnet Status Parameter Number 6 This parameter provides status of the DeviceNet connection Access Rule GET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Function 15 xp Cnxn 10 Cnxn Exp Fit 10 Fit 10 Idle _ Reserved ZIP 1 Cnxn ZIP 1 Fit ZIP 2 Cnxn ZIP 2 Fit ZIP 3 Cnxn
442. tched ON to signal thes condition Status _waming Control_Out Lecat 1 1 Oata 1 1 gt lt Locat 1 0 Dataf1 7 gt H JE lt L gt Rung 3 If a trip exists the Control_Out wil be latched ON to signal this condition Status_tnpped Control_OuwtA lt Local 1 1 Data 1 0 gt lt Local 1 0 Datal1 6 gt cL Rung 4 if a trip condition exists momentarily setting Reset_faut wil reset the faut Status_tripped Cortrol_fautReset far lt Local t 1 Data 1 0 gt lt Locat 1 O Datajt 2 gt ws e _ EES Rung 5 The fauk reset DR wil uniateh the warning Control OUA and Control_OutB ba lt Locat rep aan w Control_Out SS Rung 6 Once Control_RunFwd is set ON and a trip condition does mot exist the timer will call the explicit message once every 10 seconds aT S Dott O gt Br timer ON T JE ees ces Timer On Delay CEND Timer Ondelay_timer CDND Preset 0000 Accum B Rung 7 The MSG function will get and report back the average current to the tag named explicit_data Ondelay_timer ON lt Local 1 Datal1 0 gt MSG __ a7 Type CIP Generic CEN Message Control explict_mess Lal a 9 12 Explicit Messaging on DeviceNet Notes DeviceLogix Programming Chapter 10 Using DeviceLogix DeviceLogix is a stand alone Boolean program that resides within the ArmorStart The program is embedded in the product software so that there is no additional module required to use
443. ted The value zero is reserved to denote that the transaction is directed towards the class itself versus a specific instance within the class e Attribute This code identifies the specific characteristic of the object towards which the transaction is directed The attribute data size is one word The following table lists the most common transaction types get information and set information and the appropriate service class instance and attribute that corresponds to the type Table 9 6 Common Configuration Examples for ArmorStart Transaction Type Service Class Instance Attribute Get_Attribute_Single 0x0E 0x0F Par 10 Set_Attribute_Single 0x10 0x0F Par 10 The numeric values are in a hexadecimal format This is the actual parameter number The code 1 specifies the value of the instance parameter Use the following sequence of events as a guide for establishing explicit messages in your SLC ladder logic 1 Put the explicit message request data into an integer N file of the SLC 500 processor 2 Use the file copy instruction COP to copy the explicit message request data entered in step 1 to the MO File words 224 through 256 3 Use the examine if closed instruction XIC to monitor bit 15 of the scanner s module status register for an indication that it has received a response from the ArmorStart 4 Copy the data from the M1 file words 224 through 256
444. ted Packet Rate in msec for the zone 4 consuming connection If consumed data is not received in 4 times this value the zone connection will time out and Zone 4 Health will report 1 Not Healthy 90 Zone 1 Control Zone 1 Control Word Default Bit 1 set all other bits clear BitO Security Enable 1 Enable data security Bit1 COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages 91 Zone 2 Control Zone 2 Control Word Default Bit 1 set all other bits clear Bit0 Security Enable 1 Enable data security Bit1 C0S Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages 92 Zone 3 Control Zone 3 Control Word Default Bit 1 set all other bits clear BitO Security Enable 1 Enable data security Bit1 COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Poll Response msgs Bit3 Strobe Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 Strobe Response msgs Bit4 Multicast Poll 1 Consume Multicast Poll Response messages 93 Zone 4 Control Zone 4 Control Word Default Bit 1 set all other bits clear BitO Security Enable 1 Enable data security Bit1 COS Cnxn 1 Consume DNet Group 2 COS messages Bit2 Poll Cnxn 1
445. ted Power 0 10V 122 4 TstData 0 OV 0000 65535 Hex FFFF 0 10V 119 5 OutFreq 0 0 0 mA 0 Hz P035 Maximum Freq 0 20 mA 101 6 OutCurr 0 0 0 mA 0 Amps 200 Drive Rated Output Current 0 20 mA 103 7 OutVolt 0 0 0 mA 0 Volts 120 Drive Rated Output Volts 0 20 mA 104 8 OutPowr 0 0 0 mA 0 kW 200 Drive Rated Power 0 20 mA 122 9 TstData 0 0 0 mA 0000 65535 Hex FFFF 0 20 mA 119 10 OutFreq 4 4 4 mA 0 Hz P035 Maximum Freq 0 20 mA 101 11 OutCurr 4 4 4 mA 0 Amps 200 Drive Rated Output Current 0 20 mA 103 12 OutVolt 4 4 4 mA 0 Volts 120 Drive Rated Output Volts 0 20 mA 104 13 OutPowr 4 4 4 mA 0 kW 200 Drive Rated Power 0 20 mA 122 14 TstData 4 4 4 mA 0000 65535 Hex FFFF 0 20 mA 119 15 OutTorq 0 OV 0 Amps 200 Drive Rated FLA 0 10V 129 16 OutTorg 0 0 mA 0 Amps 200 Drive Rated FLA 0 20 mA 129 17 OutTorq 4 4 mA 0 Amps 200 Drive Rated FLA 0 20 mA 129 18 Setpnt 0 OV 0 100 0 Setpoint Setting 0 10V 209 19 Setpnt 0 0 mA 0 100 0 Setpoint Setting 0 20 mA 209 20 Setpnt 4 4 mA 0 100 0 Setpoint Setting 0 20 mA 209 Note Only output range 0 10V applies with the factory installed A10 option Options 5 14 16 17 19 and 20 are not valid options Analog Out High Parameter Number 166 Scales the maximum output value for parameter 165 source setting Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Mini
446. tended PIN 4 White 4 1 Reducing Tees Trunk 25 A Drop 15 A Female Female 1 Black 1 Black 2 Green Yellow Extended PIN i 2 Green Yellow Extended PIN 3 Red 4 White O 0 0 0 Reducer 27 Trunk 25 A Drop 15 A Male Female 1 Black 3 Red 1 Black 2 Green Yellow Extended PIN 4 White 2 Green Yellow Extended PIN 3 Red 4 White Power Receptacles Specifications Certifications UL Standards Compliance UL 2237 Mechanical Insert Black PVC Black Anodized Aluminum female and Zinc DieCast Black Receptacle Shel Material E Coat male or 316 Stainless Steel Electrical Copper Alloy with Gold over Nickel Plating Trunk Brass ai with Gold over Nickel Plating Drop Cable Rating 600V AC DC 4 pin 16 AWG 600V 10 A 4 pin 14 AWG 600V 15 A Assembly Rating 4 pin 10 AWG 600V 25 A Symmetrical Amps RMS Fault 65 kA when used with Class CC T or J type fuses Environmental Enclosure Type Rating IP67 NEMA 4 IP69K 1200 psi washdown Specifications A 19 Dimensions Dimensions are approximate Illustrations are not drawn to scale 18 49 45 26 0 728 T 1 782 280 M22F M1 280 M35F M1 5 L 3
447. ter Number 195 Related Parameters 106 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 196 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 197 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 3 Default Value Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 47 SW Current Trip Enables disables a software instantaneous within 100 ms current trip Process Factor Scales the output frequency value displayed by Parameter 110 Process Display Output Freq x Process Factor Process Display Fault Clear Stop drive before changing this parameter Resets a fault and clears the fault queue Used primarily to clear a fault over network communications 0 Ready Idle Default 1 Reset Fault 2 Clear Buffer Parameters 107 109 Fault x Code Program Lock Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel 0 Unlocked 1 Locked Testpoint Sel Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel Parameter Number 198 Related Parameters 133 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1A Minimum Value
448. ter Protection Setup User I O Setup Misc Parameter Setup Drive DeviceNet ZIP Parameters Display Group Basic Program and Advanced Program are discussed in this chapter 5 2 DeviceLogix 1 Hdw Inputs 2 Network Inputs 3 Network Outputs 4 Trip Status 5 Starter Status 6 DNet Status 7 Starter Command 8 Network Override 9 Comm Override DeviceNet 10 Autobaud Enable 11 Consumed 10 Assy 12 Produced 10 Assy 13 Prod Assy Word 0 14 Prod Assy Word 1 15 Prod Assy Word 2 16 Prod Assy Word 3 17 Consumed 10 Size 18 Produced 10 Size 19 Starter COS Mask 20 Net Out COS Mask 21 DNet Voltage ZIP Parameters 67 AutoRun Zip 68 Zone Produced EPR 69 Zone Produced PIT 70 Zone 1 Macld 71 Zone 2 Macld 72 Zone 3 Macld 73 Zone 4 Macld 74 Zone 1 Health 75 Zone 2 Health 76 Zone 3 Health 77 Zone 4 Health 78 Zone 1 Mask 79 Zone 2 Mask 80 Zone 3 Mask 81 Zone 4 Mask 82 Zone 1 Offset 83 Zone 2 Offset 84 Zone 3 Offset 85 Zone 4 Offset 86 Zone 1 EPR 87 Zone 2 EPR 88 Zone 3 EPR 89 Zone 4 EPR 90 Zone 1 Control 91 Zone 2 Control 92 Zone 3 Control 93 Zone 4 Control 94 Zone 1 Key 95 Zone 2 Key 96 Zone 3 Key 97 Zone 4 Key 98 Device Value Key 99 Zone Ctrl Enable Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Table 5 A Paramerer Group Listing Starter Protection 22 Breaker Type 23 PrFitResetMode 24 Pr Fault Enable 25 Pr Fault Reset 26 StrtrDN
449. ter with any drive rating may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Therefore the filter must only be used in installations and solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection Some local codes may require redundant ground connections The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked Grounding Connect a grounding conductor to the terminal provided as standard on each ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Refer to Table 2 2 for grounding provision location There is also an externally available ground terminal Refer to Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 and Figure 2 7 2 38 Installation and Wiring Wiring Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups power control and signal The following recommendations for physical separation between these groups is provided to reduce the coupling effect e Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tray should be 6 in 16 cm e Wire runs outside an enclosure should be run in conduit or have shielding armor with equivalent attenuation e Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits e Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups should be 3 in 8 cm Introduction Chapter 3 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters This cha
450. ternal Connections for Dynamic Brake Connector 4 Pin 1 GND Pin2 BR Black Pin 3 BR White Green Yellow Figure A 22 External Connections for ArmorPoint Interface IN o Pin 1 CAN High Pin 2 Common Pin 3 5V Pin 4 CAN Low Pin 5 Enable In Pin 7 Common Pin 8 PE Figure A 23 External Connections for ArmorPoint Interface OUT Pin 1 CAN High Pin 2 Common Pin 3 5V Pin 4 CAN Low Pin 5 Enable Out Pin 7 Common Pin 8 NC No Connection Figure A 24 External Connections for 0 10V Analog Input O OOG Pin 1 10V DC Overload Curves of P133 Motor OL Current 100 Min Derat S 7S 100 125 1B 16 200 OP KR T Motor NP Hertz Pin 2 0 10V Input Pin 3 Analog Common Pin 4 Analog Output Pin 5 RS485 Shield of P133 Motor OL Current Mat Derale 0 25 BO 7S 100 126 180 17h 29 oof Pee Motor NE Hert A 14 Specifications ArmorConnect Three Phase Trunk Cables Power Media Specifications Certifications Standards Compliance UL 2237 Mechanical Coupling Nut Black Anodized Aluminum or 316 Stainless Steel Housing Black PVC Insert Black PVC Cable Diameter 0 775 in 0 12 in 19 68 mm 0 5 mm Electrical Contacts Copper Alloy with Gold over Nickel Plating Cable Black PVC dual rated UL TC Open Wiring and STOOW Cable Rating 600V AC DC Assembly Rating 60
451. th Length UINT 0 16 Get Consumed Connection Path Empty Instances 8 11 are ZIP Consumers The following instance attributes will be supported Table B 32 Connection Object Instances 8 11 Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value O nonexistant 1 Get State USINT 1 configuring 3 established Get Instance Type USINT 1 I 0 Connection Get Transport Class Trigger USINT 0x20 COS unacknowledged Get Produced Connection ID UINT FFFF not producing data 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT es 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT OxFO unacknowledged 7 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 8 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in milliseconds 12 Get Watchdog Action USINT 2 auto reset 13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 0 14 Get Produced Connection Path 0 15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 8 16 Get Consumed Connection Path 21 OE 03 25 01 00 30 02 B 14 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information The following services are implemented for the Connection Object Table B 33 Connection Objects Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name 0x05 No Yes Reset Ox0E No Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Discrete Input Point Object The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input CLASS CODE 0x0008 Point Object Table B 34 Discrete Input Point Object Class Attributes Revision Max Insta
452. th Parameter Number 77 Access Rule GET Read Only consumed connection Data Type BOOL status for zone 4 Group ZIP Parameters 0 Healthy Units 1 Unhealthy MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Zone 1 Mask Parameter Number 78 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data Data Type BYTE mask for zone 1 Each bit represents a byte in consumed Group ZIP Parameters data up to 8 bytes in length If a Units mask bit is set the MinimumValue 0 corresponding consumed data l Maximum Value 255 byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table Default Value 0 Zone 2 Mask Parameter Number 79 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data Data Type BYTE mask for zone 2 Each bit represents a byte in consumed Group ZIP Parameters data up to 8 bytes in length If a Units mask bit is set the MinimumValue 0 corresponding consumed data Maximum Value 255 byte is placed in the DeviceLogix data table Default Value 0 Zone 3 Mask Parameter Number 80 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data Data Type BYTE mask for zone 3 Each bit represents a byte in consumed Group ZIP Parameters data up to 8 bytes in length If a Units mask bit is set the MinimumValue 0 corresponding consumed data byte is placed in the DeviceLogix Maximum Value a0 data table Default Value 0 Zone 4 Mask Parameter Number 81 Access Rule GET SET Bit enumerated consumed data Data Type BYTE mask for zone 4 Each bit represents a byte in consumed Group ZIP
453. the Parameter Object Table D 50 Parameter Group Object Class Attributes 1 Get Revision UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT All Bulletin 284 Motor Starters have the following instances of the parameter group object e Instance 1 DeviceLogix Parameters e Instance 2 DeviceNet Parameters s Instance 3 Starter Protection Parameters e Instance 4 User I O Parameters s Instance 5 Miscellaneous e Instance 6 Drive DNet e Instance 7 ZIP Parameters e Instance 8 Basic Display e Instance 9 Basic Program e Instance 10 Advanced Program Bulletin 284 CIP Information The following instance attributes are supported for all parameter group instances Table D 51 Parameter Group Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type 1 Get Group Name String SHORT_STRING 2 Get Number of Members UINT 3 Get First Parameter UINT 4 Get Second Parameter UINT N Get Nth Parameter UINT The following common services are implemented for the Parameter Group Object Table D 52 Parameter Group Object Service Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name Te Gal Atule Single Discrete Input Group Object CLASS CODE 0x001D d No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input Group Object A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported It contains the following attributes Table D 53 Discrete Input Instance Attributes
454. ting A Cable Rating Length m ft Cat No 1 1 3 0 3 m 9 8 280 MTR22 M3 90 M22 Motor Cordset 3 0 5 5 IP67 NEMA Type 4 6 m 19 6 280 MTR22 M6 5 3 7 6 14 m 45 9 280 MTR22 M14 1 1 3 0 3 m 9 8 280S MTR22 M3 90 M22 Motor Cordset 3 0 5 5 NEMA Type 4X 6 m 19 6 280S MTR22 M6 5 3 7 6 14 m 45 9 280S MTR22 M14 3 m 9 8 280 MTRM35 M3 90 M35 Motor Cordset 6 3 16 IP67 NEMA Type 4 6 m 19 6 280 MTR35 M6 14 m 45 9 280 MTR35 M14 3 m 9 8 280S MTR22 M3 90 M35 Motor Cordset 6 3 16 NEMA Type 4X 6 m 19 6 280S MTR35 M6 14 m 45 9 280S MTR35 M14 90 Male Straight Female 1 1 3 0 1 m 3 3 280 MTR22 M1D 3 0 5 5 IP67 NEMA Type 4 M22 Pathcords 53 76 3 0 m 9 8 280 MTR22 M3D 90 Male Straight Female 1 1 3 0 1 m 3 3 280S MTR22 M1D 3 0 5 5 NEMA Type 4X M22 Patchcords 53 76 3 0 m 9 8 280S MTR22 M3D 90 Male Straight Female 1 m 3 3 280 MTR35 M1D 6 3 16 IP67 NEMA Type 4 M35 Patchcords ap 3 0 m 9 8 280 MTR35 M3D o i 1m 3 3 280S MTR35 M1D 90 Male Straight Female 63 16 NEMA Type 4X 3 3 M35 Patchcords 3 0 m 9 8 280S MTR35 M3D Table H 21 Source Brake Cable Description Cable Rating Length m ft Cat No i 3m 9 8 285 BRC25 M3 90 M25 Source IP67 NEMA Brake Cable Type 4 6 m 19 6 285 BRC25 M6 14 m 45 9 285 BRC25 M14 3m 9 8 285S BRC25 M3 90 M25 Source Brake Cable NEMA Type 4X 6 m 19 6 285S BRC25 M6 14 m 45 9 285S BRC25 M14 Table H
455. ting screws and remove Figure 14 6 Bulletin 283 Base Module Removal Base Module Cable Communication Cable Module Terminal Access Cover Plate Base Module Replacement Bulletin 283 Troubleshooting 14 21 Installation of Base Module Lxi To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices 1 Mount Base Module with four mounting screws 2 Re install conduit fittings and wires onto terminal block 3 Tighten terminal screws 4 Install terminal cover plate 5 Tighten four mounting screws on the terminal access cover plate 6 Install Control Module 7 Tighten four mounting screws 8 Install all cables to Control Module comunication cables and all others connected to the inputs and outputs Figure 14 7 Bulletin 283 Base Module Installation Base Module Terminal Access Cover Plate Control Module 14 22 Troubleshooting Base Module Replacement Bulletin 284 Removal of Base Module aaa bate To avoid shock hazard disconnect main power before working on the controller motor or control devices 1 Disconnect from power source 2 Remove all cables from Starter Module comunication cables and all others connected to the inputs and outputs 3 Loosen four mounting screws on the Control Module 4 Unplug Control Module from the base by pulling forward 5 Loosen four mounting screws on the Terminal Access C
456. tion Fault Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 21 Parameter Object CLASS CODE 0x000F The following class attributes are supported for the Parameter Object Table B 40 Parameter Object Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type 1 Get Revision UINT 2 Get Max Instance UINT 8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD 9 Get Configuration Assembly Instance UINT The number of instances of the parameter object will depend upon the type of Distributed Motor Controller There is a standard set of instances reserved 1 99 for all starters These instances are followed by a unique set of instances for each starter type Across the Line Soft start or Inverter type The following instance attributes are implemented for all parameter attributes Table B 41 Parameter Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type 1 Get Set Value Specified in Descriptor 2 Get Link Path Size USINT Array of 3 Get Link Path BYTE EPATH 4 Get Descriptor WORD 5 Get Data Type EPATH 6 Get Data Size USINT 7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING 8 Get Units String SHORT_STRING 9 Get Help String SHORT_STRING 10 Get Minimum Value Specified in Descriptor 11 Get Maximum Value Specified in Descriptor 12 Get Default Value Specified in Descriptor 13 Get Scaling Multiplier UINT 14 Get Scaling Divisor UINT 15 Get Scaling Base UINT 16 Get Scaling Off
457. to safe voltage levels Nara ba Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to do this may result in personal injury and or equipment damage Installation and Wiring 2 3 Dimensions for Bulletin 280 281 CAUTION 1 CONDUIT OPENING 0 75 CONDUIT OPENING Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes All dimensions are subject to change Figure 2 1 Dimensions for IP67 NEMA Type 4 with Conduit Entrance 287 5 11 32 Al tt SS hh 150 6 gt MOTOR CONNECTION 185 7 3 M22 CORDSET a MOTOR CONNECTION 243 9 57 M35 CORDSET Ra s OP Me Ae O fr S ffi of l o 195 Ou 7 68 E 0 l o 0 lox 0 L DS 2 4 Installation and Wiring Dimensions for Bulletin 280 281 Dimensions are shown in millimeters inches Dimensions are not Cont
458. tom Parameter Based Word Wise 1 0 Assembly Table D 12 CustomParameter Based Word Wise Produced Assembly Instance Instance 120 Word Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 0 Param low byte 1 Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 0 Param high byte 1 2 Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 1 Param low byte 3 Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 1 Param high byte 2 4 Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 2 Param low byte 5 Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 2 Param high byte 3 6 Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 3 Param low byte 7 Value of the parameter pointed to by Produced Word 3 Param high byte Word Wise Bit Packed Assemblies Assemblies whose instance numbers are 180 189 are all one word 16 bits long They can be used stand alone but their main use is to assemble information for EDS file parameters These Word Wise assemblies become the building blocks for the Custom Parameter Based Word Wise assembly described in Table D 12 Table D 13 Instance 181 Hardware Inputs 1 16 Instance 181 This is a Read Only Status Assembly Byte Bit 7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 Iinput4 Input3 Input2 Input1 1 Note This assembly does not exist on the Bulletin 284A Table D 14 Ins
459. top Mode setting 3 Continu Last Drive continues operating at communication commanded speed saved in RAM Parameter Number 200 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 201 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 202 Related Parameters 119 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1 Hex Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value FFFF Default Value 400 Parameter Number 203 Parameter Number 204 Parameter Number 205 Related Parameters 115 137 206 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value 0 3 0 5 50 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Comm Loss Time Sets the time that the drive remain in communication loss before implanting the option selected in Parameter 205 Comm Loss Action Comm Format This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Anlg In 0 10V Lo This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Anlg In 0 10V HI This parameter is not available for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Anlg
460. trollers Up to 480V AC Current Hp Rating 230V AC 380 400 415V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC canino A 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 1 1 3 0 280D FN 10 C 3 0 5 5 280D FN 10 C 5 3 7 6 280D FN 10 C 6 3 16 280D FN 25 C Current Rating 230V AC 380 400 415V AC 200V AC 230V AC 460V AC ganno A 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 1 1 3 0 280A FN 10 C 3 0 5 5 280A FN 10 C 5 3 7 6 280A FN 10 C 6 3 16 280A FN 25 C Table H 16 Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controller IP67 NEMA 4 Up to 575V AC with Conduit Entrance kw Hp Current cite 230V AC ek ra a00y AC 230vac 4sovac 575v AC ganno A 50 Hz is 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 1 1 3 0 0 55 0 75 05 0 5 1 1 5 280D FN 10 C 3 0 5 5 14 2 2 15 2 3 3 280D FN 10 C 5 3 7 6 1 5 5 5 3 3 5 5 280D FN 10 C 6 3 16 4 5 5 3 3 10 10 280D FN 25 C kW Hp Current Rating 230V AC E ve 200VAC 230VAC 460VAC 575V AC Cat No A 50 Hz SNS 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 1 1 3 0 0 55 0 75 05 0 5 1 1 5 280A FN 10 C 3 0 5 5 14 2 2 15 2 3 3 280A FN 10 C 5 3 7 6 1 5 5 5 3 3 5 5 280A FN 10 C 6 3 16 4 5 5 3 3 10 10 280A FN 25 C H 8 Renewal Parts Bulletin 283 Continued Table H 17 Bulletin 283 Distributed Motor Controller IP67 NEMA 4 Up to 575V AC with ArmorConnect Connectivity
461. tting the Motor FLA and Overload Trip Class Bulletin 280 281 The product should now be configured and communicating on the network The last step is to program the motor FLA setting parameter 106 and overload trip class parameter 107 This can be accomplished by using software such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet or another handheld DeviceNet tool Using the software access the device parameters screen as shown below Notice that by default the motor FLA is set to the minimum FLA setting for the device and the overload trip class is set to 10 Select FLA setting parameter 106 and enter a value that corresponds to the FLA of the motor connected to the ArmorStart Make sure the single radio button is selected and then select Download to Device Select Overload Class parameter 107 and choose the overload trip class to be used with the motor connected to the ArmorStart The ArmorStart can be set up for trip class 10 15 or 20 Make sure the Single radio button is selected and then select Download to Device The proper motor protection is now in place Figure 8 2 RSNetWorx Parameter Screen General Device Parameters 0 Defaults EDS File DeviceLogix Groups On Line Upload From Device Jal parameters lt Single Restore Default Values CA Download To Device Parameter Help Start Monitor e Z Parameter Current Value Z Reserved Z Reserved A Reserved Z Reserved Z Reserved L L Reserved
462. ture Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value Check for blocked or dirty heatsink fins Verify Drive Error Code 8 that ambient temperature has not exceeded Replace internal fan This fault cannot be disabled 9 Over Current The ArmorStart has detected a voltage imbalance Check the power system and correct if Drive Error Codes 12 and 63 necessary This fault cannot be disabled 10 DNetPower DeviceNet power has been lost or has dropped below the 12V threshold Check the state of the Loss network power supply and look for DeviceNet media problems This fault can be disabled and is disabled by default 11 Internal a This fault occurs when communications between the main board the drive is lost This fault cannot Comm be disabled This fault cannot be disabled Verify that the disconnect is in the on position and three phase power is present 12 DC Bus Fault DC bus voltage remained below 85 of nominal DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value DC Drive Error Codes 3 4 and 5 bus voltage exceeded maximum value Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption Check input fuses Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install a starter module with the dynamic brake option This fault cannot be disabled 13 EEPROM Fault Internal Comm This is a major fault which renders the ArmorSta
463. tus Status of the control terminal block control inputs Bit 0 Start Run FWD input Bit 1 Direction Run REV Input Bit 2 Stop Input Bit 3 Dynamic Brake Transistor On Dig In Status Status of the control terminal block digital inputs Bit 0 Digital IN 1 Sel Bit 1 Digital IN 2 Sel Bit 2 Digital IN 3 Sel Bit 3 Digital IN 4 Sel Comm Status Status of communications ports Bit 0 Receiving Data Bit 1 Transmitting Data Bit 2 RS485 Bit 3 Communication Error Parameter Number 112 Related Parameters 136 138 151 154 Digital Inx Sel must be set to 4 169 170 177 Preset Freq X 240 247 Step Logic Control Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 9 Default Value 5 Parameter Number 113 Related Parameter 102 134 135 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 114 Related Parameter 151 154 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 115 Related Parameter 203 207 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1 Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 25 Control SW Ver Main C
464. ue 0 Parameter Programming Parameter Group Listing Chapter 5 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function for Bulletin 284 Volts per Hertz Controllers Each Distributed Motor Controller type will have a common set of parameters followed by a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type Refer to Chapter 8 DeviceNet Commissioning for instructions in using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to modify parameter settings Refer to Chapter 11 ArmorStart to ArmorPoint Connectivity for instructions to modify parameter settings when using the Bulletin 284A with the ArmorPoint distributed I O products Important Resetting the Factory Default Values Parameter 47 Set to Defaults allows the installer to reset all parameter to the factory default values It also resets the MAC ID to its factory default after DeviceNet Power is cycled if switches are set gt 63 Important Parameter setting changes downloaded to the ArmorStart take effect immediately even during a running status Important Parameter setting changes made in a configuration tool such as RSNetworx for DeviceNet do not take effect in the ArmorStart until the installer applies or downloads the new settings to the device The Bulletin 284D ArmorStart contains ten parameter groups The parameters shown in the DeviceLogix Setup DeviceNet Setup Star
465. ue 0 0 Maximum Value 240 0 Hz Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 102 Related Parameters 101 113 134 135 138 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 240 0 Hz Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 103 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 0 01 Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value Drive rated amps x 2 Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 104 Related Parameters 131 184 188 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1V AC Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 230V 460V or 600V AC Default Value Read Only Parameter Number 105 Access Rule GET Data Type UINT Group Display Group Units 1V DC Minimum Value S Based on Drive Rating Maximum Value Default Value Read Only 5 32 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers Drive Status Present operating condition of the drive Bit 0 running Bit 1 Forward Bit 2 Accelerating Bit 3 Decelerating Fault 1 Code A code that represents drive fault The code will appear in this parameter as the most recent fault that has occurred Fault 2 Code A code that represents a drive fault The code will appear in this parameter as the second most recent fault that has occurred Fault 3 Code A code that represents a drive fault The code will appear in this parameter as the third most recent fault that has occurred Process Display The output frequency s
466. ue 600 0 Default Value 20 0 Parameter Number 169 Related Parameters 138 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 240 0 Default Value 60 0 Parameter Number 170 173 Related Parameters 138 139 Pi 152 167 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Maximum Value 400 0 Default Value See Table 5 D To activate 170 Preset Freq 0 set 138 Speed Reference to option 4 Preset Freq 0 3 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 41 Table 5 D 170 173 Preset Freq Options Values 170 Default 0 0 Hz Provides a fixed frequency command value when 151 153 Digital Inx Sel is set to 171 Default 5 0 Hz 4 Preset Frequencies 172 Default 10 0 Hz 173 Default 20 0 Hz Min Max 0 0 400 0 Hz Display 0 1 Hz Input State of Digital In Input State of Digital In Input State of Digital In Frequency Accel Decel 1 1 0 Terminal 05 when 2 I O Terminal 06 when 3 1 0 Terminal 07 when Source Parameter Parameter 151 4 Parameter 152 4 Parameter 153 4 Used 0 0 0 170 Preset Freq 0 Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 1 0 0 171 Preset Freq 1 Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 0 1 0 172 Preset Freq 2 Accel Time 2 Decel Time 2 1 1 0 173 Preset Freq 3 Accel Time 2 Decel Time 2 Jog Frequency To activate 170 Preset Freq 0 set 138 Speed Reference to option 4 Preset Fr
467. um Value 0 0 Maximum Value Drive rated amps X 1 8 Default Value Drive rated amps X 0 05 to Stop Mode DC Injection Braking Mode ATTENTION errors a ae Vols Speed Volts Speed Stop Command Sie Commend If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during braking DB Resistor Sel Parameter Number 182 Related Parameters 137 Stop drive before changing this parameter Access Rule GET SET Enables disables external dynamic braking Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Setting Min Max Units 1 0 Disabled Minimum Value 0 1 Normal RA Res 5 Duty Cycle Maximum Value 99 2 No Protection 100 Duty Cycle 3 99 x Duty Cycle Limited 3 99 of Duty Cycle Default Value 0 S Curve Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to ramp as S Curve Time is added half at the beginning and half at the end of the ramp Example Accel Time 10 Seconds S Curve Setting 50 Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Volts per Hertz Controllers 5 43 Figure 5 1 Target L 9 S Curve Time 10 x 0 5 5 Seconds 15 Total Time 10 5 15 Seconds Parameter Number 183 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 1
468. upon the type of Distributed Motor Controller There will be a standard set of instances reserved 1 99 for all starters These instances will be followed by a unique set of instances for each starter type Bulletin 280 281 or 284 The following instance attributes are implemented for all parameter attributes Table D 48 Parameter Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Name Data Type 1 Value Specified in Descriptor 2 Link Path Size USINT Link Path Array of 3 e BYTE e EPATH 4 Descriptor WORD 5 Data Type EPATH 6 Data Size USINT 7 Parameter Name SHORT_STRING String 8 Units String SHORT_STRING 9 Help String SHORT_STRING 10 Minimum Value Specified in Descriptor 11 Maximum Value Specified in Descriptor 12 Default Value Specified in Descriptor 13 Scaling Multiplier UINT 14 Scaling Divisor UINT 15 Scaling Base UINT 16 Scaling Offset INT 17 Multiplier Link UINT 18 Divisor Link UINT 19 Base Link UINT 20 Offset Link UINT 21 Decimal Precision USINT Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 27 The following common services are implemented for the Parameter Object Table D 49 Parameter Object Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name OxOE Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single 0x01 No Yes Get_Attributes_All Parameter Group Object CLASS CODE 0x0010 The following class attributes are supported for
469. uration information These parameters are defined by the slot in the Logix chassis where the EtherNetIP or ControlNet communication card resides The next parameter is the EtherNetIP IP or ControlNet node address of the 1738 communication adapter containing the ArmorStart Lastly the slot number on the ArmorPoint subnet where the ArmorStart is connected also needs to be entered An optional parameter is a string that can be entered with a description of the function of the ArmorStart device Each device will be configured by entering its data into a different block of the Armor_Start_System Device array The Following shows the configuration for a communication card in the Logix chassis 2 AENT IP address 192 168 1 10 and Point I O slot 3 The logic determines whether the network is EtherNetIP or ControlNet depending on whether the ENET_IP_Addr field is blank or the CNET_Address is zero One of these two fields must be filled out for the logic to work correctly The Armor_Descriptor field is optional and is used to more easily identify the ArmorStart as to its function in the system Figure 11 8 Communication Card Configuration 7j Sort alias For x Armor_start_System averse bi T E Force f Style Amer tarl Susie Max_Devices Decimal T Armor_start_System Max_Parameters Decimal F Armor_start_System Num_Devices 1 Decimal Armor stait System Device EE H E EE El Armor_start_System
470. use to drive its value attribute An output that is not used in a DeviceLogix program behaves much the same as in the DeviceNet Specification One notable addition to DOP behavior for the ArmorStart implementation is that Protection Fault Action and Protection Fault Value attributes determine the behavior of the DOP when the ArmorStart faults on a protection fault The following State Transition Diagram is used for DOP Instances 3 and 4 when they are not in use in a DeviceLogix Program Figure B 1 State Transition Diagram Unbound DOP Instances 3 and 4 Non Existant Power On Available Connection Transitions to Established Protection Fault DNet Fault DNet Fault Connection Transitions to Established WIN UOI DE O1d DNet Fault Protection Fault Reset Protection Fault Protection Fault Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 17 DOP Instances 1 and 2 Special Behavior Besides the sources that can affect output points 3 and 4 DOPs 1 and 2 can be affected by keypad inputs since they double as the Run Forward and Run Reverse outputs This adds complexity to their behavior so their behavior is defined in this section separately The following State Transition Diagram is used for DOP Instances 1 and 2 Figure B 2 DOP Instances 1 and 2 Non Existant Power Up Auto State Auto Init Power Off Keyad Hand Button Pressed Hand State Hand Stop Keyad Auto Button
471. ut Point Object Table C 35 Discrete Input Point Object Class Attributes Revision Max Instance Four instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported All instances contain the following attributes Table C 36 Discrete Input Point Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 ON 115 Get Set Force Enable BOOL 0 Disable 1 Enabl e 116 Get Set Force Value BOOL 0 0FF 1 0N The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Point Object Table C 37 Discrete Input Point Object Instance Common Services Service Implemented for Service Name Code Class Instance Get_Attribute_Single Set_Attribute_Single This assembly does not exist on the Bulletin 283A The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Point Object Table C 38 Discrete Output Point Object Class Attributes Revision Max Instance Bulletin 283 CIP Information C 17 Four instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported The following table summarizes the DOP instances Table C 39 Discrete Output Point Object Instance Attributes Instance ID Name Alena te Description Mapping Run Forward output For all starter 1 Run Fwd Output 0029 01 03 types this output is hard wired from the ArmorStart CPU to the actuator User Output A none These are the 2 ArmorStart user User Output B none output
472. ute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single D 18 Bulletin 284 CIP Information Discrete Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0008 o The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Input Point Object Table D 40 Discrete Input Point Object Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Revision UINT 2 2 Get Max Instance UINT 4 Note This assembly does not exist for the Bulletin 284A Four instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported All instances will contain the following attributes Table D 41 Discrete Input Point Object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 3 Get Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 ON 115 Get Set Force Enable BOOL Oe Disable 1 Enable 116 Get Set Force Value BOOL 0 OFF 1 0N The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Point Object Table D 42 Discrete Input Point Object Instance Common Services Service Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Name 0x0E Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Set_Attribute_Single Bulletin 284 CIP Information D 19 Discrete Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x0009 The following class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Point Object Table D 43 Discrete Output Point Object Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Revision UINT 1 2 Get Max Instance UINT 10 Ten instances
473. utes is supported Table B 28 Connection Object Instance 1 Attributes Attribute Access Name Data Value ID Rule Type O nonexistant 1 configuring 1 Get State USINT 3 established 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT O Explicit Message 0x83 Server 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT Transport Class 3 10xxxxxx011 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT XXXXXX node address 10xxxxxx100 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT XXXXXX node address 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x22 T Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0x61 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0x61 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in ms F 01 auto delete 12 Get Watchdog Action USINT 03 defarrad dalete 13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 0 14 Get Produced Connection Path Empty 15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 0 16 Get Consumed Connection Path Empty Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information B 11 Instance 2 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Polled I O Message Connection The following instance 2 attributes are supported Table B 29 Connection Object Instance 2 Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 0 nonexistant 1 configuring 1 Get State USINT a astablishad 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT 1 1 0 Connection 0x82 Server Transport Class 2 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT If alloc_choice polled and ack suppression is enabled then value 0
474. vailable on Bulletin Available on Bulletin Fault Indication Fault Indication 280 281 283 284 280 281 283 284 Short Circuit X X X e Miscellaneous Fault X X Overload X X X e Brake Fuse Detection X X Phase Loss X X X e internal Comm Fault X X Control Power Loss X X X e Shorted SCR X Control Power Fuse Detection X X X e Phase Rotation X Output Power Fuse Detection X X X e Heatsink Temperature Fault X 1 0 Fault X X X e DC Bus Fault X Over Temperature X X X e Ground Fault X DeviceNet Power Loss X X X e Overcurrent X EEprom Fault X X X e Restart Retries X Hardware Fault X X X e Stall X Phase Imbalance X X e Phase Short X Not available on the Bulletin 280A 281A 283A or 284A Product Overview Inputs The inputs are single keyed 2 inputs per connector which are sourced from DeviceNet power 24V DC with LED status indication Not available with on the Bulletin 280A 281A 283A or 284A Outputs Two dual key relay output connectors are supplied as standard The outputs are sourced from control power A1 and A2 LED status indication is also provided as standard for each output Gland Plate Entrance The ArmorStart product offers two different methods of connecting incoming three phase and control power to the device One method offered is the traditional conduit entrance with a 34 in and 1 in conduit hole opening for wiring three phase and control power The second method offers connectivity to the ArmorConnect power med
475. vice Value Key Parameter Number 98 Access Rule GET SET This value is produced in the last Data Type UINT 2 bytes of data when one of the ZIP assemblies is chosen for data Group ZIP Parameters production Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 3 26 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Starter Display Zone Ctrl Enable Global enable for ZIP peer to peer messaging This parameter must be disabled before any changes to the ZIP configuration for the device can be made 0 Disable 1 Enable Phase A Current This parameter provides the current of Phase A measured n increments of 1 10 of an ampere Phase B Current This parameter provides the current of Phase B measured in increments of 1 10 of an ampere Phase C Current This parameter provides the current of Phase C measured in increments of 1 10 of an ampere Average Current This parameter provides the average current measured in increments of 1 10 of an ampere Parameter Number 99 Access Rule GET SET Data Type BOOL Group ZIP Parameters Units MinimumValue 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 101 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Starter Display Units Xx x AMps Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Parameter Number 102 Access Rule GET SET Data Type INT Group Starter Di
476. viding a plug and play environment that also avoids system mis wiring When specifying power media for use with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers Bulletin 280 281 283 and 284 use only the Bulletin 280 ArmorConnect power media Figure 2 30 Three Phase Power System Overview HU 1606 XLSDNET4 DeviceNet Power Supply Bulletin 283 Bulletin 284 ArmorStart ArmorStart Bulletin 800F Emergency Stop Pushbutton Three Phase Power Trunk PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end Example Part Number 280 PWR35A M Three Phase Drop Cable PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end Example Part Number 280 PWR22A M Three Phase Power Tees and Reducer Tee connects to a single drop line to trunk with quick change connectors Part Number 280 135 Reducing Tee connects to a single drop line Mini to trunk Quick change connector Part Number 280 RT35 Reducer connects from quick change male connector to mini female connector Part Number 280 RA35 Three Phase Powe
477. vironmental Enclosure Type Rating IP67 NEMA 4 IP69K 1200 psi washdown UL Type TC 600V 90 C Dry 75 C Wet Exposed Run ER or Operating Temperature MTW 600V 90 C or STOOW 105 C 600V CSA STOOW 600V FT2 A 16 Specifications Female straight 25 4 1 00 Female 90 deg 40 4 1 59 56 1 2 21 32 5 1 28 la 25 4 1 00 Dimensions Dimensions are approximate Illustrations are not drawn to scale Male straight 59 4 2 34 a 25 4 1 00 Male 90 deg 32 5 1 28 Asi T 43 2 I 7 1 70 I 25 4 1 00 Pinout and Color Code Face View Pinout 4 pin 41 0 0 6 6 Female Male Color Code 1 Black 3 Red 2 White 4 Green Yellow Extended PIN Power Tees amp Reducer Specifications Certifications UL Standards Compliance UL 2237 Mechanical Black Anodized Aluminum Trunk or 316 Stainless Steel Coupling Nut Black Zinc Diecast Drop or 316 Stainless Steel Housing Black PVC Insert Black PVC Electrical Contacts Copper Alloy with Gold over Nickel Plating Voltage 600V AC DC trunk Tee 25 A Reducing Tee Trunk 25 A Drop 15 A Assembly Rating Reducer 15 A Symmetrical Amps RMS Fault 65 kA when used with Class CC T or J type fuses Environmental Enclosure Type Rating IP67 NEMA 4 IP69K 1200 psi washdo
478. wer Control Safety Monitor Inputs and Ground WINING sores soren naetaet oisinnean eaaa 2 24 Terminal Designations serae isidi 2 25 ii Table of Contents Chapter 3 Bulletin 280 281 Programmable Parameters Chapter 4 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Optional LOCKING Clip oo cc ccecseesesscsseecesssseseseesessssesesseseseasens 2 27 Operation of NEMA Type 4X Disconnect Handle ccceceeeees 2 28 To Open Disconnect Handle esse eee eee 2 28 To Close Disconnect Handle for Lockout Tag out 00 2 28 ArmorConnect Power Media sss esse eee eee 2 29 S eyii 2 29 ArmorStart with ArmorConnect Connectivity sese 2 31 Installing ArmorConnect Power Media using CordSets 2 31 ArmorConnect Cable Ratings ss sse eee eee eee ee eee 2 32 Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect Three Phase Power Media sss esse 2 32 Undergrounded and High Resistive Distribution Systems 2 33 DiSCONNECTING MOVS cccseesescsscseeesssssceecsecessesaseesseeesereens 2 33 Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets 2 35 Wiring and Workmanship Guidelines sss sese eee eee eee eee ee 2 35 DeviceNet Network Installation sees eee eee eee 2 37 Other DeviceNet System Design Considerations 2 37 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC sese eee eee eee 2 37 GOUGING sites sede scvecsacsevs sivetesesssxeeid esdscs siecs wasdasvssdeits Sixes 2 37 WIIG eeseeescesccccesesseseese
479. when the PID mode is enabled by Access Rule GET SET Parameter 232 PID Ref Sel Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 01 Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value 99 99 Default Value 0 01 PID Integ Time Parameter Number 235 Sets the value for the PID integral component when the PID mode is enabled by Access Rule GET SET Parameter 232 PID Ref Sel Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 sec Minimum Value 0 0 sec Maximum Value 999 9 sec Default Value 0 1 sec PID Diff Rate Parameter Number 236 Sets the value for the PID differential component when the PID mode is enabled by Access Rule GET SET Parameter 232 PID Rel Sel Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 01 1 sec Minimum Value 0 00 1 sec Maximum Value 99 99 1 sec Default Value 0 01 1 sec PID Setpoint Parameter Number 237 Provides an internal fixed value for process setpoint when the PID mode is enabled Access Rule GET SET by Parameter 232 PID Ref Sel Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 10 0 0 0 Default Value Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 57 PID Deadband Sets the lower limit of the PID output PID Preload Sets the value used to preload the integral component on start or enable A240 Stp Logic 0 A241 Stp Logic 1 A242 Stp Logic 2 A243 Stp Logic 3 A244 Stp Logic 4 A245 Stp Logic 5 A246 Stp Logic 6 A247
480. when the drive is running at Parameter 134 Minimum Freq When set to a value other than zero Parameter 110 Process Display indicates the duration of the process Process Time Hi Scales the time value when the drive is running at Parameter 135 Maximum Freq When set to a value other than zero Parameter 110 Process Display indicates the duration of the process Bus Reg Mode Enables the bus regulator 0 Disable 1 Enabled Parameter Number 214 Related Parameter 133 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UINT Group Advanced Program Group Units 0 1 Hz Minimum Value 0 0 Hz Maximum Value 10 0 Hz Default Value 2 0 Hz Parameter Number 215 Related Parameters 110 134 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UNIT Group Advanced Setup Units Hz Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value 99 99 Default Value 0 00 Parameter Number 216 Related Parameters 110 135 Access Rule GET SET Data Type UNIT Group Advanced Setup Units Hz Minimum Value 0 00 Maximum Value 99 99 Default Value 0 00 Parameter Number 217 Related Parameters Access Rule GET SET Data Type UNIT Group Advanced Setup Units Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 51 Current Limit 2 Parameter Number 218 Maximu
481. where the line to ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage To disconnect the MOVs remove the jumper shown in Figure 2 33 Jumper Removal 1 Before installing the Bulletin 284 loosen four mounting screws 2 Unplug starter module from the base unit by pulling forward 2 34 Installation and Wiring Figure 2 32 Removal of Control Module Remove Jumper PME REC Do not remove this jumper if the unit is equipped with an EMI filter installed Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets Wiring and Workmanship Guidelines Installation and Wiring 2 35 The ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers are listed for use with each other in group installations per NFPA 79 Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery When applied according to the group motor installation requirements two or more motors of any rating or controller type are permitted on a single branch circuit Group Motor Installation has been successfully used for many years in the USA and Canada Note For additional information regarding group motor installations with the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller see Appendix C In addition to conduit and seal tite raceway it is acceptable to utilize cable that is dual rated Tray Cable Type TC ER and Cord STOOW for power and control wiring on ArmorStart installations In the USA and Canada installations the following guidance is outlined by t
482. will initiate starter operation The Auto key allows for Start Stop control via the AUTO communications network gt Ss o If the starter is running pressing the OFF key will cause the starter to stop OFF REV The REV key selects reverse direction of the motor FWD The FWD key selects forward direction of the motor The Dir arrow selects the direction of the motor either DIR Arrow forward or reverse When pressed JOG will be initiated if no other control devices are sending a stop command Releasing the key will cause the drive to stop using selected stop mode JOG B 0998 7 2 HOA Keypad Operation Figure 7 2 Bulletin 280 281 or Bulletin 283 Hand Off Auto Selector Keypad The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA Keypad when parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to 1 momentary HAND STOP HAND STOP HAND FWD AUTO Command motor off and Transition to Ignore Ignore AUTO Command motor ON havo and Transition to Ignore Ignore HAND FWD Command motor OFF Command motor off Ignore and transition to and transition to HAND STOP The following state transition matrix summarizes the HOA Keypad when parameter 45 Keypad Mode is set to O0 maintained HAND STOP HAND FWD AUTO NO KEY Command motor off PRESSED Ignore and transition to Ignore HAND STOP Command motor off and Transition to Ignore Ignore AU
483. wn Specifications A 17 Dimensions Dimensions are approximate Illustrations are not drawn to scale Reducer s M35 M22 ee MALE FEMALE 38 1 1 50 LH BLACK HL C L l om 1719 2 _ 3 H a l RED 3 N foe a GREEN YELLOW 4 V E l GE WHITE 25 4 1 00 WIRING DIAGRAM Power Tee 108 0 4 25 3 RED w 1 BLACK pene 2 1 BLACK 2 2 GREEN YELLOW KEYWAY 7 GREEN YELLOW LEAD Z 2 GREEN YELLOW S 4WHITE 73 7 2 90 9 al x a U H E 3 RED 4 WHITE g SI 9 2 FEMALE WIRING DIAGRAM Power Tee reducing drop 4 GREEN YELLOW 3 RED 3 RED w w _ EXTENDED PIN 2 z 1 BLACK a GREEN YELLOW LEAD lt B 2 GREEN YELLOW 4 WHITE 65 3 2 57 2 4 S HIH a SI B ARRE 1 BLACK H S E 5 Z 19 0 E S T 0 75 FEMALE 38 0 1 50 Pinout and Color Code Face View Pinout Assembly Rating Color Code 4 pin Quick Change Connector Mini Connector A 18 Specifications Trunk Tee 25 A Female Male T Black 3 Red 2 Green Yellow Ex
484. x80 0111 1Xxxxxx 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT XXXXXX node address 10xxxxxx101 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT xxxxxx node address 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT 0x21 Get Produced Connection Size UINT 0to8 8 Get Consumed Connection Size UINT 0to8 9 Get Set Expected Packet Rate UINT in ms O transition to timed out 12 Get Set Watchdog Action USINT 1 auto delete 2 auto reset 13 Get Produced Connection Path Length UINT 8 14 Get Set Produced Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 00 30 03 15 Get Consumed Connection Path Length UINT 8 16 Get Set Consumed Connection Path 21 04 00 25 assy inst 00 30 03 B 12 Bulletin 280 281 CIP Information Instance 4 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Change of State Cyclic I O Message Connection The following instance 4 attributes are supported Table B 30 Connection Object Instance 4 Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 0 nonexistant 1 configuring 1 Get State USINT 3 established 4 timed out 2 Get Instance Type USINT 1 1 0 Connection 0x00 Cyclic unacknowledged 0x03 Cyclic acknowledged 3 Get Transport Class Trigger USINT 0x10 COS unacknowledged 0x13 COS acknowledged 01101Xxxxxx 4 Get Produced Connection ID UINT XXXXXX node address 10xxxxxx101 5 Get Consumed Connection ID UINT xxxxxx node address Ji G 0x02 acknowledged 6 Get Initial Comm Characteristics USINT OxOF unacknowledged Get Produced Conne
485. xn ZIP 1 Fit ZIP 2 Cnxn ZIP 2 Fit ZIP 3 Cnxn ZIP 3 Fit ZIP 4 Cnxn ZIP 4Fit 4 8 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters Starter Command Parameter Number 7 Access Rule GET The parameter provides the Data Type WORD status of the starter command Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 Default Value 0 Bit Function 7 6 5 4 3 1 SS X Run Fwd a a e la s X Reserved Steen es as as Fault Reset Se Reserved seca comes Pumas ce faa Reserved A Jr Reserved eee S User Out A I a L User OUt B Network Override Parameter Number 8 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows for the Data Type BOOL local logic to override a Network l fault Group DeviceLogix 0 Disable Units 1 Enable Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Comm Override Parameter Number 9 Access Rule GET SET This parameter allows for local Data Type BOOL logic to override the absence of l an 1 0 connection Group DeviceLogix 0 Disable Units 1 Enable Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Bulletin 283 Programmable Parameters 4 9 DeviceNet Group Autobaud Enable When this parameter is enabled the device will attempt to determine the network baud rate and s
486. xp Fit 10 Fit 10 Idle Reserved ZIP 1 Cnxn ZIP 1 Fit ZIP 2 Cnxn a ZIP 2 Fit ZIP 3 Cnxn K ZIP 3 Fit ZIP 4 Cnxn X ZIP 4 Fit Starter Command Parameter Number 7 This parameter provides the command the starter Access Rule GET SET Data Type WORD Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 255 Default Value 0 Bit Function 6 5 4 2 1 Run Fwd gt X Run Rev Z S E X Fault Reset Jog Fwd S X Jog Rev X Reserved X S User Out A User Out B Bulletin 284 Programmable Parameters for Sensorless Vector Controllers 6 8 Network Override Parameter Number 8 This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault Access Rule GET SET 0 Disable Data Type BOOL 1 Enable Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Comm Override Parameter Number 9 This parameter allows for local logic to override a loss of an 1 0 connection Access Rule GET SET 0 Disable Data Type BOOL 1 Enable Group DeviceLogix Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value il Default Value 0 DeviceNet Group Autobaud Enable Parameter Number 10 When this parameter is enabled the device will attempt to determine the network Access Rule GET SET baud rate and set its baud rate to the same pr
487. y produces IO data using Change of State COS triggering The automatic production of this COS data by an ArmorStart is enabled by setting Parameter 67 AutoRun ZIP to a value of 1 Enable Then COS data will be produced automatically when the global ZIP enable parameter Zone Ctrl Enable Parameter 99 is set to the value of 1 Enable Data production will take place at a rate specified by Parameter 68 Zone ProducedEPR The minimum period between Change of State productions is determined by the value of Parameter 69 Zone ProducedPIT In the ArmorStart data from up to 4 other devices can be consumed for use in the local logic The 4 devices whose data is to be consumed are logically referred to by zone number i e zones 1 4 To configure an ArmorStart to consume data from another node on the network the node address or Macld is placed in the proper Zone Macld parameter parameters 70 73 For example to configure an ArmorStart to consume data for zone 1 from node number 11 on the network the value 11 is placed in Parameter 70 Zone 1 Macld Not all zones need to be configured to consume data If the user wishes to turn off data consumption for a zone the value 64 is placed in the Zone Macld parameter for that zone The ArmorStart monitors the frequency at which all consumed data is received in order to determine the health of each zone s data connection The Zone EPR parameters parameters 86 89 define the
488. yor 5 Section 1 _ NL ra NL ral SNL Power a IH HD ID STH D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P s Conveyor e s Conveyor e L Conveyor P A Conveyor z Section 2 lt Section 3 Section 4 7 Section 5 Let us calculate the effective wire lengths Distance 1 Distance 2 Distance 3 Distance 4 Distance 5 Equ ivalent Distance Run 1 50ft 15m 5 50ft 15m 4 50ft 15m 3 50ft 15m 2 50ft 15m 1 750 ft 229 m Based on this calculation there is no wire gauge that can be taken 750 feet so the fifth section is required to have its own run Example 1 Re calculated with section 5 having its own power feed Distance 1 Distance 2 Distance 3 Distance 4 Distance 5 Equ ace Distance Run 1 50 ft 15m 4 50f 15m 3 50ft 15 m 2 50 ft 15 m 500 ft 152 m Run 2 50 ft 15 m 50 ft 15 m 50 ft 15 m 50 ft 15 m 50 ft 15 m 250 ft 76 m Therefore Run 1 needs to be 10 AWG while Run 2 can be either 12 AWG or 10 AWG Figure F 2 Two Run Wiring Solution ral ral ral gle ral 24V DC i a a ee Sees Supply 2 AW Section 2 Section 3 Section 5 j Conveyor p Section 4 g s Conveyor L g s Conveyor g E Conveyor L v l s Conveyor Example 2 Centrally locate the power supply in Example 1 Conveyor Line Configuration 24V DC Control D

Spec Sheet - The Reynolds Company

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents